JP2020018614A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preventing a decrease in game amusement.SOLUTION: A game machine executes special performance that a prescribed mode is repeated with prescribed frequency. The prescribed performance can be executed during the special performance, and in the case that no prescribed performance is executed, control into an advantageous state is performed at higher rate when repeating the prescribed mode with second frequency that is greater than first frequency than when repeating the same with the first frequency. Control into the advantageous state is performed at hither rate when the prescribed performance is executed until the prescribed mode is repeated with the first frequency than when the prescribed mode is repeated with the second frequency without executing the prescribed performance. Change suggestive performance (character A, character B) suggesting that a display mode of active display changes has a success mode in which the display mode of active display is changed and a failure mode in which the display mode of active display is not changed. The higher execution frequency of the change suggestive performance in the success mode is, the higher rate the next change suggestive performance is executed at.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9-12

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  As a gaming machine, when a game medium such as a game ball is fired by a launching device into a game area, and a game medium wins a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the game area, and an execution condition (start condition) is satisfied, A pachinko game in which a variety of identification information (hereinafter referred to as "display symbols") is variably displayed on a variable display device, and whether or not a predetermined game value is given is determined based on the display result. There is a game machine. In such a pachinko gaming machine, when the stop symbol mode when the variable display of the display symbol in the variable display game is completely stopped becomes the specific display mode, the game machine enters an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player. Then, before the display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device, various types of notice effects that cause the player to expect the display result to be in the specific display mode are executed.

  As such a gaming machine, a variable display effect such as a pseudo-ren which temporarily displays a variable display and then variably displays (re-fluctuates) again, a period until the temporary stop is performed, and a temporary stop than the variable display effect of the pseudo-ren There are gaming machines that can perform variable display effects with a short period. Some gaming machines that perform such a variable display effect have a higher expectation of a big hit as the number of re-changes increases (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2010-253079 A

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, the player's interest may be concentrated on the number of times of re-change, and the effect may be monotonous, thereby deteriorating the gaming interest.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above situation, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a decrease in gaming interest.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and a special game execution means that executes a special game that repeats a predetermined mode a predetermined number of times (a game control CPU 120 that performs a special change, etc.) ), And a predetermined effect executing means (such as effect control CPU 120 for executing the predetermined effect) capable of executing the predetermined effect during the execution of the special effect, wherein the predetermined effect is not executed by the predetermined effect executing means. In the case where the predetermined mode is repeated for the second number of times greater than the first number of times, the advantageous state is controlled at a higher rate than when the predetermined mode is repeated for the first number of times as the special effect (for example, when the special variation is performed). The higher the number of executions, the higher the degree of expectation, etc.), and the predetermined effect is not executed by the predetermined effect execution means, and the predetermined mode is repeated the second time. When the predetermined effect is executed by the predetermined effect execution means before the predetermined mode is repeated the first number of times, the advantageous state can be controlled at a higher rate than when the predetermined mode is repeated (for example, before the twelfth time). When the predetermined effect is performed during the special change, the degree of expectation is higher than when the predetermined effect is not performed and the special change is performed 12 times, etc.) Display control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a display (active display 30TM003), and change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting that the form of the corresponding display changes. And the change suggestion effect execution means includes, as a change suggestion effect, a change suggestion effect of a successful mode (as shown in FIGS. 13-18 (1) and (2), The effect that the thrown ball hits the active display 30TM003 to change the display mode) and the change suggestion of the failure mode (as shown in FIGS. 13-19 (10) and (20)). An effect that does not change the display mode by being flipped by the display 30TM003) can be executed, and is performed within a predetermined period (for example, during a period from the start of the change to the establishment of the reach state) according to the number of times the effect indicating the change of the successful mode is executed. During the period from the start of the change until the decorative symbol (the combination of the decorative symbols or the pseudo-serial symbol in which the re-variation (pseudo-sequence) is performed after the temporary stop) is temporarily stopped, any of the left middle right from the start of the change The rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed during the period until the decorative symbol stops for the first time is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-16, the second change suggestion effect is actually executed). In the executed stage, the third change suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 100% if both of the success modes are performed, and the third change indication effect is performed once if the success mode and once the failure mode. May not be performed).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the execution of the predetermined effect, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest. Further, the degree of attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect can be increased, and the interest can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The special effect execution means executes, at the start of the special effect, an explanatory effect explaining that the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state is high when the predetermined effect is executed (for example, executing the explanatory effect) Effect control CPU 120 etc.),
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, the purpose of the special effect can be easily recognized.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
Variable display means for performing variable display in accordance with the variable display pattern (for example, effect control CPU 120 for performing variation of decorative symbols in accordance with the variation pattern);
The variable display pattern includes a re-variable display pattern for performing a predetermined number of times of a re-variable display for temporarily performing a temporary stop after the start of the variable display until the display result is derived and then performing the variable display; A shortened re-variable display pattern in which at least the period until the temporary stop is shorter than the variable display pattern (for example, including a fluctuating pattern of pseudo-sequence and a fluctuating pattern of special fluctuation).
The special effect execution means executes a special effect of repeating the re-variable display by the shortened re-variable display pattern a predetermined number of times as the predetermined mode (for example, performing a change according to a special fluctuation pattern),
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing the predetermined effect during execution of a special effect in which the re-variable display using the shortened re-variable display pattern is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, performing a predetermined effect during the special display variable display effect). ),
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, attention can be paid not only to the number of times of execution but also to whether or not a predetermined effect is executed.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
The predetermined effect execution means executes one of the predetermined effects of a plurality of types of the predetermined effects at a different rate in accordance with a rate controlled to the advantageous state (for example, “ Aspect B "has a higher degree of expectation),
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, the type of the predetermined effect can be noticed.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4),
The apparatus further includes variable display means for performing variable display according to the variable display pattern,
The variable display pattern includes a pattern for executing a specific effect suggesting that the special effect is in the advantageous state after execution of the special effect, and a pattern for controlling the advantageous state as it is after executing the special effect (for example, “ Special fluctuation super reach jackpot "fluctuation pattern and" special fluctuation jackpot "fluctuation pattern)
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, there are a plurality of development patterns after the execution of the special effect, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(6) In the gaming machine according to (5),
The predetermined effect includes a predetermined effect of the first aspect and a predetermined effect of a second aspect different from the first aspect. When the predetermined effect of the first aspect is executed during execution of the special effect, And performing the specific effect after the execution of the special effect, and if the predetermined effect of the second aspect is executed during the execution of the special effect, control is performed in the advantageous state as it is after the execution of the special effect ( For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “special fluctuation super reach big hit”, the predetermined effect of “aspect A” is executed, and in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “special fluctuation big hit”, the predetermined effect of “aspect B” is executed) ,
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, there are a plurality of development patterns after the execution of the special effect, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(7) In the gaming machine according to (3),
The special effect execution means is capable of displaying the number of times the re-variable display by the shortened re-variable display pattern is repeated as the special effect (for example, performing a display indicating the number of special changes).
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, it is easy to count the number of times of repetition, and it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

  In addition, embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions related to the following means M1 and thereafter. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine related to information corresponding to variable display, as disclosed in JP-A-2006-144581. In this gaming machine, it is required to provide a gaming machine that enhances interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of the means M1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols),
Display control means (production control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display;
Change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change suggestion effect indicating that the mode of the corresponding display changes,
The change suggestion effect executing means, as a change suggestion effect, displays a successful mode change suggestion effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-18 (1) and (2), the ball thrown by the character hits the active display 30TM003). An effect in which the ball is thrown by the active display 30TM003 and the display mode is not changed as shown in FIGS. 13-19 (10) and (20). ) Is possible,
Depending on the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode, within a predetermined period (for example, during the period from the start of the change to the establishment of the reach state, the decoration symbol is started from the start of the change (re-change (pseudo-run) after the temporary stop). The next change suggestion effect is during the period from the start of the change until the first of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols stops first) during the period until the temporary stop of the combination of the decorative symbols or the pseudo continuous symbol). The execution ratio is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, when the second change suggestion effect is executed, if both are successful, the third change is performed at a rate of 100%) (If the suggestion effect is executed and one time is a success mode and one time is a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, the degree of attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect can be increased, and the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means M2 is
The gaming machine according to the means M1,
Depending on the mode of the corresponding display (the active display 30TM003), the ratio controlled in the advantageous state (big hit gaming state) which is advantageous to the player differs (as shown in FIG. 13-3 (A), the final display of the active display). The jackpot expectation differs depending on the mode),
Depending on the number of successive success mode change suggestion effects, the ratio of the corresponding display is different (as shown in FIG. 13-16 (A), the number of successive success mode change suggestion effects) The greater the number of the hits, the higher the expectation of the jackpot, and the greater the number of consecutive success mode change suggestions, the higher the expectation of the jackpot, even for active display of the same display color.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give an interest to the number of times that the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuous, and it is possible to improve interest.

The gaming machine of the means M3 is
A game machine of means M1 or M2,
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative patterns,
When the change suggestion effect is being executed, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not change (as shown in FIG. 13-18, when the change suggestion effect is being executed, the temporary stop is not performed on the change display of the decorative symbol). (The direction of movement does not change.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, since the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not change, it is possible to further focus on the change suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of the means M4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means M1 to the means M3,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which the character A appears and a change suggestion effect in which the character B appears),
After executing one type of change suggestion effect, a different type of change suggestion effect can be executed (for example, as illustrated in FIG. 13-18 (1), after execution of the change suggestion effect in which the character A appears). , A change suggestion effect in which the character B appears as shown in FIG.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, diversification of change suggestion effects can be achieved.

The gaming machine of the means M5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means M1 to the means M4,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) includes a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which the character A appears, a change suggestion effect in which the character B appears, a change suggestion effect in which the character C appears, Change suggestion effect in which the character D appears)
Depending on the type of change suggestion effect, the rate at which the change suggestion effect of the successful mode is executed is different, and the rate of change to the specific mode corresponding display is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. (Character D has a higher rate of executing the success mode change suggestion effect, and has a higher rate of changing the active mode display mode.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give an interest in which type of change suggestion effect is executed.

The gaming machine of the means M6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means M1 to the means M5,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) includes a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (a change suggestion effect in which the character A appears, a change suggestion effect in which the character B appears, a change suggestion effect in which the character C appears, and a character D). Change suggestion effect) appears.
The rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of the change suggestion effect (as shown in FIGS. 13 to 17, the next change suggestion effect is executed for the character A than for the character D). High percentage)
A gaming machine characterized by that:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give an interest in which type of change suggestion effect is executed.

  As disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), there has been proposed a gaming machine capable of displaying a holding icon in various display modes as information corresponding to variable display. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), there is room for improving interest in information corresponding to variable display. The invention according to the means K1 to K7 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The game machine of the means K1 is:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols),
A display control unit (production control CPU 120) for performing display control of information (first hold display 30TM001, second hold display 30TM002, active display 30TM003, sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display is provided. ,
The display control means executes display control of first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) corresponding to variable display in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). In the second information display area (sub-reserve display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105) different from the first information display area, a variable display corresponding to the first information and a common variable display are supported. The display control of the second information (sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) can be executed,
The rate at which the mode of the first information changes is different from the rate at which the mode of the second information changes (as shown in FIG. 13C, the sub-active display 30TM005 is usually the final display mode rather than the active display 30TM003). The rate at which a mode different from the mode is selected is low, and the display mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 is less likely to change than the first hold display 30TM001.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display a plurality of types of information, that is, first information and second information, as information corresponding to common variable display, thereby improving interest in information corresponding to variable display. And interest in the aspect of the first information and the second information.

The game machine of means K2 is
The game machine of means K1,
The mode of the first information after the change is different from the mode of the second information after the change (as shown in FIG. 13-8 (6), the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode is a blue circle display). , The blue mode sub-hold display 30TM004b is a blue star display)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, since the first information and the second information have different modes after the change, the respective information can be clearly distinguished and grasped.

The game machine of means K3 is
A game machine of means K1 or means K2,
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) can simultaneously display the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) and the second information (secondary hold display 30TM004, secondary active display). (As shown in FIG. 13-8 (2), the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 can be simultaneously displayed).
Depending on the mode of the first information after the change and the mode of the second information after the change, the rate of controlling to the advantageous state advantageous to the player is different (for example, as shown in FIG. The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a golden mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005, as compared with the case where the final display mode of the display 30TM003 is the normal mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is the normal mode. Is a red color mode, the big hit expectation is higher)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the combination of the mode of the first information and the mode of the second information, and the interest can be improved.

The game machine of means K4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means K1 to the means K3,
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) includes:
A first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as first information is displayed in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and a first correspondence display (active) corresponding to the variable display being executed. Display 30TM003) in the first information display area (active display area 30TM103);
When the variable display corresponding to the first hold display is started, it is possible to display the first corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in a mode common to the first hold display (see FIG. 13-9 ( As shown in (9) and (10), when the first reserved display 30TM001c (red circle display) in the red mode is shifted to the active display area 30TM103, the active display 30TM003c (red circle) in the red mode, which is the same display color. Is displayed)),
A second hold display (second hold display 30TM004) as the second information is displayed in the second information display area (second hold display area 30TM104, second active display area 30TM105) and a second display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Displaying a corresponding display (sub active display area 30TM005) in the second information display area (sub hold display area 30TM104, sub active display area 30TM105);
When starting the variable display corresponding to the second hold display, it is possible to display the second corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in a manner common to the second hold display (see FIG. 13-9 ( As shown in 9) and (10), when the sub-hold display 30TM004c (red star display) in the red mode shifts to the sub-active display area 30TM105, the sub-active display 30TM005c (red color mode) in the same display color as the red mode is displayed. (Star-shaped display) is displayed)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, a plurality of types of information, that is, first correspondence information and second correspondence information can be displayed as information corresponding to the variable display that is being executed. This can be improved, and the aspect of the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information can be made interesting.

The game machine of means K5 is:
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means K1 to the means K4,
A notification effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an information effect (reach effect) for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player;
At least a part of the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103) is included in an area where the notification effect is executed,
The display control means (the effect control CPU 120) can make the first information non-display in accordance with the execution of the notification effect, while the second information is also displayed when the information effect is executed. The information can be visually recognized (as shown in FIG. 13-9 (11), when the reach state is established, the character “REACH !!” is displayed at the bottom of the screen, and the first hold display 30TM001 and the active state are displayed. (Display 30TM003 is not displayed, while sub-hold display 30TM004 and sub-active display 30TM005 are continuously displayed.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, by not displaying the first information, the attention to the notification effect is increased, and by continuously displaying the second information, the information on the variable display is confirmed even during the execution of the notification effect. Can be possible.

The game machine of means K6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means K1 to the means K5,
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) places a first corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the active variable display in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). Displaying a second corresponding display (sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display being executed in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105);
The first action effect performed when the mode of the first correspondence display changes and the second action effect performed when the mode of the second correspondence display changes (for example, active mode) The active action effect that changes the display mode of the display 30TM003 is a mode in which the character A appears and executes an action of throwing a ball. This is the mode of executing the action of flying a balloon
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, the aspect of the first action effect is different from the mode of the second action effect, so that interest can be improved.

The game machine of means K7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means K1 to the means K6,
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) displays a first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as first information in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), Is displayed in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104),
When the mode of the first hold display is changed and when the mode of the second hold display is changed, the rate of controlling the player to an advantageous state is different (as shown in FIG. The big hit expectation is higher when the display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 changes than when the display mode of the display 30TM003 changes. The expectation of big hit is higher when the display mode changes)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it can be noticed which of the first hold display and the second hold display has changed.

  As disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), there has been proposed a gaming machine capable of displaying a holding icon in various display modes as information corresponding to variable display. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), there is room for improving interest in information corresponding to variable display. The invention according to the means L1 to L7 has been made in view of the above situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine which enhances interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The game machine of the means L1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols),
A display control unit (production control CPU 120) for performing display control of information (first hold display 30TM001, second hold display 30TM002, active display 30TM003, sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display is provided. ,
The display control means executes display control of first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) corresponding to variable display in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). In the second information display area (sub-reserve display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105) different from the first information display area, a variable display corresponding to the first information and a common variable display are supported. The display control of the second information (sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) can be executed,
When the mode of the first information is changed, at least a part of the announcement effect in the display area different from the first information display area is not executed (as shown in FIG. 13-11, the mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is When it changes, the sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 and the sub-active display 30TM005 is not displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine capable of displaying a plurality of types of information, that is, first information and second information as information corresponding to a common variable display, it is possible to suppress an effect from being complicated and to enhance interest. be able to.

The gaming machine of the means L2 is
The game machine of the means L1,
The mode of the first information after the change is different from the mode of the second information after the change (as shown in FIG. 13-8 (6), the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode is a blue circle display). , The blue mode sub-hold display 30TM004b is a blue star display)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, since the first information and the second information have different modes after the change, the respective information can be clearly distinguished and grasped.

The game machine of the means L3 is
A game machine of means L1 or means L2,
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) can simultaneously display the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) and the second information (secondary hold display 30TM004, secondary active display). (As shown in FIG. 13-8 (2), the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 can be simultaneously displayed).
Depending on the mode of the first information after the change and the mode of the second information after the change, the rate of controlling to the advantageous state advantageous to the player is different (for example, as shown in FIG. The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a golden mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005, as compared with the case where the final display mode of the display 30TM003 is the normal mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is the normal mode. Is a red color mode, the big hit expectation is higher)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the combination of the mode of the first information and the mode of the second information, and the interest can be improved.

The game machine of the means L4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means L1 to the means L3,
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) includes:
A first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as first information is displayed in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and a first correspondence display (active) corresponding to the variable display being executed. Display 30TM003) in the first information display area (active display area 30TM103);
When the variable display corresponding to the first hold display is started, it is possible to display the first corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in a mode common to the first hold display (see FIG. 13-9 ( As shown in (9) and (10), when the first reserved display 30TM001c (red circle display) in the red mode is shifted to the active display area 30TM103, the active display 30TM003c (red circle) in the red mode, which is the same display color. Is displayed)),
A second hold display (second hold display 30TM004) as the second information is displayed in the second information display area (second hold display area 30TM104, second active display area 30TM105) and a second display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Displaying a corresponding display (sub active display area 30TM005) in the second information display area (sub hold display area 30TM104, sub active display area 30TM105);
When starting the variable display corresponding to the second hold display, it is possible to display the second corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in a manner common to the second hold display (see FIG. 13-9 ( As shown in 9) and (10), when the sub-hold display 30TM004c (red star display) in the red mode shifts to the sub-active display area 30TM105, the sub-active display 30TM005c (red color mode) in the same display color as the red mode is displayed. (Star-shaped display) is displayed)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, a plurality of types of information, that is, first correspondence information and second correspondence information can be displayed as information corresponding to the variable display that is being executed. This can be improved, and the aspect of the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information can be made interesting.

The game machine of the means L5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means L1 to the means L4,
A notification effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an information effect (reach effect) for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player;
At least a part of the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103) is included in an area where the notification effect is executed,
The display control means (the effect control CPU 120) can make the first information non-display in accordance with the execution of the notification effect, while the second information is also displayed when the information effect is executed. The information can be visually recognized (as shown in FIG. 13-9 (11), when the reach state is established, the character “REACH !!” is displayed at the bottom of the screen, and the first hold display 30TM001 and the active state are displayed. (Display 30TM003 is not displayed, while sub-hold display 30TM004 and sub-active display 30TM005 are continuously displayed.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, by not displaying the first information, the attention to the notification effect is increased, and by continuously displaying the second information, the information on the variable display is confirmed even during the execution of the notification effect. Can be possible.

The game machine of the means L6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means L1 to the means L5,
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) places a first corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the active variable display in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). Displaying a second corresponding display (sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display being executed in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105);
The first action effect performed when the mode of the first correspondence display changes and the second action effect performed when the mode of the second correspondence display changes (for example, active mode) The active action effect that changes the display mode of the display 30TM003 is a mode in which the character A appears and executes an action of throwing a ball. This is the mode of executing the action of flying a balloon
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, the aspect of the first action effect is different from the mode of the second action effect, so that interest can be improved.

The game machine of means L7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means L1 to the means L6,
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) displays a first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as first information in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), Is displayed in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104),
When the mode of the first hold display is changed and when the mode of the second hold display is changed, the rate of controlling the player to an advantageous state is different (as shown in FIG. The big hit expectation is higher when the display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 changes than when the display mode of the display 30TM003 changes. The expectation of big hit is higher when the display mode changes)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it can be noticed which of the first hold display and the second hold display has changed.

  As shown in JP-A-2006-144581 (FIG. 36), a gaming machine is proposed in which an active display is displayed as information corresponding to a variable display, and the display mode of the active display is changed every time the pseudo continuous change is executed. Have been. In the gaming machine described in JP-A-2006-144585 (FIG. 36), there is room for improving interest in information corresponding to variable display. The invention according to the means N1 to N6 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The game machine of the means N1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols),
Display control means (production control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display;
Change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change suggestion effect indicating that the mode of the corresponding display changes,
The change suggestion effect execution means, as a change suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 13-18 (1) and (2), a ball thrown by the character A hits the active display 30TM003 as shown in FIGS. The effect of changing the display mode) and the effect of indicating the change of the failure mode (as shown in FIGS. 13-19 (10) and (20)), the ball thrown by the character D is flipped by the active display 30TM003 to change the display mode. Effect) that can be performed,
During a predetermined period (for example, during the period from the start of the fluctuation to the time when the reach state is established), the decorative symbol (a combination of decorative symbols or a pseudo-continuous symbol in which re-fluctuation (pseudo ream) is performed after the temporary stop) is temporarily set. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode with respect to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the period until the stop, the period from the start of the change to the first stop of any of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols) Accordingly, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is different (as shown in FIG. 13-16 (A), [the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of success mode] with respect to the [number of executions of the change suggestion effect]). Is higher, the bigger the jackpot expectation is, the more likely the display mode is. For example, the display mode when [the number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the successful mode / the number of executions of the change suggestion effect] is 2/3 is blue. Next Display mode when it is 4/5 is more jackpot expected high degree of red aspect.)
A gaming machine characterized by that:
According to such a configuration, the degree of attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect can be increased, and the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means N2 is
A game machine of means N1,
Depending on the mode of the corresponding display (active display 30TM003), the ratio controlled in the advantageous state (big hit game state) is different (as shown in FIG. 13-3 (A), the big hit expectation degree depends on the final display mode of the active display). Different),
Depending on the number of successive success mode change suggestion effects, the ratio of the corresponding display is different (as shown in FIG. 13-16 (A), the number of successive success mode change suggestion effects) The greater the number of the hits, the higher the expectation of the jackpot, and the greater the number of consecutive success mode change suggestions, the higher the expectation of the jackpot, even for active display of the same display color.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give an interest to the number of times that the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuous, and it is possible to improve interest.

The gaming machine of the means N3 is
A game machine of means N1 or means N2,
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative patterns,
When the change suggestion effect is being executed, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not change (as shown in FIG. 13-18, when the change suggestion effect is being executed, the temporary stop is not performed on the change display of the decorative symbol). (The direction of movement does not change.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, since the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not change, it is possible to further focus on the change suggestion effect.

The game machine of means N4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means N1 to the means N3,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which the character A appears and a change suggestion effect in which the character B appears),
After executing one type of change suggestion effect, a different type of change suggestion effect can be executed (for example, as illustrated in FIG. 13-18 (1), after execution of the change suggestion effect in which the character A appears). , A change suggestion effect in which the character B appears as shown in FIG.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, diversification of change suggestion effects can be achieved.

The game machine of the means N5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means N1 to the means N4,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) includes a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which the character A appears, a change suggestion effect in which the character B appears, a change suggestion effect in which the character C appears, Change suggestion effect in which the character D appears)
Depending on the type of change suggestion effect, the rate at which the change suggestion effect of the successful mode is executed is different, and the rate of change to the specific mode corresponding display is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. (Character D has a higher rate of executing the success mode change suggestion effect, and has a higher rate of changing the active mode display mode.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give an interest in which type of change suggestion effect is executed.

The game machine of the means N6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means N1 to the means N5,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) includes a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (a change suggestion effect in which the character A appears, a change suggestion effect in which the character B appears, a change suggestion effect in which the character C appears, and a character D). Change suggestion effect) appears.
The rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of the change suggestion effect (as shown in FIGS. 13 to 17, the next change suggestion effect is executed for the character A than for the character D). High percentage)
A gaming machine characterized by that:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give an interest in which type of change suggestion effect is executed.

  In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing a set value, it is necessary to appropriately execute control relating to the provision of a game medium. The invention according to the means A1 to A9 has been made in view of the above situation, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control related to providing game media.

The game machine of the means A1 is
Gaming device capable of executing processing related to valuable value (prepaid balance, ball holding, ball storage, etc.) (processing related to ball lending consuming prepaid balance, ball lending consuming ball holding, ball lending consuming ball storage, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving a signal (a VL signal, a BRDY signal, a BRQ signal, etc.) output from the (card unit 21TM050),
Providing means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) for providing a game medium based on a signal output from the gaming machine;
A specific control means (step S21TM1690 or the like for executing a process such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the big hit determination random number is different). A control microcomputer 100);
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling to the setting change mode capable of changing the set value;
With
When controlled in the setting change mode, application of a game medium based on a signal output from the gaming device is limited. (1. The game control microcomputer 100 when controlled in the setting change mode) Does not turn on the connection confirmation signal (does not output it to the payout control board 21TM037), 2. When the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command while being controlled in the setting change mode, the payout control micro 2. The computer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. 3. When the gaming machine frame opening sensor detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is open, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal. No, 4. When the game is controlled in the setting change mode, Since the microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command (because the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not receive the connection confirmation command), even if the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the BRQ signal is turned on, the EXS signal is output. Do not turn it on.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, when being controlled to the setting change mode, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the provision of the game medium.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, when the power switch 21TM055 is operated and the operating voltage is supplied to the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 turns on the lock switch 21TM051. And based on the fact that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, control is performed to a setting change mode in which the set value can be changed. During the period in which the setting change mode is being controlled, the connection confirmation signal is not output to the payout control board 21TM037 because the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 is not executed, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 Do not perform ball rental.

The game machine of means A2 is
The gaming machine of the means A1,
Game control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process) having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine;
The game control means includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The providing means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) can provide a game medium when a special signal (connection confirmation signal) is input from the game control means,
The game control means does not output the special signal when being controlled in any one of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode (the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 outputting the connection confirmation signal Will be executed after exiting the mode and after exiting the setting confirmation mode),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being provided when the game is controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means A3 is
The gaming machine of the means A1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The providing means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) outputs a first predetermined signal (PRDY signal) to the gaming device, and based on the input of the first predetermined signal, the gaming device Game media can be provided based on the input of the second predetermined signal (BRDY signal) output from
The first predetermined signal is not output when being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (1. The PRDY signal is not turned on when the connection confirmation signal is not input; When the command is not received, the PRDY signal is not turned on),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being provided when the game is controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means A4 is
The gaming machine of the means A1,
Game control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process) having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine;
At least one of the game control means and the provision means (for example, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) has an open state detection means (an open state detection means for detecting an open state in which a game machine frame or a door frame corresponding to the game machine is open). A gaming machine frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the gaming machine frame 3 is open, a door frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is open, Door frame opening sensor 21TM300) is provided,
Regardless of whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, the application of the game medium is restricted when the open state is detected (when the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the glass door frame 3a Does not turn on the PRDY signal when is open),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, when the gaming machine frame or the door frame is opened in order to control the setting change mode, the provision of the game medium can be restricted.

The game machine of means A5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A4,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The providing means outputs a provision signal in response to input of a provision request signal from the gaming device (a BRQ signal is turned on) (turns an EXS signal on) and outputs the provision signal. A game medium is provided when an application command signal output from the gaming device in response to the input is input (when the card unit 21TM050 that has detected the ON of the EXS signal turns off the BRQ signal),
When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the application preparation signal is not output even if the application request signal is input (the EXS signal is turned on even if the BRQ signal is detected on). do not do),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being provided when the game is controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of the means A6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A5,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
When the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting switch) ) When 21TM052 is ON), control is performed to the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means determines that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) ) If 21TM052 is off), control to the setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The game machine of means A7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A6,
When controlled to the setting change mode, the game state is initialized (RAM clear of step S21TM1410 is executed),
After the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is performed based on the end of the control of the setting change mode (after the setting value is blinked on the display monitor 21TM029), the gaming state is initialized. (Displaying the character “C” on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the clerk of the game hall or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode has ended and the gaming state has been initialized.

The game machine of means A8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A7,
A game control means having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controlling a progress of a game in the gaming machine (a game control microcomputer 100 executing a game control timer interrupt process);
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the effect,
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The game control means outputs a command (a setting change mode command, a setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control relating to notification in accordance with the command (displays “setting is being changed” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received; "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible for a store clerk or the like at the game arcade to know that the control has been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means A9 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A8,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
Along with the control in the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (if the game mode is controlled in the setting change mode, the RAM clear processing in step S21TM1410 is executed), and the game proceeds to the setting confirmation mode. As a result of the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when the setting check mode is controlled, the RAM clearing process of step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, a store clerk or the like at the game hall can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and can also select whether or not to initialize the game state.

  In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside has been proposed. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing the set value, it is necessary to appropriately execute control based on a signal output from the gaming machine. The invention according to means B1 to means B7 has been made in view of the above situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control based on a signal output from a gaming device.

The game machine of the means B1 is
Gaming device capable of executing processing related to valuable value (prepaid balance, ball holding, ball storage, etc.) (processing related to ball lending consuming prepaid balance, ball lending consuming ball holding, ball lending consuming ball storage, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving a signal (a VL signal, a BRDY signal, a BRQ signal, etc.) output from the (card unit 21TM050),
Predetermined control means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) for executing predetermined control (ball lending) based on a signal output from the gaming machine;
A specific control means (step S21TM1690 or the like for executing a process such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the big hit determination random number is different). A control microcomputer 100);
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting change mode capable of changing the setting value;
It is possible to execute a predetermined control based on a signal output from the gaming device regardless of whether or not the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode (the gaming control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode). Even during the period, the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command can be transmitted, and the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command are received when the connection confirmation signal is on. The microcomputer 21TM370 can execute the ball lending regardless of whether the period is controlled to the setting change mode),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately execute the predetermined control based on the signal output from the gaming device, and it is possible to avoid a control burden when the predetermined control is not executed when being controlled in the setting change mode. .

The gaming machine of the means B2 is
The gaming machine of means B1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
When the predetermined control is being executed, the predetermined control is interrupted based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (e.g., a power failure). After the end of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the predetermined control is restarted (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 suspends the ball lending when the power is cut off during the ball lending, and resumes the power supply after the power supply is restarted. When the game control microcomputer 100 shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball lending is resumed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends without immediately resuming the ball lending),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, even when the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the occurrence of the predetermined event, the predetermined control can be appropriately executed.

The gaming machine of the means B3 is
The gaming machine of means B1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
If the control is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode while the predetermined control is being executed, the predetermined control is ended (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines that the power is cut off during the ball lending operation). When it occurs, the ball lending is forcibly terminated (stopped), and the ball lending is not resumed when the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode at the time of restoring power, and the setting change is not performed. Ball rental is not resumed even after the mode or setting confirmation mode ends),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the control for restarting the predetermined control after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode becomes unnecessary, and the predetermined control can be simplified.

The game machine of means B4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B3,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means determines that the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch 21TM052 is ON). Control) to the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means determines that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, and the clear switch 21TM052 is OFF). Control) to the setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode according to the condition that is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The game machine of means B5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B4,
When controlled to the setting change mode, game information is initialized (when controlled to the setting change mode, RAM clear of step S21TM1410 is executed),
When the set value is changed in the setting change mode, after the change of the set value is notified (after the set value is blinked on the display monitor 21TM029), it is notified that the gaming state is initialized (display). The character "C" is displayed on the monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the clerk of the game hall or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode has ended and the gaming state has been initialized.

The gaming machine of the means B6 is
Any of gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B5,
A game control means having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controlling a progress of a game in the gaming machine (a game control microcomputer 100 executing a game control timer interrupt process);
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the effect,
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The game control means outputs a command (a setting change mode command, a setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control relating to notification in accordance with the command (displays “setting is being changed” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received; "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible for a store clerk or the like at the game arcade to know that the control has been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means B7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B6,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
Along with the control in the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (if the game mode is controlled in the setting change mode, the RAM clear processing in step S21TM1410 is executed), and the game proceeds to the setting confirmation mode. As a result of the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when the setting check mode is controlled, the RAM clearing process of step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, a store clerk or the like at the game hall can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and can also select whether or not to initialize the game state.

  In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately execute control when a game medium passes through a specific area when changing a set value. The invention according to means C1 to means C6 has been made in view of the above situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control when a game medium passes through a specific area.

The game machine of the means C1 is
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific areas (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening), a specific control (special value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for big hit determination is different) according to the set value (special control) A specific control means (a game control microcomputer 100 executing a process such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing a big hit determination process or the like in a symbol process process;
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting change mode capable of changing the setting value;
When being controlled to the setting change mode, the specific control is not executed even if the game medium passes through the specific area (control to the setting change mode prior to the setting of the timer interrupt (step S21TM1500)). Accordingly, during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode, the special symbol process process (big hit determination process) of step S21TM1690 is not executed),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed when the setting value may be changed.

The game machine of the means C2 is
A game machine of means C1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means determines that the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch 21TM052 is ON). Control) to the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means determines that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, and the clear switch 21TM052 is OFF). Control) to the setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode according to the condition that is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The game machine of the means C3 is
A game machine of means C1 or means C2,
When controlled to the setting change mode, the game state is initialized (when controlled to the setting change mode, the RAM is cleared in step S21TM1410),
After the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is performed based on the end of the control of the setting change mode (after the setting value is blinked on the display monitor 21TM029), the gaming state is initialized. (Displaying the character “C” on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the clerk of the game hall or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode has ended and the gaming state has been initialized.

The game machine of means C4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to the means C3,
A game control means having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controlling a progress of a game in the gaming machine (a game control microcomputer 100 executing a game control timer interrupt process);
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the effect,
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The game control means outputs a command (a setting change mode command, a setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control relating to notification in accordance with the command (displays “setting is being changed” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received; "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible for a store clerk or the like at the game arcade to know that the control has been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of the means C5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to the means C4,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
When the game mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the specific control is not executed even if the game medium passes through the specific area (the control mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode before the timer interrupt setting (step S21TM1500)). Accordingly, during the period of being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the special symbol process process (big hit determination process) of step S21TM1690 is not executed),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed when the setting value is confirmed.

The game machine of means C6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to the means C5,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
Along with the control in the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (if the game mode is controlled in the setting change mode, the RAM clear processing in step S21TM1410 is executed), and the game proceeds to the setting confirmation mode. As a result of the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when the setting check mode is controlled, the RAM clearing process of step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, a store clerk or the like at the game hall can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and can also select whether or not to initialize the game state.

  In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to execute an appropriate process when power supply is stopped when a set value is changed. The invention relating to the means D1 to D5 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which executes appropriate processing when power supply is stopped.

The gaming machine of the means D1 is
A specific control means (step S21TM1690 or the like for executing a process such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the big hit determination random number is different). A control microcomputer 100);
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling to the setting change mode capable of changing the set value;
Setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling to a setting confirmation mode for notifying the set value in a confirmable manner;
Setting value storage means (setting value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the setting values are stored) for storing the setting values,
The setting change mode control means determines that the first condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and the second condition is satisfied (the clear switch ( Setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state) to control the setting change mode,
The setting check mode control means determines that the first condition is satisfied (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and the second condition is not satisfied (clear) when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. Switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state) to control the setting confirmation mode,
The setting value is determined based on a specific operation in the setting change mode (operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state),
The setting value storage means stores a setting value before being controlled to the setting change mode when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode (from a setting value storage area of the RAM 102 before shifting to the setting change mode). The set value that has been set is continuously stored without being changed with the transition to the setting change mode),
In the setting change mode, the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation (the power is cut off without performing the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state), and thereafter If the setting check mode is controlled when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, the set value stored in the set value storage unit is notified (the control mode is switched to the setting check mode after power-on). In this case, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 before the transition to the setting confirmation mode).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the clerk at the game hall or the like can appropriately set the set value in the case where the power supply is stopped while being controlled in the setting change mode.

The gaming machine of the means D2 is
The gaming machine of the means D1,
The setting change mode control means performs a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051) when power supply to the gaming machine is started, and performs an initialization operation (turns the clear switch 21TM052 on). Control) to perform the setting change mode when the
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode when the transition operation is performed when the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the initialization operation is not performed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, a store clerk or the like at the game hall can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

The gaming machine of the means D3 is
A game machine of means D1 or means D2,
When controlled to the setting change mode, the game state is initialized (RAM clear of step S21TM1410 is executed),
Based on the end of the control of the setting change mode, a notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is executed (the set value is blinked on the display monitor 21TM029).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the clerk at the game hall or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode has ended.

The gaming machine of means D4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means D1 to the means D3,
A game control means for controlling the progress of a game in the gaming machine, the game control means including a game control microcontroller for executing a game control timer interrupt process, comprising the specific control means, the setting change mode control means, and the setting confirmation mode control means; Computer 100)
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for executing effect control,
The game control means outputs a command (a setting change mode command, a setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes a notification according to the command (displays “setting is being changed” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received, and displays an image when a setting confirmation mode command is received). "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the device 5),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible for a store clerk or the like at the game arcade to know that the control has been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of the means D5 is
Any of gaming machines selected from the means D1 to the means D4,
Timing after the power supply to the gaming machine is started (timing after the game control microcomputer 100 can execute the game control timer interrupt processing after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends) When the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, a predetermined notification is performed (the effect control CPU 120 outputs a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated, a clear switch (setting switch). When the setting changeover switch operation command indicating that the 21TM052 has been operated is received from the game control microcomputer 100, "operation of the lock switch has been detected.", "Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." Is displayed on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, a clerk of the game hall or the like can grasp that the first condition or the second condition is satisfied at a timing after the power supply is started.

  In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside has been proposed. Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device to grasp the status of processing related to the change of the set value. Even if the conventional game machine signal output technology described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp this. The invention according to means E1 to E8 has been made in view of the above situation, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping the status of a process related to a change in a set value on an external device side. is there.

The game machine of the means E1
A gaming machine capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination is different),
The set value is changeable (changeable based on an operation in a setting change mode),
A specific signal (security signal) can be output from the first terminal (tenth terminal) in response to a predetermined event (abnormal winning, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) occurring in the gaming machine,
A special signal (setting change corresponding signal) can be output from the second terminal (seventh terminal) in response to the processing related to the change of the set value (transition to the setting change mode, transition to the setting confirmation mode). ,
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be notified to the outside in a distinguishable manner.

The game machine of means E2 is
The game machine of means E1,
The specific signal can be output in response to the start of power supply to the gaming machine (a security signal is output when RAM clear is executed),
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing the set value when power supply to the gaming machine is started; Prepared,
When controlled to the setting change mode, both the specific signal and the special signal can be output (the security signal and the setting change signal are output simultaneously)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, since it is possible to notify externally at least the possibility of being controlled to the setting change mode by the specific signal, even in a conventional external device that does not assume the input of the special signal, the setting change is performed by the specific signal. It is possible to know that the mode may have been controlled.

The game machine of means E3 is
The game machine of means E2,
When both the specific signal and the special signal are output based on the control to the setting change mode, the output period of the specific signal is longer than the output period of the special signal (output of the setting corresponding change signal). For 30 seconds after the end of the security signal)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, since it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that at least the setting change mode may be controlled by the specific signal, even in a conventional external device that does not assume the input of the special signal, the setting is performed by the specific signal. It is possible to know that there is a possibility of being controlled in the change mode.

The game machine of means E4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means E1 to the means E3,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The special signal can be output based on the control in the setting confirmation mode (a setting correspondence change signal is output during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that the setting has been controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means E5 is
The game machine of means E4,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the setting check mode can be controlled (when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF). Is controlled in the setting check mode)
It is possible to output both the specific signal and the special signal based on being controlled to the setting confirmation mode (simultaneously outputs a security signal and a setting correspondence change signal),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, since it is possible to notify to the outside at least the possibility of being controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the specific signal, even in a conventional external device that does not assume the input of the special signal, the setting is confirmed by the specific signal. It is possible to know that the mode may have been controlled.

The game machine of means E6 is
The game machine of means E1,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing the set value when power supply to the gaming machine is started; Prepared,
The special signal can be output when the setting change mode is controlled (a setting change corresponding signal is output when the setting change mode is controlled), and the specific signal can be output when the setting change mode ends. (If the RAM clear is executed, a security signal is output when the setting change mode ends).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside of the occurrence of the predetermined event while simplifying the signal output processing when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode.

The game machine of means E7 is
The game machine of means E1 or means E6,
Setting check mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in which the set value can be checked when the power supply to the gaming machine is started; Prepared,
The special signal can be output when the setting confirmation mode is controlled (a setting change corresponding signal is output when the setting confirmation mode is controlled), and the specific signal can be output when the setting confirmation mode ends. (If the RAM clear is executed, a security signal is output when the setting confirmation mode ends)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to notify the occurrence of the predetermined event to the outside while simplifying the signal output processing when the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means E8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means E1 to the means E7,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling to the setting change mode capable of changing the set value;
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value.
In the setting change mode, the set value can be changed according to a setting change operation (the set value can be changed by operating the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 and operating the lock switch 21TM051),
When the setting change operation is performed while neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, a predetermined notification is performed (the effect control CPU 120 operates the lock switch 21TM051). When a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch operation command has been received from the game control microcomputer 100, the lock switch operation command has been detected. , A warning that “operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected” is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the clerk at the game hall or the like can grasp that the inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

  In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside has been proposed. Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (Paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device to grasp the information related to the setting value. Even if the conventional game machine signal output technology described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication (Paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp this. The invention according to the means F1 to F11 has been made in view of the above situation, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping information related to a set value on an external device side.

The game machine of the means F1 is:
A gaming machine capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination is different),
The setting value can be changed to any one of a plurality of values (changeable based on an operation in a setting change mode),
A special signal (setting change corresponding signal) can be output in response to a process related to the change of the setting value (transition to the setting change mode, transition to the setting confirmation mode),
The special signal can be output in a special mode in which the set value can be specified (a number of pulses corresponding to the set value are output).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The game machine of the means F2,
The gaming machine of the means F1,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode capable of changing the setting value;
Outputting the special signal in the special mode with the end of the setting change mode (when the setting change mode ends, outputting a number of pulses corresponding to the determined set value);
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to output a signal for notifying whether or not the setting change mode is controlled and a signal for notifying the set value of the gaming machine from the common terminal.

The game machine of the means F3 is
The game machine of means F2,
A special signal in a non-special mode (a setting change corresponding signal that is turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode) is output when the setting change mode is being controlled, and with the end of the setting change mode. After the output of the special signal is temporarily stopped (after the setting change corresponding signal is once turned off with the end of the setting change mode), the special signal of the special mode (the number of pulse-like settings corresponding to the determined set value) Change response signal),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to notify to the outside whether or not the setting change mode is controlled by the special signal, and also to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The game machine of means F4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F3,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
Outputting the special signal of the special mode with the end of the setting confirmation mode (when the setting confirmation mode ends, outputting a number of pulses corresponding to the displayed set value);
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to output a signal notifying whether or not the control is set to the setting check mode and a signal notifying the setting value of the gaming machine from the common terminal.

The game machine of means F5 is
The game machine of means F4,
A special signal in a non-special mode (a setting change corresponding signal that is turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode) is output when the setting confirmation mode is being controlled. After the output of the special signal is temporarily stopped (after the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode), the special signal of the special mode (the number of pulse-shaped pulses corresponding to the displayed set value) is obtained. Output the setting change response signal),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to notify to the outside whether or not the control is set to the setting confirmation mode by the special signal, and also to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The gaming machine of the means F6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F5,
In the special signal of the special mode, the set value can be specified by the number of pulses. (By setting the number of times of output of the pulse-shaped setting change corresponding signal to the same number as the set value, the set value can be specified in the external device. is there),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to easily specify the set value in the external device.

The game machine of means F7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F6,
A specific signal (security signal) can be output in response to a predetermined event (abnormal winning, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) occurring in the gaming machine.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event can be notified to the outside.

The game machine of means F8 is
A game machine of means F7,
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from a common terminal (for example, output from a tenth terminal),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the set value can be notified externally with a simple configuration.

The game machine of means F9 is
A game machine of means F7,
Outputting the specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) from different terminals (for example, outputting a security signal from the tenth terminal and outputting a setting change corresponding signal from the seventh terminal);
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the set value can be notified to the outside in a manner that can be clearly distinguished.

The gaming machine of the means F10 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F9,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode capable of changing the setting value;
In the setting change mode, the set value can be changed according to a setting change operation (the set value can be changed according to an operation of a setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052);
Regardless of whether or not the setting change operation has been performed in the setting change mode, the special signal of the special mode is output upon completion of the setting change mode (when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, Regardless of whether or not the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated before, the number of pulses corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is output as a setting change corresponding signal. ,
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the signal output process by executing the common signal output process regardless of whether the setting change operation is actually performed.

The game machine of means F11 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F10,
The special signal of the special mode is output at the end of the process related to the change of the set value (the number of pulse signals corresponding to the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 at the end of the set change mode). And outputs a number of pulse-like setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 with the end of the setting confirmation mode. After the output is completed, the special signal of the special mode is output at a predetermined timing different from the processing related to the change of the set value (for example, the end of the big hit game state) (stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102). Output the number of pulse-like setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the set value
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to notify the setting value to the outside at a predetermined timing, and therefore, it is possible to increase opportunities for the external device to specify the setting value.

  In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing a set value, it is necessary to appropriately execute control relating to the provision of a game medium. The invention relating to the means G1 to G10 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control related to providing a game medium.

The gaming machine of the means G1 is:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) provided with a granting means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 controlling a payout motor 21TM289) capable of granting a gaming value (pachinko ball),
A specific control means (step S21TM1690 or the like for executing a process such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the big hit determination random number is different). A control microcomputer 100);
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling to a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
Open state detection capable of detecting an open state in which at least one of the gaming machine frame (game machine frame 3) and the door frame (glass door frame 3a) corresponding to the gaming machine (eg, the game machine frame 3) is opened. Means (a game machine frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the game machine frame 3 is in an open state, a door frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is in an open state) And a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300).
Regardless of whether the setting change mode is controlled or not, when the open state is detected, the provision of the game value is restricted (when the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the glass door frame When 3a is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289, so that the payout of the game medium in the ball lending process and the prize ball process is not performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the provision of the game value when the game mode is controlled to the setting change mode.

The gaming machine of the means G2 is
The gaming machine of means G1,
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) is provided with the open state detection means (game machine capable of detecting that the game machine frame 3 is in the open state). The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a gaming machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 including a frame open sensor and a door frame open sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is in an open state. When (the state in which the gaming machine frame 3 is opened) is detected, the setting change mode can be controlled (if YES in step S21TM3520, processing in step S21TM3530 and subsequent steps is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game machine frame or the door frame from being controlled to the setting change mode in a state where the open state is not detected.

The game machine of means G3 is
A game machine of means G1 or G2,
A specific information storage unit (RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100) for storing specific information (a value of a setting change flag) capable of specifying that the setting change mode has been controlled;
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after power supply to the gaming machine is stopped,
The setting change mode control means can set a game stop state when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means after the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed (game). When the setting microcomputer change flag is set after power-on, the gaming machine frame 3 is open, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, and the clear switch 21TM052 is ON. If the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied under the condition that the condition is satisfied, the process does not shift to the normal game processing and loops until the power is turned off.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage unit after the power supply is restarted, the game can be stopped.

The gaming machine of means G4 is
A game machine of means G3,
In response to the end of the setting change mode, the specific information (the value of the setting change flag) is deleted (based on the operation of turning off the lock switch 21TM051; YES is determined in step S21TM3530, and the setting change mode The process is ended, and the setting change flag is cleared in step S21TM3710.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to shift to the normal game process after the setting change mode ends.

The game machine of means G5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means G1 to G4,
Game control means (game control microcomputer 100 executing a game control timer interrupt process) for controlling the progress of the game,
The giving means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that controls the payout motor 21TM289) has the open state detecting means, and determines whether or not to give the game value based on the detection of the open state. (When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming medium is not paid out, When none of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a have been opened, the payout of the game medium is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, since the giving means for controlling the giving of the game value includes the open state detecting means, it is easy to determine whether or not to give the game value, and the processing load can be reduced.

The game machine of means G6 is
A game machine of means G5,
The providing means (dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the dispensing motor 21TM289) includes:
Based on receiving information (payout number) related to the provision of a game value from the game control means (the game control microcomputer 100 executing the game control timer interrupt process), the game value is provided,
Storage means (RAM 21TM302 having an unpaid number storage buffer formed in a backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) capable of storing grant information (number of unpaid numbers) relating to the game value to be given;
The storage means can store the additional information even after power supply to the gaming machine is stopped,
After the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted, the giving means executes the giving of the game value in accordance with the adding information stored in the storage means (the power supply is interrupted during the payout of the game medium). If this occurs, the payout of the game media is interrupted, the interrupted payout is resumed after the power is turned on, and the unpaid number of game media is paid out),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, it is possible to store the grant information on the game value to be granted, and to store the information after the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted. Since it is possible to assign a game value corresponding to the assignment information, it is possible to avoid the disadvantage of the player.

The game machine of means G7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means G1 to the means G6,
It can be connected to a gaming device (card unit 21TM050),
The giving means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 which controls the payout motor 21TM289) executes the giving of the game value based on the signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) outputted from the gaming machine,
When the open state is detected, the provision of the game value based on the signal output from the gaming device is restricted (the gaming machine frame provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided for the gaming machine). When detecting opening of the frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, the card unit 21TM050 does not transmit the BRDY signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout of the game medium is executed. Is not)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, since the assignment of the game value while the gaming machine frame or the door frame is being opened is limited, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem associated with the giving operation while the gaming machine frame or the door frame is being opened, Maintenance work or the like while the gaming machine frame or door frame is open can be smoothly advanced.

The game machine of means G8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means G1 to the means G7,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) capable of controlling a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming a set value;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
Along with being controlled to the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized,
Along with the control in the setting confirmation mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized. If the determination is YES, the RAM is cleared in step S21TM3050, or if the determination is YES in step S21TM3140, the RAM is cleared in step S21TM3150. Is determined to be NO in step S21TM3040 based on the fact that the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state, thereby not proceeding to step S21TM3050, or Do not want to migrate to step S21TM3150),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, a store clerk or the like at a game arcade can select whether to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also select whether to initialize the game state.

The game machine of means G9 is
A game machine of means G8,
Storage means (RAM 21TM302 having an unpaid number storage buffer formed in a backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) capable of storing grant information (data on unpaid number) relating to a game value to be given;
The additional information is initialized as the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (when the RAM clear of step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 for initializing the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed). At the same time, the RAM clearing in step S21TM1880 for initializing the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is also executed. The number of data is initialized),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized including the grant information on the gaming value to be granted, thereby facilitating management at the gaming shop.

The game machine of means G10 is
A game machine of means G8,
Storage means (RAM 21TM302 having an unpaid number storage buffer formed in a backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) capable of storing grant information (data on unpaid number) relating to a game value to be given;
Regardless of whether or not the gaming state of the gaming machine has been initialized, the additional information is not initialized. Also, since the RAM clearing in step S21TM1880 for initializing the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed, the unpaid number of the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is not initialized),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, even when the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized, the assignment information is not initialized, so that information on the game value to be assigned can be appropriately protected.

  In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside has been proposed. Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. With respect to a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), the state of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine and the state of execution of processing related to a change in a set value are determined by an external device. In some cases, it is necessary to distinguish and recognize them. However, even if the conventional game machine signal output technology described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, the external device side needs to recognize both. There is a problem that it is difficult to distinguish and recognize. The invention according to the means H1 to H5 has been made in view of the above situation, and the external device side distinguishes the occurrence situation of a predetermined event in a gaming machine and the execution situation of a process related to a change of a set value on an external device side. It is to provide a gaming machine that can be recognized separately.

The game machine of the means H1 is:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination differs),
The setting value can be changed,
A specific signal (security signal) can be output in response to a predetermined event (RAM clear, game machine frame / door frame open detection, etc.) occurring in the gaming machine, and processing (setting change) related to the change of the set value Mode), and can output a specific signal.
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the predetermined event is different from the output period of the specific signal corresponding to the process related to the change of the set value (the security signal is not controlled to the setting change mode because the RAM is cleared. Is output for 30 seconds, and if the RAM is cleared and controlled to the setting change mode, the signal is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the period controlled to the setting change mode.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be notified to the outside in a distinguishable manner.

The game machine of the means H2 is
A game machine of means H1,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling to a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
Setting check mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) capable of controlling a setting check mode capable of checking a set value,
The output period of the specific signal is different between the case where the setting is controlled to the setting change mode and the case where the setting is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. (When the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode, the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode. Is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the set period, and is output for a period obtained by adding 50 ms to the period controlled by the setting check mode when the mode is controlled to the setting check mode.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between control in the setting change mode and control in the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of the means H3 is
A game machine of means H1 or means H2,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling to a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
Setting check mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) capable of controlling a setting check mode capable of checking a set value,
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
When at least one of the shift operation and the initialization operation is performed while not being controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, a predetermined notification is performed (the effect control CPU 120 includes: When a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated and a setting changeover switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated have been received from the game control microcomputer 100, the "lock switch" Is detected on the image display device 5) and a warning "Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected."
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, a store clerk or the like at a game arcade can grasp that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

The game machine of means H4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means H1 to the means H3,
A special signal (setting change corresponding signal) can be output in response to the processing (setting change mode, setting check mode) related to the change of the set value.
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from different terminals (for example, a security signal is output from a tenth terminal, and a setting change corresponding signal is output from a seventh terminal). ),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be distinguished externally, and the process related to the change of the set value can be performed. Can be notified to the outside in a clearer manner.

The game machine of the means H5 is:
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means H1 to the means H4,
A special signal (setting change corresponding signal) can be output in response to the processing (setting change mode, setting check mode) related to the change of the set value.
The special signal can be output in a special mode in which a set value can be specified (a number of pulses corresponding to the set value are output).
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

  As disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on an external setting change operation. Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device to grasp the execution status of the processing related to the set value. Even if the conventional game machine signal output technology described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp this. The invention according to the means I1 to I6 has been made in view of the above situation, and is to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping the execution state of a process related to a set value on an external device side. .

The gaming machine of the means I1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination differs),
The setting value can be changed,
In response to the start of the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value, the output of the specific signal (security signal) is started,
Stopping the output of the specific signal (security signal) in response to the end of the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value,
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the control related to the set value is longer than a predetermined period (when controlled to the setting change mode, the security signal output period is 30 seconds or more, and when controlled to the setting confirmation mode , The output period of the security signal is 50 ms or more),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, the control state related to the set value can be appropriately notified to the outside of the gaming machine.

The game machine of the means I2 is
The game machine of means I1,
A specific signal (security signal) can be output in response to a predetermined event (RAM clear, game machine frame / door frame open detection, etc.) generated in the gaming machine,
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the predetermined event is different from the output period of the specific signal corresponding to the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value. If the setting change mode is not controlled, the signal is output for 30 seconds. If the RAM is cleared and the setting change mode is controlled, the signal is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the period controlled by the setting change mode. ),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be notified to the outside in a distinguishable manner.

The gaming machine of the means I3 is
A game machine of means I1 or means I2,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling to a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
Setting check mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) capable of controlling a setting check mode capable of checking a set value,
The output period of the specific signal is different between the case where the setting is controlled to the setting change mode and the case where the setting is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. (When the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode, the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode. Is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the set period, and is output for a period obtained by adding 50 ms to the period controlled by the setting check mode when the mode is controlled to the setting check mode.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between being controlled to the setting change mode and being controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of the means I4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means I1 to the means I3,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling to a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
Setting check mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) capable of controlling a setting check mode capable of checking a set value,
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
When at least one of the shift operation and the initialization operation is performed while not being controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, a predetermined notification is performed (the effect control CPU 120 includes: When a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated and a setting changeover switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated have been received from the game control microcomputer 100, the "lock switch" Is detected on the image display device 5) and a warning "Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected."
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, a store clerk or the like at a game arcade can grasp that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

The gaming machine of the means I5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means I1 to the means I4,
A special signal (setting change corresponding signal) can be output according to the control (setting change mode, setting check mode) related to the set value.
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from different terminals (for example, a security signal is output from a tenth terminal, and a setting change corresponding signal is output from a seventh terminal). ),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be distinguished externally, and the process related to the change of the set value can be performed. Can be notified to the outside in a clearer manner.

The gaming machine of the means I6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means I1 to the means I5,
A special signal (setting change corresponding signal) can be output according to the control (setting change mode, setting check mode) related to the set value.
The special signal can be output in a special mode in which a set value can be specified (a number of pulses corresponding to the set value are output).
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

  There has been proposed a gaming machine that displays a title for notifying the type of the reach effect at the start of the reach effect (for example, see JP-A-2006-101428). In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-101428, it is desired to enhance a staging effect. The invention according to means J1 to J8 has been made in view of the above situation, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine with an enhanced effect of production.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the means J1 is:
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player,
A suggestion effect execution means (eg, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (e.g., a reach effect) indicating that the control is performed in the advantageous state;
Title notifying means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect,
The title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIGS. 10-2 (D) and (F)).
According to such a configuration, the effect can be enhanced.

The game machine of the means J2 is a game machine of the means J1,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of the suggestion effect,
In a plurality of types of the suggested effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be executable in a common manner (for example, FIG. 10C).
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to which of the suggestion effects is executed, and the interest is improved.

The game machine of means J3 is a game machine of means J1 or means J2,
At a plurality of execution timings during the suggestion effect execution, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a notice effect) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state,
An execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the title is announced.

The gaming machine of means J4 is a gaming machine of any of means J1 to means J3,
The suggestion effect execution means executes at least a first suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestion effect. Is possible,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notifying unit may notify a title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the notification of the title according to the suggestion effect, so that the effect of the effect is improved.

The game machine of means J5 is a game machine of means J4,
The ratio in which the advantageous state is controlled may be higher when the first suggestion effect is executed than when the second suggestion effect is executed.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

The gaming machine of means J6 is a gaming machine of any of means J1 to J5,
The suggestion effect execution means may be configured to be able to execute the suggestion effect in an effect mode related to a title notified in the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

The game machine of means J7 is a game machine of any of means J1 to means J6,
Detecting means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting a player's movement;
Specific display execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for performing specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection means,
The specific display execution means,
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific display are displayed. Is possible,
In the non-valid period of the detection by the detecting means, after the first specific display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 10-10 (E), FIG. 10-11 (I)). )),
During the valid period of the detection by the detection means, an operation effect using the changed second specific display may be executed (for example, FIGS. 10-11 (J) and (K)).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

The game machine of means J8 is a game machine of any of means J1 to means J7,
As a suggestion display indicating the degree of expectation of the control to the advantageous state, a first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (a first size shutter image 31AK061 displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. 10-12 (a)). And the like, and a second suggestion display whose display size is the second size (such as the second size reach title image 31AK062 displayed at the time of the reach title effect shown in FIG. 10-12 (d)). Means (for example, the image display device 5 and the effect control CPU 120),
The display means,
Plural types of elements having different aspects (elements E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry) shown in FIGS. 10-12 (a) and (d). ) Can be displayed (e.g., the fruit patterns shown in FIGS. 10-12 (a) and (d)).
When displaying either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display in a pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. (Either the shutter image 31AK061 or the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 10A and 12D may be displayed such that the elements E1 to E5 are included).
According to such a configuration, the specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. Thereby, it is possible to accurately convey that the specific image is displayed.

  It should be noted that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of effect control process processing. FIG. 9 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like according to another characteristic portion. It is a rear view showing a pachinko gaming machine according to another characteristic portion. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the effect control command concerning other characteristic parts. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value used as the random number for games which concerns on another characteristic part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a variation pattern according to another characteristic portion. It is an explanatory view showing a display result judgment table concerning other characteristic parts. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hit type determination table concerning other characteristic parts. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit type which concerns on another characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table concerning other characteristic parts. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure showing the data holding area for game control concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure showing arrangement and display contents of a display monitor concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure showing the storage area which memorizes the number of prize balls concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure showing a memory map concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure showing the built-in RAM area concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure showing an example of control of a display in a display monitor concerning other characteristic parts. FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating an example of execution of buffer update according to another characteristic part. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main process according to another characteristic unit. It is a figure showing the display mode of the display monitor concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure showing the display mode of the display monitor concerning other characteristic parts. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a display monitor in a modification example according to another characteristic portion. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a display monitor in a modification example according to another characteristic portion. It is a rear perspective view showing a pachinko gaming machine in a modified example according to another characteristic portion. It is a rear surface perspective view showing the state where the frame for gaming machines in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part was opened. It is a figure showing a security cover in a modification concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure showing a security cover in a modification concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure showing an example of state control concerning other characteristic parts. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing concerning other characteristic parts. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of power supply concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure showing the priority of effect control concerning other characteristic parts. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the production control main processing in the modification concerning other characteristic parts. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting confirmation process in progress in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the output amount change switch concerning characteristic part 71AK. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating initial setting control related to a characteristic unit 71AK. It is a figure showing the example of execution of information concerning feature part 71AK. It is a figure showing the example of a display concerning feature part 71AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing concerning feature part 71AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the output switching process at the start which concerns on the characteristic part 71AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of an in-progress output change processing concerning feature part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the priority of the effect control in the modification concerning the characteristic part 71AK. It is a figure showing an example of execution of an initial operation concerning characteristic part 72AK. It is a figure showing a control pattern concerning characteristic part 72AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of command processing at the time of power supply concerning feature part 72AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of a power supply in the modification concerning the characteristic part 72AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of command processing at the time of power supply concerning characteristic part 73AK. It is a figure showing the example of a display of the setting confirmation information screen concerning feature part 73AK. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the production control pattern concerning feature part 74AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the production control main processing concerning feature part 74AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of confirmation effect control processing concerning feature part 74AK. It is a timing chart etc. which show the example of control of the confirmation effect concerning characteristic part 74AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of power supply concerning characteristic part 75AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the confirmation effect control process during a setting change concerning the characteristic part 75AK. It is a timing chart etc. which show the example of control of the confirmation effect concerning characteristic part 75AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern setting processing concerning characteristic part 87AK. It is a figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern concerning characteristic part 87AK. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the fluctuation pattern decision table concerning characteristic part 87AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process concerning the characteristic part 87AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of predetermined production execution setting processing concerning characteristic part 87AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the presence or absence of predetermined effect execution regarding the characteristic part 87AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the predetermined effect mode regarding the characteristic part 87AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the execution timing of the predetermined effect concerning the characteristic part 87AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production mode after the predetermined production | production regarding the characteristic part 87AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the execution mode of the description effect concerning the characteristic part 87AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the display character which concerns on the characteristic part 87AK. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation concerning feature part 87AK. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation concerning feature part 87AK. It is a figure for explaining a fluctuation pattern and a kind of reach. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of notice effect determination processing. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in a notice effect determination process. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a payout control board. It is a rear view showing a pachinko gaming machine. It is an explanatory view showing a display result judgment table. (A) is a simplified front view of the main board, and (B) is an explanatory view for explaining the display contents of the display monitor. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a partial configuration of a storage area in a RAM on a main board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a memory map of a CPU on a main board. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a RAM area corresponding to a storage area of a main board RAM. (A) is a time chart showing the display time of an item displayed on the display monitor, and (B-1) to (B-6) are explanatory diagrams for explaining changes in the display content of the display monitor. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating movement of data stored in a storage area of a ring buffer. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display mode of a display monitor in a setting change mode. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode of a display monitor in a setting confirmation mode. (1) is a diagram showing information displayed on the image display device when controlled in the setting change mode, and (2) shows information displayed on the image display device when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. FIG. (1) to (3) are explanatory diagrams showing an effect mode of a setting suggestion effect, and (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining an effect mode of a setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control signal output to a payout control board from a game control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control command transmitted / received between a game control board and a payout control board. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing signal lines and the like used for transmitting and receiving control signals and control commands. It is a sequence diagram showing transmission and reception of signals between the microcomputer for game control and the microcomputer for payout during normal operation. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing which CPU for payout control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process which CPU for payout control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the ball lending restriction method in this embodiment. It is a timing chart for explaining communication between a card unit and a pachinko gaming machine. It is a timing chart which shows the 1st ball lending restriction method. It is a timing chart which shows the 2nd ball lending restriction method. It is a timing chart which shows the 3rd ball lending restriction method. It is a timing chart which shows the 4th ball lending restriction method. FIG. 9 is a timing chart showing an example in which ball lending is not restricted during the setting change mode. It is a timing chart which shows the example which restarts payout after the end of a setting change mode. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example in which payout is forcibly terminated in accordance with a shift to a setting change mode. It is a timing chart which shows transmission and reception of the signal between the microcomputer for game control and the microcomputer for payout at the time of normal operation. It is a timing chart which shows transmission and reception of the signal between the microcomputer for game control and the microcomputer for payout control during the period when it is controlled to the setting change mode. It is a timing chart which shows transmission and reception of the signal between the microcomputer for game control and the microcomputer for payout control during the period when the game machine frame or the glass door frame is open. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power failure occurs before a set value is determined, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power failure occurs after a set value is determined. It is a figure showing a warning screen when a setting change operation is performed during a game. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of a signal output from each output terminal. FIG. 4 is a timing chart showing an output period of a security signal and a setting change correspondence signal. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between a set value and an output mode of a setting change correspondence signal. FIG. 6 is a timing chart showing an output mode and an output period of a setting change corresponding signal. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process. (1) A diagram showing a value displayed on the display monitor when the set value is not a regular value, and (2) a diagram showing a value displayed on the display monitor when the set value is a regular value. . It is a timing chart showing a method of restricting ball lending based on detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame. It is a timing chart which shows the method of restarting ball lending after completion of detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a method of resuming ball lending without shifting to the setting change mode after power-off. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a method of shifting to a setting change mode after power-off to forcibly end ball lending. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a method of shifting to a setting change mode after power-off and restarting ball lending. It is a timing chart showing a method of restricting award ball payout based on detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame. It is a timing chart which shows the method of restarting award ball payout after completion of the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame. It is a timing chart which shows the method of restarting award ball payout without shifting to the setting change mode after power-off. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a method of shifting to a setting change mode after power-off and forcibly terminating award ball payout. It is a timing diagram showing a method of shifting to the setting change mode after power-off and restarting the prize ball payout. FIG. 4 is a timing chart showing an output period of a security signal and a setting change correspondence signal. FIG. 4 is a timing chart showing an output period of a security signal and a setting change correspondence signal. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of hold | maintenance display and active display. It is a flowchart which shows a change effect determination process. (A) is an explanatory view showing a final display mode determination table for determining a first change effect, and (B) is an explanatory view showing a final display mode determination table for determining a second change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hold | maintenance change pattern in a 1st change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hold | maintenance change pattern in a 1st change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hold | maintenance change pattern in a 2nd change effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each effect in a 1st change effect and a 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode regarding the 1st change production and the 2nd change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode regarding the 1st change production and the 2nd change production. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each effect in the 1st change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode regarding the 1st change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode regarding the 1st change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the effect mode regarding a 1st change effect and a 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the effect mode regarding a 1st change effect and a 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the effect mode regarding a 1st change effect and a 2nd change effect. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a change pattern of an active display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the kind of change suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example regarding the production mode of the change suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example regarding the production mode of the change suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example regarding the production mode of the change suggestion production.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined hitting ball firing device and driven into the game area.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of a special symbol (also called a special figure) as a plurality of kinds of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B for performing are provided. These are each composed of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a numeral indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of a special symbol means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed so as to be variable (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the case of the change of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable display.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as “second special figure game”. In addition, the special symbol display device which performs the variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. On the image display device 5, various effect images are displayed.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern indicating a number or the like). Is variably displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down). (Scroll display of direction and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decoration symbol executed synchronously is also simply referred to as a variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. The hold display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays suspended is also referred to as the number of suspended storages. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved storage number. In addition, the sum of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2, there are provided a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs. Displays the first number of reserved storages, and the second reservation display 25B displays the second number of reserved storages based on the number of lighted LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning port that is always kept in a fixed open state by which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special figure game can be started.

  The variable prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting prize port that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning prize ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in an off state, so that the tip of the movable wing piece is Is in the closed state where the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port (also referred to as the second starting winning port being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning prize ball device 6B is in an open state in which a game ball can enter the second starting winning opening when the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 is on (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special figure game can be started. It should be noted that the variable winning ball device 6B only needs to change between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 which is always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door that is driven to be opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and a special winning opening as a specific area that is changed between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the off state, the special winning opening door closes the special winning opening, and the game ball becomes large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is on, the special winning opening door opens the large winning opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special winning opening. Become.

  When game balls enter the special winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10, for example.

  A game ball entering each winning port including the general winning port 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area), a normal symbol display 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays a normal symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The normal symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The normal design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal symbol is also called a normal symbol game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a pass gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the passing of the game ball through the passage gate 41, the general-purpose game is executed.

  Above the ordinary symbol display 20, there is provided an ordinary symbol holding display 25 </ b> C. The general-purpose reservation indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored general-purpose reservations, which is the number of general-purpose games for which execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

  On the surface of the game board 2, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails are provided. At the bottom of the game area, there is provided an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning ports.

  Loudspeakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 for a gaming effect is provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to fire a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball firing device is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball loaned by a predetermined ball rental machine is held so that it can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device (reservation). ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which a prize ball is paid out when the upper plate is full is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is provided. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detecting means for detecting the operation (operation or the like) of the player, but other detecting means may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
A game ball is fired toward a game area by a rotation operation by a player on a hit ball operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the ordinary symbol game using the ordinary symbol display device 20 is started. In the case where the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during a period during the execution of the previous general-purpose game or the like (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general-purpose game based on the passage). The general-purpose game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary symbol game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "a symbol per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol (regular symbol lost symbol) other than the symbol per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol is “regular symbol lost”. When "per day" is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period of time (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  Note that, when the game ball enters (wins) the starting winning opening during a period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during a period in which the game is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state, which will be described later. When the special figure game based on the start winning prize cannot be immediately executed), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, “7”, an actual symbol is different depending on the type of big hit described later) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, the big hit symbol is obtained. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, “2”) different from the above is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “−”) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “losing” is obtained.

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the state is controlled to the small hit game state.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes a timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and a timing of the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaching a predetermined number (for example, nine). It is continued until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which a special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times).

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big winning opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous to the player.

  Note that the "big hit" is set with a big hit type. For example, a plurality of types of opening modes of the special winning opening (the number of rounds and the upper limit period of opening) and a game state after the big hit game state (a normal state, a time saving state, a probable change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared. The type has been set. As the big hit type, a big hit type where many prize balls can be obtained or a big hit type where few or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

  In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hitting game state, the opening mode is the same as the big hitting game state in the case of some of the big hit types (the number of opening of the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same). Etc.) to open the big winning opening. In addition, similarly to the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the “small hit”.

  After the big hit game state is ended, the time may be controlled to a time saving state or a certain change state depending on the big hit type.

  In the time saving state, control (time saving control) for shortening the average special figure fluctuation time (the period during which the special figure is fluctuated) is performed as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average time of fluctuating fluctuating time (period of fluctuating fluctuating figure) is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of "per-figure hit" in the frug drawing game is improved than in the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that allow the game balls to easily enter the second start winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved, and is therefore an advantageous state for the player.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than that in the normal state is executed. The probable change state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because the change efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the state is likely to be a “big hit”.

  The time saving state and the probable change state continue until one of the end conditions such as the execution of the predetermined number of special figure games and the start of the next big hit game state is satisfied first. The condition that the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times is an end condition is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

  The normal state is a game state other than a special state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time-saving state, a probable change state, or the like. The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special map game will be a "big hit", is set in the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when a system reset is performed). This is a state in which the same control is performed as when the processing is not executed).

  The state in which the probable change control is being executed is also referred to as a high-probability state, and the state in which the probable change control is not being executed is referred to as a low-probability state. The state in which the time-saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time-saving control is not executed is called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the probable change state is a high-precision high-base state, and the normal state is also a low-probability low-base state. The high-accuracy low-base state is also referred to as a high-accuracy low-base state.

  After the small hitting game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the control is continued to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number cut, the game state is naturally changed). Note that the display result of the special figure game does not have to have “small hit”.

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area within a special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when a game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a positively changed state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed in accordance with the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. Note that the effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, a sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a game effect lamp 9 is provided. May be performed by turning on / off the light, operating the movable body 32, or the like.

  In the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 as the effect performed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At the timing when the display result (also called a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game or the second special figure game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative symbols) which is a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also stopped (derived).

  During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end thereof, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that has not been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 forms a part of a jackpot combination described below. Is continued.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a ratio (also referred to as a jackpot reliability or a jackpot expectation) in which a display result (a display result of a special figure game or a display result of a variable display of a decorative pattern) becomes a "big hit" according to the effect mode. A plurality of different reach effects are executed. The reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a fixed decoration pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbol (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of "probable change big hit" which is controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and after the big hit game state is ended, the probable change state is set. In the case of a non-probable variable jackpot (normal jackpot) that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as positive variation symbols, and the even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-positive variable symbols (normal symbols). After the non-probable design has reached the reach mode, a promotion effect that eventually becomes a “probable change” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “small hit”, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, “ 1 35 ”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols forming the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state) and when it is "small hit" , A common fixed decorative design may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not become the reach mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "non-reach loss"). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative symbol variable display mode becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination (“reach loss”) is displayed as the decorative symbol variable display result. ) May be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "reach loss").

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the above-mentioned variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effects include a notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display with execution suspended). As the prefetch notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Also, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display, one variable display is made to look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo continuous production may be executed.

  During the big hit game state, a big hit effect is performed to notify the big hit game state. As the large hit production, a production that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion production that indicates that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, a small hitting effect for notifying the small hitting game state is executed. The big hit game in the small hit game state and in some big hit types (a big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state) By performing a common effect in the state and the state, the player may not be able to know whether the current state is the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hitting game state and after the end of the big hitting game state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

  Further, for example, when a special map game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15 and the like as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of holding), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of holding), Game state, small hitting game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, , A random number circuit 104 and an input / output port (I / O) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns to be described later, effect control commands to be described later, data to be referred to when making various determinations to be described later, and various tables) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first reservation). An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second reservation display 25B, the general-purpose reservation display 25C, and the like (solenoid driving signal) is provided.

  The switch circuit 110 detects detection signals (game balls pass or exit) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start-up switch (first start-up switch 22A and second start-up switch 22B), count switch 23). (Such as a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the vehicle enters) and is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the passing or approach of the game ball has been detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a special winning opening door. Transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, the effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12 The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a big hit type)) and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), A game state (for example, start and end of variable display, opening state of a special winning opening, occurrence of a prize, number of storages held, game state), a command for specifying an error occurrence, and the like.

  The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game. (Including various types of notification such as driving of the movable body 32, notification of an error, and notification of restoration of a power failure).

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (this is a process for realizing the above functions of the effect control board 12, and Determination, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal appropriately indicating the operation content). In some cases, the control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 displays an effect image on the image display device 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output a sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal designating a lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

  The audio control board 13 has various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs a sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let it.

  The lamp control board 14 includes various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. I do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the turning on / off of the lamp.

  The sound output, control of turning on / off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or a lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.) are executed by the effect control CPU 120. You may do so.

  The random number circuit 124 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for inputting an effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11 or the like, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port.

  Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the voice control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of the main board 11)
First, main operations of the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, and the like), setting of making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in a work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a process of protecting data in the RAM 102, and the like are performed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (check sum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, various timer states, and the like), but also the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of stopping the power supply, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a restoration process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the recovery processing, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, when the power supply is stopped, the game state is restored, and if the special symbol is being changed, the special symbol change is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing recovery from the power interruption to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, the effect control command to specify the backed-up game state before the power interruption, or the effect control to specify the display result of the running special figure game if the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the time of restoration from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the restoration from the power interruption has been performed or that the restoration from the power interruption is being performed. Screen display to perform The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

  After transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12 after ending the restoration process or the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a register of a CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, a loop process is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process.

  Upon receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether a detection signal has been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, big hit information (information indicating the number of occurrences of big hits) and start information (start information) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the state has changed to a certain probability) are output (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random number used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). When the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process at each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special figure game, control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized. See below).

  Subsequent to the special symbol processing, the ordinary symbol processing is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process process every time the timer interrupts, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the general symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), Opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per day" is enabled. The execution of the ordinary symbol game is performed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary symbol reservation display 25C is turned on to display the ordinary symbol reservation number.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, a process when a power interruption occurs, a process for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed as a part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a command control process (Step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set to be transmitted to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process ends.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as a special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of the start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of stored holds is executed. When a winning start occurs, a random number value for determining a display result (including a big hit type) and a fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of storages to be held, transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for designating a determination result such as occurrence of a start winning prize, the number of storages to be held, and pre-reading determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of the winning start-up thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to

  After executing the start winning determination processing in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processing in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each of the special symbol process processes (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In the special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit", or the big hit type in the case of "big hit" Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (any of a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special figure game is set in accordance with the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1”, and the special special pattern normal processing ends. Note that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed prior to the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the order of winning the game balls into the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special figure game may be established in the order of the winning (also referred to as winning the order).

  When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting processing, any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is determined by using a random value for variation pattern determination based on a result of a predetermined determination as to whether the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. And the like are determined. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the variation pattern setting process ends.

  The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (the special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of variable display of the decorative symbol (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. Is designated (variable display pattern, etc.).

  The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “2”. The special symbol change processing includes a process for setting a special symbol to be changed in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to change. And the like. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol fluctuation reaches the special figure fluctuation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”, and the special symbol fluctuation processing ends.

  The special symbol stop processing in step S113 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop processing, the change of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). The processing for making the setting is included. If the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When the display result is “losing”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. If the display result is "small hit" or "losing", the game state is updated when the time reduction state or the probable change state is controlled and the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. The big hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process of starting a round in the big hit gaming state and setting a big winning opening to an open state based on the display result being “big hit”. Have been. When opening the special winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, in accordance with the type of the big hit, an opening upper limit period in which the special winning opening is opened and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pre-processing ends.

  The big hit opening processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The processing during the opening of the jackpot is based on a process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the jackpot, and on the basis of the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. For determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing such as stopping supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “6”, The processing during the opening of the big hit ends.

  The post-big hit release processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". The post-big hit opening process includes a process of determining whether or not the number of times of execution of the round for opening the big winning port has reached a set upper limit number of times, and a process of determining whether the number of times of execution of the round has reached the upper limit number of times. And the like for performing a setting for terminating the process. When the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. On the other hand, when the number of rounds has reached the upper limit number of executions, The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release processing ends.

  The big hit end processing in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The big hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an ending effect is performed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state, and a change in response to the end of the big hit game state. The processing includes various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the big hit end processing ends.

  The small hit release pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. The small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting the large winning opening to the open state in the small hitting game state based on the display result being “small hit”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit opening processing in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". The processing during opening of the small hits includes processing for measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the special winning opening and timing for returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes a process of determining whether or not the event has occurred. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing of ending the small hitting game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”, and the small hit opening processing ends.

  The small hit end processing in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is performed is performed. Here, when the small hitting game state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hitting gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operation of effect control board 12)
Next, main operations of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12 The register setting of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit) is performed. Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed, and the process stands by.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt inhibition. However, if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt inhibit state is used, an interrupt is generated. It is desirable to issue a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In the command reception interrupt processing, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interruption permission, and then ends the command reception interruption processing.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read out. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the effect control command that has been read out is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that it is possible to confirm which effect control command has been received and the content specified by the effect control command in the effect control process processing or the like. For example, it turns on a provided reception flag. When the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the CPU executes the effect control process process (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, a display operation of an effect image in a display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative luminous body such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED, and a movable body 32 The control for operating various effect devices, such as the driving operation of the camera, is performed. Further, with respect to the control content of the rendering operation using various rendering devices, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

  Following the effect control process in step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the processing executed in step S76 in FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process process illustrated in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing a look-ahead notice effect are performed based on a start control effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the number of held memories specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like designating the start of the variable display has been received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process ends.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In the variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the decorative design variable display (fixed decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach Whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are to be executed, the mode thereof, the execution start timing, and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a set of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. Thereafter, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, updates the value of the effect process flag to “2”, and ends the variable display start setting process. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The variable display effect processing in step S172 is processing executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5 by instructing the display control unit 123. Or to drive the movable body 32, to output a voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to output a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED by the output are performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating stop display of the fixed decorative symbol from the main board 11 is received. In response to, for example, the fixed decoration symbol which is the display result of the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

  The waiting process per special figure in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the waiting process per special figure, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to “6”. Update to ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the small hit effect process. Also, if the reception wait time of the command has elapsed without receiving a command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special map game is “losing”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the wait process per special figure ends.

  The small hit production process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is “4”. In the small hit effect production process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. . In addition, in the small hit effect production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating the end of the small hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit production process ends.

  The small hit end effect processing in step S175 is processing executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In the small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and performs various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set contents. Execute Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect process ends.

  The big hit production process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is “6”. In the big hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set contents. In the big hit middle rendering process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating termination of the big hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the rendering control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending rendering process. 7 ", and ends the big hit production process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In the ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and performs various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the set contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of the basic description)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description is a payout-type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a prize. An enclosed game machine may be used.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and the extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the sign indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player, If the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention is also applicable to slot machines equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.).

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium. It may be in a form of being distributed by being installed in a storage device included in the storage device. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, programs and data for implementing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  The game can be executed not only by installing a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the program may be directly executed using hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  In this specification, one of the expressions of comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, and “differentiate”) is that one of the ratios is “0%”. May be included. For example, it may include that one is a ratio of “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

(Explanation of the configuration related to other features)
Next, other features of the embodiment of the present invention will be described. This feature allows a control of an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state which is advantageous to the player based on the set value, and a configuration or a setting for enabling the set value to be changed based on a predetermined setting change operation. There is provided a configuration for enabling the user to confirm the set value by display. Then, a set value can be displayed by a configuration capable of displaying information on a game value such as a prize ball given based on a game medium such as a game ball entering a predetermined area.

  FIG. 8A is a configuration diagram illustrating various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion. The same components as those in the above embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals. For example, the output circuit 111 may have a configuration similar to that of the solenoid circuit 111. The first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B only need to have the same configuration as the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B. The effect display device 5 only needs to have a configuration similar to that of the image display device 5. The case where the display result is “outside” (hiragana) is the same as the case where the display result is “losing” (katakana). The first general winning opening switch 26A, the second general winning opening switch 26B, the third general winning opening switch 26C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 26D are game balls that have passed (entered) any one of the plurality of general winning openings 10. Is detected, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection.

  The effect control board 12 is connected to operation motors AK011 to AK014 for driving a movable member serving as a movable role (movable effect device) and origin sensors AK021 to AK024 for detecting the origin position of the movable member. . The operation motors AK011 to AK014 may be motors or motors using an electromagnetic solenoid. The origin sensors AK021 to AK024 may be configured using a contact-type sensor such as a microswitch or a non-contact-type sensor such as a photosensor or a capacitance sensor. The effect control board 12 is provided with a real-time clock (RTC) 126 capable of outputting time information.

  In this embodiment, when controlled to the small hitting game state, a second special winning opening provided separately from the first special winning opening, which is a special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, An open state is established in a predetermined open mode. For example, in the small hitting game state, the second large winning opening is opened in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls is generated. State. In the present embodiment, the second big winning opening is set to be opened once until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses in the small hitting game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be opened a plurality of times in the small hitting game state. The second special winning opening is opened by the second special winning opening door when the solenoid 83 for the second special winning opening door is on, and the game ball passes (enters) the second special winning opening. It will be easier. On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 for the second special winning opening door is in the off state, the second special winning opening is closed by the second special winning opening door, and the game ball passes through the second special winning opening ( Entry). As described above, the second large winning opening changes between an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), which is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter), which is disadvantageous for the player. In addition, in place of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) the second big winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state where the game ball is hard to pass (enter) the second big winning port is provided. You may.

  The count switch 23 is a first count switch that detects a game ball that has passed (entered) the first big winning opening. Game balls passing through (entering) the second special winning opening pass through a second count switch installed in the second special winning opening, and are detected by the second count switch. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second count switch, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Thus, when the game ball passes through (enters) the second large winning opening that has been opened, the game ball passes (enters) another normal winning opening, for example, the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. ), More prize balls will be paid out. Therefore, when the second special winning opening is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second special winning opening, and the first state is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the second special winning opening is closed, it becomes impossible or difficult to pass (enter) a game ball to the second special winning opening to obtain a prize ball, which is disadvantageous for the player. There are two states.

  A third count switch and a fourth count switch through which a game ball can pass are installed inside the second big winning opening. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second special winning opening passes through either the third count switch or the fourth count switch, and is guided to the back side of the game board 2. The game ball is detected by the third count switch by passing through the third count switch. The game ball is detected by the fourth count switch by passing through the fourth count switch.

  In the present embodiment, the game state after the end of the small hit game is controlled to the big hit game state based on the detection of the game ball by the third count switch during the small hit game. Therefore, during the period in which the second big winning opening door is opened during the small hit game, if the course of the game ball is changed by adding vibration or the like and the game ball is detected by the third count switch, Since it becomes possible for the player to be controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment stops the game in such a case.

  A regulating member that regulates and allows the flow of the game ball toward the third count switch is provided inside the second winning hole. The restricting member is provided so as to be changeable between a restricting state in which the flowing of the game ball toward the third count switch is restricted and an allowable state in which the flowing of the game ball toward the third count switch is permitted. Have been.

  In the small hitting game state, when a game ball that has won the second big winning port passes through the third count switch, a "big hit" based on the passing of the game ball through the third count switch (V winning big hit). That is, the CPU 103 controls the game state to the big hit game state based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the third count switch. On the other hand, if the game ball that has won the second big winning opening in the small hitting game state passes through the fourth count switch, the "big hit" does not occur. That is, the CPU 103 does not control the gaming state to the big hit gaming state based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the fourth count switch.

  Then, when the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state based on the passage of the third count switch, the second big winning opening door is set to a predetermined period (e.g., 29 seconds) or a predetermined number (e.g., 29 seconds). During the period until the winning balls (for example, 10) are generated, the second winning port is opened. As a result, a round game in which the second large winning opening is set to the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player is executed. In the present embodiment, the second big winning opening is controlled to the first state when the state is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the passage of the third count switch. The present invention is not limited thereto, and the first special winning opening may be controlled to the first state.

  The round game, which is the opening cycle of the second special winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “15” or “5”). Even before the number of round game executions reaches the upper limit number, the round game may be terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball does not win the second big winning opening). Good.

  FIG. 8B is a rear view showing the main board 11, the effect control board 12, the power supply board 17, and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 while being housed in the board case 201. The main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 29 that can be viewed from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and has a function of displaying various kinds of winning information related to winning on the display monitor 29. A display switch 30 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 29, and the information displayed on the display monitor 29 can be switched by operating the display switch 30.

  The main board 11 has a door opening sensor 90 for detecting the opening of a glass door frame which covers the front surface of the game board 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a large winning opening for detecting the opening of the first and second large winning openings. Various sensors such as a door sensor 91 are connected, and a function of determining occurrence of various abnormalities (errors) based on detection signals output from these sensors is also provided. A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 of the main board 11 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  The main substrate 11 is sealed in a substrate case 201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material. A display monitor 29 (for example, 7 segments) is disposed in the center of the main substrate 11, and a right side of the display monitor 29 is provided. A display changeover switch 30 is provided. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged at the front when the main board 11 is viewed. Since the main board 11 is not visible when the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front face when viewing the main board 11 means the back side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened. This is the front when viewing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is provided with each winning opening (a first winning opening, a second winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a general winning opening, hereinafter referred to as “entrance area”). ) Is counted, and various kinds of winning information, such as the ratio and the winning ratio, are displayed on the display monitor 29 based on the counting, and the winning information is displayed. Thereby, various winning information such as the connection ratio and the winning combination after the installation in the game hall can be confirmed. On the maker side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual that the game board surface is designed so that the game ball enters the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency (to pass the test). When the test is performed, it is confirmed (verified) whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, whether or not the adjustment has been performed, what kind of adjustment has been performed, and as a result of the adjustment, the gaming ball enters the general winning opening at the frequency as designed. Is checked (verified). Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize the presence or absence of the adjustment after installation and the contents.

  The power supply board 17 is configured to be able to supply power from an AC power supply (AC 100 V), which is an external power supply (commercial power supply), to electric components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the production control board 12. ing. The power supply board 17 is sealed in a board case 202 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and a lock switch 51 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state is provided on the upper right side of the rear surface of the power supply board 17. A setting changeover switch 52 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value such as a jackpot winning probability (a payout rate) in the change state is provided. The power supply board 17 is provided with a clear switch AK001 and a power switch AK002.

  The lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the person in possession can operate. Further, since the lock switch 51 requires key operation, only the staff having the key for operating the lock switch 51 can be operated among the staff at the game arcade. The lock switch 51 is a switch that can execute an ON / OFF switching operation using a predetermined key, and is also a switch that can execute an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pressing operation).

  When a power-on operation using the power switch AK002 is performed, a predetermined operation using the lock switch 51 or the clear switch AK001, such as an on / off switching operation of the lock switch 51 and a pressing operation of the clear switch AK001, is performed. May be asked. The lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 may perform a predetermined operation using these switches simultaneously with the power-on operation using the power switch AK002. Therefore, at least the lock switch 51, the clear switch AK001, and the power switch AK002 only need to be arranged at positions where they can be operated simultaneously by a staff at a game arcade or the like. As described above, the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 can detect various operations such as on / off switching operation and pressing operation by game room attendants or the like in accordance with the power-on operation using the power switch AK002. Is configured.

  At the lower part on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, there is provided a nozzle (discharge port) for discharging the gaming ball that has won each winning port or the gaming ball that has entered the out port to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is provided with an outlet switch 70 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a shot game ball). The signal from the outlet switch 70 is taken into the switch circuit 110 of the main board 11.

  FIG. 8C is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the content of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration. The first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". This command form is an example, and another command form may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  The command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating a variation start in the special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating a variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the effect display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content of the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for specifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or an effect symbol. In the variable display result notification command, when the variable display result is a "losing", "big hit", or "small hit" determination result (predetermined result) or when the variable display result is "big hit" Different EXT data is set according to the result of determining which of the large hit types is one of the multiple types (big hit type determination result).

  The variable display result notification command includes, for example, commands 8C00H to 8C05H. The command 8C00H is a first variable display result designating command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “out”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit A”. The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit B”.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the stop (decision) of the decoration symbol in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the effect display device 5. The command 9000H is a RAM clear notification command for notifying that the contents stored in the RAM 102 have been cleared with the initialization of the game control microcomputer 100 when the power supply is started by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is. The command 9100H is a setting change start command for designating the start of a setting change state in which a set value can be changed when power supply is started by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The command 9200H is a power outage restoration designation command for designating execution of a power outage restoration process corresponding to power outage restoration. The command 93XXH is a setting change end command for designating the end of the setting change state.

  In the setting change end command, for example, EXT data corresponding to a setting value newly set by the change may be set. In this case, different EXT data is set according to the set value newly set by the change in the setting change state or the set value continuously set without being changed. When the setting value has three stages of 1 to 3, the command 9300H specifies that the setting value is set to “1”, and the command 9301H specifies that the setting value is set to “2”. However, the command 9302H may specify that the setting value is set to “3”. Alternatively, as the setting change end command, only the command 9300H whose EXT data is 00H is prepared, and the end of the setting change state may be designated by the command 9300H regardless of the setting value newly set by the change. Alternatively, as an effect control command different from the setting change end command, a setting value designation command for designating a setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be provided. In addition to the case where the setting value designation command is transmitted along with the transmission of the setting change end command, for example, with the transmission of the first fluctuation start command or the second fluctuation start command, the setting value designation command corresponds to the start of fluctuation in each time of the special figure game. May be transmitted. Also, for example, a set value designation command may be transmitted as the predetermined number of times of the fluctuation display is executed, such as every ten times of the fluctuation start in the special figure game. Alternatively or additionally, the set value designation command may be transmitted with the transmission of the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command. The setting value designation command may be transmitted along with the transmission of the customer waiting demonstration designation command.

  The command 9400H is a setting check start command for designating the start of a setting check state in which a set value can be checked when power supply is started by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The command 9401H is a setting confirmation end command for designating the end of the setting confirmation state. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, a command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time reduction control is not performed, and a command 9501H is a game state (high base state) in which time reduction control is performed. , A time-saving state).

  The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command for specifying the occurrence of an error (abnormal) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the generated error (abnormal). In the error (abnormal) designation command, for example, the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormal) is set, thereby specifying which error (abnormal) has been determined to be generated on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by an error notification process. The command 9F00H is a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating the display of a customer waiting demonstration screen (demo screen display) by displaying an effect image corresponding to the stoppage of the game in the customer waiting state.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fan fare command”) for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening designation command for designating a period in which the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a command after the opening of the special winning opening that specifies a period in which the special winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type decision result by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during opening of the special winning opening or the notification command after opening of the special winning opening, different EXT data is set in accordance with the number of rounds executed in the big hit game state or the small hit game state (for example, “1” to “15”). Is done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the ordinary winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display 4A is satisfied. The command B200H indicates that a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. This is a second starting opening winning designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display 4B is established.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number. The first reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning port and the first starting condition is satisfied. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the second starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning port and the second starting condition is satisfied. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command are used when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved storages decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of the execution.

  Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) of the total reserved storage number may be used.

  The command D100H is a V prize notification designation command for notifying that the third count switch has been turned on when the game ball has passed the third count switch, that is, that a V prize has been won. In the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform a control for executing a V-prize notification effect for notifying that a V-prize has been won based on the reception of the V-prize notification designation command. In the V-prize information presentation effect, a different effect pattern may be determined or the determination ratio of a plurality of effect patterns may be made different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As described above, the setting value may be suggested according to the presentation mode of the V-prize information presentation effect. For example, when the effect image indicating "V" is rotated and displayed, the effect mode of the V winning information effect includes an effect mode in which the rotation direction is clockwise and an effect mode in which the rotation direction is counterclockwise. May be. Alternatively, a plurality of effect modes in which the display color of the effect image indicating “V” is different may be included. Then, a setting value designation command may be transmitted along with the transmission of the V winning notification designation command. Thus, when the V-prize notification effect is performed, the effect mode according to the set value can be appropriately determined.

  FIG. 8D is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value serving as a game random number counted on the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, on the main substrate 11 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the random number value MR3 for determining the general figure display result. Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of the MR4 is controlled to be countable. Note that other random numbers may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by the CPU 103 by software update using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, an example is shown in which each of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of each of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 is May be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 8-5 shows a fluctuation pattern in the present embodiment. Hereinafter, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach loss is also referred to as a non-reach fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern of the reach loss is also referred to as a reach fluctuation pattern. Further, the variation pattern in which the display result is “big hit” is also referred to as a large hit variation pattern, and the variation pattern in which the display result is “small hit” is also referred to as a small hit variation pattern.

  The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach like normal reach α, normal reach β,. A variation pattern may be provided. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ, in addition to super reach α and super reach β, may be provided.

  In the ROM 101, for example, a display result determination table (set value 1), a display result determination table (set value 2), a display result determination table (set value 3), a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), a big hit type determination A table (for the second special symbol), a small hit type determination table, and the like are stored.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured such that the winning probability (winning rate) of a big hit and a small hit changes according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) corresponding to the set value, the winning probability (winning rate) of the big hit and the small hit is changed. The set value has three stages of 1 to 3, 1 is the highest payout rate, and the payout rate decreases as the value increases in the order of 1, 2, and 3. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2, 3, the advantage gradually decreases.

  FIG. 8-6 is an explanatory diagram of the display result determination table. In the display result determination table, a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the display result determination table, the variable special figure designating buffer is 1 (first), that is, the variable special figure designating buffer is 2 (second), and the variable special figure designating buffer is 2 (second). For each of the cases where the second special symbol is subjected to the variable display, a determination value for a large hit and a determination value for a small hit are set.

  FIG. 8A illustrates a display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1. When the display variable determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, if the variable special figure designating buffer is the first, that is, if the first special symbol is to be subjected to the variable display, the set value is “ It is determined that a big hit is won with a higher probability (1/99) than the case of “2” and “3”, and that a part of these judgment values is set as a judgment value corresponding to a small hit. The small hit is won with a higher probability (1/50) than when the value is “2” or “3”. When the display variable determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, if the variable special figure specification buffer is the second, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is the same as the case where the variable special figure specification buffer is the first. Is determined, and even when the second special symbol is subjected to the variable display, the big hit is obtained with the same probability (1/99) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. And half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, so that the probability (100/200) is higher than when the first special symbol is a target of variable display. ) To win a small hit.

  FIG. 8B illustrates a display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2. When using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the jackpot is hit with a lower probability (1/150) than when the setting value is “1”. At the same time as winning, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hits, so that the small hits have a lower probability (1/99) than when the set value is “1”. You are going to win. When the display variable determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 is used, if the variable special figure specification buffer is the second, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is the same as the case where the variable special figure specification buffer is the first. Is determined, and when the second special symbol is subjected to the variable display, the big hit is obtained with the same probability (1/150) as when the first special symbol is the variable display. And half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, so that the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display, and , A small hit is won with the same probability (100/200) as when the set value is “1”.

  FIG. 8C illustrates a display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3. When using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 and the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is set, but the determination value corresponding to the small hit is When the first special symbol is set as a variable display target, the jackpot has a lower probability (1/200) than the case where the set value is “1” or “2”. Wins, but does not win small hits (win probability: 0). When using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is the same as the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the first. Is set, and even when the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, the big hit with the same probability (1/200) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. And half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, so that the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display, and , The small value is won with the same probability (100/200) as when the set value is “1” or “2”.

  The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any one of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the special symbol has a big hit (big hit A to big hit). Jackpot C). If MR1 matches any one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is set to the small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit and the probability (ratio) of a small hit. To determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state, but to stop the symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is a big hit symbol It is also to decide whether or not to do. Determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hitting game state. However, the stop in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is determined. That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol is a small hit symbol. As described above, since the probability of being controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state is different depending on the set value, if the set value is changed, one setting is set in a plurality of settings having different degrees of advantage for the player. Will be changed to another setting.

  In the present embodiment, in each of the display result determination tables, the winning probability of small hits when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second is assumed to be the same, but the small hits are set in the order of the setting values 1, 2, and 3. The winning probability may be reduced. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the winning probability of the small hit is reduced in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3, but the same as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second. Alternatively, the same winning probability may be used for all set values.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination table to determine whether to make a big hit or a small hit. However, the big hit determination table and the small hit determination table are provided separately, and the big hit is determined. The determination is made using a common table in the case of the variation display of the first special symbol and the case of the variation display of the second special symbol regardless of the variation special figure designation buffer. The processing may be performed using separate tables for the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first and the case where the variation special figure is the second.

  In the present embodiment, when the display variable determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the determination value other than the determination value corresponding to the big hit is determined as the determination value corresponding to the small hit. It was not set, that is, the small hit was not won, but a part of the judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit was set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, and the small hit was won. It may be. That is, the fact that the ratio of the small hit probability differs depending on the set value includes that the small hit probability is 0%.

  In the present embodiment, a total of three setting values 1 to 3 are provided as settable values for the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 May be set to two or four or more (for example, six). In addition, the advantage of the player according to the set value is not limited to the one in which the smaller the set value is, the higher the advantage is for the player, and the larger the set value is, the higher the advantage for the player is. Is also good. For example, in the case where the set value is made up of six stages from 1 to 6, 1 is the lowest payout rate, and the payout rate increases as the value increases in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, and 6 The highest payout rate may be used. As described above, as the set value is set to 1, the advantage is lowest for the player, and when 6 is set, the advantage is highest for the player. The advantage may be gradually increased.

  FIG. 8-7 is an explanatory diagram of the big hit type determination table and the small hit type determination table. The big hit type determination table indicates that the big hit type is one of the big hit A to the big hit C based on the hit type determining random number (MR2) when the change display result is determined to be a big hit symbol. Is referred to to determine. The small hit type determination table indicates that the type of the small hit is the small hit A or the small hit B based on the random number (MR2) for the hit type determination when the variation display result is determined to be the small hit symbol. Is referred to to determine. In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the third count switch during the small hit game of the small hit A, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type of the big hit D is executed. Has become. When the game ball passes through the third count switch during the small hit game of the small hit B, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type of the big hit E is executed. . The big hit D and the big hit E are not the big hit type determined by the random number value MR2 for hit type determination extracted at the time of the start winning, and the game ball is not played during the small hit game of the small hit A or the small hit B. This is a type of jackpot determined by whether or not a three-count switch has been passed.

  FIG. 8A shows a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol). The big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) uses the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening (that is, when the first special symbol is changed and displayed) to determine the big hit type. Referenced when making a decision.

  FIG. 8-7 (B) shows a big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol). The big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) uses the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed) to determine the big hit type. Referenced when making a decision.

  FIG. 8C shows a small hit type determination table. The small hit type determination table is referred to when the small hit type is determined regardless of which of the first winning prize port and the second starting prize port the game ball is in the pending memory. .

  FIG. 8-8 is an explanatory diagram showing the jackpot types in the present embodiment. In this embodiment, the big hit types are big hit A and big hit D in which the time saving control is not executed after the big hit gaming state ends, and big hit B, big hit C and big hit E in which the time saving control is executed after the big hit gaming state ends. Is set. Of these jackpots A to E, jackpot C and jackpot E are regarded as the most advantageous jackpots for the player, and jackpot A and jackpot D are regarded as the most disadvantageous jackpots for the player. In addition, since the big hit E is a big hit which is more advantageous than the big hit D, the small hit B is a smaller hit which is more advantageous than the small hit A.

  Among the big hits A to E, the big hit A is a big hit that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) for changing the first big win into the second state advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the big hitting game state of the big hit A, the time-saving control is not executed. The big hit B is a big hit that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) for changing the first big winning opening to the second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the big hit game state of the big hit B is completed, the time-saving control is executed until the big hit occurs again until the 20 special figure games are executed or the 20 special figure games are executed. The big hit C is a big hit that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) for changing the first big winning opening to the second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the big hit game state of the big hit C is completed, the time-saving control is executed until a big hit occurs again until 100 special figure games are executed or 100 special figure games are executed. The big hit D is a big hit that is repeatedly executed four times (so-called four rounds) to change the second big winning opening to the second state advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit D, the time-saving control is not executed. The big hit E is a big hit that is repeatedly executed 14 times (so-called 14 rounds) for changing the second big winning opening to the second state advantageous to the player. Further, after the big hit game state of the big hit E ends, the time-saving control is executed until a big hit occurs again until 100 special figure games are executed or 100 special figure games are executed.

  The jackpot D and the jackpot E have the second jackpot as the opening jackpot to be opened. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpots to be opened for the jackpot D and the jackpot E are as follows. , The first big winning opening. In other words, for the small hit game, the second big winning opening is opened, and for the big hit D and the big hit E based on the occurrence of the V winning during the small hitting game, the big hit game is replaced with the first big winning opening as the big hit game. You only have to open the big winning opening.

  In the time-saving state, the probability of being "hit the ordinary figure" is increased, so that a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. For this reason, in the time saving state, a big hit may occur as a result of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, or a big hit may occur due to the V winning during the small hit game. It is likely to occur continuously without going through the state, and it becomes a so-called continuous state.

  In the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit B, the number of special figure games for which the time saving control is executed is set to 20, so that a small hit occurs during the 20 special figure games and the game ball The rate of passing through the 3-count switch (the rate at which a gaming ball wins a V during 20 special figure games and a big hit occurs) is set to about 50%. On the other hand, in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit C and the big hit E, the number of special figure games in which the time saving control is executed is set to 100, so that a small hit occurs during the 100 special figure games. The rate at which game balls pass through the third count switch (the rate at which a game ball wins a V during 100 special figure games and a big hit occurs) is set to approximately 100%.

  In the present embodiment, five types of big hits A to E are provided as big hit types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and six or more big hit types may be provided. The following types may be provided.

  In the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is “1”, from 0 to 299 of the determination value range of MR2, 0 to 49 are assigned to big hit A, and 50 To 149 are assigned to big hit B, and 150 to 299 are assigned to big hit C. When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 249 are assigned to the big hit B, 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Also, when the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 149 is assigned to the big hit A, and 150 to 249 is assigned to the big hit B, 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. As described above, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit B or the big hit C at which the time-saving control is executed at the end of the big hit game decreases in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. I am trying to become.

  In the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is “1”, 0 to 29 out of the range of the determination value of MR2 from 0 to 299 are assigned to the big hit A, and 30 Up to 99 are assigned to the big hit B, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “2”, in the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2, 0 to 69 is assigned to the big hit A, and 70 to 269 is assigned to the big hit B, 270 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. Also, when the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range of MR2 0 to 299, 0 to 199 are assigned to the big hit A, and 200 to 269 are assigned to the big hit B, 270 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. As described above, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, the rate of determining the big hits B and C at which the time saving control is executed at the end of the big hit game is determined in the special figure game of the first special symbol. Is higher than in the case of occurrence of, and lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3.

  In the present embodiment, when the set value is 1, the rate of determining the jackpot type to be the big hit C is the highest, then the rate of determining the big hit B is high, and the rate of determining the big hit A is large. The lowest (big hit type determination ratio at set value 1: big hit C> big hit B> big hit A). If the set value is 2, the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot B with the highest determination ratio, then the jackpot A is determined to be higher, and the jackpot C is determined to be the lowest (set value). Jackpot type determination ratio in 2: jackpot B> jackpot A> jackpot C). Further, when the set value is 3, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the jackpot A is the highest, then the ratio of the jackpot B is high, and the ratio of the jackpot C is the lowest. (Small jackpot type determination ratio at set value 3: big jackpot A> big jackpot B> big jackpot C).

  It should be noted that, depending on the set value, there may be one or more jackpot types that have not been determined among the jackpot A, the jackpot B, and the jackpot C. In other words, the difference in the jackpot type determination ratio depending on the set value that has been set means that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%) or that the specific jackpot type is 100%. Deciding on a percentage is included.

  In the small hit type determination table, when the set value is “1”, in the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the small hit A, and 100 to 299 are small. It is assigned to hit B. When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 149 are assigned to the small hit B, and 150 to 299 are assigned to the small hit B. I have. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 199 are assigned to the small hits A and 200 to 299 are assigned to the small hits B in the range of the determination values of MR2 0 to 299. I have. In this way, when the V winning big hit occurs during the small hit game, the rate of determining the big hit E in which the number of special figure games in which the time saving control is executed after the big hit game is 100 is 20 times. It is higher than the ratio for determining the big hit D, and lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3.

  In the present embodiment, when the set value is 1, the small hit B is determined at a higher ratio than the small hit A as the small hit type, so that the V prize occurs during the small hit game. Therefore, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot E is higher than the rate at which the jackpot is determined to be the jackpot D (the jackpot type determination rate due to the V prize at the set value 1: the jackpot E> the jackpot D). When the set value is 2, the small hits A and the small hits B are determined at the same ratio as the small hit types, so that the V prize occurs during the small hit game. The rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot D is equal to the rate determined to be the jackpot E based on the above (the jackpot type determination rate due to the V prize at the set value 2: the jackpot E = the jackpot D). Further, when the set value is 3, the small hit A is determined as a small hit type at a higher ratio than the small hit B, so that the V prize is generated during the small hit game. Thus, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot D is higher than the rate at which the jackpot is determined to be the jackpot E (the jackpot type determination rate by the V prize at the set value 1: the jackpot D> the jackpot E).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a big hit and the determination ratio of the big hit type when the V prize occurs differ according to the set value. In other words, the type of the small hitting game state controlled according to the set value changes, and the type of the big hitting game state controlled when the V winning occurs may change. It has become possible to improve entertainment interests.

  Depending on the set value, there may be a small hit type that is not determined among the small hits A and the small hits B. In other words, the fact that the determination ratio of the small hit type differs depending on the set value that is set means that one of the small hit types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%), that is, the other small hit type is determined. The determination of the type at a rate of 100% is also included. Further, the determination ratio of the small hit type may be different depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. When the small hit type is determined at a different rate according to the variation special map, there may be a small hit type that is not determined among the small hit A and the small hit B depending on the variation special map. That is, in order to determine the small hit type at a different ratio according to the variation special figure, one of the small hit types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%), that is, the other small hit type is determined. This includes determining at a rate of 100%. At least one of the big hit type and the small hit type may be determined by using the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. The larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be, the more advantageous the player is. The determination rate of the big hit type or the small hit type is not limited to one different according to the set value, and the big hit type or the small hit type may be determined by the same determination ratio for all the set values.

  The gaming ability itself is not limited to the one that does not change regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the gaming ability may be changed according to the setting value that is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is a gaming property (a so-called probability variation loop type) in which the probability variation loops at a rate of 65%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the big hit probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the big hit game ends based on the fact that the gaming ball passes through the third count switch during the big hit game. While the later gaming state is controlled to be a positive change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a gaming property (so-called V-variable type) in which the ratio of the game balls passing through the third count switch during the big hit game varies according to the fluctuation special map. When the set value set to is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game ball passes through the third count switch during the high base (during the time saving control). Or as a game of controlling the jackpot gaming state (so-called one two-kind mixed type) based on the. Furthermore, although the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same as that of 1-3, the big hit probability and the small hit probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1-3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4). When changing the playability in accordance with the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 or 4, the third count switch is used as an effect switch (a switch for executing a predetermined effect every time the game ball passes through the third count switch), When the set value is 2 or 3, the third count switch is used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a positive change state or a big hit game state based on a game ball passing through the third count switch). May be used.

  The ROM 101 stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. The variation pattern determination table is used to determine one of a plurality of types of variation patterns in accordance with the result of the pre-determination. As the variation pattern determination table, a variation pattern determination table for a big hit, which is used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “big hit”, and a variation pattern result of “small hit” is determined in advance. A change pattern determination table for big hits to be used when a change is made, and a change pattern determination table for a loss to be used when it is determined in advance that the change display result is to be “miss” are prepared in advance.

  FIG. 8-9 is an explanatory diagram of a large hit variation pattern determination table and a small hit variation pattern determination table. The big hit variation pattern determination table is referred to when a variation display result is determined to be a big hit symbol to determine a variation pattern based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination. The small hit variation pattern determination table is referred to when a variation display result is determined to be a small hit symbol to determine a variation pattern based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination.

  FIG. 8A shows a jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A). The big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A) is referred to when the big hit type is big hit A. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for the jackpot A), when the set value is “1”, from 0 to 997 of the determination value range of MR3, the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot is 0 to 300. ), 301 to 800 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 801 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. ing. When the set value is “2”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 351 to 825 are The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is allocated, and the fluctuation pattern of 826 to 997 is allocated to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the range of the determination value of MR3 0 to 997, 0 to 400 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 401 to 850 is The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is assigned, and 851 to 997 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3).

  FIG. 8-9 (B) shows a change pattern determination table for big hits (for big hits B and big hits C). The jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C) is referred to when the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for the jackpot B and the jackpot C), when the set value is “1”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot is 0 to 100 in the range of 0 to 997. PB1-1), 101 to 350 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 351 to 997 are the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. Assigned to. When the set value is “2”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 150 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 151 to 450 The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. Further, when the set value is “3”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 201 to 550 are assigned. The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit.

  The fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit A) and the fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit B and big hit C) have a normal reach big hit fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) and a super reach α big hit fluctuation pattern (PB1- 2) A predetermined random number in the range of the random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern is assigned as a determination value to each of the fluctuation patterns of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the big hit A is won in the special map game, the rate of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is higher than the rate of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit, In addition, the setting values become lower in the order of 1, 2, and 3. In addition, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special map game, the ratio of determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot determines the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the superreach α jackpot. The ratio is higher than the ratio and is lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. In this embodiment, when the type of the big hit is “big hit B” or “big hit C”, the super reach β is easily determined, and when the big hit type is “big hit A”, the super reach α is determined. The determination value is assigned so as to facilitate the game, and when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player's expectation that the big hit B or the big hit C will be increased. I can do it.

  FIG. 8C illustrates a small hit variation pattern determination table. In the small hit variation pattern determination table, even if the set value is any one of “1”, “2”, and “3”, 0 to 997 of the MR3 determination value range 0 to 997 are small hits. (PC1-1). In the variation pattern determination table for small hits, a predetermined random number in the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Have been. In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as small hit variation patterns. With the setting values “1”, “2”, and “3”, the small hit variation pattern may be determined at a different rate from the plurality of variation patterns.

  FIG. 8-10 is an explanatory diagram of the variation pattern determination table for outliers. The outlier variation pattern determination table is referred to when the variation display symbol is determined to be the outlier symbol, in order to determine the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination.

  FIG. 8-10 (A) shows a variation pattern determination table A for outliers. The outlier variation pattern determination table A is referred to when the number of pending storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the time saving control is not performed in the gaming state. In the deviation fluctuation pattern determination table A, the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), the normal reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation deviation pattern (PA2-2), and the super reach A predetermined random number value within the range that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take for the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the reach β deviation is assigned as a judgment value.

  FIG. 8-10 (B) shows a variation pattern determination table B for outliers. The outlier variation pattern determination table B is referred to when the total number of suspended storages is 2 to 4 in the low base state. In the outlier variation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach outlier variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super-reach α corresponding to the total number of pending storages of 2 to 4 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern can take to the variation pattern of the loss (PA2-2) and the super reach β variation pattern of the loss (PA2-3). I have.

  FIG. 8-10 (C) shows a variation pattern determination table C for outliers. The outlier variation pattern determination table C is referred to when the total number of pending storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. In the outlier variation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach outlier variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α corresponding to the total number of pending storages of 5 to 8 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern can take to the variation pattern of the loss (PA2-2) and the super reach β variation pattern of the loss (PA2-3). I have.

  FIG. 8-10 (D) shows a variation pattern determination table D for a loss. The loss variation pattern determination table D is referred to when the gaming state is the high base state in which the time saving control is performed. In the deviation fluctuation pattern determination table D, the shortened non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation deviation pattern (PA2) corresponding to the shortened time control. -2) A predetermined random number in the range of the random pattern value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned as the determination value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β deviation.

  When using the variation pattern determination tables A to D for outliers, the rate of determining the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is higher than that of determining the super-reach variation pattern, and lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. It is becoming. In addition, when using the variation pattern determination tables A to D for outliers, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 out of the determination values is a superreach α deviation variation pattern, and the evaluation values of 901 to 997 are superreach β deviations regardless of the variation pattern determination tables. When the fluctuation display result is not assigned to each fluctuation pattern, that is, the super reach fluctuation pattern is determined by the common determination ratio regardless of the set value, so the super reach fluctuation pattern It is possible to prevent the effect from being reduced due to the fact that the variable display is not executed.

  Note that the “common determination ratio” refers to not only a case where the determination ratio is completely the same at different set values (this embodiment), but also a case where the determination ratio is the same at different set values (for example, the set value 1 to 3 where the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach differs by about 1%). If the fluctuation display result is incorrect, it is not limited to the form in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value, and if the fluctuation display result is incorrect, Regardless of the set value, non-reach, normal reach, and super-reach may have the same determination ratio for all fluctuation patterns. They may be the same. If the fluctuation display result is out-of-position, regardless of the set value, the setting ratio of both the super-reach α out-of-shift fluctuation pattern determination ratio and the super-reach β out-of-shift fluctuation pattern determination ratio is set. However, the present invention is not limited to the same form, and when the fluctuation display result is incorrect, only one of the super-reach α deviation fluctuation pattern determination ratio and the super reach β deviation fluctuation pattern determination ratio is determined. May be the same regardless of the set value. If the fluctuation display result is out-of-position, regardless of the set value, the setting ratio of both the super-reach α out-of-shift fluctuation pattern determination ratio and the super-reach β out-of-shift fluctuation pattern determination ratio is set. It is not limited to the same form regardless of the setting. Even if the fluctuation display result is a big hit, the set value at which the fluctuation pattern determination ratio of the super reach big hit is set regardless of the set value. Irrespective of. When the fluctuation display result is out of order, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach or the normal reach is not limited to the form different depending on the set value that is set. There may be one or more undetermined fluctuation patterns among the reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern. The fact that the determination ratio of the variation pattern differs depending on the set value that has been set means that one of the variation patterns is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%) or that the specific variation pattern is 100%. It is also included that the decision is made. The present invention is not limited to the form in which the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern for loss determination depending on the total number of pending storages. Of the first special symbol, and the number of retained storages of the second special symbol when executing the variable display of the second special symbol). May be determined.

  In each outlier variation pattern determination table, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of the numerical values 1 to 3, the superreach outlier variation patterns (PA2-2 and PA2-3) are included. The range of the assigned random numbers is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the miss probability differ according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the fluctuation display is actually executed in the super-reach change pattern (super-reach difference The appearance rate of the fluctuation pattern) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It should be noted that the variation display is not limited to the form in which the rate of execution in the variation pattern of the super-reach loss differs according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In consideration of the loss probability, the fluctuation display may be performed in a super-reach fluctuation pattern at the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 8-11 shows the game control data holding area 150. The game control data holding area 150 is provided in the RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 and serves as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. The game control data holding area 150 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, a general figure reservation storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game control timer setting unit. 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155.

  The first special figure holding storage unit 151A stores the holding data related to the variable display of the first special figure on the first special symbol display 4A. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates the winning order (the detection order of game balls) with the first start winning opening with the reservation number, and sets the first start condition by passing (entering) the game ball. Based on the establishment, the CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 or the like a random number value MR1 for determining a fluctuation display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and numerical data indicating a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern. Are stored until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The first starting condition is satisfied when a game ball passes (enters) a first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A to generate a starting winning. The hold data stored in the first special figure holding storage unit 151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure has not been started yet, and the change display result in this special figure game This is suspension information that enables determination of whether or not a big hit will occur based on the (special figure display result).

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B stores the holding data related to the variable display of the second special figure on the second special symbol display 4B. As an example, the second special map holding storage unit 151B associates the winning order (the order of detection of game balls) with the holding number in the second starting winning port and associates the holding number with the holding number to determine the second starting condition by passing (entering) the game ball. Based on the establishment, the CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 or the like a random number value MR1 for determining a fluctuation display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a numerical data indicating a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern, and the like as reserved data. Are stored until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The second starting condition is satisfied when a game ball passes (enters) a second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and a starting winning is generated. The hold data stored in the second special figure holding storage unit 151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure has not been started yet and has been held. This is suspension information that enables determination of whether or not a big hit will occur based on the (special figure display result).

  In addition, the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number. In this case, the opening information indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening may be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

  The general-purpose reservation storage unit 151C stores the reservation information of the general-purpose game that has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 yet, even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure holding storage unit 151C determines the general figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game ball, in association with the holding number in the order in which the game ball passed through the passage gate 41. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting section 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags. The game control timer setting section 153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating a timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers. The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be provided with a random counter for counting a part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can be updated by software. The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, a random number value that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value. The numerical data indicating each random number value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random number value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or an arithmetic process on all or a part of the numerical data.

  The display of the total of the game balls and the ratio of the accessory on the main board 11 of the present embodiment will be described. The main board 11 has information on the winning of the game, for example, the number of prize balls by winning the first starting winning opening (navel), the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the first big win. The number of prize balls and the total number of prize balls by the prize at the winning opening and the second grand prize opening (attacker) are input, and the number of shot balls are totaled. The display monitor 29 displays the first grand prize opening and the total number of prize balls. The ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls occupied by the prize to the second winning port (attacker), and the number of prize balls by the prize to the second start prize port (denchu) in the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls occupied by winning in the first and second large winning openings (attackers), and the base (%), which is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. Is displayed. The repetition ratio is a percentage of the total number of prize balls occupied by the number of prize balls (the number of continuous character-acquired balls described below) due to prize winning in the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening (attacker). The role ratio is defined as the number of prize balls in the total number of prize balls due to a prize in the second starting prize port (Den Chu) and the number of prize balls in the first prize port and the second prize port (Attacker) ( The following figure shows the ratio of the number of acquired ball). The base is the ratio of the number of game balls launched to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls (the total number of balls obtained as described below) is based on the number of prize balls by winning in the first and second large winning openings (attackers) and the winning in the second starting winning opening (electric chew). The number of prize balls and prize balls by prize holes (first start prize port, general prize port) other than the first grand prize port, the second grand prize port (attacker) and the second start prize port (denchu). It is the sum of numbers and In addition, the first special winning opening, the second special winning opening (attacker), and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are variable characters, and when the passable width of the game ball is changed, the game ball is won. It is a character whose assumed ratio fluctuates. In addition, the winning opening (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the first winning winning opening, the second winning winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (denchu) is a fixed role, and The passable width of the ball is fixed, and the expected winning ratio of the game ball is a fixed character.

  As for the method of totaling and calculating the information regarding the winning of the game, regarding the connection ratio and the winning ratio, the winning ball by winning the first starting winning opening (navel) and the general winning opening (sode) in the number of winning balls of 6000 pieces. Number (general prize balls), the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (power chew), the number of ordinary power prize balls (power chew prize balls), the first grand prize mouth and the second grand prize The number of special prize prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls), which is the number of prize balls by winning a mouth (attacker), is totaled. The total is defined as one set, and the connection ratio (%) and the combination ratio (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60000 pieces are calculated. The number of prize balls (general prize balls), the number of ordinary electric prize balls (number of electric chu prize balls), the number of special electric The number of role prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls) is recorded in a ring buffer provided for each set value, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated every set. ing. In other words, the storage of 11 sets of 6000 pieces is stored in a considerable amount (for example, for several bytes), and the total ratio (%) and the winning combination (%) of the totals can be calculated. As for the base, the number of launched game balls with respect to the number of 60000 prize balls is counted. The total is set as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60,000 prize balls to the number of game balls launched is calculated.

  The display monitor 29 displays a base ratio (%) calculated based on the connection ratio (%), the combination ratio (%), the total connection ratio (%), the combination ratio (%), and the previous 60000 prize balls for 6000 pieces. The base 1 (%)) and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls can be switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds). That is, six displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to complete the display, but the number of prize balls due to winning in the first starting winning opening (navel) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are counted as the game progresses. The number of prize balls due to winning, and the number of prize balls due to winning at the first winning port and the second winning port (attacker) are changed. Then, for example, if the number of winning balls won after displaying the connection ratio (%) for 6000 pieces is reflected in the winning percentage (%) for 60000 pieces displayed thereafter, for example, There is a possibility that a discrepancy occurs between the repetition ratio (%) and the role ratio (%) of 60000 pieces. Therefore, the number of prize balls by winning the first starting winning opening (navel), the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the number of first winning opening and the second winning opening (attacker). If the number of awarded balls and the total number of awarded balls due to winning are input and totaled at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, a display timing of a connection ratio (%) for 6000 pieces), such a discrepancy is caused. Can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, a storage area for storing information related to a game prize is provided for each set value. The ball, prize ball total, and hit total are stored in a storage area (ring buffer) corresponding to the set value. For this reason, the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base in the present embodiment can be individually calculated for each set value.

  In the following, as an example of the calculation method, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls by the prize in the second starting prize port (Den Chu) and the first prize port and the second prize port (attacker). The method of calculating the ratio of the bonuses (ratio (%)) in the case where the number of the bonuses obtained as the sum of the number of the awarded balls by winning is 42000 is described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls refers to the total cumulative number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the number of the accessory acquisition balls refers to the cumulative number of game media paid out when the game media wins the attacker and the electric chew. In addition, the number of continuous bonus item acquisition balls refers to the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning the game media to the attacker. The hit total is the cumulative number of game media hit into the pachinko gaming machine 1 until the number of prize balls reaches 60000. Therefore, the connection ratio can be obtained by the following equation (1). Further, the winning combination can be obtained by the following equation (2). The base can be obtained by the following equation (3).

  Connection ratio = [Number of consecutive bonus ball acquisitions / Total number of acquisitions] × 100 (1)

  Role ratio = [(Number of consecutive role-acquired balls + Number of role-acquired balls) / total number of acquired] × 100 (2)

  Base = [60000 (total number of prize balls) / total hits] × 100 (3)

  In the case where the total number of prize balls is 60000 and the number of obtained bonus balls is 42,000, the ratio of bonus items is obtained as 0.70 (three decimal places rounded down) by dividing 42,000 by 60000. However, since the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot perform calculations below the decimal point, calculations using the following method are required.

  First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of the accessory acquisition balls is multiplied by 100 to be 4200000. Then, this 4200000 is divided by 60000. This requires 70 as the quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, the calculation result up to two decimal places can be obtained. Here, when calculating the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, the calculation result may be multiplied by 1000.

  Next, a second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then, 42000 is divided by the 600. This requires 70 as the quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two decimal places can be obtained. Here, when calculating the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, the calculation result may be divided by 1000.

  In the above example, the total number of prize balls is 60000, but a three-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate a long-term bonus ratio. That is, in this example, 00EA60h is stored in the 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A410h is also stored in the storage area of 3 bytes for the number of the winning ball. The microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform an operation between values of a maximum of 2 bytes. Therefore, the lower one byte may be truncated to facilitate the operation.

  A third calculation method which is performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, the lower one byte 60h is rounded down to 00EA60h of the total number of prize balls, so that the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, 00EA60h of the total number of prize balls, so that the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can easily calculate. 234 is calculated in decimal notation. Similarly, the lower one byte of 10h is rounded down to 00A410h, which is the number of the accessory acquisition balls, and the number of the accessory acquisition balls is calculated as 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation. Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 78%. In the third calculation method, while the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is facilitated, an error of + 12% occurs. However, the error when the total number of prize balls and the number of obtained bonus balls are 10 times is + 1%. That is, as the period for calculating the accessory ratio becomes longer, the error is reduced and approximates the original value.

  For example, assuming that the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of acquired accessory balls is 19876, the calculation of the winning combination (%) is performed by dividing 34876 by 19321 and dividing the number by 34321 to calculate the ratio. 19876/34321 = 0.57912... It is calculated that the winning combination (%) is about 57.9%. When performing calculations in the game control microcomputer 100, calculations at the decimal point must be avoided, and therefore, are replaced by the following formulas. In the division of 19876/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100, and the decimal point is truncated to be 19876/343 = 57.9475. Since the value after the decimal point is rounded down, it is calculated to be 57% of the duty ratio (%) and is displayed on the display monitor 29. In this example, the value calculated by the accurate calculation is different from the value calculated by the accurate calculation on the display. There will be no.

  The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (the value other than the value of the most significant bit is 0), and the value with the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of accessory acquired balls are 32799. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when it is replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327 = 100.3%, resulting in an error of + 0.3%. When the calculation is performed with the decimal point truncated, for example, the accurate value is 69.9%, and when the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, the display is changed from 69% to 70% by 1%. Although it is conceivable that an error of% is displayed, the combination ratio (%) (or the connection ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error on the display of the error of 1%.

  In addition, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of obtained balls is divided by 100, so that the calculation cannot be performed if the total number of obtained balls is less than 100. Further, when the value is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. If it is less than 10,000, the error may exceed 1% and may be even larger. That is, the error increases as the total number of acquired balls decreases. Therefore, until the total number of acquired balls equal to or more than a specific number (for example, 32768 which is the minimum value of 16 bits) is counted by the counter, the display ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are not displayed on the display monitor. Even if the display is performed, the fact that there is a possibility that the error is large may be notified by emitting a dedicated LED, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

  The storage area in which the information on the winning of the game is stored may not be initialized when the clear switch AK001 or the like is operated, and may be continuously stored. This storage area may include a ring buffer, and may constitute a 10-set total buffer, a total prize ball buffer, or the like in which information relating to winning of a game stored in a ring buffer provided with 10 counters of up to 2 bytes is totaled. . It should be noted that the checksum of the stored value is calculated and initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected. Initialization of the storage area for storing information on winning of a game when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of consecutive bonus balls obtained is larger than the value of the number of balls obtained. Processing may be performed. Further, an error display, a warning display, or the like may be performed without performing the initialization process, or an error display or a warning display may be performed, or the initialization process may be performed after the display.

  When the calculation of the connection ratio or the duty ratio has to be performed again, for example, when the calculation of the connection ratio or the duty ratio has an obstacle, the display monitor clear switch different from the clear switch AK001 is operated. By doing so, data used for the connection ratio and the combination stored in the nonvolatile storage device such as the RAM 102 or the flash memory may be cleared. The display monitor clear switch only needs to be disposed on the back side surface of the game board 2 at a position, such as a predetermined position on the power supply board 17, which cannot be easily operated by a game room attendant or the like. When the display monitor clear switch is operated, a display monitor clear signal different from the clear signal is transmitted to the main board 11.

  The substrate case 201 is formed of a material having a light-transmitting property, and the main substrate 11 and the display monitor 29 are visible. The board case 201 has a not-shown hole through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat radiating hole for releasing heat of electric components of the main board 11. The display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat radiating hole is not directly in front. Therefore, the visibility of the display monitor 29 is not blocked by the heat radiating holes. Here, “directly in front” means directly in front of the main board 11 as a viewpoint, and means between a staff member or the like of a game arcade who wants to view the main board 11 and the main board 11.

  The display monitor 29 displays a winning ratio (%), a link ratio (%), and a base (%) on seven segments, and switches and displays each value every predetermined period (for example, every five seconds). I do. In this case, for example, while the winning combination (%) is displayed for 5 seconds, an event occurs in which a game medium newly wins on the electric chute or the attacker, and the value calculated accordingly changes the ratio ( %), The value of the winning combination (%) may differ from the value of the consecutive winning combination (%). For this reason, it is preferable that the combination ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are calculated within the same interrupt and the calculated values are sequentially displayed. If the numerical value that can be displayed in seven segments is two digits (for example, when two seven segments are provided), the display cannot be performed with 100% as 100. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. In the display monitor 29, a numerical value can be displayed in the lower two digits. However, in this case, the numerical value may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, a numerical value may be displayed in a part of the upper two digits under a specific condition. It is to be noted that the present invention is not limited to the form in which the sensors provided in each of the attacker and the electric chew detect that the game medium has won, and the total number of award balls is individually counted based on the detection result. Using the sensor provided after the discharge path from which the game media having won the game media and the game media having won the electric chute are discharged is merged, based on the detection result, the number of the ball for obtaining the accessory and the number of the ball for continuously obtaining the accessory May be counted.

  The main board 11 is provided on the back side of the game board 2. On the back side of the game board 2, in addition to the main board 11, peripheral boards such as the effect control board 12 are also provided. The RAM 102 on the main board 11 includes a gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, a third general winning number counter, and a fourth general winning number counter. A general winning number counter and a large winning number counter are provided. Note that the number of winnings of the first winning port and the second winning port (attacker) is not limited to the form in which the number of winnings is counted by the winning counter, but the number of winnings in the first winning port is counted. A first large winning number counter and a second large winning number counter for counting the number of winnings in the second large winning opening are separately provided, and the number of winnings in the first large winning opening and the number in the second large winning opening are counted. The number of winnings may be individually counted, and the respective winnings may be summed up to be the number of winnings to the attacker.

  The gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start port switch 22A. The second start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 22B. The first general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch 26A. The second general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second general winning opening switch 26B. The third general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the third general winning opening switch 26C. The fourth general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 26D. The large winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23 and the second count switch 24A.

  FIG. 8-12 shows the arrangement and display contents of the display monitor 29. The main board 11 is housed in a board case 201. The caulking pin 11B is attached to the board case 201. With the provision of the caulking pins 11B, the main board 11 is completely sealed in the board case 201, thereby preventing improper acts on the main board 11. The board case 201 is a swaged board case (hereinafter also referred to as a “swaging board case”). The display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11. Further, a sealing seal 11S for proving that the main substrate 11 is sealed is attached to the substrate case 201. The sealing seal 11 </ b> S is affixed, for example, across the removed portion of the board case 201. The sealing seal 11S is arranged at a position distant from the main substrate 11, and is arranged at a position different from a position where visibility of the display monitor 29 is blocked, such as directly in front of the display monitor 29. Thus, the display monitor 29 is arranged at a position that is not hidden by the seal 11S.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, the display monitor 29 includes a first display unit 29A, a second display unit 29B, a third display unit 29C, a fourth display unit 29D, and a fifth display unit 29E. . Each of the first display unit 29A to the fifth display unit 29E is composed of seven segments composed of seven segments that draw the character “8” and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 29A to the fifth display unit 29E can be turned on and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white, and the like. Further, these colors can be displayed in different colors or so-called rainbows while being changed in an extremely short cycle.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, items of display Nos. 1 to 6 are displayed on the display monitor 29. The set values (1 to 3) totaled are displayed on the first display unit 29A of the first digit, and the total period is displayed on the second display unit 29B of the second digit and the third display unit 29C of the third digit. The numerical value is displayed as a percentage on the fourth display unit 29D at the fourth digit and the fifth display unit 29E at the fifth digit. In display No. 1, a short-term connection ratio is displayed, and in display No. 2, a short-term winning ratio is displayed. In the display No. 3, the total ratio is displayed, and in the display No. 4, the total winning combination is displayed. Display No. 5 displays the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls, and display No. 6 displays the base (base 2) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls. Is done. Here, the short term means a period in which the number of awarded balls (acquired balls) is 6,000. The period in which the total sum is obtained means the total period after the calculation of the ratio and the winning ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the ratio and the winning ratio is once reset. In the above example, the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base are calculated without depending on the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the repetition ratio may be a percentage of the total number of prize balls occupied by the number of prize balls due to winning in the special winning opening during the jackpot game state. The winning combination is defined as a ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of prize balls due to winning in the second starting winning opening in the high base state and the number of winning balls due to winning in the large winning opening in the jackpot game state. Is also good. Further, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

  When the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed, the second display unit 29B and the second display unit 29C are displayed. “Y7.” Is displayed on the display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the short-term ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, and the short-term role ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the fourth display portion 29D and the fifth display portion 29E display the short-term winning combination as a percentage (% display). When the total cumulative connection ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, “A6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, “A7.” Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, and the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed. When displayed, the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E display the total cumulative combination ratio as a percentage (% display). When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, “bL.” Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit is displayed. “B6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, the total total winning combination is displayed as a percentage (% display).

  In calculating the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base, the main board 11 is used to calculate the first special winning opening and the second special winning opening (attacker), the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening. , The total number of game balls having entered the fourth general winning opening and the number of game balls discharged from the outlet are calculated. In the main processing, the CPU 103 controls the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, the first count switch 23, the second count switch 24A, and the first general winning opening switch 26A to the fourth general port switch. A switch process for confirming the state of each of the winning opening switch 26D and the discharge opening switch 70 (the presence or absence of a detection signal) is performed. In the switch processing, it is specified which entry area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. When the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passage number counter is added, and when the detection signal is output from the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, The value of the first start winning number counter and the value of the second start winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 23, the value of the large winning number counter is added, and the first general winning opening switch 26A is added. When the detection signals are output from the second general winning opening switch 26B, the third general winning opening switch 26C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 26D, the first general winning number counter, the second general winning number counter, The value of the third general winning number counter and the fourth general winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the outlet switch 70, the value of the hit number counter is added. , Counts the entry number of game balls (winning number of game balls to each winning hole) to each entry area. The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102. As described above, the step of counting the number of game balls entering each entry area is also executed in a series of processing for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each entry area (switch state confirmation processing. Switch processing), it is possible to count the number of game balls entering each entry area without having to execute a separate tallying program, that is, without causing a problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in the number of execution programs. It has become.

  FIG. 8-13 shows a storage area for storing the number of winning balls for each winning opening. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of prize balls due to winning in each winning opening based on the total number of game balls winning in each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning opening. Let it. The number of prize balls obtained by winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out by one prize to the prize port by the number of wins to the prize port. The number of prize balls obtained by winning game balls is predetermined for each winning port. The number of prize balls for each of the prize holes to be classified includes a general prize hole prize ball (a prize ball for winning from the first general prize port to the fourth general prize port (Sode)), a first start prize port prize ball (first prize hole). The number of awarded balls in the 1st winning prize opening (navel), the prize ball in the normal electric prize prize ball (prize ball in the prize in the electric chew), and the special electric prize ball (prize ball in the prize in the attacker) is there. The RAM 102 also stores the total number of prize balls and the number of hit game balls. Although the CPU 103 separately counts the number of game balls won to the general winning opening and the number of game balls won to the first starting winning opening, the number of game balls winning to the general winning opening and the first starting number are also counted. The number of game ball winnings to the winning opening may be summed up. The number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the number of prize balls of the first starting winning prize ball are separately calculated. The number of prize balls may be calculated together.

  The RAM 102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of hit balls and the number of hits. The ring buffer includes ten first to tenth storage areas each having a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of winning balls in each winning opening for each of the 6,000 winning balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (up to 2 bytes). The active buffer also has a 0-th storage area consisting of a 2-byte maximum counter for storing the number of winning balls in each winning opening for each of the 6,000 winning balls. In the 0th storage area, the number of prize balls for each winning opening that increases as the game progresses is added. The eleven storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin. Further, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area for each of the winning openings, for the total number of prize balls (for 10 sets) and the number of hits stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area, and for the total sum. I have. The storage area of the total sum and the total total of 10 sets is constituted by a counter of a maximum of 3 bytes. Therefore, 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60000 data can be stored with a margin. I can remember.

  The RAM 102 stores a duty combination ratio storage area for storing 10 sets and a total cumulative combination ratio and a connection ratio, a base for 10 sets (base 2), and a base for the previous 10 sets (base 1). And a base storage area. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the winning combination and the total ratio of the 10 sets and the total total based on the winning prize number based on the winning number of the game ball to each winning port of the 10 sets and the total total, and calculates the 10 sets and the total ratio. And the total winning combination and the connecting ratio are stored in the storing and storing portion. The connection ratio storage area for storing the combination ratios and the connection ratios for the 10 sets and the total total is configured by a counter of a maximum of 1 byte. For example, when the combination ratio and the connection ratio of the ten sets and the total total are stored as integers, they can be stored with a margin by a maximum of 1 byte counter. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the base of the 10 sets based on the number of hits of the game balls into the winning openings of the 10 sets for each winning opening, and calculates the base of the calculated 10 sets (base 2) and the last time. The base (base 1) calculated from the number of hits of the game balls to the winning holes for each of the ten sets for each winning port is stored in the base storage area. For example, when storing the bases 1 and 2 as integers, the bases 1 and 2 can be stored with a margin with a maximum 1-byte counter.

  FIG. 8-14 shows a memory map of the CPU 103 on the main board 11. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing a built-in register, the ROM 101, the RAM 102, and the like. Address / data signal lines of the ROM 101 are assigned to a built-in ROM area of a ROM area of a memory space (in the present embodiment, 0000H to 2FBFH, of which 0000H to 2FBFH; 2FC0H to 2FFFH are program management areas). Data is read from the ROM 101 by specifying this ROM area. In this embodiment, the ROM area is managed by dividing it into eight areas, a first area to an eighth area, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H. Address / data signal lines of the built-in register are allocated to a built-in register area (FE00H to FEBFH in the present embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads data from the built-in register and transfers data to the register via the built-in register area. Is written. Address / data signal lines of the RAM 102 are allocated to a built-in RAM area which is an RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in the present embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 designates this RWM area to read data from the RAM 102 Write data to the RAM 102. The other areas of the memory space (in the present embodiment, 3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, and FEC0H to FFFFH) are unused areas.

  FIG. 8-15 shows an RWM area serving as a built-in RAM area. The built-in RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 includes a RAM control area, a non-use area, a RAM data area, and other areas. A storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area includes instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction. The data for the control program to be executed (may be simply referred to as control program data) is temporarily stored. Reference data (for example, various lottery data) referred to by the control program is temporarily stored in a storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area.

  The data used to display the reams and the ratios are temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area or the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area is provided with a storage area for storing the total sum of the number of prize balls for each winning opening and a storage area for the total winning combination ratio. The storage areas of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas include an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having a first storage area to a 10th storage area, and the number of prize balls (10 sets) for each winning opening. ) Is provided, and a storage area for 10 sets is provided. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area, data having different subroutine start addresses are stored. One byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address in the built-in RAM area, and each data (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data, management data) stores one byte. If the data has more bytes (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored for each byte in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. .

  FIG. 8-16 shows an example of display control on the display monitor 29. The main board 11 controls the display monitor 29 to display the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base. On the display monitor 29, a plurality of items are sequentially displayed.

  FIG. 8-16 (A) is a time chart showing a mode of a display change on the display monitor 29. When the display on the display monitor 29 is started, first, the short-term ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed. The display of the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. When the display of the display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term role ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed in red. When the display of display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative connection ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed in red. When the display of the display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total total winning combination of the display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed in red. When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed. The display of the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed in red. When the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. The display of the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed in red. Then, when the display of the display No. 6 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed. Thereafter, from the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 to the base 2 of the display No. 6, each display is sequentially changed and displayed every 5 seconds. As for the color of the display, only the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is green, and the short-term role ratio of the display No. 2 to the base 2 of the display No. 5 are red. In this way, the display monitor 29 switches and displays the short-term ratio, the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 every 5 seconds.

  FIG. 8-16 (B1) shows a case where the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. In this case, the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character “y” is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. In addition, the short-term ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the short-term connection ratio is 41%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character “1.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  FIG. 8-16 (B2) shows a case where the short-term winning ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character “y” is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the short-term winning ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the short-term role ratio is 63%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character “3.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  FIG. 8-16 (B3) shows a case where the total cumulative connection ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. In this case, the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character “A” is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. The fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E display the total cumulative connection ratio. For example, when the total cumulative connection ratio is 58%, the character “5.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  FIG. 8-16 (B4) shows a case in which the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. In this case, the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character “A” is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. The total display ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character “6.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  FIG. 8B (B5) shows a case where the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed. In this case, the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character “b” is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character “L.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. The base 1 calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character “0.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  FIG. 8-16 (B6) shows a case where the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character “b” is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. The base 2 calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character “2” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  The display of the short-term ratio, the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 can be sequentially changed for each set value based on the operation of the display changeover switch 30. I have. For example, when the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is “1”, the operation of the display changeover switch 30 is performed. As a result, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to “2”, and the short-term ratio, the short-term position ratio, the total cumulative ratio, and the like are displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. The display of the total cumulative winning combination, base 1 and base 2 is changed to a display corresponding to the case where the set value is “2”. When the short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is “2”, the display changeover switch 30 is operated to The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to “3”, and the short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative total displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E are displayed. The display of the winning combination, base 1 and base 2 is changed to a display corresponding to the case where the set value is “3”. When the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative connection ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed when the set value is “3”, the display changeover switch 30 is operated. The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to "1", and the short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative total displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E are displayed. The display of the winning combination, base 1 and base 2 is changed to a display corresponding to the case where the set value is “1”.

  It should be noted that the display monitor 29 is not limited to the form in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at each set value can be displayed. Only any two numerical values may be displayed. It is not limited to the form in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of awarded spheres, are calculated, and the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 29. The history of the awarded number of awarded balls may be displayed on the display monitor 29 without calculating the winning combination and the base. On the display monitor 29, only the short-term ratio is displayed in red, and the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, base 1 and base 2 are not limited to those displayed in green. The short-term duty ratio, the total cumulative duty ratio and the total cumulative duty ratio are displayed in the same color, and the short-term duty ratio, the short-term duty ratio, the total cumulative duty ratio and the same as the total cumulative duty ratio are different for base 1 and base 2. It may be displayed in color.

  FIG. 8-17 shows an execution example of updating in the active buffer and the ring buffer. When the total prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reach the predetermined capacity of 6000, the main board 11 updates the storage in the 0th to 10th storage areas in the ring buffer. Further, the storage unit stores the sum and total cumulative storage area for 10 sets and the combination and combination ratio storage area for storing the combination and total ratio of the 10 sets and total. At this time, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer, and the numerical values stored in the first to ninth storage areas of the ring buffer are respectively stored in the second storage area. Move from the storage area to the tenth storage area. For example, the prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 0th to 9th storage areas are “27”, “81”, “120”, “36”, “225”, “87”, “66”, “117”, and “45”, respectively. It is "21". At this time, when the total prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reach 6000, the prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 1st storage area to the 10th storage area are respectively set to “27”, “81” and “120”. "36" "225" "87" "66" "117" "45" "21". Accordingly, the number of prize balls in the zeroth storage area is set to “0”, and the number of prize balls in the tenth storage area is deleted. When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area, the stored number of prize balls may be deleted once, and then the new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new prize ball number may be stored by overwriting the stored prize ball number.

(Explanation of game control related to other features)
FIG. 8-18 is a flowchart showing an example of a main process executed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 in this embodiment. This main processing should just be able to be performed instead of the game control main processing. In the main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step Sa1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step Sa2), and the stack pointer designated address is set to the stack pointer (step Sa3). After initialization of the built-in device (initialization of CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) (step Sa4), the RAM 102 can be accessed. Is set (step Sa5). In the interrupt mode 2, an address synthesized from a value (1 byte) of a specific register (I register) built in the CPU 103 and an interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is: This is a mode indicating an interrupt address.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the clear switch AK001 is on based on a clear signal which is an output signal of the clear switch AK001 (step Sa6). If the clear switch AK001 is off, it is determined whether or not the power-off detection processing has been executed (step Sa7). If the power-off detection process has been executed, it is determined whether or not the execution result of the parity check is normal (step Sa8). If the check result is normal, the start address of the backup setting table is set as a pointer (step Sa41), and an initial value is set in the work area based on the contents (step Sa42). Thereby, the stored contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the time of the power failure regarding the progress of the game are restored.

  When the power failure is restored in step Sa42, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 51 is on based on the lock switch signal which is the output signal of the lock switch 51 (step AKS001). If the lock switch 51 is on in step AKS001, the setting check process is executed (step AKS002), and the set value can be checked. In the setting confirmation processing, it is possible to confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying on the display monitor 29. When the lock switch AK002 is off in step AKS001 or after executing the setting confirmation processing in step AKS002, the process proceeds to step Sa14. When the lock switch AK002 is off in step AKS001, a command 9200H serving as a power failure recovery designation command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 182.

  When the execution of the setting confirmation process is started in step AKS002, the setting confirmation state in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is entered, and the setting confirmation from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is started. Command 9400H, which is a command, is transmitted. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped may be set. When the game is stopped, the firing of the game ball by the operation of the hit ball operation handle 30, the detection of the game ball by various switches, and the like are stopped, and the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, The symbol display 20 may be controlled so as to stop displaying a lost symbol or the like, or to perform a display corresponding to a game stop state different from the lost symbol. When the execution of the setting confirmation process in step AKS001 ends, the setting confirmation state and the game stop state accompanying it end, and a command 9401H serving as a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Is done.

  If the clear switch AK001 is turned on in step Sa6, if the power-off detection process has not been executed in step Sa7, or if the check result is not normal in step Sa8, the predetermined RAM is cleared. The process is executed to clear data other than the set values stored in the backup storage area of the RAM 102 (step Sa9). The storage area in which the information on the winning of the game is stored may not be cleared in step Sa9. Subsequent to step Sa9, the start address of the initialization setting table is set as a pointer (step Sa10), and an initial value is set in the work area based on the contents (step Sa11). Thereby, the storage contents regarding the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are initialized. If the clear switch AK001 is turned on in step Sa6, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) in steps Sa9 and Sa10, so that the clear switch AK001 detects an operation of being pressed on. In addition, the operation related to the initialization of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be detected.

  When the stored contents are initialized in step Sa11, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 51 is on based on the lock switch signal (step Sa12). If the lock switch 51 is ON in step Sa12, the setting change processing is executed (step Sa13), whereby the set value can be changed. In the setting change processing, it is possible to confirm the change state of the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying on the display monitor 29. When the lock switch 51 is off in step Sa12, or after executing the setting change process in step Sa13, the process proceeds to step Sa14.

  When the lock switch 51 is off in step Sa12, a command 9000H serving as a RAM clear notification command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Note that the present invention is not limited to the mode in which the setting change process is executed on condition that the lock switch 51 is turned on. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changeable.

  When the execution of the setting change process is started in step Sa13, the setting change state is set as a change permission state in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed. Then, a command 9100H serving as a setting change start command is transmitted. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be set to the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the execution of the setting change process in step Sa13 ends, the setting change state and the accompanying game stop state end, and a command 93XXH serving as a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Is done. In addition, in addition to the case where the clear switch AK001 is ON, the setting is performed if the lock switch 51 is ON when the power-off inspection process is not executed or the execution result of the parity check is not normal. The present invention is not limited to the mode in which the change process is executed, and the setting change process may be executed when the lock switch 51 is ON only when the RAM 102 is cleared when the clear switch AK001 is ON.

  Thereafter, the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is read (step Sa14), and the value is used as the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the random number circuit 104 is initialized by the random number circuit setting process (step Sa15). Further, a setting is made to generate a periodic timer interrupt every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step Sa16). Then, the interrupt prohibition setting (step Sa17), the display random number update processing (step Sa18), the initial value random number update processing (step Sa19), and the interrupt permission setting (step Sa20) are repeatedly executed.

  The CPU 103 performs a special symbol normal process in the special symbol process process, based on a display result determination table corresponding to the set value set and numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for variable display result determination. It is determined (predetermined) whether or not to display the change display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol as "big hit" or "small hit" before the change display result is derived and displayed. Further, when executing the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is determined by using a variation pattern determination table corresponding to the set values and numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination. May be determined. As described above, by determining the variable display result at a different ratio according to the set value, the game can be advanced so that the advantage for the player is different.

  In the present embodiment, when the clear switch AK001 is turned on in step Sa6 of the main processing, the storage contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) in steps Sa9 to Sa11, and then in steps Sa12 and Sa13. Although the setting value can be changed, the present invention is not limited to this. The storage contents of the RAM 102 may be initialized (cleared) after the setting value changeable state ends. . That is, if the clear switch AK001 is on in step Sa6, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 51 is on in step Sa12, and if it is off, the process proceeds to steps Sa9 to Sa11. The stored contents are initialized (cleared). On the other hand, if the lock switch 51 is turned on in step Sa12, a setting change process is executed in step Sa13, and after the process is completed, steps Sa9 to Sa9 are performed. The process may proceed to Sa11. For example, when the RAM clear notification command is transmitted in response to the initialization (clearing) of the storage content of the RAM 102, the initialization control board 12 starts the initialization notification in response to the reception of the RAM clear notification command. Sometimes. Therefore, if steps Sa9 to Sa11 are executed before step Sa13, when the setting change processing is executed in step Sa13 and the setting value can be changed, the initialization notification is executed and the setting is changed. There is a possibility that the change of the value may be hindered. On the other hand, the storage contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) in steps Sa9 to Sa11 after the setting change processing in step Sa13 is completed, so that the initialization notification and the like are started after the change of the set values is completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a trouble in the operation of changing the set value.

  FIG. 8-19 shows a display mode of the display monitor 29 in the setting change process of step Sa13. As shown in FIG. 8-19 (A), the power switch AK002 is operated by the staff of the game arcade or the like when the connection ratio, the duty ratio, the base, and the like are displayed on the display monitor 29, and the power supply is cut off. When the display is stopped, the display on the display monitor 29 ends as shown in FIG. Thereafter, when a staff member of the game arcade presses the clear switch AK001 and operates the power switch AK002 while switching the lock switch 51 on, the power supply is started by turning on the power. As shown in FIG. 19C, on the display monitor 29, the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the first display unit 29A. When the setting changeover switch 52 is pressed by a person in charge of a game arcade or the like in a state where the set value is displayed, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is sequentially updated each time the operation is detected. To display. For example, when the pressing operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, if “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the value is updated to “2”, and if “2” is displayed, the value is changed to “3”. It is sufficient that the display is updated to "1" if "3" is displayed, so that the display of the first display unit 29A can be sequentially and cyclically updated between "1" to "3". Thereafter, when the lock switch 51 is pressed by a staff member of the game arcade or the like, the operation is detected, and the set value displayed on the first display unit 29A is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 (update storage). I do. At this time, by blinking the first display unit 29A, a staff member of the game hall or the like notifies that a new set value has been stored so as to be recognizable.

  When the setting change process is executed in step Sa13, the storage contents of the RAM 102 are initialized in step Sa9. Therefore, when the setting value is changed, the hold storage based on the hold data and the like in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B is deleted. When a switching operation to turn off the lock switch 51 is performed by a staff member of the game arcade or the like, the operation is detected, and the setting change process ends. The CPU 103 is in a state where a game can be played by executing the processing after step Sa14 in the main processing. As a result, for example, it becomes possible to execute a variation display result, a jackpot type, a lottery determination lottery determination, a prize ball payout, and the like. In the setting change process, the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 29 is not limited to the form in which the stored value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed. A predetermined set value such as “1” or “3” which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player may be displayed.

  In the setting change processing, the control for sequentially updating and displaying the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A of the display monitor 29 is limited to a mode of updating each time a pressing operation of the setting switch 52 is detected. Instead, for example, each time the pressing operation of the clear switch AK001 is detected, it may be sequentially updated and displayed. For example, on the display monitor 29, when the clear switch AK001 is pressed down in a state where the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the first display unit 29A, “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A. Is updated to "2" when "2" is displayed, updated to "3" when "2" is displayed, and updated to "1" when "3" is displayed. It suffices if the display of the display unit 29A can be sequentially and cyclically updated between "1" to "3". In this case, the clear switch AK001 used for initializing the storage content of the RAM 102 can be commonly used for changing the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in manufacturing cost due to an increase in the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 8-20 shows a display mode of the display monitor 29 in the setting confirmation processing in step AKS002. As shown in FIG. 8A, the power switch AK002 is operated by a staff at a game arcade or the like when the connection ratio, the duty ratio, the base, and the like are displayed on the display monitor 29, and power is supplied by shutting off the power. When the display is stopped, the display on the display monitor 29 ends as shown in FIG. After that, the power supply is started by turning on the power by operating the power switch AK002 while switching on the lock switch 51 without operating the clear switch AK001 by the staff of the game arcade without pressing the clear switch AK001. As shown in 8-20 (C), on the display monitor 29, the set values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 are displayed on the first display unit 29A. In a state where the set value is displayed, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A cannot be updated and displayed even if the setting changeover switch 52 is pressed by a staff member of the game arcade or the like. Thereafter, when a switching operation for turning off the lock switch 51 is performed by a staff member of the game arcade or the like, the operation is detected, and the setting confirmation process ends. The CPU 103 is in a state where a game can be played by executing the processing after step Sa14 in the main processing. As a result, for example, it becomes possible to execute a variation display result, a jackpot type, a lottery determination lottery determination, a prize ball payout, and the like.

  As described above, the display monitor 29 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can display information relating to the game value that enables confirmation of the adjustment of the number of prize balls after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. The display monitor 29 can display information of a set value for proceeding the game so that the advantage for the player is changed by changing the probability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the big hit game state. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a display device for displaying the set values separately from a display device for displaying information on the game value, so that it is possible to prevent an increase in the manufacturing cost due to an increase in the device configuration in the pachinko gaming machine 1. it can.

  In this embodiment, the display monitor 29 is used to display the set values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 and to display the connection ratio, the ratio, the base, and the like. The present invention is not limited to this. While displaying the connection ratio, the combination ratio, the base, and the like using the display monitor 29, the setting values are displayed using the setting display unit different from the display monitor 29. Is also good. This makes it possible to clearly separate the control for displaying the connection ratio, the duty ratio, the base and the like using the display monitor 29 and the control for displaying the set values using the setting display unit. Processing by a control program or the like can be dispersed and simplified, and the control load can be reduced. As described above, when a setting display unit different from the display monitor 29 is used, the setting display unit may be disposed on a substrate different from the substrate on which the display monitor 29 is disposed, or the display monitor 29 is disposed. The setting display unit may be arranged on a substrate common to the substrate.

(Explanation of Modifications Related to Configuration and Game Control in Other Features)
FIG. 8-21 shows a display mode of the display monitor 29 in a modification in which the setting change process can be executed during the game. The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to a form that can be changed when the power is turned on, and the change of the set value may be executable during the game. In this case, after the CPU 103 starts the processing after step Sa16 in the main processing, the game machine frame 3 is opened by the staff of the game arcade, etc., and the clear switch AK001 and the switching operation of turning on the lock switch 51 are performed. Are pressed, the operation is detected, and the display monitor 29 displays the current set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the first display unit 29A. When the setting changeover switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 is pressed down by a staff member of the game arcade or the like in a state where the set value is displayed, the operation is detected and displayed on the first display unit 29A. Update and display numerical values sequentially. Then, when the lock switch 51 is pressed by a staff member of the game arcade or the like, the operation is detected, and the set value displayed on the first display unit 29A is set as a new set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102.

  The set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is limited to a form that can be changed when the power is turned on, based on the detection of the operation of switching on the lock switch 51 and the detection of the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 on. Instead, it may be changeable at the time of power-on, based on at least the detection of the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on. For example, even when there is no detection of the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 on when the power is turned on, the storage contents of the RAM 102 are not initialized (cleared) based on the detection of the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on. The settings stored in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed based on, for example, restoring the stored contents at the time of the power failure and detecting the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 on. As described above, even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not initialized by initializing (clearing) the storage contents of the RAM 102 with the start of power supply upon power-on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the time of power-on is not used. Control for changing the set value that has been set may be performed.

  When a new set value is stored, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, the special figure on-hold storage, the general-purpose on-hold storage, the game control flag setting unit 152, the game control timer setting unit 153, the game control counter Various flags and data stored in the setting unit 154, the game control buffer setting unit 155, and the like may be deleted. In this manner, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, a change in the set value may cause a change in the display result to cause a large hit on hold memory, or the newly variable normal prize ball device 6B Can be prevented from being released (the occurrence of a normal drawing hit), and the fluctuation display result during execution can be prevented from unduly becoming a big hit. Further, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, the big win port is closed if the big hit game is being played, or the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is closed if the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is open. This can prevent the player from obtaining inappropriate profit. Further, when the setting change process is interrupted without setting a new set value, it is possible to prevent the held storage from being erased even though a new set value is not set. In addition, the present invention is not limited to the mode in which the hold memory is cleared based on the setting of a new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the set value originally set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reset. In such a case, the hold storage may be cleared. The hold storage may be cleared when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the display monitor 29, that is, when the CPU 103 executes the setting change process. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the change in the set value from being accurately reflected on the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the form in which the first special winning opening and the second special winning opening are closed based on the setting of the new setting value, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 The first special winning opening and the second special winning opening may be closed when the set value is displayed, that is, when the CPU 103 executes the setting change process. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the change in the set value from being accurately reflected on the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 8-22 shows a display mode in a modification in which the first display unit 29 </ b> A capable of displaying the set value on the display monitor 29 is not provided. The display monitor 29 is provided with five display units from a first display unit 29A to a fifth display unit 29E, and displays the display ratio, the duty ratio, and the base displayed on the second display unit 29B to the fifth display unit 29E. The present invention is not limited to the mode in which the set value is displayed on the first display unit 29A, and it is not necessary to provide a display unit for displaying the connected ratio, the winning combination, and the base set value being displayed. In FIG. 8-22 (A), the display ratio corresponding to the second display unit 29B to the fifth display unit 29E of the display monitor 29 is displayed on the display unit 29, the combination ratio, the base, and the display unit 29 corresponds to the first display unit 29A. The set value is not displayed on the display unit.

  FIG. 8B illustrates an example of the display control of the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in the case where the display unit that displays the set value is not provided. In this case, the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base at the set value 1 are red, the connection ratio, combination ratio, and the base at the set value 2 are green, and the connection ratio, combination ratio, and the base at the set value 3 are blue. To display. By displaying the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base in different display colors according to the set values, it is possible to easily grasp which set value is the numerical value. In this display control example, similarly to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to switch and display the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base at the set value 1 at intervals of 5 seconds. The switching display at the interval of 5 seconds between the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is changed to the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the switching display at the interval of 5 seconds at the setting value 2. Further, the connection ratio and the combination ratio at the setting value 3 It is only necessary to be able to cyclically change the display to the switching display at an interval of 5 seconds of the base. Alternatively, switching display of the connection ratio at the set value 1, the connection ratio at the set value 2, and the connection ratio at the set value 3 at 5-second intervals, the combination ratio at the set value 1, the combination ratio at the set value 2, and the setting value 3 The switching display of the duty ratio at intervals of 5 seconds and the switching display of the base at the set value 1, the base at the set value 2, and the base at the set value 3 at an interval of 5 seconds are cyclically performed for each operation of the display switch 30. Various changes may be possible.

  The display monitor 29 is not limited to a form in which the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base for each set value can be displayed, but the connection ratio, combination, and combination corresponding to any one of the set values 1 to 3 are set. Only the ratio and the base may be displayed. For example, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are calculated for each of the setting values 1 to 3, and the highest or the lowest value or the longest or shortest measurement time is calculated among the calculated connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. Only the values and the like need to be displayed on the display monitor 29. Further, the highest or the lowest value or the value with the longest or shortest measurement time among the calculated connection ratio, combination ratio, and base is set as the initial display on the display monitor 29, and the display changeover switch 30 is operated to change the initial display from the initial display. The display on the display monitor 29 may be switchable to the value of.

  The display monitor 29 displays two or more of the ratio, combination, and base at the set value 1, the ratio, combination, and base at the set value 2, and the combination, combination, and base at the set value 3. It is possible to calculate the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base at the set value, and in addition to or instead of the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base for each set value, the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base at these two or more set values The information may be displayed on the display monitor 29. In this way, by allowing the display ratio 29, the combination ratio, and the base at the two or more set values to be displayed on the display monitor 29, it is possible to grasp the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in more detail. Note that the composite information is not limited to the form in which the combined ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are calculated for two or more set values and can be displayed on the display monitor 29. , The average value of the combination ratio and the base may be calculated and displayed on the display monitor 29.

  The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying only the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in accordance with the set values. Further, on the display monitor 29, the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base according to the set value are displayed as the initial display. The display may be switched to the connection ratio, the combination ratio, or the base. The display monitor 29 may be able to display numerical values other than the base ratio, the winning combination, and the base, such as the number of prize balls per predetermined time (for example, one hour), as the predetermined information corresponding to the set value.

  For example, under specific conditions, such as immediately after the end of a jackpot game or during a reduced working time, by using a special fluctuation pattern determination table different from the normal fluctuation pattern determination table, a fluctuation display with a specific fluctuation pattern than during normal times ( For example, a shortened non-reach variation pattern (PA1-4) may be easily executed. When the variation pattern can be determined using the special variation pattern determination table, the determination of the variation pattern using the special variation pattern determination table is terminated and switched to the normal determination according to the set value. The timing may be different. Specifically, when the set value is 1, the variation pattern is determined using the special variation pattern determination table until the fifteenth variation display after the big hit game ends, and the variation pattern is determined after the big hit game ends. After the first time, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the normal fluctuation pattern determination table, and if the set value is 2, the special fluctuation pattern determination table is displayed until the tenth fluctuation display after the end of the big hit game. Is used to determine the fluctuation pattern. After the end of the big hit game, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the normal fluctuation pattern determination table. If the set value is 3, the big hit game is determined. The fluctuation pattern is determined using the special fluctuation pattern determination table up to the fifth fluctuation display after the end, and the normal fluctuation pattern It may be determined variation pattern using the determination table.

  After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed in step Sa9 in the main process or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a special variation pattern is used in the first tenth variation. When the variable display is executed, it indicates that a set value (for example, set value 1) advantageous to the player is set, and after the initialization (clear) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the pachinko game machine After the setting value set to 1 is changed, if the fluctuation display is executed in a special fluctuation pattern at the 30th fluctuation, a setting value (for example, setting value 1) advantageous to the player is set. Is a game feature that focuses on whether or not the variable display is executed in a special fluctuation pattern at a specific timing or a specific number of times of the fluctuation display It may be. In the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 has such a game characteristic, when the set value is 1, initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed or the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. After the set value is changed, the rate of execution of the change in the special change pattern is the highest at the first tenth change, and when the set value is 3, initialization of the RAM 102 ( After the (Clear) is executed, or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, the rate at which the variation is executed in the special variation pattern at the first tenth variation becomes the lowest. Only when the set value is 1, the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed. After, it is sufficient to change at a special variation pattern in the first 30 variation eyes is executed.

  The switching condition (the number of fluctuations before switching the table) for switching the fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern from the special fluctuation pattern determination table to the normal fluctuation pattern determination table differs depending on the set value. The ratio may be determined. Due to different switching conditions for switching the fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern according to the set value, the determination ratio of a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, shortened non-reach (PA1-4)) decreases. Since the player can be made to pay attention to the timing, the effect of the variation pattern can be enhanced.

  After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a predetermined time (for example, one hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( Until the fluctuation display (for example, 100 times) is executed, the determination ratio of the fluctuation display of the specific fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation display of the super-reach fluctuation pattern) is determined by using each fluctuation pattern determination table in a normal state. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be increased or decreased as compared with the case of determining the variation pattern. In this case, the execution of the variation display of the variation pattern of the super reach is determined at different determination ratios depending on whether the set value is 1, 2, or 3. Good. As a result, after a predetermined time (for example, one hour) has elapsed since the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 was performed or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 was changed, or Until the predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of the fluctuation display is executed, the player can pay attention to the number of times of the fluctuation display of the super-reach fluctuation pattern. Can be increased. Further, after the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is performed, or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, until a predetermined time elapses, or a predetermined number of times of fluctuation display is performed. A change pattern that can be determined only until the setting is made is provided for each set value, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided to the player by executing the change display according to the change pattern according to these set values. The notification may be made possible.

  After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a predetermined time (for example, one hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( Until the fluctuation display (for example, 100 times) is executed, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern other than the super reach such as the non-reach and the normal reach differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, a variation pattern different from a normal variation pattern such as a non-reach, a normal reach, a super reach, or the like (for example, an extremely short variation time of 0.1 or the like) depending on a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 The determination ratio of the variation pattern or the variation pattern whose variation time is extremely long such as 10 minutes may be different.

  After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a predetermined time (for example, one hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( For example, during a specific period until the variable display of (100 times) is executed, a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested at a rate at which a specific effect is executed. For example, it is possible to execute a high setting suggestion effect indicating that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is an advantageous setting value for the player, and the setting set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 for a specific period. When the value is 1 (the setting value most advantageous to the player), the high setting value suggestion effect is most easily executed, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3 (the setting value most disadvantageous to the player). ), The high setting value suggestion effect is most difficult to be executed. In the specific period, at least one of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach, depending on whether the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed since the last time power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 was stopped. The determination ratio of the variation pattern may be different.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured as a pachinko gaming machine capable of controlling the gaming state to a positively changing state after the end of the big hit game, and the game after the big hit game is terminated based on the passing of the game ball through the third count switch during the big hit game. The state may be controllable to a certain state. In this case, as the jackpot type, a jackpot type that opens the second big winning opening during the jackpot game, that is, a jackpot type (hereinafter, jackpot X) that allows the game ball to pass through the third count switch during the jackpot game, A jackpot type (hereinafter, jackpot Y) that does not open the second jackpot during the jackpot game, that is, a game ball that cannot pass through the third count switch during the jackpot game is provided, and the determination rate of the jackpot X and the jackpot Y May be changed according to the set value. By doing in this way, the rate at which the gaming state is controlled to the positive change state after the end of the big hit game can be varied according to the set value, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition to, or instead of, the rate at which the fluctuation display results in a big hit or the different rate of determining the big hit type, the number of prize balls when a game ball wins each winning opening, or the large number in each round during a big hit game The upper limit winning number of game balls to the winning opening may be made different depending on the set value. Further, the opening pattern of the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening during the big hit game may be made different depending on the set value. Thereby, the number of prize balls awarded in the big hit gaming state can be varied according to the set value, so that the entertainment of the game can be improved.

  A movable body may be provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a movable body effect of operating the movable body during a game such as a variable display or a big hit game may be executable. When such a movable body is provided, it is possible to execute variable winning initialization control such as confirming the advance / retreat operation of the regulating member inside the second big winning opening, and to confirm the operation of the movable body and move the movable body to the initial position. The movable body initialization control to be moved can be executed by the effect control CPU 120, and when a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, or when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, (When a new set value is set to 1), the variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be executed. Thereby, the new set value can be accurately reflected on the operation of the regulating member and the movable body. The variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be executed after execution of step Sa13 or step Sa14 in the main processing. For example, the variable winning initialization control or the movable body initialization control may be executed at the timing when the first timer interrupt occurs. If the variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control can be executed, the variable winning initialization control may be started at a timing before the movable body initialization control. Alternatively, the variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be started simultaneously, and the variable winning initialization control may be ended before the movable body initialization control. This makes it possible to appropriately perform the initialization control relating to the winning of the game ball.

  The determination ratio of the super reach variation pattern may differ depending on the set value. The specific variable display pattern may be a variation pattern different from the variation pattern of the super reach. The setting of which variation pattern is the specific variable display pattern can be arbitrarily changed according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIGS. 8-23 and 8-24 show modified examples in which the installation positions of the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are set to the side of the main board 11. By providing the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated unless a game machine staff or the like opens the game machine frame 3. is there. In addition, by providing a security cover 500A that covers the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the pachinko machine when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed is provided. The illegal setting value change of the gaming machine 1 may be prevented.

  The security cover 500A is attached to the lower right side of the outer frame 1a. Accordingly, when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security switch 500A approaches the lock switch 51 and the setting switch 52 from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the lock switch 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated. It can be. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the security switch 500A is separated from the lock switch 51 and the setting switch 52, so that the lock switch 51 and the setting switch 52 can be operated. The lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are covered with a cover body from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the cover body is further covered with the security cover 500A from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. By covering from the back side of the gaming machine 1 (the cover body is pressed forward by the security cover 500A), the illegal change of the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed is stronger. May be prevented. When the setting switch 52 is replaced with the clear switch AK001, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with a cover or a security cover 500A instead of the setting switch 52.

  FIG. 8-25 shows a modification in which a security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the security cover 500B may be slidably provided in the left-right direction with respect to the gaming machine frame 3. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the right end of the security cover 500B is sandwiched between the right side of the outer frame 1a and the gaming machine frame 3, and the security cover 500B is connected to the lock switch 51 and the setting switch 52 on the rear side. What is necessary is just to make it immovable from the state covered from the side. Then, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be made operable by sliding the security cover 500B. When the setting switch 52 is substituted by the clear switch AK001, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with the security cover 500B instead of the setting switch 52.

  FIG. 8-26 shows a modification in which the security cover is provided rotatably. Specifically, the left end of the security cover 500C may be pivotally supported so as to be rotatable with respect to a vertically-oriented pivot provided on the back side of the gaming machine frame 3. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the right end of the security cover 500C is sandwiched between the right side of the outer frame 1a and the gaming machine frame 3, and the security cover 500C is set to the lock switch 51. What is necessary is just to make it impossible to move from the state where the changeover switch 52 is covered from the back side. When the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be operated by rotating the security cover 500C around a pivot (not shown). When the setting switch 52 is replaced with the clear switch AK001, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with a security cover 500C instead of the setting switch 52.

  When these security covers are provided so as to overlap the main substrate 11, the security covers are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the mounting surface of the main substrate 11 and the visibility of the sealing seal are not hindered. Is also good.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 may have different gaming properties, such as a probable variable loop type and a V probable type. In the case of the probability-variable loop type or the V-variable type, a function (so-called small hit time) capable of increasing the number of balls by a small hit for opening the first big winning opening after a specific big hit game ends. You may have it. In the case of a gaming machine having a function of a small hit time, the big hit probability is changed according to the set value (for example, in the case of the set value 1, the big hit probability of the normal state is set to 1/200, and the big hit probability of the stable change state is set. Is set to 1/20, and in the case of the set value 2, the jackpot probability of the normal state is set to 1/300 and the jackpot probability of the probable change state is set to 1/30. Since the initial hit probability is higher than when other set values are set, it is easier to enter the small hit time, but the probability of a big hit during the probability change control is also higher than when other set values are set. , The small hit time is likely to end. In other words, when a small hit time function is installed in a pachinko gaming machine capable of executing the probability change control, the smaller the setting value of the big hit probability in the normal state, the higher the probability of entering the small hit time, while The hit time is difficult to continue, and the smaller the set value with the lower big hit probability in the normal state, the lower the probability of entering the small hit time, while the smaller hit time is more likely to continue. For this reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the probability variable loop type or the V probability variation type, not only can the width of the game be expanded by installing the function of the small hit time, but also a set value with a low big hit probability is set. Even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used, it is possible to cause the player to have an intention to play a game.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the V-variable type, the opening pattern of the large winning port for determining the variable control in the round for determining the variable control is changed to the long-term opening pattern (the opening pattern in which the gaming balls can easily enter the large winning port for determining the variable control). ) And a short-term opening pattern (an opening pattern in which a game ball is unlikely to win a large winning opening for probability change control), the long-term opening pattern and the short-term opening pattern are determined according to the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this case, the actual probability of intrusion (the probability of a large probability of change) may be made different by determining at different rates.

  A jackpot type determination gate is provided at a predetermined position in the game area (for example, a position above the second big winning opening), and the game ball passes through the jackpot type determination gate after the special symbol is derived and displayed in a combination indicating the jackpot. At this timing, the random number value MR2 for the jackpot type determination may be extracted, and the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type determined based on the extracted value of MR2 may be started. When the jackpot type determination gate is provided in this manner, the jackpot type is determined at a different rate according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, 16 round jackpot and 4 round jackpot are provided as jackpot types). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the ratio controlled in the jackpot gaming state of the 16 round big hit is the highest, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is 3, the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state of the 16 round jackpot is the lowest).

  The lock switch 51, the setting changeover switch 52, or the clear switch AK001 may be provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 3. When the lock switch 51, the setting switch 52, or the clear switch AK001 is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 3 as described above, the lock switch 51, the setting switch 52, or the clear switch AK001 is provided on the hitting operation handle or the hitting device. Providing it in the vicinity makes it impossible to operate unless the glass door frame 3a is opened.

  What is determined at a different rate in accordance with the set value may be at least as long as it is determined whether or not to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, such as at least a jackpot gaming state, The variation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Depending on the set value, determine whether the fluctuation display result is "big hit" or "small hit" at a different rate, but at the same rate regardless of the set value, big hit type In determining the change pattern or the change pattern, the change ratio of the change pattern is not changed even if the set value is changed. Therefore, the set value is not suggested to the player or the like, or it is difficult to suggest the set value. When determining not only the fluctuation display result but also the fluctuation pattern at a different ratio according to the set value that is set, the change ratio of the fluctuation pattern is changed when the setting value is changed, so that the player etc. A set value can be suggested or is easily suggested.

  As described above, in the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, the CPU 103 executes the main processing in accordance with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, so that the operation by the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 is performed. According to the detection result, it is possible to control to any of the setting change state, the setting confirmation state, the initialization state, and the power failure recovery state. The setting change state is a change permission state in which the change of the set value by the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 is permitted. The setting check state is a state in which the set value set on the display monitor 29 can be checked. The initialization state is a state in which the storage contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared), unlike the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. The power failure recovery state is a state in which the contents stored in the RAM 102 have been restored to the contents at the time of the power failure.

  FIG. 8-27 shows an example of state control according to switch detection at power-on. If the lock switch 51 is on and the clear switch AK001 is on when the power supply is started by turning on the power based on the operation of the power switch AK002, the setting change process is performed in step Sa13 of the main process. By being executed, the setting change state is controlled. In this case, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized in step Sa9 of the main process. On the other hand, if the lock switch 51 is on and the clear switch AK001 is off when the power supply is started, the setting confirmation process is executed in step AKS002 of the main process, so that the setting is performed. Controls the confirmation state. In this case, step Sa9 of the main process is not executed, and the contents stored in the RAM 102 are restored to the contents at the time of the power failure by steps Sa41 and Sa42. If the lock switch 51 is off and the clear switch AK001 is on when the power supply is started, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized in step Sa9 of the main process, thereby setting the initialization state. Control. In this case, since the lock switch 51 is determined to be off in step Sa12 of the main process, the setting change process in step Sa13 is not executed. If the lock switch 51 is off and the clear switch AK001 is off when the power supply is started, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are restored to the contents at the time of the power failure by steps Sa41 and Sa42 of the main processing. In this way, the power outage recovery state is controlled. In this case, since the lock switch 51 is determined to be off in step AKS001 of the main processing, the setting confirmation processing in step AKS002 is not executed. As described above, in accordance with the power-on operation using the power switch AK002, the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 detect various operations such as on / off switching operation and depressing operation by game room attendants and the like. The state can be controlled according to the detection results.

(Explanation of the means relating to the above-mentioned characteristic portion)
The above embodiment includes the following features. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine capable of setting a set value, for example, there is a pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a dedicated set value display unit for displaying the set value set is provided to prevent an increase in the cost of the gaming machine. There was a problem that can not be. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion for solving this problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing of Sa13) which can be set to any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any one of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value,
A game in which a game value is given based on a game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a first winning opening, a second winning opening, etc.). Value providing means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a jackpot opening process);
Information display means (for example, display monitor 29, etc.) capable of displaying information related to the game value provided by the game value provision means;
With
The information display means can display the set value set by the setting means (for example, display by the first display unit 29A of the display monitor 29).
According to this means 1, it is not necessary to separately provide a display device for displaying the set value, so that an increase in the cost of the game machine is prevented. Can be.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 of the above feature,
The information display means can display predetermined information corresponding to a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a connection ratio, a winning combination, a base, etc. on the display monitor 29).
The gaming machine described in Means 1 is described. In Means 2, the state of the gaming machine can be easily grasped.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 of the above feature,
The information display means can sequentially display predetermined information of each set value (for example, the display monitor 29 displays the short-term ratio, the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1, and the base 2). (A part displayed sequentially at intervals of 5 seconds, etc.)
A gaming machine described in Means 2 is described. In Means 3, predetermined information of each set value can be easily grasped.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 of the above feature,
The information display means can display predetermined information of each set value in different display modes (for example, in the case of the set value 1, the connection ratio, the combination ratio and the base are displayed in red, and in the case of the set value 2, the connection ratio, (The part where the combination ratio, combination ratio, and base are displayed in blue is displayed in the setting value 3 with the combination ratio and the base displayed in green.)
A gaming machine described in the means 2 or 3 is described. In the means 4, it is possible to easily grasp predetermined information of each set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 of the above feature,
Operating means (for example, a display changeover switch 30);
The information display means can switch and display predetermined information of each set value in accordance with the operation of the operation means (for example, by operating the display changeover switch 30, the connection ratio of the set value 1, the combination ratio, the base The display is switched to the display of the connection ratio, the duty ratio and the base of the set value 2, and the display of the connection ratio, the duty ratio and the base of the set value 2 is changed to the display of the connection ratio, the duty ratio and the base of the set value 3. Switching part)
A gaming machine according to any one of the means 2 to 4 is described. In the means 5, predetermined information of each set value can be easily grasped.

As a gaming machine of the means 6 of the above-mentioned characteristic portion,
The information display means displays predetermined information corresponding to the set value set by the setting means (for example, a portion which can display only the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base corresponding to the set value set) Such)
A gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to 5 is described, and in this means 6, a task of easily confirming predetermined information of a set value set by the setting means is easily performed. be able to.

As a gaming machine of the means 7 of the above-mentioned characteristic portion,
Calculation means capable of calculating information on the game value provided by the game value provision means (for example, the CPU 103 has a connection ratio (%), a combination ratio (%), a total connection ratio (%), a combination A part for calculating the base (base 1 (%)) calculated based on the ratio (%) and the previous 60000 prize balls, and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls Etc.)
The calculating means can calculate the information individually for each set value (for example, a general winning prize ball, a first starting opening prize ball, a normal electric prize ball, a special electric prize ball, a total prize ball, The driving total is stored in a storage area (ring buffer) corresponding to the set value that has been set, and can be individually calculated for each set value.
The information display means displays only the information corresponding to any one of the set values (for example, a connection ratio corresponding to any one of the set values 1 to 3; Role ratio, part that can display only the base, etc.)
A gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6 described above is described. In this means 7, information can be easily checked.

As a gaming machine of the means 8 of the above-mentioned characteristic portion,
Calculation means capable of calculating information on the game value provided by the game value provision means (for example, the CPU 103 has a connection ratio (%), a combination ratio (%), a total connection ratio (%), a combination A part for calculating the base (base 1 (%)) calculated based on the ratio (%) and the previous 60000 prize balls, and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls Etc.)
The calculation means can individually calculate the individual information that is the information corresponding to each set value, and can calculate the composite information that is the information according to two or more different set values (for example, The sum of two or more setting values, such as the ratio, the winning ratio, the base, etc.),
The information display means is capable of displaying the information and the composite information (for example, a part which calculates a ratio, a winning ratio, and a base at two or more set values and enables display on the display monitor 29).
A gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7 is described. According to this means 8, the state of the gaming machine can be grasped in more detail.

(Explanation of production control for other features)
FIGS. 8 to 28 are flowcharts illustrating an example of an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the embodiment including the above-described feature unit. This effect control main process may be performed as long as it can be executed in place of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes an initialization process (step AKS011) similar to that of the above embodiment, and then, unlike the above embodiment, executes a power-on command process (step AKS011). AKS012). After executing the power-on command processing, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step AKS013), and if it is off (step AKS013; No), as in the above embodiment, The process of step AKS013 is repeatedly executed, and the process stands by. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on (step AKS013; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step AKS014), the command analysis process (step AKS015), and the effect control process process (Step AKS016) and effect random number update processing (Step AKS017) are sequentially executed.

  FIG. 8-29 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in step AKS012 as power-on command processing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 acquires the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 as the received command when the power supply is started, and determines the content thereof. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the received command is a command 9000H serving as a RAM clear notification command (step AKS021). If the received command is not the RAM clear notification command (step AKS021; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a command 9200H that is a power failure recovery designation command (step AKS022). If it is not a power failure recovery stop command (step AKS022; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a command 9100H serving as a setting change start command (step AKS023). If it is not a setting change start command (step AKS023; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a command 9400H serving as a setting confirmation start command (step AKS024). If the command is not a setting confirmation start command (step AKS024; No), the process returns to step AKS021, and repeats steps AKS021 to AKS024 until a reception command is acquired, and waits. If a predetermined error determination time elapses without obtaining the received command, it may be notified that an error of the received command has occurred.

  If it is determined in step AKS023 that the received command is a setting change start command (step AKS023; Yes), a game stop state start process is executed (step AKS025). In the game stop state start time process, the progress of the effect control accompanying the progress of the game is stopped in response to the game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state start processing executed in step AKS025, for example, among the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for the commands other than the setting change end command, the setting for invalidating the reception is performed. do it. In this way, for example, various effects such as a variable display of effect symbols and an effect display during a big hit may be restricted so as not to be executed in accordance with the progress of the game. When the setting change start command is received, when the game is in the game stop state corresponding to the setting change state, various effects accompanying the progress of the game that can be executed when the game is not in the game stop state are not executed. Is set as the range or limit.

  After executing the game stop state start process in step AKS025, control for starting the setting change notification is performed (step AKS026). For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display a setting change notification screen based on control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting change notification, and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output a setting change notification sound. Then, the control may be performed. After the control of the setting change notification is started, it is determined whether or not the setting change is to be ended (step AKS027). In step AKS027, when the command received from main board 11 is command 93XXH serving as a setting change end command, it may be determined that the setting change is to be ended. If the setting change end command is not received and the setting change is not ended (step AKS027; No), step AKS027 is repeatedly executed and the process stands by.

  When it is determined in step AKS027 that the setting change is to be ended (step AKS027; Yes), control for ending the setting change notification is performed (step AKS028). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control so as to end the display of the setting change notification screen on the effect display device 5 and end the output of the setting change notification sound by the speakers 8L and 8R. After the control of the setting change notification ends, the game stop state end processing is executed (step AKS029). In the processing at the time of ending the game stop state, a setting may be made to enable the command reception from the main board 11 which has been invalidated. Thus, the regulation may be released so that various effects associated with the progress of the game, such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during a big hit, can be executed.

  Thereafter, control for executing the initialization notification is performed (step AKS030). For example, the effect control CPU 120 initializes the effect display device 5 based on the control data prepared in advance corresponding to the initialization notification during an initialization notification period until a predetermined initialization notification time elapses. Control may be performed so that the notification screen is displayed and the initialization notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Even when it is determined in step AKS021 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command (step AKS021; Yes), the process may proceed to step AKS030 to execute the initialization notification. In this way, it is possible to notify that the storage contents of the RAM 102 have been initialized (cleared) in response to the detection of the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 in response to the start of power supply by turning on the power.

  When it is determined in step AKS024 that the received command is a setting confirmation start command (step AKS024; Yes), a game stop state start process is executed (step AKS031). In the game stop state start process executed in step AKS031, for example, among the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for the commands other than the setting confirmation end command, the setting for invalidating the reception is performed. do it. In this way, for example, various effects such as a variable display of effect symbols and an effect display during a big hit may be restricted so as not to be executed in accordance with the progress of the game. When the setting confirmation start command is received, when the game is in the game stop state corresponding to the setting confirmation state, various effects accompanying the progress of the game that can be executed when the game is not in the game stop state are not executed. Is set as the range or limit.

  After the game stop state start process is executed in step AKS031, control for starting setting confirmation notification is performed (step AKS032). For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display a setting confirmation notification screen based on control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting confirmation notification, and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output a setting confirmation notification sound. Then, the control may be performed. After the control of the setting confirmation notification is started in this way, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation is to be ended (step AKS033). In step AKS033, when the command received from the main board 11 is the command 9401H serving as the setting confirmation end command, it may be determined that the setting confirmation ends. If the setting confirmation end command has not been received and the setting confirmation has not been completed (step AKS033; No), step AKS033 is repeatedly executed to wait.

  When it is determined in step AKS033 that the setting confirmation is to be ended (step AKS033; Yes), control is performed to end the setting confirmation notification (step AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control so as to end the display of the setting confirmation notification screen on the effect display device 5 and terminate the output of the setting confirmation notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this way, after the control of the setting confirmation notification is completed, the game stop state end processing is executed (step AKS035). Thus, the regulation may be released so that various effects associated with the progress of the game, such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during a big hit, can be executed.

  Thereafter, control for executing the power failure restoration notification may be performed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display a power failure recovery notification screen based on control data prepared in advance corresponding to the power failure recovery notification, and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output a power failure recovery notification sound. Then, control may be performed. Even when it is determined in step AKS022 that the received command is a power failure recovery designation command (step AKS022; Yes), power failure recovery notification may be executed. In these cases, if it is possible to notify that the content stored in the RAM 102 has been restored to the content at the time of the power failure in response to the case where the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is not detected with the start of power supply by turning on the power, Good.

  FIG. 8-30 shows control priorities with respect to notification and screen display by effect control in the present embodiment. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state with the start of power supply upon power-on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 executes the game stop state start processing in steps AKS025 and AKS031 of the power-on command processing. After the game stop state start process is executed, the reception of a command different from the setting change end command or the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and regulation is exercised so that control relating to normal effects is not executed. Therefore, the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification is the highest priority among the priorities related to the effect control. For example, the priority AKP02 of the power saving function setting screen or the like is lower than the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. The power saving function setting screen is displayed when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (game machine frame 3) is set to a predetermined position as a specific position. This is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device 5 in order to enable setting of presence / absence, type, current date and time by RTC, and the like. Since the priority AKP03 for the magnet error notification and the like is lower than the priority AKP02 for the power saving function setting screen and the like, the priority AKP03 is lower than the priority AKP01 for the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. Since the priority AKP0Z of the normal game screen corresponding to the progress of the game at the normal time is the lowest priority among the priorities related to the effect control, the priority AKP01 is lower than the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. Degree.

  As described above, the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification is higher than the priority AKP02 of the power saving function setting screen or the like. When the setting is changed or the control for starting the setting confirmation notification is performed in step AKS032, the switch position of the output amount changeover switch is temporarily switched to the specific position before the setting change or the setting confirmation is completed. Even if the output amount changeover switch is switched, the display of the power saving function setting screen is not started. In this way, the display related to the set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the setting change notification screen and the setting confirmation notification screen is displayed in preference to the display related to the output amount of the effect or the output control such as the power saving function setting screen. Thereby, the display relating to the set value is appropriately performed, so that it is possible to prevent the trouble in the work of changing the set value.

(Explanation of Modifications Related to Effect Control in Other Features)
FIG. 8-31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an effect control main process executed in a modification in which a setting confirmation process can be executed during a game. The set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to a form that can be checked when the power is turned on, and the check of the set value may be executable during the game. In this case, after the CPU 103 starts the process after step Sa16 in the main process, the game machine frame 3 is opened by a game room attendant or the like, and a switching operation of turning on the lock switch 51 is performed. When the operation is detected, the display monitor 29 causes the first display unit 29A to display the current set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1. This display is not changed even if the setting changeover switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 is pressed down by a game room attendant or the like, and serves as a display for confirming the current set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. I have. When the execution of the setting confirmation process is started during the game, a setting confirmation state is set in which the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is issued from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Is transmitted. When the execution of the setting confirmation processing ends, the setting confirmation state ends, and a command 9401H serving as a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the effect control main process in the modified example, after performing the effect random number updating process in step AKS017, the in-progress setting confirmation process (step AKS01A) is performed, and then the process returns to step AKS013.

  FIG. 8-32 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step AKS01A as the ongoing setting confirmation process. For example, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting check is being displayed on the display monitor 29 so that the set value can be checked (step AKS051). In step AKS051, for example, after the control in step AKS058 is performed, it may be determined that the setting is being confirmed during the period until the control in step AKS060 is performed. If the setting is not being confirmed (step AKS051; No), it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation start command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step AKS052). At this time, when the setting confirmation start command is received (step AKS052; Yes), it is determined whether or not the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in progress (step AKS053). In step AKS053, after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted from the main board 11, it is determined that the game is not in progress in a period until the first variation start command or the second variation start command is received, In other periods, it may be determined that the game is in progress.

  When it is determined in step AKS053 that the game is in progress (step AKS053; Yes), the in-progress setting confirmation flag is set to an on state (step AKS054). The in-progress setting confirmation flag is a flag indicating that a setting confirmation start command has been received during the progress of the game. If it is determined in step AKS052 that the setting confirmation start command has not been received (step AKS052; No), or if the in-progress setting confirmation flag is turned on in step AKS054, the waiting for the customer transmitted from the main board 11 is performed. It is determined whether or not a demonstration designation command has been received (step AKS055). At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not been received (step AKS055; No), the ongoing setting confirmation processing ends.

  If it is determined in step AKS055 that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been received (step AKS055; Yes), it is determined whether or not the ongoing setting confirmation flag is ON (step AKS056). At this time, if the in-progress setting confirmation flag is off (step AKS056; No), the in-progress setting confirmation process ends. On the other hand, when the in-progress setting confirmation flag is on (step AKS056; Yes), the in-progress setting confirmation flag is cleared and turned off (step AKS057), and control for starting the setting confirmation notification is performed. (Step AKS058). Even when it is determined in step AKS053 that the game is not in progress (step AKS053; No), the process proceeds to step AKS058 to perform control to start setting confirmation notification. Thereby, when the setting confirmation start command is received during the progress of the game, the setting confirmation notification can be started after the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received.

  If it is determined in step AKS051 that the setting check is being performed (step AKS051; Yes), it is determined whether a setting check end command has been received (step AKS059). At this time, if the setting confirmation end command has not been received (step AKS059; No), the ongoing setting confirmation processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting confirmation end command has been received (step AKS059; Yes), control for ending the setting confirmation notification is performed (step AKS060).

  By performing such a setting confirmation process in progress, when the setting value set by executing the setting confirmation process during the game is displayed on the display monitor 29, on the side of the effect control board 12, After receiving the customer waiting demonstration display command transmitted from the main board 11, the display of the setting confirmation notification screen and the output of the setting confirmation notification voice can be started. Thereby, when the set value can be confirmed during execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game, it is possible to prevent the in-progress effect from being stopped, thereby preventing inconvenience due to the confirmation of the set value.

  In the case where the main board 11 performs the setting confirmation processing during the game, the setting confirmation state may be controlled after the customer waiting demonstration designation command can be transmitted. In this case, for example, a setting confirmation start command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 together with the customer waiting demonstration designation command. Alternatively, instead of transmitting the setting confirmation start command together with the customer waiting demonstration designation command, a dedicated command corresponding to the setting confirmation during the game is transmitted, and after the progress of the game is completed, the set value which is set May be controlled in a state in which can be checked.

  Alternatively, the set values that are set are displayed on the display monitor 29 provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and there is no need for the effect display device 5 to perform display corresponding to the set values. Therefore, when performing the setting confirmation process during the game, the display monitor 29 does not transmit a setting confirmation start command or the like from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, and the display that can confirm the setting value is displayed. Control for starting may be performed. In this case, on the effect control board 12, control by the effect control CPU 120 or the like may be performed so that the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game is continued.

  In addition to the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification, the setting change completion notification and the setting confirmation completion notification may be made executable. For example, in the power-on command processing, the control change in step AKS028 ends the setting change notification, starts the setting change end notification with the start of the setting change end notification period, and ends with the end of the setting change end notification period. The setting change end notification may be ended. In the power-on command processing, the setting confirmation notification is terminated by the control in step AKS034, the setting confirmation termination notification is started with the start of the setting confirmation termination notification period, and the setting confirmation termination notification period is terminated. The setting confirmation end notification may be ended.

  In the setting change notification, control may be performed such that the setting change notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R without displaying the setting change notification screen on the effect display device 5. In the setting confirmation notification, control may be performed so that the setting confirmation notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R without displaying the setting confirmation notification screen on the effect display device 5. Alternatively, in the setting change notification, in addition to the display of the setting change notification screen and the output of the setting change notification sound, or in place of part or all, a part or all of the light emitting members of the game effect lamp 9 or the game effect lamp 9 Control may be performed such that an arbitrary light-emitting member such as an information lamp provided separately from the device emits light in a predetermined setting change notification mode. In the setting confirmation notification, in addition to the display of the setting confirmation notification screen and the output of the setting confirmation notification sound, or instead of part or all, instead of part or all of the game effect lamp 9, part of the game effect lamp 9 Alternatively, control may be performed such that all light-emitting members or an arbitrary light-emitting member such as a notification lamp provided separately from the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a predetermined setting confirmation notification mode. As described above, the setting change notification only needs to be able to notify that the setting value can be changed using an arbitrary effect device or an effect device different from the effect device. The setting confirmation notification may be any notification device or any notification device that is different from the rendering device, as long as the notification that the setting value can be confirmed is performed. Note that the present invention is not limited to the mode in which the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification are performed, and may be one in which one or both of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification are not performed.

  The command 93XXH serving as the setting change end command and the command 9401H serving as the setting confirmation end command are not limited to the form prepared, and a common setting end command is used as the setting change end command and the setting check end command. May be used. In this case, in the power-on command processing, in step AKS027, it is determined that the setting change is completed when the setting end command is received, and in step AKS033, the setting confirmation is ended when the setting end command is received. Then, it may be determined.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 71AK)
FIG. 8-33 shows a configuration example of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 regarding the characteristic portion 71AK of the present embodiment. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may be provided on the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the upper right portion of the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 can be operated from the outside via an opening formed in a board case accommodating the effect control board 12. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may be a rotary switch capable of detecting a predetermined operation such as a switch changeover operation for initializing a predetermined effect output or the like. The effect output initially set by the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 only needs to include at least the volume of the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, the light emission amount of the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may be included. For example, when the game room staff releases the gaming machine frame 3, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 becomes operable. As described above, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is a condition that the initial setting of the effect output can be changed when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. The output amount switch 71AK001 initially sets the effect output to one of a plurality of stages. Further, depending on the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, it is switched using the stick controller 31A or the like whether to permit or prohibit the effect output change adjustment by the player. The effect control CPU 120 may store the data indicating the effect output setting in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 as output setting information.

  As shown in FIG. 8-33 (B), the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 has a total of 16 channels from “0” to “F”, and the knob 71AK002 is turned by the operation of turning the knob 71AK002. The corresponding switch position can be switched. In the present embodiment, the sound volume is initially set to one of six levels according to whether the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is “0” to “F”, and the sound volume is adjusted by the player. Whether to permit is switched. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is connected to the effect control CPU 120 directly or via a predetermined circuit, and a changeover switch signal indicating the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is input to the effect control CPU 120 to correspond to the channel. The switch position can be specified.

  FIG. 8-34 shows the initial setting control 71AKC01 such as effect output according to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. In the initial setting control 71AKC01, for example, when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is “5”, the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is determined according to “volume 6 (maximum)”. The upper limit sound volume is initially set to “97.0”, and is controlled so that the sound volume setting (adjustment) by the player is possible (permitted). The volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is not limited, and the output amount of an arbitrary effect device such as the light amount of the game effect lamp 9 may be initially set according to the switch position of the output amount switch 71AK001. . When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is any one of “6” to “F”, the volume setting (adjustment) by the player becomes impossible (prohibited), and the effect is produced by the initially set effect output. Is executed. Further, in response to the case where the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is “F”, a setting screen such as a power saving function can be displayed on the effect display device 5, and the presence or absence and type of the power saving function (power saving mode), and The value indicating the current date and time can be set (changed) by the RTC 126.

  As described above, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is provided on the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted. In addition, it is possible to control the output amount of the effect to one of a plurality of stages. The effect control CPU 120 executes a process for controlling the output amount of the effect to one of a plurality of stages based on a switch signal capable of specifying the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001.

  FIG. 8-35 shows an execution example of the setting change notification, the setting confirmation notification, and the initialization notification with respect to the characteristic unit 71AK. In this execution example, as shown in FIG. 8-35 (A), as a setting change notification, a setting change notification screen 71AKD01 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and a setting change notification sound 71AKE01 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. . As the setting confirmation notification, as shown in FIG. 8-35 (B), a setting confirmation notification screen 71AKD02 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and a setting confirmation notification sound 71AKE02 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As the initialization notification, as shown in FIG. 8-35 (C), the initialization notification screen 71AKD03 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and the initialization notification sound 71AKE03 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In the characteristic unit 71AK, similarly to the above embodiment, the power-on command processing is executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main processing. In the power-on command processing, the setting change notification is started by the control in step AKS026, and the setting change notification is ended by the control in step AKS028. Further, the setting confirmation notification is started by the control in step AKS032, and the setting confirmation notification is ended by the control in step AKS034. Further, by the control in step AKS030, the initialization notification starts at the start of the initialization notification period, and ends at the end of the initialization notification period. Note that the setting change notification screen 71AKD01, the setting confirmation notification screen 71AKD02, and the initialization notification screen 71AKD03 are not limited to being displayed on the entire display area of the effect display device 5, but may be part of the display area of the effect display device 5. May be displayed. In addition to the setting change notification, other than the display on the effect display device 5 performed on the effect control board 12 and the audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or in addition to this, the special change notification is performed on the main substrate 11 side. The display on the symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be performed by using a light emission mode different from that during the normal game. According to this, in addition to the notification in the effect display device 5, it is also possible to notify in the special symbol display device, and it is possible to appropriately notify that the setting is being changed.

  The characteristic portion 71AK is provided with an output amount changeover switch 71AK001, and can perform an initial setting such that the effect output such as volume is one of a plurality of stages corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. On the other hand, the audio output in the setting change notification, the setting confirmation notification, and the initialization notification is at the maximum volume that can be output in the pachinko gaming machine 1 irrespective of the initial setting of the volume corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. What is necessary is just to output at a certain "volume 6 (maximum)" (upper limit volume "97.0"). For example, in the setting change notification, the setting change notification sound 71AKE01 for notifying a message “Setting is being changed” is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume. In the setting confirmation notification, a setting confirmation notification sound 71AKE02 that notifies a message “Setting is being confirmed” is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume. In the initialization notification, the initialization notification sound 71AKE03 for notifying the message "initialized" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume.

  As described above, in response to the operation of switching the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, the operation related to the adjustment of the effect output is detected, and based on the detection, the output amount of the effect is controlled to one of a plurality of stages. In the setting change notification serving as the notification regarding the change of the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the output of the setting change notification sound 71AKE01 is performed based on the maximum volume that is the common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation related to the effect output adjustment. . In the setting confirmation notification and the initialization notification, as the output of the setting confirmation notification sound 71AKE02 and the initialization notification sound 71AKE03, the notification may be performed based on the maximum volume which is a common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation related to the effect output adjustment. As described above, since the notification is performed based on the common output amount, it is possible to prevent the illegal act from being performed in accordance with the change or confirmation of the set value and the initialization (clearing) of the stored contents in the RAM 102.

  FIG. 8-36 shows a display example when the player volume adjustment, the power saving function setting, and the like are performed for the characteristic portion 71AK. For example, when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is “0” and the effect output has not been adjusted by the player yet, the volume setting is “volume 1 (minimum)”. FIG. 8-36 (A) shows a player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 displayed on the effect display device 5 corresponding to this case. The player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 includes effect images indicating six memories corresponding to six levels of volume, and changes the display color of each memory according to the current volume. For example, when the volume setting is “volume 1 (minimum)”, one memory is displayed in a first display color (for example, red), and the remaining five memories are displayed in a second display color (for example, white). . At this time, in response to the operation of tilting the operation stick (lever) of the stick controller 31A to the right being detected, the volume setting is changed to “volume 2”, and the first volume is set on the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11. The display color memory is increased by one. In this manner, each time the first operation of tilting the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A in the first direction (right direction, etc.) is detected, a plurality of stages of effects are performed until the effect output setting reaches the maximum. What is necessary is just to change so that the output amount may be increased by one step. On the other hand, each time the second operation of tilting the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A in the second direction (left direction) is detected, the effect output amount in a plurality of stages is set until the effect output setting reaches a minimum. What is necessary is just to change it so that it may decrease by one step.

  When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is “F”, the power saving function and the value of the RTC 126 can be set. FIG. 8-36 (B) shows a power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 displayed on the effect display device 5 corresponding to this case. The power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 includes a display area for setting the power saving function and a display area for setting the value of the current date and time (current time) by the RTC 126. When the power-saving function setting screen 71AKD12 is displayed, the presence or absence and type of the power-saving function (power-saving mode) are determined in response to the operation of operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B detected by the staff at the game hall or the like. Then, a value indicating the current date and time is set (changed) by the RTC 126. The effect control CPU 120 executes processing for setting (changing) the power saving function and the like based on the display of the power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 and detection of the operation of changing each setting. For example, when "power saving mode A" is selected in the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12, the control for activating the power saving function is performed only during the customer waiting demonstration in which the demonstration screen is displayed. Whatever is performed is sufficient. In the case where “power saving mode B” is set to be selected on the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12, for example, the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is displayed not only during the customer waiting demonstration but also during the execution of the variable display. Any control that activates the power saving function, such as reducing the (light emission amount), may be used.

  FIG. 8-37 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 for the characteristic portion 71AK. This effect control main process may be performed as long as it can be executed in place of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of the characteristic unit 71AK, the effect control CPU 120 executes the initialization process (step 71AKS011) and the power-on command process (step 71AKS012), similarly to the above embodiment. The initialization processing of step 71AKS011 is processing corresponding to the initialization processing of step AKS011 in the above embodiment, and the power-on command processing of step 71AKS012 is processing corresponding to the power-on processing of step AKS012 in the above embodiment. Should be fine. After executing the power-on command processing in step 71AKS012, unlike the above-described embodiment, the start-time output switching processing (step AKS013) is executed. Thereafter, similarly to the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step 71AKS014). If it is off (step 71AKS014; No), the process of step 71AKS014 is repeatedly executed. Wait. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on (step 71AKS014; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step 71AKS015), the command analysis process (step 71AKS016), and the effect control process process (Step 71AKS017) and the effect random number updating process (Step 71AKS018) are sequentially executed. Further, in the effect control main processing of the characteristic unit 71AK, the in-progress output change processing (step 71AKS019) is executed, and then the process returns to step 71AKS014.

  FIG. 8-38 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step 71AKS013 as the start-time output switching process. In the start-time output switching process, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the switch position based on the switch signal from the output amount switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS031). At this time, it is determined whether or not the specified switch position is “F” (step 71AKS032). If the switch position is other than “F” (Step 71AKS032; No), control for switching the initial setting of the output amount is performed by adjusting the effect output according to the switch position (Step 71AKS033), and the output at the start is performed. The switching process ends. In step 71AKS033, for example, initial output setting data indicating a switch position corresponding to a channel may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

  If it is determined in step 71AKS032 that the switch position is “F” (step 71AKS032; Yes), control is performed to start setting of the power saving function and the like (step 71AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control such that the effect display device 5 displays the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 based on control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting of the power saving function and the like. After the control for setting the power saving function and the like is started in this way, it is determined whether the setting is completed (step 71AKS035). In step 71AKS035, when the selection of the item indicating "end" is determined on the power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12, it may be determined that the setting is completed. If this setting is not completed (step 71AKS035; No), control corresponding to the setting of the power saving function or the like is performed (step 71AKS036), and the process returns to step 71AKS035. In step 71AKS036, the display on the power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 can be changed according to the detection of the operation of tilting the operation stick (lever) of the stick controller 31A, the detection of the operation of pressing the push button 31B, and the like. Control may be performed as described above.

  If it is determined in step 71AKS035 that the setting has been completed (step 71AKS035; Yes), control for ending the setting of the power saving function and the like is performed (step 71AKS037), and the start-time output switching process ends. In step 71AKS037, for example, the production control CPU 120 stores power saving function data indicating the presence or absence of the power saving function and the type (power saving mode) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the like. Further, when a setting for changing the value of the RTC 126 is performed, data indicating the changed value is set in the RTC 126.

  FIG. 8-39 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in step 71AKS019 as ongoing output change processing. In the in-progress output change process, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a switching permission condition has been satisfied (step 71AKS051). The switching permission condition may be predetermined as a condition for permitting adjustment of the effect output using the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 during execution of the effect control accompanying the progress of the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the switching permission condition may be satisfied when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. If such a switching permission condition is satisfied (step 71AKS051; Yes), the switch position is detected based on the switch signal from the output amount switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS052). Based on this detection result, it is determined whether or not the switch position has been changed (step 71AKS053). For example, the effect control CPU 120 compares the switch position indicated in the initial output setting data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 with the switch position specified from the changeover switch signal, and when the comparison result does not match, It may be determined that the switch position has been changed.

  If it is determined in step 71AKS053 that the switch position has been changed (step 71AKS053; Yes), it is determined whether or not the changed switch position is “F” (step 71AKS054). At this time, if the switch position is other than “F” (Step 71AKS054; No), control for switching the initial setting of the output amount is performed by adjusting the effect output according to the switch position (Step 71AKS055). In step 71AKS055, for example, initial output setting data indicating a switch position corresponding to a channel may be stored (updated) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

  If it is determined in step 71AKS054 that the switch position is "F" (step 71AKS054; Yes), control for starting the setting of the power saving function is performed (step 71AKS056). In this case, processing similar to steps 71AKS034 to 71AKS037 of the output switching processing at the start may be performed. That is, it is determined whether or not the setting has been completed (step 71AKS057). If the setting has not been completed (step 71AKS057; No), control corresponding to the setting of the power saving function or the like is performed (step 71AKS058), and step 71AKS057. Return to Thereafter, when the setting is completed (Step 71AKS057; Yes), control for ending the setting of the power saving function and the like is performed (Step 71AKS058).

  When the switching permission condition is not satisfied in step 71AKS051 (step 71AKS051; No), when the switch position is not changed in step 71AKS053 (step 71AKS053; No), or control is performed in step 71AKS055 or step 71AKS059. After performing, it is determined whether or not the player can adjust the volume or the like based on the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS060). In step 71AKS060, when the current switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is any one of “0” to “5”, the volume setting (adjustment) by the player is possible (permitted). It may be determined that the adjustment by the player is possible. If the adjustment by the player is impossible (prohibited) (step 71AKS060; No), the ongoing output change process ends. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the method of determining whether or not the switching permission condition is satisfied in step 71AKS051, and the switch position may be detected in step 71AKS052 without performing the determination in step 71AKS051.

  If it is determined in step 71AKS060 that the adjustment by the player is possible (step 71AKS060; Yes), it is determined whether an operation for changing the output amount of the effect has been detected (step 71AKS061). In step 71AKS061, for example, when the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 is displayed, the operation of changing the effect output amount in a plurality of stages is detected based on the detection result of the operation of operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. What is necessary is just to determine whether there was. If such an operation is not detected (Step 71AKS061; No), the ongoing output change process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that an operation has been detected (step 71AKS061; Yes), control for adjusting the output amount according to the detection result is performed (step 71AKS062), and the ongoing output change process ends. In step 71AKS062, when an operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected on the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11, update output setting data indicating the changed volume setting and the like are stored (updated) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. You can do it.

(Explanation of Modified Example Regarding Characteristic Part 71AK)
FIG. 8-40 shows a priority of control regarding notification by effect control, screen display, and the like in a modification of the characteristic portion 71AK. The pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to change the setting with the start of power supply by turning on the power. On the other hand, in the case where the power supply is turned on and the power supply is started, when the setting is controlled, the game may be controlled so as not to be in the game stop state. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the game stop state start process in step AKS031 of the power-on command process, and when the setting is in the check state, for example, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is turned off. The input of the changeover switch signal that can specify the switch position may be made valid. In this case, the priority 71AKP11 of the setting change notification is the highest priority among the priorities relating to the effect control, and is higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen or the like. On the other hand, the priority 71AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification is lower than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen or the like. Since the priority 71AKP1Z of the normal game screen corresponding to the progress of the game at the normal time is the lowest priority among the priorities relating to the effect control, the priority AKP11 of the setting change notification and the setting screen for the power saving function etc. The priority is lower than the priority 71AKP12 and the priority AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification.

  As described above, the priority 71AKP11 of the setting change notification is higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen or the like. Therefore, when the control to start the setting change notification is performed in step AKS026 of the power-on command processing, Before the end of the setting change, even if the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is switched to the specific position of “F” even if the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is detected. First, the display of the power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 is not started. On the other hand, the priority 71AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification is lower than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen and the like, so that the control for starting the setting confirmation notification is performed in step AKS032 of the power-on command processing. When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is switched to the specific position “F” before the end of the setting confirmation, the power saving operation is performed based on the detection of the operation of switching the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. The display of the function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 may be started. As described above, when the setting value is changed, the control for switching the initial setting of the effect output amount is not executed, while when the setting value is confirmed, the control for switching the initial setting of the effect output amount may be executed. . Thereby, in order to prevent a trouble in the work of changing the set value, the stage of the output amount of the effect can be appropriately controlled together with the confirmation of the set value.

  By executing the power-on command processing in step 71AKS012 and then performing the start-time output switching processing in step 71AKS013, it is possible to detect the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 in the setting change state. Regardless, the present invention is not limited to the mode in which the control of the output amount of the effect is not performed, and it is determined whether or not the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount switch 71AK001 is detected in the power-on command processing. When the operation is detected, information indicating the switch position can be specified is stored, and after the setting change state is completed, the output amount of the effect is controlled based on the stored information. May be used. For example, in the power-on command processing of the above-described embodiment, if it is determined in step AKS027 that the setting change has not been completed, the switch position is specified based on the changeover switch signal from the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. At this time, information indicating the result of specifying the switch position is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Thereafter, in step 71AKS031 of the start-time output switching process, the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may be specified based on the information indicating the result of specifying the switch position. Also in this case, in the setting change state, it is possible to restrict the control of the output amount of the effect from being performed regardless of the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001.

  Alternatively, in the case of the setting change state, it is determined whether or not the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is "F" or not, and whether or not the switch position is the specific switch position is determined. Alternatively, the control for displaying the setting change notification screen 71AKD01 on the effect display device 5 may be given priority over the control for displaying the power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 on the effect display device 5. In this case, when the setting change notification ends by the control in step AKS028 of the power-on command processing, the control for displaying the setting change notification screen 71AKD01, which has been performed with priority, on the effect display device 5 also ends. It is only necessary that the display device 5 can start displaying the power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12.

  Unlike the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, a detection device capable of detecting an operation performed by the player in a predetermined operation is provided, and a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed based on the detection of the operation by the detection device. Is also good. For example, in addition to or instead of the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001, a setting value change switch capable of detecting an operation such as a switching operation or a pressing operation by the player is provided, and the operation of the player is detected by the setting value changing switch. In the same manner as when the operation is detected by the clear switch AK001, the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed.

  As described above, in the effect control main processing of the characteristic unit 71AK, the power-on command processing is executed in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment in step 71AKS012, and the start-time output switching processing is executed in step 71AKS013. In the power-on command processing, for example, a game stop state start processing is executed in step AKS025 or step AKS031. After the game stop state start process is executed, the reception of a command different from the setting change end command or the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and regulation is exercised so that control relating to normal effects is not executed. In this case, the input of the changeover switch signal that can specify the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is also invalidated, and the adjustment of the effect output according to the switch position and the display of the setting screen 71AKD12 such as the power saving function are not performed. The control based on the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is restricted (prohibited). In this way, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state in which the setting value change is permitted with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, regardless of the detection of the operation related to the adjustment of the output amount of the effect, The execution of the control for switching the initial setting of the output amount is restricted (prohibited). Thereby, the control for changing the set value is given priority over the control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of the effect, so that it is possible to prevent the setting value changing work from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

  The effect control CPU 120 controls the execution of the effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the progress of the game. The effect control CPU 120 is provided on the effect control board. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is provided on the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted. This makes it possible to appropriately switch the initial setting of the output amount of the effect in order to prevent a trouble in the work of changing the set value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

  In the effect control main process of the characteristic unit 71AK, the power-on command process is executed in step 71AKS012, and then the start-time output switching process is executed in step 71AKS013. In the output switching process at the start of step 71AKS013, control for switching the initial setting of the effect output in accordance with the switch position is performed in step 71AKS033, or control for setting the power saving function and the like is performed in steps 71AKS034 to 71AKS037. In this manner, when the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled with the start of the power supply, if the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is detected before the setting change state ends, After the setting change state ends, control is performed to the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. This makes it possible to appropriately switch the initial setting of the output amount of the effect in order to prevent a trouble in the work of changing the set value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

  When the setting change notification is performed by the display screen of the effect display device 5 or the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the setting change notification sound 71AKE01 is output regardless of the initial volume setting corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. Is output at the maximum volume that can be output by the pachinko gaming machine 1. As described above, the notification is performed using the common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, thereby preventing the trouble of the setting value changing operation. Can be prevented from being performed. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

(Explanation of the means relating to the characteristic portion 71AK)
Regarding the above-described feature portion 71AK, a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different degrees of advantage for a player is described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine capable of changing settings related to effects, there is a gaming machine described in, for example, JP-A-2015-29614. However, in the technology described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-29614, while changing a plurality of settings having different degrees of advantage, control when changing the setting of the effect is not considered. Was. For this reason, there is a possibility that the operation of changing to a plurality of set values having different degrees of advantage for the player may be affected. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 71AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing a trouble in an operation of changing a set value,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of performing a game and being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage for the player is different based on the set value;
Setting control means (for example, CPU 103 executing steps Sa6 and Sa12) capable of controlling a change permission state for permitting change of the set value by the setting means with the start of power supply;
Effect-adjustment detecting means (for example, an output-amount changeover switch 71AK001 or the like) capable of detecting an operation relating to adjustment of an effect output amount;
Output amount control means for controlling the output amount of the effect to any one of a plurality of stages based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detecting means (for example, the output switching process at the start of step 71AKS013 or the output change process in progress of step 71AKS019). Effect control CPU 120 to be executed), and
Limiting means for limiting the execution of the control by the output amount control means regardless of the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detecting means when the change is permitted, (for example, step AKS012 is executed as the power-on command processing of step 71AKS012). Effect control CPU 120 or the like for executing processing).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to such a configuration, the execution of the control by the output amount control means is restricted in the change permission state, so that it is possible to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK,
Effect control means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling execution of effects in accordance with the progress of the game;
An effect control board (for example, an effect control board 12 or the like) provided with the effect control means,
The effect control board further includes receiving means (for example, a knob 71AK002 of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 or the like) for receiving an operation detectable by the effect adjustment detecting means.
The game machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 71AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value while appropriately controlling the output amount of the effect.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK,
The output amount control means, when the operation is detected by the effect adjustment detecting means before the change permission state ends, after the change permission state ends, the operation by the effect adjustment detection means Is controlled to the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of (for example, execution of the output switching process at the start in step 71AKS013).
The game machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 71AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a trouble in the work of changing the set value while appropriately controlling the stage of the output amount of the effect.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK,
Unlike an operation performed by a player during a game, an initialization detecting means (for example, a clear switch AK001 or the like) capable of detecting an operation related to initialization of a gaming machine is provided.
In the change permission state, the set value by the setting means can be changed according to the detection of the operation by the initialization detecting means (for example, when a clear switch AK001 is used instead of the setting changeover switch 52, etc.). ),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 3 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a trouble in the operation of changing the set value without separately providing a configuration for changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK,
A change notifying unit (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, etc.) for notifying a change of a set value by the setting unit;
The change notifying means performs the notification (for example, output of the setting change notification sound 71AKE01) with a common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detecting means.
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 4 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a change in the set value due to an improper act and prevent a trouble in a work of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 6 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK,
A setting confirmation control unit (for example, a CPU 103 that executes a setting confirmation process in step AKS002) capable of controlling a setting confirmation state for confirming a setting value set by the setting unit;
The output amount control means includes:
When in the setting confirmation state, it is possible to control the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detecting means (for example, the setting confirmation notification higher than the priority 71AKP13. Priority 71AKP12 etc.),
In the change permission state, the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detecting means is not controlled (for example, the priority of the setting change notification higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the setting screen for the power saving function etc.) 71AKP11 etc.),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 5 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK.
In such a configuration, the stage of the output amount of the effect can be controlled together with the confirmation of the set value, but the stage of the output amount of the effect is not controlled when the set value is changed. Problems can be prevented from occurring.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 72AK)
FIG. 8-41 shows an execution example of the power-on operation by the movable member driven by the operation motors AK011 to AK014. The movable members driven by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 include a first movable member serving as a first movable effect device and a second movable member serving as a second movable effect device. The first movable member stops at the lower left position of the effect display device 5 as the origin position (retreat position). From the retracted position, it rises diagonally to the right, stops at the advanced position overlapping the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 5, and then performs an operation effect of returning to the retracted position again. The first movable member includes a rotation mechanism, first to third split pieces, and a slide mechanism. First to third split pieces are provided at the tip of the rotating mechanism. The first to third split pieces form a predetermined figure at this time, with the time of origin being the united closed state. The rotating mechanism of the first movable member is rotated by the operation motor AK011 from the retracted position, which is the origin position, to the advanced position at the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5. Thus, after the first movable member has advanced to the central portion of the display screen of the effect display device 5, the first to third split pieces are opened by the operating motor AK012. On the other hand, when the first movable member is at the origin position, the first to third fragments cannot be opened. The slide mechanism of the first movable member is slid laterally by the operation motor AK013 after the rotation mechanism of the first movable member and the first to third split pieces are rotated to the advanced position. The slide mechanism of the first movable member sets the rotation mechanism and the first to third split pieces on the left side of the effect display device 5 with the time when the first movable member is at the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5 as the origin position. It is only necessary to be able to slide between the position and the right position.

  The second movable member stops at the position above the effect display device 5 as the origin position (retreat position). After descending from the evacuation position and stopping at the advance position overlapping the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 5, an operation effect of returning to the evacuation position again is performed. The second movable member is lowered by the operation motor AK014 from the evacuation position, which is the origin position, to the advancing position slightly above the display screen center of the effect display device 5, and is raised from the advancing position to the evacuation position. In this way, the second movable member performs an effect operation of simply reciprocating up and down by the driving force of the operation motor AK014.

  The origin position of the rotation mechanism of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK021. The origin positions of the first to third fragments of the first movable member are detected by the origin sensor AK022. The origin position of the slide mechanism of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK023. The origin position of the second movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK024. The operation motor AK011 provides a driving force that enables the rotation mechanism of the first movable member to move between the origin position and the advanced position. The operation motor AK012 provides a driving force that enables the first to third split pieces of the first movable member to move between the closed state and the open state at the origin position. The operation motor AK013 provides a driving force that enables the slide mechanism of the first movable member to move between the origin position and the left or right position of the effect display device 5. The operation motor AK014 provides a driving force that enables the second movable member to move between the origin position and the advanced position.

  The power-on operation by the first movable member and the second movable member includes a long initial operation and a short initial operation. The long initial operation is an initial operation for performing an operation similar to a normal effect operation during execution of an effect accompanying the progress of a game. By performing the long initial operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not a failure occurs in the normal effect operation. The short initial operation is an operation in which a part of the operation in the normal effect operation is omitted, and is a return operation for returning the first movable member and the second movable member to the origin positions.

  When the long initial operation is performed as the power-on operation, first, as shown by a solid arrow 72KM01, the rotation mechanism of the first movable member is moved to the origin position (retreat position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK011. Is moved to the overlapping position on the front side of the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5 which is the advance position from the above. Subsequently, as shown by a broken arrow 72AKM02, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved from the closed state at the origin position to the open state by the driving force of the operation motor AK012. Thereafter, as shown by a broken arrow 72AKM03, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved from the open state to the closed state (origin position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK012. Next, as shown by solid line arrows 72AKM04 to 72AKM06, the slide mechanism of the first movable member is moved from the origin position to the right movable position by the driving force of the operation motor AK013, and then moved to the left movable position. Then return to the origin position. Then, as shown by the solid line arrow 72AKM07, the rotating mechanism of the first movable member is returned from the advanced position to the original position (retreat position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK011. Thereafter, as shown by broken-line arrows 72AKM08 and 72AKM09, the second movable member is moved from the origin position (retreat position) to the advance position by the driving force of the operation motor AK014, and then returned to the origin position (retreat position).

  When the short initial operation is performed as the power-on operation, an operation in which a part of the long initial operation is omitted may be performed. For example, among the operations indicated by the arrows 72AKM01 to 72AKM09, control for executing the operations indicated by the broken-line arrows 72AKM02, 72AKM03, 72AKM08, and 72AKM09 is performed. In this case, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member cannot be moved from the closed state to the open state unless the rotation mechanism of the first movable member moves to the advanced position. Therefore, even in the short initial operation, the operation indicated by the solid arrows 72AKM01 and 72AKM07 is required. Further, in the long initial operation, the operations of the first to third split pieces of the first movable member and the operations of the second movable member are performed so that the moving amount is larger than the operations indicated by the broken arrows 72AKM02, 72AKM03, 72AKM08, and 72AKM09. May be performed. In the short initial operation, the slide mechanism of the first movable member may be moved so that the movement amount is smaller than the operation indicated by the solid arrows 72AKM04 to 72AKM06.

  In the short initial operation, at least a part of the operation may be omitted or added according to the detection result by the origin sensors AK021 to AK024. For example, when the origin sensor AK022 is off and the other origin sensors are on, the operation of moving the first to third split pieces of the first movable member to the closed state, which is the origin position, is indicated by a broken arrow 72AKM03. The operation motor AK012 is driven to move in the direction. Then, when the origin sensor AK022 is turned on, the driving of the operation motor AK012 may be stopped. Thereafter, by moving the rotation mechanism of the first movable member so as to be smaller than the movement amount indicated by the solid arrows 72AKM01 and 72AKM07, the origin sensor AK021 is turned off once and then turned on. The motor AK021 is driven. The second movable member may be moved as indicated by broken-line arrows 72 AKM 08 and 72 AKM 09, and the operation motor AK 024 may be driven so that the origin sensor AK 024 is once turned off and then turned on.

  FIG. 8-42 shows a control pattern used for driving the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014. The pattern data constituting these control patterns may be stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 in advance. In this embodiment, a short initial control pattern 72AKP01, a long initial control pattern 72AKP02, an effect operation A control pattern 72AKP11, and an effect operation B control pattern 72AKP12 are prepared in advance as control patterns of the movable member.

  The short initial control pattern 72AKP01 is a control pattern used to execute a short initial operation. The long initial control pattern AKP02 is a control pattern used to execute a long initial operation. The effect operation A control pattern 72AKP11 is a control pattern used to execute the operation of the movable member included in the first effect executed with the progress of the game, such as a reach effect, for example. The effect operation B control pattern 72AKP12 is a control pattern used to execute the operation of the movable member included in the second effect different from the first effect performed with the progress of the game, such as a notice effect, for example. . As the control pattern of the movable member, more control patterns may be prepared, or some control patterns may be prepared. The effect control CPU 120 may determine the drive contents of the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the pattern data read from the ROM 121, and control the operation of the movable member.

  FIG. 8-43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on command process executed by the effect control CPU 120 regarding the characteristic unit 72AK of the present embodiment. This power-on command processing only needs to be executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main processing in the above embodiment. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 72AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines the command received from the main board 11 as in the above-described embodiment (steps 72AKS001 to 72AKS004). If it is determined in step 72AKS003 that the received command is a setting change start command (step 72AKS003; Yes), a game stop state start process is executed (step 72AKS005), as in the above-described embodiment. Control for starting notification is performed (step 72AKS006).

  After performing the control in step 72AKS006, unlike the above embodiment, the control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS007). For example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the pattern data of the short initial control pattern 72AKP01 from a predetermined area of the ROM 121, and executes the operation control of the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the read data. By executing the control in step 72AKS007, it is possible to perform a control for executing a return operation of returning the movable member to the origin position when the setting change state is set as the change permission state. Note that, even in a period after the process proceeds to step 72AKS008 or later, the control in step 72AKS007 may be continuously performed until the short initial operation period ends, and control for executing the short initial operation may be performed.

  Subsequent to the control in step 72AKS007, it is determined whether or not the setting change is to be ended (step 72AKS008), similarly to the above embodiment. If the setting change is not to be ended (Step 72AKS008; No), Step 72AKS008 is repeatedly executed and the process stands by. If it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is to be ended (step 72AKS008; Yes), control for ending the setting change notification is performed (step 72AKS009), and a game stop state end process is executed (step 72AKS010).

  After executing the game stop state end processing in step 72AKS010, unlike the above-described embodiment, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS011), and the process proceeds to step 72AKS014. In step 72AKS011, for example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the pattern data of the long initial control pattern 72AKP02 from a predetermined area of the ROM 121, and executes the operation control of the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the read data. By performing the control in step 72AKS011, it is possible to perform control for executing a long initial operation as an initial operation of the movable member after the setting change state as the change permission state ends. Further, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 72AKS011, when the setting change state is set as the change permission state, the long initial operation as the initial operation is executed following the short initial operation as the return operation. No control can be performed. Note that, even after the process proceeds to step 72AKS014, the control in step 72AKS011 may be continuously performed until the long initial operation period ends, and the control for performing the short initial operation may be performed.

  If it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command (step 72AKS001; Yes), control for executing a short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS012), and control for executing a long initial operation is performed. (Step 72AKS013). In step 72AKS013, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 72AKS012 is completed. By performing the control in steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013, when the power supply is not controlled to the setting change state as the change permission state with the start of power supply, the long initial operation as the initial operation follows the short initial operation as the return operation. Control for executing the operation can be performed. Note that, even after the process proceeds to step 72AKS014, the control in step 72AKS013 may be continuously performed until the long initial operation period ends, and the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed. The control in step 72AKS011 and the control in step 72AKS013 may be executed by a common process using a common long initial control pattern 72AKP02. Alternatively, the control in step 72AKS011 and the control in step 72AKS013 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02.

  Thereafter, control for executing the initialization notification is performed (step 72AKS014). The control for executing the initialization notification may be performed, and then the control for executing the long initial operation may be performed. If it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, control for executing the initialization notification may be performed before control for executing the short initial operation is performed in step 72AKS012. .

  If it is determined in step 72AKS004 that the received command is a setting confirmation start command (step 72AKS004; Yes), a game stop state start process is executed (step 72AKS015), as in the above-described embodiment. Control for starting notification is performed (step 72AKS016). Subsequently, unlike the above embodiment, control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS017). By performing the control in step 72AKS017, the control for executing the return operation of returning the movable member to the origin position when in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 It can be performed. Note that, even in the period after the process proceeds to step 72AKS018 or later, the control in step 72AKS017 may be continuously performed until the short initial operation period ends, and the control for performing the short initial operation may be performed.

  Subsequent to the control in step 72AKS017, it is determined whether or not the setting check is to be ended, similarly to the above embodiment (step 72AKS018). If the setting check is not completed (Step 72AKS018; No), Step 72AKS018 is repeatedly executed and the process stands by. When it is determined in step 72AKS018 that the setting confirmation is to be ended (step 72AKS018; Yes), control for ending the setting confirmation notification is performed (step 72AKS019), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 72AKS020).

  After executing the game stop state end processing in step 72AKS020, unlike the above-described embodiment, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS021), and the power-on command processing ends. By executing the control in step 72AKS021, after the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed, the long initial operation as the initial operation of the movable member is executed. Control can be performed. In addition, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 72AKS021, the long initial operation as the initial operation is performed after the short initial operation as the return operation when the setting is in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value. Is not performed. Note that, even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 72AKS021 may be continuously performed until the long initial operation period ends, and control for executing the long initial operation may be performed.

  If it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the received command is a power failure restoration designation command (step 72AKS002; Yes), control for executing a short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS022), and control for executing a long initial operation is performed. Is performed (step 72AKS023), and the power-on command processing ends. In step 72AKS023, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 72AKS022 is completed. By performing the control in steps 72AKS022 and 72AKS023, when the power supply is not controlled to the setting change state as the change permission state with the start of power supply, the long initial operation is the initial operation following the short initial operation which is the return operation. Control for executing the operation can be performed. Note that even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 72AKS023 may be continuously performed until the long initial operation period ends, and control for executing the long initial operation may be performed. The control in step 72AKS021 and the control in step 72AKS023 may be executed by common processing using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02. Alternatively, the control in step 72AKS021 and the control in step 72AKS023 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02.

(Explanation of Modified Example Related to Characteristic Part 72AK)
FIG. 8-44 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on command process executed in a modification of the characteristic unit 72AK. In the power-on command processing in this modification, when it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command (step 72AKS001; Yes), the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS010. Thereafter, control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS031), control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS032), and the process proceeds to step 72AKS014 to perform control for executing the initialization notification. If it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the contents stored in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 are initialized (cleared) with the start of power supply by turning on the power. Correspondingly, the control in step 72AKS014 is executed to execute the initialization notification. When this initialization notification is executed, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is executed, so that the control to execute the long initial operation as the initial operation following the short initial operation as the return operation can be performed. . Also, even after executing the game stop state end processing in step 72AKS010, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is executed, so that the setting change state as the change permission state ends and the short-circuit operation in which the return operation is performed. Subsequent to the initial operation, control for executing a long initial operation as an initial operation can be performed. As described above, when the received command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001 and after the game stop state ending process is executed in step 72AKS010, the control in common steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed. In addition, control can be performed to execute the long initial operation following the short initial operation.

  In the power-on command processing in this modified example, when it is determined in Step 72AKS002 that the received command is the power failure recovery designation command (Step 72AKS002; Yes), the game stop state end processing is executed in Step 72AKS020. Thereafter, control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS033), control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS034), and the power-on command processing is terminated. If it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the received command is a power outage restoration designation command, the power stored in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 is restored to the stored content at the time of the power outage with the start of power supply by turning on the power. . When such a power failure recovery is performed, the control in steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is performed, so that the control to execute the long initial operation as the initial operation following the short initial operation as the recovery operation is performed. it can. Further, even after executing the game stop state end processing in step 72AKS020, the control in steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is executed, so that the setting confirmation for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed. After the end of the state, control for executing a long initial operation as an initial operation following a short initial operation as a return operation can be performed. As described above, the control in Steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 common to Steps 72AKS032 and 72AKS034 between the case where it is determined in Step 72AKS002 that the received command is the power failure restoration notification command and the case where the game stop state end processing is executed in Step 72AKS020. In addition, control can be performed to execute the long initial operation following the short initial operation.

  The short initial operation and the long initial operation may be controlled to be performed in response to the initialization notification, or may be controlled without the initialization notification. In addition, the control to execute the short initial operation and the long initial operation may be performed when the power failure recovery notification is performed, or the control to be performed without the power failure recovery notification may be performed. In addition, after the control for executing the effect accompanying the progress of the game is started, the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed based on the establishment of the return operation condition. After the control for executing the effect accompanying the progress of the game is started, the control for executing the long initial operation may be performed based on the establishment of the initial operation condition.

  The configuration of the movable member is not limited to the form including the first movable member and the second movable member, and at least a short initial operation as a return operation and a long initial operation as an initial operation can be performed, In an effect associated with the progress of the game, it is only necessary to be able to operate in a predetermined operation mode. The short initial operation and the long initial operation may be those arbitrarily designated according to the configuration of the movable member.

  As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 72AK, in step 72AKS007, control for executing the short initial operation is performed. In this way, when the power supply is started and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state in which the change of the set value is permitted, the movable members such as the first movable member and the second movable member are moved to the origin position. Control is performed to execute a return operation for returning to. Thereby, when the control for changing the set value is performed, the movable member is returned to the origin position, so that the work for changing the set value is not hindered by the movable member, and the work for changing the set value is performed. Can be prevented from occurring. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 72AK, if it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the control in steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013 is performed, so that the short initial operation as a return operation is performed. Subsequently, control for executing a long initial operation as an initial operation is performed. On the other hand, when the short initial operation is executed by the control in step 72AKS007, the control for executing the long initial operation is not performed until it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is completed. If the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, is performed in the setting change state, the execution of the setting change notification is hindered, and appropriate notification may not be performed. Therefore, control for executing the long initial operation is performed after the setting change state ends, and control for executing the long initial operation is not performed when the setting is in the check state. As described above, when the setting change state is set as the change permission state, the long initial operation, which is the initial operation by the movable member, is not performed, and the setting value change operation is not hindered. It is possible to prevent trouble in changing the value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  If it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is to be ended, control is performed to execute a long initial operation in step 72AKS011. In this way, control is performed to execute only the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, after the setting change state as the change permission state ends. Thus, when it is possible to prevent trouble in changing the set value, it is possible to prevent useless operation of the movable member and reduce a control load for operating the movable member. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  In the power-on command processing according to the modified example of the characteristic unit 72AK, when it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed to perform a return operation. After the short initial operation, control is performed to execute a long initial operation, which is an initial operation. At this time, by performing the control in step 72AKS014, control for executing the initialization notification is performed. In this way, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) in accordance with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, so that when the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized, the initialization notification is given. When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute a short initial operation as a return operation and a long initial operation as an initial operation. Also, when it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is to be ended, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 performs the long initial operation as the initial operation following the short initial operation as the return operation. Perform control. Thereby, in order to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value, the operation of the movable member can be shared, and the control load for operating the movable member can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 72AK, control for executing the short initial operation is performed in step AKS017. In this way, when the power supply is started by turning on the power and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value, the movable members such as the first movable member and the second movable member are moved to the origin position. Control is performed to execute a return operation for returning to. Thereafter, when it is determined in step 72AKS018 that the setting confirmation is to be ended, control is performed in step 72AKS021 to execute the long initial operation. In this way, control is performed to execute the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, after the setting confirmation state ends. If the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, is performed in the setting confirmation state, the execution of the setting confirmation notification is hindered, and appropriate notification may not be performed. Therefore, control for executing the long initial operation is performed after the setting confirmation state ends, and control for executing the long initial operation is not performed when the setting confirmation state is established. Thereby, in order to prevent a trouble in the work of changing the set value, the set value can be easily checked by preventing the long initial operation which is the initial operation by the movable member from being performed when the setting is in the check state. To do. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

(Explanation of the means relating to the characteristic portion 72AK)
Regarding the above-described characteristic portion 72AK, a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different degrees of advantage for a player is described in, for example, JP-A-2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine for returning a movable member to an origin position, for example, there is a gaming machine described in JP-A-2016-221154. However, the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2016-22154 do not consider a case where a change in setting and an operation of a movable member conflict with each other. For this reason, there is a possibility that the operation of changing to a plurality of set values having different degrees of advantage for the player may be affected. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 72AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing a trouble in an operation of changing a set value,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of performing a game and being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage for the player is different based on the set value;
Setting control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the processing of steps Sa6 and Sa12) capable of controlling a change permission state for permitting a change of the set value by the setting means with the start of power supply;
A movable member operable in accordance with the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member operated by the operation motors AK011 to AK013, a second movable member operated by the operation motor AK014, and the like);
At least a movable control means (for example, a step) capable of controlling a return operation (for example, a short initial operation or the like) for returning the movable member to the origin position and an initial operation (for example, a long initial operation) by the movable member. Effect control CPU 120 for executing command processing at power-on of AKS012).
The movable control unit performs control to execute the return operation when the change is permitted (for example, execution of step 72AKS007).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to such a configuration, the return operation of returning the movable member to the origin position is performed in the change permission state, so that it is possible to prevent the trouble in the work of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 relating to the characteristic portion 72AK,
The movable control means,
When the change permission state is not controlled with the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013),
When the change is permitted, the control for executing the initial operation following the return operation is not performed (for example, execution of step 72AKS008).
A gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 72AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the movable member from performing the initial operation when the change is permitted, thereby preventing trouble in the work of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic portion 72AK,
The movable control means performs control for executing only the initial operation after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 72AKS011).
It may be a gaming machine of the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 72AK.
In such a configuration, useless operation by the movable member can be prevented, and at the same time, it is possible to prevent trouble in changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic portion 72AK,
When the gaming machine is initialized with the start of power supply, initialization notifying means for executing initialization notification (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, effect control CPU 120 for executing step 72AKS014). Etc.)
The movable control means,
When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS031, 72AKS032 accompanying execution of step 72AKS014),
After the end of the change permission state, control for executing the initial operation following the return operation is performed (for example, execution of steps 72AKS031, 72AKS032 following steps 72AKS005 to 72AKS010).
It may be a gaming machine of the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 72AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load by sharing the operation of the movable member, and to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 relating to the characteristic portion 72AK,
A setting confirmation control unit (for example, a CPU 103 that executes a setting confirmation process in step AKS002) capable of controlling a setting confirmation state for confirming a setting value set by the setting unit;
The movable control means,
In the setting confirmation state, control for executing the return operation is performed (for example, execution of step 72AKS017),
After the setting confirmation state ends, control for executing the initial operation is performed (for example, execution of step 72AKS021).
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 4 relating to the characteristic portion 72AK.
In such a configuration, when the setting is in the setting confirmation state, the initial operation by the movable member is not performed, so that the set value can be easily confirmed and the trouble of changing the set value can be prevented.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 73AK)
FIG. 8-45 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on command process executed by the effect control CPU 120 regarding the characteristic unit 73AK of the present embodiment. This power-on command processing only needs to be executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main processing in the above embodiment. Regarding the characteristic portion 73AK, the operation content of the short initial operation and the long initial operation may be the same as the content of the characteristic portion 72AK of the present embodiment. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines the command received from the main board 11 as in the above embodiment (steps 73AKS001 to 73AKS004). If it is determined in step 73AKS003 that the received command is a setting change start command (step 73AKS003; Yes), a game stop state start process is executed (step 73AKS005), as in the above-described embodiment. Control for starting notification is performed (step 73AKS006).

  After performing the control in step 73AKS006, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change (step 73AKS007). If the setting change is not to be ended (step 73AKS007; No), step 73AKS007 is repeatedly executed and the process stands by. When it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is to be ended (step 73AKS007; Yes), control for ending the setting change notification is performed (step 73AKS008), and a game stop state end process is executed (step 73AKS009). As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, the control for executing the short initial operation as the return operation of returning the movable member to the origin position is not performed when the setting change state is set as the change permission state. .

  If it is determined in step 73AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command (step 73AKS001; Yes), or after executing the game stop state end processing in step 73AKS009, control to execute the short initial operation is performed. (Step 73AKS010), and then control to execute the long initial operation (Step 73AKS011). In step 73AKS011, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 73AKS010 ends. By performing the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011, when the power supply is not controlled to the setting change state as the change permission state with the start of power supply, the long initial operation as the initial operation follows the short initial operation as the return operation. Can be controlled. Further, when the setting is changed to the setting change state as the change permission state along with the start of the power supply, the control to execute the short initial operation as the return operation after the setting change state ends can be performed. Alternatively, when the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled along with the start of the power supply, after the setting change state ends, the short initial operation as the return operation is followed by the long initial operation as the initial operation. Control for executing the operation can be performed.

  Thereafter, control for executing the initialization notification is performed (step 73AKS012). The control for executing the initialization notification may be performed, and then the control for executing the short initial operation or the long initial operation may be performed. Alternatively, after performing control to execute the short initial operation, control to execute initialization notification may be performed, and then control to execute the long initial operation may be performed.

  If it is determined in step 73AKS004 that the received command is a setting confirmation start command (step 73AKS004; Yes), a game stop state start process is executed (step 73AKS013), similarly to the above-described embodiment. Control for starting notification is performed (step 73AKS014). Subsequently, control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 73AKS015). By executing the control in step 73AKS015, the control for executing the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It can be performed. Note that, even in the period after proceeding to step 73AKS016 or later, the control in step 73AKS015 may be continuously performed until the short initial operation period ends, and control for executing the short initial operation may be performed.

  Subsequent to the control in step 73AKS015, it is determined whether or not to end the setting confirmation (step 73AKS016). If the setting check is not completed (step 73AKS016; No), step 73AKS016 is repeatedly executed and the process stands by. If it is determined in step 73AKS016 that the setting confirmation is to be ended (step 73AKS016; Yes), control for ending the setting confirmation notification is performed (step 73AKS017), and a game stop state end process is executed (step 73AKS018). Next, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 73AKS019), and the power-on command processing ends. By executing the control in step 73AKS019, after the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed, the long initial operation as the initial operation of the movable member is executed. Control can be performed. In addition, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 73AKS019, the long initial operation as the initial operation is performed after the short initial operation as the return operation in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value. Is not performed. Note that, even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 73AKS019 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and control for executing the long initial operation may be performed.

  If it is determined in step 73AKS002 that the received command is a power failure restoration designation command (step 73AKS002; Yes), control to execute a short initial operation is performed (step 73AKS020), and then control to execute a long initial operation. (Step 73AKS021), the power-on command processing ends. In step 73AKS021, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 73AKS020 is completed. By executing the controls in steps 73AKS020 and 73AKS021, when the power supply is not controlled to the setting change state as the change permission state with the start of power supply, the long initial operation as the initial operation follows the short initial operation as the return operation Control for executing the operation can be performed. Note that, even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 73AKS021 may be continuously performed until the long initial operation period ends, and control for executing the long initial operation may be performed. The control in step 73AKS019 and the control in step 73AKS021 may be executed by a common process using a common long initial control pattern 72AKP02, as in the case of the characteristic portion 72AK. Alternatively, the control in step 73AKS019 and the control in step 73AKS021 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02, as in the case of the characteristic portion 72AK.

  FIG. 8-46 shows the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01 displayed during the execution of the setting confirmation notification for the characteristic portion 73AK. On the setting confirmation notifying screen 73AKD01, a character image for notifying a message of "setting is being confirmed" is displayed, and a history of the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be displayed. The history of the setting values may be cumulatively stored on the effect control board 12 side by storing the set value information together with the RTC information in a backup area of the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12, for example. Alternatively, the history of the set values is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control board 12 by storing the set value information in a predetermined area together with the RTC information in a non-volatile storage device (for example, a flash memory) provided separately from the RAM 122. It may be stored cumulatively on the side. Alternatively, the setting value history is stored in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 in a backup area together with the setting value information in the backup area, and a setting confirmation start command is transmitted. By transmitting a set value history command prepared in advance as an effect control command capable of specifying a history of set values from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the effect control board 12 side supplies power. May be specified at the start of the process.

  When the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01 is displayed, if the movable member is stopped at a position deviating from the origin position, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the display screen of the effect display device 5 and grasp the history of the set values. It becomes difficult to do. Therefore, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, the control in step 73AKS015 is executed, so that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, Control is performed to execute a short initial operation as a return operation for returning the member to the origin position. As described above, when the setting is controlled to the setting confirmation state in response to the start of the power supply, unlike the case of being controlled to the setting change state, the short initial operation as the return operation is performed. The history of the set values that can be displayed on the 73AKD01 can be easily grasped by the staff at the game arcade or the like. On the other hand, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 73AKS018, the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 In this case, the control for executing the long initial operation as the initial operation following the short initial operation as the return operation is not performed. As described above, when the setting is controlled in the setting confirmation state in response to the start of power supply, in this setting confirmation state, the short initial operation as the return operation is performed, while the long initial operation as the initial operation is performed. Since the operation is not executed, the long initial operation is executed after the staff of the game hall or the like can easily grasp the history of the set values that can be displayed on the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01. In this case, it is possible to prevent the history of the set values from becoming difficult to grasp due to the movable member.

  It should be noted that the history of the set values may be displayed even when the setting is changed to the changed state. In this case, control may be performed to execute a short initial operation for returning the movable member to the origin position when the setting change state is set as the change permission state. As described above, when the history of the set value can be displayed by being controlled to the setting confirmation state with the start of the power supply, the short initial operation as the return operation is performed, and the set value is set. May be easily grasped.

  As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, when it is determined in step 73AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, control is performed to execute the short initial operation in step 73AKS010. . On the other hand, if it is determined in step 73AKS003 that the received command is the setting change start command, the control for executing the short initial operation is not performed until it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is to be ended. Accordingly, when the control for changing the set value is performed, the short initial operation, which is the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position, is not performed, so that the change operation of the set value is not hindered by the return operation. In this way, it is possible to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, after it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is to be ended, the control in step 73AKS010 is performed, so that the control to execute the short initial operation as the return operation is performed. As described above, after the setting change state as the change permission state ends, the control for executing the short initial operation, which is the return operation, is performed. An operation of appropriately returning the member to the origin position can be performed.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, if it is determined in step 73AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed, and the short initial operation as a return operation is performed. Subsequently, control for executing a long initial operation as an initial operation is performed. At this time, the control for executing the initialization notification is performed by performing the control in step 73AKS012. In this way, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) in accordance with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, so that when the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized, the initialization notification is given. When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute a short initial operation as a return operation and a long initial operation as an initial operation. Also, when it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is to be ended, the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed so that the long initial operation as the initial operation is performed following the short initial operation as the return operation. Perform control. Thereby, in order to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value, the operation of the movable member can be shared, and the control load for operating the movable member can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  On the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01, the history of the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be displayed. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, if it is determined in step 73AK004 that the received command is the setting confirmation start command, control is performed in step 73AKS015 to execute the short initial operation. Thus, when the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01, which is a setting confirmation display capable of displaying the history of the setting values, is being displayed, the control for executing the short initial operation as the return operation is performed. This makes it possible to easily grasp the setting confirmation display when preventing the setting value changing operation from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  The effect control CPU 120 controls the execution of the effect according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, when the command 9100H serving as the setting change start command is received in step 73AKS003, it is determined that the received command is the setting change start command. The command 9100H serving as a setting change start command transmitted from the main board 11 is different from the command 9000H serving as a RAM clear notification command, the command 9200H serving as a power failure recovery designation command, and the command 9400H serving as a setting check start command. In this way, when the power supply is started by turning on the power and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state in which the setting value change is permitted, a command as information different from the case where the setting is not controlled is transmitted. Is done. Thereby, in order to prevent a trouble in the work of changing the set value, it is possible to reduce the control load regarding the effect. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

(Explanation of the means relating to the characteristic part 73AK)
Regarding the above-described characteristic portion 73AK, a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different degrees of advantage for a player is described in, for example, JP-A-2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine for returning a movable member to an origin position, for example, there is a gaming machine described in JP-A-2016-221154. However, the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2016-22154 do not consider a case where a change in setting and an operation of a movable member conflict with each other. For this reason, there is a possibility that the operation of changing to a plurality of set values having different degrees of advantage for the player may be affected. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 73AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing a trouble in the work of changing the set value,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of performing a game and being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage for the player is different based on the set value;
Setting control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the processing of steps Sa6 and Sa12) capable of controlling a change permission state for permitting a change of the set value by the setting means with the start of power supply;
A movable member operable in accordance with the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member operated by the operation motors AK011 to AK013, a second movable member operated by the operation motor AK014, and the like);
At least movable control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing a power-on command process in step AKS012) capable of executing a return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position,
The movable control means,
When the control is not controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, control for performing the return operation is performed (for example, execution of step 73AKS010).
When the change is permitted, control for executing the return operation is not performed (for example, execution of steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to such a configuration, since the return operation of returning the movable member to the origin position is not performed in the change permission state, it is possible to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK,
The movable control means performs control for executing the return operation after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 73AKS010).
The gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 73AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately operate the movable member and to prevent trouble in changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK,
When the gaming machine is initialized with the start of power supply, initialization notification means for executing initialization notification (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, effect control CPU 120 for executing step 73AKS012) Etc.)
The movable control means,
When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute an initial operation by the movable member following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 73AKS010 to 73AKS012),
After the end of the change permission state, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of step 73AKS010 following steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009).
The gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 73AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load by sharing the operation of the movable member, and to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK,
Setting display means (for example, effect display device 5 or the like) capable of executing a setting confirmation display for confirming the set value set by the setting means,
The setting display means can display a history of the set values set by the setting means in the setting confirmation display (for example, display of a setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01).
The movable control means performs control to execute the return operation when the setting confirmation display is being executed, and does not perform control to execute the initial operation (for example, execution of steps 73AKS015 and 73AKS016).
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 3 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK.
In such a configuration, when the setting confirmation display is being executed, the initial operation by the movable member is not executed, so that the setting confirmation display can be easily grasped, and there is a problem in the work of changing the set value. Can be prevented.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK,
Effect control means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing command analysis processing of AKS015) for controlling execution of effects based on information from the game control means,
The game control means transmits information (for example, a command 9100H serving as a setting change start command) that is different from the case where control is not performed in the change permission state when the change permission state is controlled in response to the start of power supply. ,
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 4 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the effect control means and prevent the setting value changing work from being hindered.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 74AK)
FIG. 8-47 shows an example of the configuration of the effect control pattern 74AKP01 used for executing the confirmation effect regarding the characteristic portion 74AK of the present embodiment. The pattern data constituting the effect control pattern 74AKP01 may be stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 in advance. The confirmation effect is controlled to be executable based on establishment of a predetermined confirmation effect condition after power supply is started by turning on the power. The confirmation effect of the characteristic unit 74AK includes the output of a confirmation sound for outputting the sound of the trumpet from the left speaker 8L twice, the output of the confirmation sound for outputting the sound of the drum twice from the right speaker 8R, and the output of the stick controller 31A. Confirmation vibration for driving two sets of vibration motors built in the operation rod (lever) in a predetermined pattern is included. The effect control pattern 74AKP01 includes data indicating the confirmation effect process timer initial value 74AKJ00, and enables setting of the initial value of the check effect process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, for example. In addition, the effect control pattern 74AKP01 includes first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 associated with the confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKJ01, second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02 associated with the confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKJ02, and confirmation. The first confirmation effect control data 74AKD03 associated with the effect process timer determination value 74AKJ03 is included. The first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 is used for controlling the output of a confirmation sound for outputting the sound of the trumpet twice from the left speaker 8L. The second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02 is used to control the output of a confirmation sound that outputs the drum sound twice from the right speaker 8R. The third confirmation effect control data 74AKD03 is used for controlling confirmation vibration for driving two sets of vibration motors built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A in a predetermined pattern. When controlling the execution of the confirmation effect, the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer is updated, and when any one of the confirmation effect process timer determination values 74AKJ01 to 74AKJ03 is matched, the first to third confirmations corresponding to the matched determination values are performed. By performing the control using the effect control data 74AKD03, it is possible to output the confirmation sound and execute the confirmation vibration.

  During the execution of the confirmation effect, a part or all of the light emitting members included in the game effect lamp 9 may be turned on. For example, when the confirmation effect is started, the lighting of the light emitting member is started, and the output of the confirmation sound is started from the left speaker 8L. When the output of the confirmation sound by the left speaker 8L is completed, the output of the confirmation sound from the right speaker 8R is started. When the output of the confirmation sound by the right speaker 8R ends, the confirmation vibration by the vibration motor built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A starts. Then, the confirmation vibration by the vibration motor built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A ends, the light emitting member is turned off, and the confirmation effect ends. In the confirmation effect, after the power supply is started by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected within a predetermined confirmation reception period, so that the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. Then, the execution is started. Production of any one of output of a confirmation sound by the left speaker 8L, output of a confirmation sound by the right speaker 8R, and confirmation vibration by a vibration motor built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A. Is performed, the control for executing another effect is not performed. As described above, when any one of the output of the confirmation sound and the confirmation vibration included in the confirmation effect is performed, the control may be performed so as not to execute another effect. Since the output of the confirmation sound and the confirmation vibration are performed at different timings in this way, it is easy for the staff in the game hall or the like to easily determine whether or not the production using each production device can be normally performed. Can be.

  FIGS. 8 to 48 are flowcharts illustrating an example of an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 for the characteristic unit 74AK. This effect control main process may be performed as long as it can be executed in place of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of the characteristic unit 74AK, the effect control CPU 120 executes the initialization process (step 74AKS011) and the power-on command process (step 74AKS012) in the same manner as the above embodiment, and then sets the timer interrupt flag to ON. Is determined (step 74AKS013), and if it is off (step 74AKS013; No), step 74AKS013 is repeatedly executed to stand by. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on (step 74AKS013; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step 74AKS014), command analysis processing (step 74AKS015), and effect control process processing (Step 74AKS016) and the effect random number updating process (Step 74AKS017) are executed in order. Further, in the effect control main processing of the characteristic unit 74AK, the confirmation effect control processing (step 74AKS018) is executed, and then the process returns to step 74AKS013.

  FIG. 8-49 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the processing executed in step 74AKS018 as the confirmation effect control processing. In the confirmation effect control process, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the initialization notification has been started (step 74AKS031). For example, in the power-on command processing of the above-described embodiment, the initialization notification is started by performing the control in step AKS030. Thereafter, when the determination in step 74AKS031 is made first, it may be determined that the initialization notification has started. An initialization notification start flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and when the initialization notification start flag is on, it may be determined that the initialization notification has started.

  When it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the initialization notification has started (step 74AKS031; Yes), control for starting the confirmation reception period is performed (step 74AKS032). The confirmation reception period may be started with the start of the initialization notification, and may be ended with the elapse of a predetermined confirmation reception time, for example, 30 seconds or 1 minute.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the initialization notification has not been started (step 74AKS031; No), it is determined whether or not a confirmation reception period has been reached (step 74AKS033). When the confirmation reception period is started in step 74AKS032 or when it is determined in step 74AKS033 that it is the confirmation reception period (step 74AKS033; Yes), it is determined whether the variable display has been started (step 74AKS033; Yes). 74AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may determine that the variable display has been started by receiving the first change start command and the second change start command transmitted from the main board 11.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS034 that the variable display is to be started (step 74AKS034; Yes), control for canceling the confirmation acceptance period is performed (step 74AKS035), and the confirmation effect control process ends. As described above, when the variable display is started during the confirmation reception period, the confirmation reception period is stopped, and the restriction is made so that the confirmation effect condition is not satisfied. By canceling the confirmation reception period along with the start of the variable display, it is possible to control the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game and the execution of the confirmation effect so that the confirmation effect is appropriately executed.

  When it is determined in step 74AKS034 that the variable display has not been started (step 74AKS034; No), it is determined whether or not an operation for starting the confirmation effect has been detected (step 74AKS036). In step 74AKS036, when the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected, it may be determined that the operation for starting the confirmation effect has been detected. At this time, if there is no motion detection (step 74AKS036; No), the confirmation effect control process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the motion is detected (step 74AKS036; Yes), the effect control pattern 74AKP01 used to execute the confirmation effect is read from a predetermined area of the ROM 121 (step 74AKS037), and the confirmation effect process is performed. The timer initial value 74AKJ00 is set as the confirmation effect process timer (step 74AKS038). In addition, it is set so that the timer value is determined based on the first confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKD01 (step 74AKS039), and the process proceeds to step 74AKS046. If it is determined in step 74AKS036 that an operation has been detected and a setting for executing a confirmation effect is performed, control for ending the confirmation reception period may be performed.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS033 that it is not the confirmation reception period (step 74AKS033; No), it is determined whether or not a confirmation effect is being performed (step 74AKS040). In step 74AKS040, for example, when the measurement of the elapsed time by the confirmation effect process timer has started, it may be determined that the confirmation effect is being performed. At this time, if the confirmation effect is not being performed (step 74AKS040; No), the confirmation effect control process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the confirmation effect is being performed (step 74AKS040; Yes), it is determined whether the variable display has been started (step 74AKS041). When it is determined that the variable display is to be started (step 74AKS041; Yes), control for stopping the confirmation effect is performed (step 74AKS042), and the confirmation effect control process ends. In this way, when the variable display is started during the confirmation effect, by stopping the execution of the confirmation effect, control is performed so that the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game and the execution of the confirmation effect do not overlap. , The confirmation effect can be appropriately executed.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS041 that the variable display has not been started (step 74AKS041; No), update control of the confirmation effect process timer is performed (step 74AKS043). Next, it is determined whether or not a timeout has occurred in the confirmation effect process timer (step 74AKS044). At this time, if a timeout has occurred (step 74AKS044; Yes), control for ending the confirmation effect is performed (step 74AKS045), and the confirmation effect control process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timeout has not occurred (step 74AKS044; No), it is determined whether or not the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer matches the determination value (step 74AKS046). If it does not match the determination value (step 74AKS046; No), the confirmation effect control process ends.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS046 that it matches the determination value (step 74AKS046; Yes), an effect using the confirmation effect control data corresponding to the determination value is started (step 74AKS047). In addition, after setting such that the timer value is determined based on the confirmation effect process timer determination value stored next in the effect control pattern 74AKP01 (step 74AKS048), the confirmation effect control process ends.

  FIG. 8-50 is a timing chart showing an example of control of the confirmation effect regarding the characteristic portion 74AK. FIG. 8-50 (A) shows that when the power supply is started by turning on the power, the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected, but the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on is not detected. Correspondingly, the case where the setting is not controlled to the change state is shown. Fig. 8-50 (B) shows that when power supply is started by turning on the power, an operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected and an operation of switching the lock switch 51 on is detected. Corresponds to the case where the state is controlled to the setting change state. FIG. 8C shows the control contents at each timing.

  When the power is not turned on at the timing 74AKT01 and the setting is not controlled, the effect control board 12 determines that the effect control CPU 120 receives the RAM clear notification command at the timing 74AKT02, for example. . In the power-on command processing of the above-described embodiment, when the received command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step AKS021, the control in step AKS030 is performed, and the initialization notification is started. Then, in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018 included in the effect control main process of the characteristic unit 74AK, it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the initialization notification is to be started, and the confirmation reception period is started by the control of step 74AKS032. You. When an operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at the timing 74AKT03 within the confirmation detection period, it is determined that a confirmation effect start operation has been detected at step 74AKS036 of the confirmation effect control process. The control for executing the confirmation effect, such as steps 74AKS037 to 74AKS048, is started. When the control for executing the confirmation effect is started in this manner, a plurality of types of first to third confirmation effects are provided using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01. The effects are executed in order. Thereafter, at timing 74AKT04, it is determined in step 74AKS044 of the confirmation effect control process that the confirmation effect process timer has timed out, and the control in step 74AKS045 is performed, thereby ending the confirmation effect.

  On the other hand, in the case where the control is changed to the setting change state with the start of power supply by turning on the power at the timing 74AKT11, in the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 issues a setting change start command at the timing 74AKT12. It is determined that it has been received. In the power-on command processing of the above-described embodiment, since the received command is determined to be the setting change start command in step AKS023, the game stop state start processing in step AKS025 is executed, and then the control in step AKS026 is performed. Is performed, and the setting change notification is started. At this time, except for receiving the setting change end command, control for continuously executing the setting change notification is performed, and control for executing the initialization notification is not started. After that, when the setting change end command transmitted from the main board 11 is received at the timing 74AKT13, it is determined that the setting change is ended in the step AKS027 of the power-on command processing, so that the steps AKS028 and AKS029 follow. , The control of step AKS030 is performed, and the initialization notification is started.

  In this way, when the initialization notification by the control of step AKS030 is started at timing 74AKT13, in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018 included in the effect control main process of the characteristic portion 74AK, the initialization notification is performed at step 74AKS031. Is started, and the control in step 74AKS032 starts the confirmation acceptance period. Therefore, at timing 74AKT13, the confirmation reception period starts with the start of the initialization notification. When an operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at the timing 74AKT14 within the confirmation reception period, it is determined that the start operation of the confirmation effect has been detected in step 74AKS036 of the confirmation effect control process. The control for executing the confirmation effect, such as steps 74AKS037 to 74AKS048, is started. When the control for executing the confirmation effect is started in this manner, a plurality of types of first to third confirmation effects are provided using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01. The effects are executed in order. Thereafter, at timing 74AKT15, it is determined in step 74AKS044 of the confirmation effect control process that the confirmation effect process timer has timed out, and the control in step 74AKS045 is performed, thereby ending the confirmation effect.

  The effect included in the confirmation effect may be an effect using any effect device provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in addition to or instead of the confirmation vibration by driving the vibration motor built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A, the confirmation vibration by driving the vibration motor built in the push button 31B. May be executed.

  As described above, in the effect control main processing of the characteristic unit 74AK, the power-on command processing is executed in step 74AKS012 in the same manner as in the above embodiment, and then the confirmation effect control processing is executed in step 74AKS018. In the power-on command processing, for example, a game stop state start processing is executed in step AKS025 or step AKS031. After the game stop state start process is executed, the reception of a command different from the setting change end command or the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and regulation is exercised so that control relating to normal effects is not executed. In this case, the control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step AKS021 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, in step AKS030, control is performed to execute initialization notification. Thereafter, in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018, when the confirmation effect condition is satisfied based on, for example, the determination of the start of the initialization notification in step 74AKS031, the process proceeds to step 74AKS037 and thereafter to execute the confirmation effect. Perform the control to be executed. In this way, when the power supply is started by turning on the power and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state in which the setting value change is permitted, the control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed. Thereby, the control for changing the set value is given priority over the control for executing the confirmation effect, so that it is possible to prevent a trouble in the work for changing the set value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

  In the power-on command processing, control in steps AKS025 to AKS030 is performed in accordance with the setting change state. After that, by executing the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process, after the setting change state as the change permission state ends, the control for executing the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition is performed. Do. This makes it possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect when preventing the setting value changing work from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

  The push button 31B and the push sensor 35B are configured to detect an operation such as a pressing operation by a player. In the confirmation effect control process of the characteristic unit 74AK, the control in step 74AKS032 is executed, so that the confirmation accepting period is reached. Then, in step 74AKS036, it is determined that the start operation has been detected, so that the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. . This makes it possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect when preventing the setting value changing work from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

  When executing the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process of the characteristic unit 74AK, the control in step 74AKS032 is executed, so that the storage contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) without being controlled to the setting confirmation state. ), The confirmation acceptance period is the same as the case where the setting confirmation state ends. The control for executing the confirmation effect is performed according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation reception period. Thereby, in order to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value, the control for executing the confirmation effect can be shared, and the control load of the confirmation effect can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

  The effect control pattern 74AKP01 used in the characteristic unit 74AK includes the first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 and the second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02, thereby enabling control to output a confirmation sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Thus, the confirmation effect includes the output of the confirmation sound by the speakers 8L and 8R serving as the sound output means. This makes it possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect when preventing the setting value changing work from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

(Explanation of the means relating to the characteristic part 74AK)
Regarding the above-described characteristic portion 74AK, a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different degrees of advantage for a player is described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine for performing control for outputting a confirmation sound, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-220833. However, in the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-220833, no consideration has been given to the case where the setting change and the confirmation effect compete. For this reason, there is a possibility that the operation of changing to a plurality of set values having different degrees of advantage for the player may be affected. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 74AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing a trouble in a work of changing a set value,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of performing a game and being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage for the player is different based on the set value;
Setting control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the processing of steps Sa6 and Sa12) capable of controlling a change permission state for permitting a change of the set value by the setting means with the start of power supply;
Effect means (eg, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of executing effects,
After the power supply is started, a confirmation control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing a confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018) capable of executing a confirmation effect control by the effect means based on establishment of a confirmation effect condition; With
The confirmation control means,
When the control is not controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect in accordance with establishment of the confirmation effect condition (for example, execution of step 74AKS018 after execution of steps AKS021, AKS030, etc. ),
When the change permission state is set, the control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed (for example, execution of steps AKS025 to AKS029).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to such a configuration, the confirmation effect is not executed in the change permission state, so that it is possible to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK,
The confirmation control means performs control for executing the confirmation effect in accordance with establishment of the confirmation effect condition after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 74AKS018 after executing steps AKS025 to AKS030, and the like) ),
A gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 74AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the setting value changing work from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK,
Game detecting means (for example, a push button 31B, a push sensor 35B, etc.) capable of detecting an action by the player;
The confirmation effect condition is satisfied based on the detection of the operation by the game detection means during the confirmation reception period (for example, execution of step 74AKS036).
The gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 74AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the setting value changing work from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK,
The confirmation control means, when initialization is performed without being controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, when the change permission state ends, the confirmation effect condition in a common confirmation reception period The control for executing the confirmation effect is performed according to the establishment (for example, execution of steps 74AKS033 and 74AKS036),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 3 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK.
In such a configuration, the execution of the confirmation effect is made common, and it is possible to prevent the trouble of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK,
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of outputting a production sound,
The confirmation effect includes an output of a sound for confirmation by the sound output unit (for example, execution of step 74AKS047 using the first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 and the second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 4 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the setting value changing work from being hindered.

(Explanation about 75AK)
FIG. 8-51 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on command processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 regarding the characteristic unit 75AK of the present embodiment. This power-on command processing only needs to be executed in step 74AKS012 of the effect control main processing in the characteristic part 74AK of the above embodiment. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 75AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines the command received from the main board 11 as in the above embodiment (steps 75AKS001 to 75AKS004). If it is determined in step 75AK003 that the received command is a setting change start command (step 75AKS003; Yes), a game stop state start process is executed (step 75AKS005), as in the above-described embodiment. Control for starting notification is performed (step 75AKS006).

  After performing the control in step 75AKS006, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change (step 75AKS007). If the setting change is not to be ended (step 75AKS007; No), unlike the above-described embodiment, after performing the setting change confirmation effect control process (step 75AKS008), the process returns to step 75AKS007. As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 75AK, the setting change confirmation state is controlled as the change permission state with the start of power supply by executing the setting change confirmation effect control processing in step 75AKS008. At the same time, control for executing the confirmation effect can be performed. If it is determined in step 75AKS007 that the setting change is to be ended (step 75AKS007; Yes), control for ending the setting change notification is performed (step 75AKS009), and a game stop state end process is executed (step 75AKS010).

  If it is determined in step 75AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command (step 75AKS001; Yes), or after executing the game stop state end processing in step 75AKS010, control for executing the initialization notification is performed. (Step 75AKS011), and the power-on command processing ends.

  If it is determined in step 75AKS003 that the received command is a setting confirmation start command (step 75AKS003; Yes), a process corresponding to the setting confirmation state is executed as in the above embodiment (steps 75AKS012 to 75AKS016). ), The power-on command processing ends. As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 75AK, when the power supply is started, when the setting is changed to the setting change state, the setting change confirmation effect control processing of step 75AKS008 is executed, while the setting is changed to the setting check state. When it is controlled, the process corresponding to the setting change confirmation effect control process is not executed. Therefore, while the control for enabling the confirmation effect is performed when the setting is in the change state, the control for enabling the confirmation effect to be executed when the setting is in the check state is not performed.

  FIG. 8-52 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step 75AKS008 as the setting change confirmation effect control processing. In the confirmation effect control process during setting confirmation, effect control CPU 120 first determines whether a confirmation effect has been completed (step 75AKS031). In step 75AKS031, for example, when the confirmation effect completion flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 is on, it may be determined that the confirmation effect has been completed. The confirmation effect completion flag may be set to the ON state when the execution of the confirmation effect is completed. If the confirmation effect has been completed in step 75AKS031 (step 75AKS031; Yes), the confirmation effect control process during setting change is ended.

  When it is determined in step 75AKS031 that the confirmation effect has not been completed (step 75AKS031; No), it is determined whether or not the confirmation effect is being performed (step 75AKS032). At this time, if the confirmation effect is not being performed (Step 75AKS032; No), it is determined whether or not an operation for starting the confirmation effect has been detected (Step 75AKS033). If there is no motion detection in step 75AKS033 (step 75AKS033; No), the in-setting-change confirmation effect control process ends. If it is determined in step 75AKS033 that the operation has been detected (step 75AKS033; Yes), the effect control pattern 74AKP01 is read as a setting for starting the execution of the confirmation effect (step 75AKS034), and the confirmation effect process timer is initialized. The value 74AKJ00 is set (step 75AKS035), and the first confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKD01 is set (step 75AKS036). As described above, in the setting change confirmation effect control process, the determination in step 75AKS033 is performed. Therefore, when the setting change state is set as the change permission state, an arbitrary period such as a confirmation reception period is not provided. When the operation of pressing the push button 31B at the timing is detected, the confirmation effect condition is satisfied, and the execution of the confirmation effect can be started.

  If it is determined in step 75AKS032 that the confirmation effect is being performed (step 75AKS032; Yes), the update control of the confirmation effect process timer is performed (step 75AKS037), and it is determined whether a timeout has occurred (step 75AKS038). ). At this time, if a timeout has occurred (step 75AKS038; Yes), control for ending the confirmation effect is performed (step 75AKS039), and the confirmation effect control process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timeout has not occurred (step 75AKS038; No), it is determined whether or not the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer matches the determination value (step 75AKS040). If it does not match the determination value (Step 75AKS040; No), the confirmation effect control process ends.

  If it is determined in step 75AKS040 that it matches the determination value (step 75AKS040; Yes), an effect using the confirmation effect control data corresponding to the determination value is started (step 75AKS041). In addition, after setting such that the timer value is determined based on the confirmation effect process timer determination value stored next in the effect control pattern 74AKP01 (step 75AKS042), the confirmation effect control process ends.

  FIG. 8-53 is a timing chart showing a control example of the confirmation effect regarding the characteristic portion 75AK. FIG. 8-53 (A) shows that when the power supply is started by turning on the power, an operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected, but no operation of switching the lock switch 51 on is detected. Correspondingly, a case where the setting is not controlled to the change state is shown. FIG. 8-53 (B) shows that when power supply is started by turning on the power, an operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected, and an operation of switching the lock switch 51 on is detected. Corresponds to the case where the state is controlled to the setting change state. FIG. 8-53 (C) shows the control content at each timing.

  When the power supply is not turned on at the timing 75AKT01 when the power is turned on and the setting is not controlled, the operation is the same as when the setting is not controlled by the feature unit 74AK, and the RAM clear notification command is received at the timing 74AKT02. Accordingly, the initialization notification is started, and accordingly, the confirmation reception period is started. When the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected at the timing 75AKT03 in the confirmation reception period, the control for executing the confirmation effect is started, and the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01, etc. , A plurality of types of effects serving as first to third confirmation effects are sequentially executed. Thereafter, at timing 75AKT04, the confirmation effect ends.

  On the other hand, when the power is turned on at the timing 75AKT11 to start the power supply, the setting is controlled at the timing 75AKT12, unlike the case where the setting is controlled to the setting confirmation state at the timing 75AKT12. Upon receiving the start command, it is determined in step 75AKS003 of the power-on command processing that the received command is a setting change start command. As a result, following steps 75AKS005 and 75AKS006, it is determined whether or not the setting change is to be terminated in step 75AKS007. If the setting is not to be terminated at this time, a confirmation effect control processing during setting change is executed in step 75AKS008. You. In the confirmation effect control process during setting change of the characteristic portion 75AK, when it is determined in step 75AKS032 that the confirmation effect is not being performed, it is determined in step 75AKS033 whether a start operation has been detected. Thus, when the setting change state is set as the change permission state, the confirmation effect condition can be satisfied by detecting the operation of pressing the push button 31B. For example, when the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at the timing 75AKT13 in the setting change state, it is determined that the start operation of the confirmation effect has been detected in Step 75AKS033 of the confirmation effect control process during setting change. Then, the control for executing the confirmation effect such as steps 75AKS034 to 75AKS042 of the setting effect confirmation effect control process is started. Thus, using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01, a plurality of types of effects to be the first to third confirmation effects are sequentially executed. Thereafter, at timing 75AKT14, the confirmation effect ends.

  After the timing 75AKT14, when the setting change end command transmitted from the main board 11 is received at the timing 75AKT15, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 75AK, it is determined that the setting change is ended in step 75AKS007. Thus, following steps 75AKS009 and 75AKS010, the control of step 75AKS011 is performed, and the initialization notification is started. When the initialization notification is started, as in the case of the characteristic portion 74AK, the confirmation effect control process is executed in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process, so that the confirmation reception period is started. I just need. Then, when the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected during the confirmation reception period, the control for executing the confirmation effect may be started again.

  As described above, the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 75AK includes the setting change confirmation effect control process executed in step 75AKS008, and the start operation is detected in step 75AKS033 of the setting change confirmation effect control process. When it is determined that there is a confirmation effect condition, the process proceeds to step 74AKS037 and the control for executing the confirmation effect is performed according to establishment of the confirmation effect condition. In this way, when the power supply is started by turning on the power and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state in which the change of the setting value is permitted, the control for executing the confirmation effect based on the establishment of the confirmation effect condition is performed. Therefore, when the setting change state is set as the change permission state, by enabling the confirmation effect, it is possible to accurately check the state of the gaming machine and to interfere with the work of checking the state of the gaming machine. Can be prevented.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 75AK, when it is determined in step 75AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the confirmation effect control processing similar to that of the characteristic unit 74AK is executed, and the confirmation is accepted. The period starts. During the confirmation acceptance period, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition. On the other hand, in the confirmation effect control process during setting change, the control for executing the confirmation effect is performed when it is determined in step 75AKS033 that the start operation is detected without providing the confirmation reception period. As a result, the confirmation effect can be executed at any time when the setting is being changed as the change permission condition, so that in order to prevent trouble in checking the state of the gaming machine, the confirmation effect is performed together with the change of the set value. Can be performed properly.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 75AK, the control in steps 75AKS005 to 75AKS011 is performed corresponding to the setting change state. After that, the confirmation effect control process similar to that of the characteristic unit 74AK is executed, so that the confirmation reception period is started. In this way, after the setting change state as the change permission state ends, the control for executing the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation reception period is performed, so that the operation of confirming the state of the gaming machine occurs. In order to prevent such a situation, the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed.

   The push button 31B and the push sensor 35B are configured to detect an operation such as a pressing operation by a player. For example, in the confirmation effect control process during setting change of the characteristic portion 75AK, it is determined in step 75AKS033 that the start operation has been detected, so that the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. In addition, by executing the same confirmation effect control process as that of the characteristic portion 74AK, it is determined in step 74AKS036 that the start operation has been detected, and the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. This makes it possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect when preventing the operation of checking the state of the gaming machine from being hindered.

(Explanation of the means relating to the characteristic portion 75AK)
Regarding the above-described characteristic portion 75AK, a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different degrees of advantage for the player is described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine for performing control for outputting a confirmation sound, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-220833. However, in the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-220833, no consideration has been given to the case where the setting change and the confirmation effect compete. Therefore, there is a possibility that the operation of checking the state of the gaming machine may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 75AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing a trouble in checking the state of the gaming machine,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of performing a game and being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage for the player is different based on the set value;
Setting control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the processing of steps Sa6 and Sa12) capable of controlling a change permission state for permitting a change of the set value by the setting means with the start of power supply;
Effect means (eg, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of executing effects,
After the power supply is started, a confirmation control means (for example, a confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018, a confirmation effect control during setting change in step 75AKS008) capable of executing control of the confirmation effect by the effect means based on establishment of the confirmation effect condition. Effect control CPU 120 or the like that executes processing).
The confirmation control means,
When the control is not controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect in accordance with establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation reception period (for example, execution of the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018). ),
When the change is permitted, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect in accordance with the establishment of the confirmation effect condition (for example, execution of a setting effect confirmation control process during setting change in step 75AKS008).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to such a configuration, the confirmation effect can be executed when the change is permitted, so that it is possible to accurately check the state of the gaming machine and prevent trouble in checking the state of the gaming machine. .

As a gaming machine of the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 75AK,
The confirmation control means,
If the initialization is performed without being controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation reception period (for example, step 74AKS033). , Running 74AKS036),
When the change is permitted, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition without providing a confirmation reception period (for example, execution of step 75AKS033).
The gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 75AK may be used.
In such a configuration, the confirmation effect is appropriately executed together with the change of the set value, so that it is possible to prevent the trouble of checking the state of the gaming machine from occurring.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic portion 75AK,
The confirmation control means performs control for executing the confirmation effect in accordance with satisfaction of the confirmation effect condition during a confirmation acceptance period after the change permission state ends (for example, a step after executing steps 75AKS005 to 75AKS011). 74AKS018),
The gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 relating to the characteristic portion 75AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the operation of checking the state of the gaming machine from being disturbed.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic portion 75AK,
Game detecting means (for example, a push button 31B, a push sensor 35B, etc.) capable of detecting an action by a player,
The confirmation effect condition is satisfied based on the detection of the operation by the game detecting means (for example, execution of step 75AKS033).
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 3 relating to the characteristic portion 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the operation of checking the state of the gaming machine from being disturbed.

(Explanation of the means common to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK)
As a gaming machine of the means A relating to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK,
Setting detecting means (for example, a lock switch 51 or the like) capable of detecting an operation related to setting;
Initialization detecting means (for example, a clear switch AK001) capable of detecting an operation related to initialization of the gaming machine;
Setting confirmation control means capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state based on the detection of the operation by the setting detection means upon the start of power supply (for example, CPU 103 executing steps AKS001 and AKS002);
A change permission control means capable of controlling to the change permission state based on the detection of the operation by the initialization detection means upon the start of power supply (for example, the CPU 103 executing steps Sa6 and Sa13);
A gaming machine according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately control the setting confirmation state and the change permission state, and to appropriately set the setting values.

As a gaming machine of the means B relating to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK,
Setting detecting means (for example, a lock switch 51 or the like) capable of detecting an operation related to setting;
Initialization detecting means (for example, a clear switch AK001 or the like) capable of detecting an operation related to initialization;
When the operation is not detected by the setting detecting means and the operation is detected by the initialization detecting means with the start of the power supply, the initialization notification is executed at the same time as the power supply is started, while the power supply is started. Accordingly, when an operation is detected by the setting detection unit, the initialization notification unit executes the initialization notification after the operation is no longer detected (for example, for an effect control unit that executes a power-on command process in step AKS012). CPU 120).
A gaming machine according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the initialization notification and to appropriately set the setting values.

As a gaming machine of the means C relating to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK,
An information display means (for example, a display monitor 29) capable of displaying information relating to a game value given based on a game medium entering a predetermined area;
The information display means can display a set value set by the setting means (for example, a display by the first display unit 29A).
A gaming machine according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately set the setting values without separately providing a configuration for displaying the setting values.

As a gaming machine of the means D relating to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK,
Effect detection means (for example, an output amount changeover switch 71AK001 or the like) capable of detecting an operation relating to the output amount of the effect;
A display control unit (for example, an effect control CPU 120 executing step AKS026) for displaying a display relating to the set value by the setting unit in preference to a display relating to the output amount of the effect;
A gaming machine according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK may be used.
In such a configuration, the display relating to the set value is appropriately performed, and it is possible to prevent the trouble in the work of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means E relating to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK,
Effect control means for controlling the execution of the effect based on information from the game control means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing a command analysis process of AKS015);
The effect control means, when in the change permission state, information restriction means for restricting control based on information different from notification information for notifying the end of the change permission state (for example, effect control CPU 120 executing AKS027 or the like) ) And
A gaming machine according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem and to appropriately set the set value.

(Explanation related to association of features)
Each configuration related to the feature units 71AK to 75AK may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration related to another feature unit. The features combined in this way, or individual features not combined, may be combined as appropriate with some or all of the components relating to other features. For example, regarding the characteristic unit 71AK, the configuration of the effect control CPU 120 that executes the start-time output switching process in step 71AKS013 of the effect control main process, and the short initial operation in step 72AK007 of the power-on command process regarding the characteristic unit 72AK. With respect to the configuration of the effect control CPU 120 that performs the control to be executed, and regarding the characteristic portion 73AK, the effect control for executing the short initial operation is not performed until it is determined that the setting change is completed in step 73AKS007 of the power-on command processing. Concerning the configuration of the CPU 120 and the characteristic portion 74AK, in the step 74AKS018 of the production control main process, the configuration of the production control CPU 120 for executing the confirmation production control process, and the characteristic portion 75AK, in step 75AKS008 of the power-on command processing Configuration of the effect control CPU120 for executing a constant change in confirmation effect control process, some or all, or may be appropriately combined.

(Description of the characteristic part 87AK)
FIG. 9-1 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process in the characteristic unit 87AK. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the big hit flag is on (step S261). If the big hit flag is on (step S261; Yes), the big hit change pattern determination table 132A is selected and set as a use table for determining a change pattern to one of a plurality of types (step S262). In addition, for example, by reading the jackpot type buffer value stored in the RAM 102, it is determined whether the jackpot type is “non-probable”, “probable”, or “probable” (step S263).

  If the big hit flag is off in step S261, it is determined whether the small hit flag is on (step S264). If the small hit flag is on (step S264; Yes), it is determined whether the small hit flag is on (step S264). If the small hit flag is ON (step S264; Yes), the small hit variation pattern determination table 132B is selected and set as a use table for determining any of a plurality of types of variation patterns (step S265). )

  On the other hand, when the small hit flag is OFF in step S264 (step S264; No), the loss variation pattern determination table 132C is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. (Step S268) For example, by determining whether or not the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 102 is on, it is determined whether or not the time reduction control is being performed in which the time reduction control is performed in the probable change state or the time reduction state. Identify.

  After executing any one of the processes of steps S263, S265, and S268, it is set in the usage table based on, for example, numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type stored in the random number buffer for variation or the like. The variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table (step S272).

  FIG. 9B shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases in which the variable display result (special figure display result) is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” that does not become the reach mode, and “reach mode” is the “reach mode”. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in correspondence with each of the cases of “reach” and corresponding to the case where the variable display result (the special map display result) becomes “big hit” or “small hit”. I have. The number of fluctuations in the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo consecutive fluctuations and the number of fluctuations in the fluctuation pattern of the special fluctuations are determined in a period from the start of the first variable display to the end of the last re-variation (at the time of derivation display of the fixed decorative symbol). When reach is established in the last re-variable display, the number of variable displays executed during the period from the start of the first variable display to the establishment of reach is shown. In the pseudo-repeating variable display effect, a fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) which is a variable display result after variable display of a decorative symbol is started in response to the start condition of the special figure game being established once. By the time, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left,” “middle,” and “right,” and then all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C are displayed. The effect display for changing the decoration design again (re-change) at 5R is performed a predetermined number of times. Further, in the variable display effect of the special fluctuation, the period until the temporary stop and the temporary stop period are shorter than the variable display effect of the pseudo-ream, and the decorative symbol is changed again. In addition to the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 9B, even if the pseudo-random chance is temporarily stopped and displayed, even if the pseudo-continuation is not performed, the pseudo-continuation gasse fluctuation pattern is not performed. There may be a variation pattern of "hit". Also, a plurality of types of pseudo-run variation patterns having different numbers of times may be provided.

  FIG. 9A shows an example of determining a fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit. For example, in the process of step S272 shown in FIG. 9A, the large hit variation pattern determination table previously stored and prepared in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 is referred to based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination. The variation pattern in the case where the variable display result is "big hit" at the determination ratio as shown in -3 (A) may be determined. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table 132A, determined values are assigned to the respective variation patterns so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern differs depending on which of the plurality of types has been determined. For example, the assignment of the determined value to each variation pattern differs depending on whether the jackpot type is “non-probable” or “probable”. This makes it possible to vary the ratio determined for the same variation pattern in accordance with the result of determining which of the plurality of types is the big hit type. In this embodiment, the determination ratio is set in the large hit variation pattern determination table 132A and the later-described loss variation pattern determination table 132C such that the greater the number of special variations, the higher the probability that the variable display result is "big hit". ing. In this embodiment, twelve special fluctuation patterns, eight special fluctuation patterns, and four special fluctuation patterns are prepared as special fluctuation patterns, and 12 special fluctuation patterns> 8 times The degree of expectation is set such as a special fluctuation pattern> 4 special fluctuation patterns.

  FIG. 9B illustrates an example of determining a fluctuation pattern at the time of a small hit. For example, in the process of step S272 shown in FIG. 9A, the small hit variation pattern determination table previously stored and prepared in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 is referred to based on the variation pattern determination random value MR3. The variation pattern when the variable display result is “small hit” may be determined at the determination ratio as shown in 9-3 (B).

  FIG. 9C illustrates an example of determining a variation pattern at the time of loss. For example, in the process of step S272 shown in FIG. 9A, the loss variation pattern determination table 132C previously stored and prepared in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 is referred to based on the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination. It is only necessary to determine the variation pattern when the variable display result is “losing” at the determination ratio as shown in 9-3 (C).

  In the losing variation pattern determination table 132C, the determined values are set such that the ratio determined for each variation pattern is different depending on whether the game state is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the time saving control is being performed in the time saving state. Some parts are assigned to patterns. Thus, the ratio determined for the same variation pattern can be made different depending on whether the game state is the normal state, the probability change state, or the time reduction control in the time reduction state. In the loss variation pattern determination table 132C, there is a portion in which a determined value is assigned to a different variation pattern depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the time reduction control in the time reduction state. Thereby, a different variation pattern can be determined depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the time saving control in the time saving state.

  Returning to FIG. 9A, after the variation pattern is determined in step S272, a special figure variation time, which is a variable display time of a special symbol according to the determination result of the variation pattern, is set (step S273). The special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special figure game to the derivation and display of the fixed special symbol which is the variable display result (the special figure display result). It is.

  After executing the processing of step S273, a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display device 4A and a second special figure on the second special symbol display device 4B are performed according to the variable special figure designation buffer value. The setting for starting the change of the special symbol is performed so as to start any of the special figure games using the figures (step S274). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure on the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure on the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

  Subsequent to the process of step S271, setting for transmitting various commands for starting the change of the special symbol is performed (step S275). For example, when the fluctuation special figure specification buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sends the game state specification command, the first fluctuation start command, the fluctuation pattern specification command, the fluctuation display result to the effect control board 12 from the main board 11. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the first reserved storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address (head address) of the prepared first variation start command table in the ROM 101 is transmitted in the RAM 102. The data is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the command buffer. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sends the game state designation command, the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, and the variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. To sequentially transmit the notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the prepared second variation start command table is designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Stored in the buffer area. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol change processing (step S276), and then the change pattern setting processing ends.

  Here, the first variation start command is a command for designating a variation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The second variation start command is a command for designating a variation start in a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The fluctuation pattern designation command is variably displayed in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" on the image display device 5 in correspondence with the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative pattern. The variable display result notification command is a command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. The game state designation command is a command for designating the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  After the variation pattern setting process is completed based on the command transmission setting in step S275, each time the above-described command control process is executed, a game state designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, The 1 change start command or the 2nd change start command, the change pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, the 1st hold storage number notification command, or the 2nd hold storage number notification command is transmitted sequentially. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after transmitting the variable display result notification command first, the first variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command The game state designation command, the first reserved storage number notification command, or the second reserved storage number notification command may be transmitted in this order.

  FIG. 9D is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the special figure display result is “losing” by, for example, reading the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11. Is determined (step S521). At this time, when it is determined that the special figure display result is “losing” (step S521; Yes), the designated variation pattern is decorated by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command, for example. It is determined whether the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the symbol is "non-reach" (step S522).

  When it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is the non-reach variation pattern (step S522; Yes), the combination of the fixed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination is determined (step S523). As an example, in the process of step S523, first, a random number value for determining a left determined symbol, which is updated by a rendering random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area (a rendering control counter setting unit or the like) of the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122, is shown. By extracting the numerical data and referring to a left determined symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols is displayed. The left fixed decoration symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the right determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the right determined symbol determination table stored in the ROM 121 and prepared in advance is referred to. By such means as the determined decorative symbol, the right determined decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a middle fixed symbol which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter or the like is extracted, and the middle fixed symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to. For example, the middle fixed decoration symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decoration symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the fixed decoration symbols.

  When it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is not the non-reach variation pattern (step S522; No), a combination of the final decorative symbols constituting the reach combination is determined (step S524). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a left and right fixed symbol, which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect, is extracted, and left and right data previously stored in the ROM 121 and prepared By referring to the fixed symbol determination table, among the fixed decorative symbols, the symbol numbers that are stopped and displayed together in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 are displayed. Determine the same decorative design. Further, it extracts numerical data indicating a random value for determining a medium-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect, and refers to a medium-determined symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121. Thereby, the middle fixed decoration symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decoration symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 among the fixed decoration symbols is determined. Here, in the case where the determined decorative symbol becomes a big hit combination, for example, when the symbol number of the middle determined decorative symbol becomes the same as the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol and the right determined decorative symbol, an arbitrary value is set. By adding or subtracting (for example, “1”) to or from the symbol number of the medium determined decorative symbol, the determined decorative symbol may be a reach combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the middle fixed decorative symbol, a difference (symbol difference) between the left fixed decorative symbol and the right fixed decorative symbol with the symbol number may be determined, and a middle fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S521 that the special figure display result is not “losing” (step S521; No), it is determined whether the special figure display result is “small hit” or another case. A determination is made (step S525). When it is determined to be a "small hit" (step S525; Yes), a combination of the final decorative symbols corresponding to the "small hit", such as the opening chance, is determined (step S527). . As an example, in response to a case where any one of the fluctuation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 is specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command, the final stop symbol constituting one of the plurality of types of opening chances is determined. Determine the combination of decorative patterns. In this case, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a chance eye updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined chance eye determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. , The combination of the determined decorative symbols constituting any of the opening chance eyes may be determined.

  When it is determined in step S525 that the change is "non-probable" or "probable" other than "small hit" (step S525; No), the combination of the final decorative symbols constituting the big hit combination is determined. (Step S526). As an example, in the process of step S526, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a jackpot determined symbol, which is updated by a random counter or the like of the effect control counter setting unit 193, is extracted and subsequently stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined big hit fixed symbol determination table, the display is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" on the screen of the image display device 5. A decorative symbol having the same symbol number is determined. At this time, depending on whether the jackpot type is “non-probable change” or “probable change”, or whether there is a promotion effect during the big hit, a different decorative design may be determined as the fixed decorative design. Good.

  As a specific example, when the jackpot type is “non-probable variation”, one of the plurality of types of normal symbols is selected as a decorative symbol to determine the final decorative symbol constituting the non-probable variable jackpot combination. I just need. When the jackpot type is “probable change”, any one of a plurality of types of normal symbols or probable designs is selected and a decorative design that constitutes a non-probable variable hit combination or a probable variable combination is selected. Should be determined. At this time, if the non-probable variable jackpot combination is determined to be the final decorative symbol, the notification that the probable state is controlled in the re-lottery effect during the variable display is not performed, and the process is executed in accordance with the jackpot gaming state. What is necessary is just to be notified that the state is controlled to be in the probable change state by a jackpot promotion promotion or the like. On the other hand, when the determined decorative symbol of the probability change big hit combination is determined, the fact that the game is controlled to the probability change state is performed in the re-lottery effect during the variable display or without executing the re-lottery effect.

  After executing the processing of step S524 or S526, it is determined whether or not the specified fluctuation pattern is a special fluctuation pattern by reading, for example, EXT data in the fluctuation pattern designation command (step S528). When it is determined in step S528 that the pattern is the special fluctuation pattern (step S528; Yes), a predetermined effect execution setting process is performed (step 87AKS001). FIG. 9-5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the predetermined effect execution setting process. In the predetermined effect execution setting process shown in FIG. 9-5, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the predetermined effect (step 87AKS002). Specifically, in the process of step 87AKS002, whether to execute the predetermined effect is determined based on the variable display result in accordance with the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-6. The predetermined effect in this embodiment is an effect performed during the special display variable display effect, and is not executed when the predetermined effect is performed at the time of the special change before 12 times, as described later. This is an effect with a higher degree of expectation than when 12 special fluctuations are performed. Further, as described later, when the predetermined effect is executed, the expectation is higher as the execution timing is later.

  Subsequent to the process of step 87AKS002, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the predetermined effect is determined to be “present” in step 87AKS002 (step 87AKS003). When it is determined that the execution of the predetermined effect is “present” (Step 87AKS003; Yes), the execution mode and the execution timing of the predetermined effect are determined (Step 87AKS004). Specifically, in the process of step 87AKS004, the variation pattern is specified based on the variation pattern designation command, and the execution mode of the predetermined effect is set to “mode A” according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-7 based on the specified variation pattern. "Or" Aspect B ". Although the example shown in FIG. 9-7 shows an example in which the determination ratio of the execution mode of the predetermined effect is set irrespective of the number of special fluctuations, it is set to a different determination ratio depending on the number of special fluctuations. May be. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7, the predetermined effect of “mode B” is a mode determined only when the variable display result is “big hit”. For this reason, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that the predetermined effect of “mode B” is performed. In this embodiment, the character A is displayed in “mode A”, and the character B is displayed in “mode B”. In addition, the "mode B" may be determined only in the case of the fluctuation pattern of "special fluctuation big hit".

  In the process of step 87AKS004, if the specified fluctuation pattern is four special fluctuation patterns, the variable display result is “big hit” or “losing” according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-8 (A). The execution timing of the predetermined effect is determined depending on whether there is any. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the predetermined effect is executed, the expectation is higher as the execution timing is later. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9A, among the four special fluctuations, the second special fluctuation is the second special fluctuation compared to the case where the first special fluctuation is the execution timing of the predetermined effect. The fourth time, which is the last time, has a variable display result in the third time, when the time is the execution timing of the predetermined effect, and in the fourth time, when the time of the third special change is the execution time of the predetermined effect. The determination ratio is set so that the degree of expectation of "big hit" is increased.

  If the specified fluctuation pattern is eight special fluctuation patterns, in the process of step 87AKS004, whether the variable display result is "big hit" or "losing" according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-8 (B). , The execution timing of the predetermined effect is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 9B, the execution timing is different from that of FIG. 9A, and the execution timing is a plurality of times, such as the first time, the second time, or the third to fifth times. Although an example is shown in which one determination ratio is set for, as described above, it is sufficient that the later the execution timing is, the higher the expectation is. In the example shown in FIG. 9B, any one of the third to fifth times is the third to fifth times as compared with the case where the first or second special change is the execution timing of the predetermined effect. The sixth or seventh time is the final time than the case where the sixth or seventh special fluctuation time is the execution timing of the predetermined effect, as compared to the case where any of the special fluctuation times is the execution timing of the predetermined effect. The determination ratio is set such that the degree of expectation that the variable display result is "big hit" is higher in the eighth time. Therefore, in the process of step 87AKS004, any of these execution timings is determined first, and then a specific execution timing is determined (determined in two stages). For example, in the case of the first or second special fluctuation, whether the execution timing is the first or the second is determined such that the second time has a higher expectation than the first time. To decide. Also, for example, in the case of any of the third to fifth special fluctuations, similarly, whether the execution timing is the third time, the fourth time, or the fifth time is further determined by the fifth time. It is determined that the fourth time has a higher expectation than the fourth time than the third time. The same applies to the case of the sixth or seventh special fluctuation. Note that, in FIG. 9-8 (B), similarly to FIG. 9-8 (A), the respective determination ratios may be set for each time (first to eighth times) (they are determined in one step). In this case, the determination ratio may be set so that the expectation increases as the execution timing is later.

  If the specified variation pattern is the 12 special variation patterns, in the process of step 87AKS004, whether the variable display result is "big hit" or "losing" according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. , The execution timing of the predetermined effect is determined. The example shown in FIG. 9-8 (B) also shows an example in which one determination ratio is set for a plurality of timings as the execution timing, as in FIG. 9-8 (B). As described above, the later the execution timing is, the higher the expectation should be. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 9-8 (C) as well, as in the case where the execution timing is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. A specific execution timing may be determined (it may be determined in two stages). Note that, in FIG. 9-8 (C), similarly to FIG. 9-8 (A), the respective determination ratios may be set for each time (first to twelfth) (they are determined in one step). In this case, the determination ratio may be set so that the expectation increases as the execution timing is later.

  Returning to FIG. 9-5, after executing the process of step 87AKS004, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution timing of the predetermined effect determined in step 87AKS004 is the last time in the special fluctuation (step 87AKS005). ). When the execution timing of the predetermined effect is not the last time (step 87AKS005; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines an effect mode after the execution of the predetermined effect (step 87AKS006). As described above, when the predetermined effect is executed, the expectation is higher than when the special effect is performed 12 times without being executed, and thus the predetermined effect is performed at a timing before the final special change. When the effect is executed, the player's interest in the special fluctuation after the predetermined effect is reduced. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the predetermined effect is executed at a timing before the final special fluctuation, the special fluctuation is performed from the execution of the predetermined effect until the period when the final special fluctuation is performed. By performing an effect (extended effect) different from the variable display effect, the time after the execution of the predetermined effect is extended. In step 87AKS006, the execution mode of the extended effect is determined according to the execution mode of the predetermined effect in accordance with the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-9.

  As shown in FIG. 9-9, there are “aspect 1” and “aspect 2” as the execution manner of the extended effect in this embodiment, and in step 87AKS006, the manner of the predetermined effect to be executed is “aspect A , The extended effect of “aspect 1” is determined as the execution mode, and the extended effect of “aspect 2” is determined as the execution mode if it is “aspect B”. The extended effect of “mode 1” is an effect of displaying a “target appearance” message on the image display device 5, and the extended effect of “mode 2” is a message of “acquiring a premium target” displayed on the image display device 5. It is an effect to be displayed in, but is not limited to this, in addition to this, it may be possible to blink or turn on an audio output or a lamp, or change the presence or absence of audio output and the presence or absence of the lamp according to the mode Good.

  Returning to FIG. 9-5, after executing the process of step 87AKS006, if the execution timing of the predetermined effect is the last time (step 87AKS005; Yes), or if it is determined that the predetermined effect is not executed in step 87SKA003 (step 87AKS003) No), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode of the explanation effect (step 87AKS007). The explanation effect is an effect indicating that the degree of expectation to be a “big hit” is high when the predetermined effect is performed in the special fluctuation. For example, the character A or the character This is an effect of performing a display such as GET B. In step 87AKS007, the execution mode of the explanation effect is determined according to the variation pattern in accordance with the determination ratio shown in FIGS. As shown in FIGS. 9-10, the mode of execution of the explanation effect in this embodiment includes “mode A” and “mode B”. The “mode B” is an effect for performing display such as GET the character B.

  As described above, the predetermined effect in this embodiment is “losing” because the predetermined effect of “aspect B” is not executed when “losing” is performed, as shown in FIG. 9-10. , The description effect of the “aspect B” is not executed. Further, since the "big hit" is determined when the predetermined effect of "aspect B" is executed, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect of "aspect B" from being executed and becoming a super reach, thereby giving the player a feeling of being prolonged. Therefore, in the same manner as in FIG. 9-7, the ratio determined in the “aspect B” in the case of the “special fluctuation big hit” fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the “big hit” without becoming super reach than in the case of other fluctuation patterns Is also higher. When the predetermined effect of the “mode B” is executed, the “big hit” is determined. Therefore, when the “big hit” is reached via the super reach (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the special fluctuation super reach big hit), The value to be given to the player may be different, for example, in the case of the "big hit" (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the special fluctuation big hit), for example, in which the number of rounds is different or the probability of giving a certain change is different. Further, the predetermined effect of “mode B” is not limited to the premium effect indicating “big hit” decision, and may be executed at the time of “loss”. In accordance with this, the description effect of “mode B” may also be executed at the time of “loss”.

  Returning to FIG. 9-5, after executing the process of step 87AKS007, the effect control CPU 120 determines the character to be displayed each time in the special fluctuation (step 87AKS008), and ends the predetermined effect execution setting process. When the predetermined effect of “mode A” is executed, character A is displayed. Therefore, character B corresponding to “mode B” is not displayed, and the predetermined effect of “mode B” is executed. In this case, since the character B is displayed, the character A corresponding to the "aspect A" is restricted from being displayed. The restriction may be performed in step 87AKS008 or step 87AKS004.

  In step 87AKS008, the characters to be displayed are determined according to the number of special fluctuations and the like in accordance with the determination ratio shown in FIGS. Specifically, when the predetermined effect is not performed, the display character is determined in accordance with the determination ratio of FIGS. 9A to 9C according to the number of special fluctuations, and when the predetermined effect is performed, The display character is determined according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. In this embodiment, five types of characters such as character A to character E are prepared in advance, and character A is displayed at the time of the predetermined effect of “mode A”, and character B is displayed at the time of the predetermined effect of “mode B”. You. Therefore, in step 87AKS008, the display setting of the characters C to E is performed. As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, the greater the number of times the character E is displayed, the higher the degree of expectation of a "big hit" is set. The example illustrated in FIG. 9-11 indicates the number of times the character E is displayed. For example, in the case of “E is once” in FIG. D should just be displayed. A plurality of patterns in which the number of characters to be displayed and the order of the characters are determined may be prepared as display patterns, and the pattern to be displayed may be determined. In this case, for example, if the number of times of the special change is four, even if the number of times the character E is displayed is one, the number of times the character E is displayed later is the same as the expectation of "big hit" being higher. However, the expectation may be different depending on the display timing.

  Returning to FIG. 9-4, after performing any one of the processes of step 87AKS001, step S523, and step S527, the effect control CPU 120 performs other effect execution settings (step S531). For example, at the start of the variable display or at a predetermined timing during execution, a sound effect (for example, an alarm sound, a chime sound, a siren sound, etc.) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect. By executing an effect in a predetermined mode including a part or all of the effects in which the flash lamp included in the lamp 9 and the like shines, it is immediately notified that the variable display result is a "big hit" (determinative). The effect of the one-shot notification mode of performing the notification may be executed. Alternatively, an effect of displaying a special effect image (premium image) corresponding to the variable display result being “big hit” may be executed as the fluctuating notice effect.

  As another example, in the process of step S531, regardless of the possibility that the variable display result may be a "big hit", for example, a setting for executing an effect in a predetermined mode for liveliness may be performed. More specifically, it is only necessary to be able to execute an effect in a predetermined mode such as an effect in which a predetermined lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 shines or an effect in which a predetermined effect image serving as a mini character is displayed.

  Thereafter, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S532). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of special figure fluctuation effect control patterns prepared according to, for example, a fluctuation pattern designated by a fluctuation pattern designation command, and sets the selected pattern as a use pattern. After the process of step S532 is performed, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the RAM 122 is set, for example, corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command (step S533). Subsequently, a setting for starting a change of a decorative pattern or the like in the image display device 5 is performed (step S534). At this time, for example, by transmitting a display control command specified by the display control data included in the special figure fluctuation effect control pattern determined as the use pattern in step S532 to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, What is necessary is just to start the change of the decorative symbol in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" provided on the screen of the image display device 5. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S535), and the variable display start setting process ends.

  FIG. 9-12 illustrates an example of the effect operation in the case where the predetermined effect of “mode A” is executed. In the illustrated example, an example is shown in which the predetermined effect of “mode A” is executed tenth time in the fluctuation pattern of “special fluctuation super reach big hit” in which 12 special fluctuations are performed. As shown in FIG. 9-12 (a), when the first special fluctuation is started, a message display is displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (b), to get character A together with character A as an explanation effect. (Explanation display 87AK001) is performed. By the explanation effect, the player can recognize that the expected degree is high when the character A is displayed. Note that the explanation display 87AK001 may be reduced and displayed continuously in order to prevent the player from forgetting. Note that, in this case, it is sufficient to delete the data at the timing of FIG. In addition, the display color may be changed from black to iridescent at the timing.

  As shown in FIG. 9-12 (c), at the end of the first special change (at the time of the first temporary stop of the decorative pattern), the character determined in the process of step 87AKS008 in FIG. 9-5 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the character C is displayed as the character 87AK002 determined in the process of 87AKS008. Then, when the second special change is started as shown in FIG. 9D, the character count display 87AK003 indicating the display count of the character C is performed. The number-of-characters display 87AK003 may be displayed for a period until a predetermined effect is performed or for a period until the special change is completed without executing the predetermined effect.

  As shown in FIG. 9E, the character determined in the process of step 87AKS008 in FIG. 9D is displayed at the end of the second special change (temporary stop of the second decorative symbol). The illustrated example shows an example in which the character E is displayed as the character 87AK002 determined in the process of 87AKS008. Then, as shown in FIG. 9F, when the third special change is started, a character count display 87AK003 indicating the number of display times of the characters C and E is performed, and at the end of the third special change ( At the time of the third decorative symbol temporary stop), the character C is displayed as the character 87AK002 as shown in FIG. 9-12 (g).

  Such special fluctuations are repeated, and at the tenth special fluctuation, which is the execution timing of the predetermined effect, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (h), at the end of the special fluctuation (at the time of the tenth temporary stop of the decorative symbol). The character A, which is the character 87AK004, is displayed as a predetermined effect. After the predetermined effect is executed, the effect is extended for the period corresponding to the period until the remaining two special fluctuations end, in the mode determined in step 87AKS006 in FIG. 9-5. The example illustrated in FIG. 9H illustrates an example in which a message “Target Appearance” is displayed as an extended effect of “Aspect 1”. Then, when a period corresponding to the case where the twelfth special fluctuation is performed elapses, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (j), a reach state is established, and a super-reach reach effect is executed.

  FIG. 9-13 shows an example of the effect operation in the case where the predetermined effect of “mode B” is executed. In the example shown in the figure, an example is shown in which the predetermined effect of “mode B” is executed for the tenth time in the “special fluctuation big hit” fluctuation pattern in which twelve special fluctuations are performed. As in FIG. 9-12 (h), at the end of the tenth special change (at the tenth temporary stop of the decorative pattern), as shown in FIG. 9-13 (a), the character 87AK004 as the predetermined effect is used. A certain character B is displayed. Then, after the predetermined effect is executed, the extended effect is executed for the period corresponding to the period until the remaining two special fluctuations are completed, in the mode determined in step 87AKS006 in FIG. 9-5. The example illustrated in FIG. 9B illustrates an example in which a message “Premium target acquisition” is displayed as an extended effect of “Mode 2”. Then, when a period corresponding to the case where the twelfth special fluctuation is performed has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 9-13 (c), the reach state is not reached, and the fixed display symbol that becomes “big hit” is displayed as it is. Is done.

  As described above, in the characteristic portion 87AK, the variable display effect of the special fluctuation can be executed, and the expectation degree increases as the number of times of executing the special fluctuation increases. In addition, the predetermined effect can be executed during the variable display effect of the special change, and when the predetermined effect is performed at the time of the special change before the 12 times, 12 times of the special change are performed without being executed. Expectations are higher than in cases. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the execution of the predetermined effect, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest.

  Further, in the first special variation, an explanation effect indicating that the degree of expectation of "big hit" is high when a predetermined effect is executed in the special variation is executed. Therefore, the purpose of the special effect can be easily recognized. Further, the fluctuation pattern includes a fluctuation pattern of a pseudo-run and a fluctuation pattern of a special fluctuation, and a predetermined effect is executed in the fluctuation due to the fluctuation pattern of the special fluctuation. Therefore, attention can be paid not only to the number of executions but also to the presence or absence of execution of the predetermined effect. In addition, there are two types of predetermined effects, “aspect A” and “aspect B”. When the predetermined effect of “aspect B” is executed, “big hit” is determined. That is, the degree of expectation differs depending on the mode of execution. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the type of the predetermined effect.

  Further, the fluctuation pattern includes a fluctuation pattern of “special fluctuation super reach jackpot” and a fluctuation pattern of “special fluctuation jackpot”, and a pattern that develops into super reach after the special fluctuation and a pattern that does not develop into super reach There is a pattern that becomes a "big hit" as it is. Therefore, there are a plurality of development patterns after the execution of the special effect, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment. Also, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “special fluctuation super reach big hit”, the ratio of the execution of the predetermined effect of “aspect A” is high, and in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “special fluctuation big hit”, “aspect B” Is more likely to be performed. Therefore, there are a plurality of development patterns after the execution of the special effect, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(Modification of the characteristic part 87AK)
In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-12, an example is shown in which the character displayed in each special change and the character count display 87AK003 indicating the number of times are displayed. A display (for example, a message display such as the third time!) That allows recognition of the change may be performed. Since the higher the number of special fluctuations, the higher the degree of expectation, such a display allows the player to easily recognize the number of special fluctuations and improve the entertainment of the game.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the expectation is high when the predetermined effect is executed in the special fluctuation (when the character A or B is displayed), and in other cases, the expectation is higher as the number of times the character E is displayed is larger. An example with a high degree is shown. That is, in the above-described embodiment, an example has been shown in which the jackpot expectation degree is suggested according to the displayed character, but this is an example. For example, a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested by the number of times or combination of characters to be displayed. For example, if the character displayed most frequently in the 12 special fluctuations is character A, the setting value is an even number, if the character B is, the setting value is an odd number, and if the character C is the lowest, the setting value is the lowest. The character D may indicate that the setting is high, and the character E may indicate that the setting is high. Also, the character displayed second most may be targeted. Further, the set value may be suggested by the display pattern of the display character. Further, the set value may be suggested by the type of the character displayed at the specific time in the special fluctuation, and the number of the special fluctuation to be the specific time may be determined by lottery at the start of the special fluctuation. . In this case, at the start of the special change at the specific time, a message such as attention to the type of the character may be displayed. Further, for example, the setting value may be suggested for the number of times or the pattern of the character displayed in the latter half special fluctuation such as the seventh to twelfth special fluctuations out of the twelve special fluctuations. In this way, by suggesting the set value in the special effect, the player's attention to the special effect can be attracted.

  The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration thereof is included in the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other exemplary embodiments described below, as well as changes and additions without departing from the gist of the present invention.

  In addition, all or some of the configurations described in the above-described embodiments and the modifications and the configurations described in the embodiments and the modifications described below may be arbitrarily combined.

  It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the below-described embodiments disclosed this time are merely examples in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above and the following description, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and performs a special effect of executing a special effect of repeating a predetermined mode a predetermined number of times. Means (CPU 120 for effect control for performing special fluctuation) and predetermined effect executing means (CPU 120 for effect control for executing predetermined effect) capable of executing a predetermined effect during execution of the special effect. When the predetermined effect is not executed by the effect execution means, a higher ratio is obtained when the predetermined mode is repeated for the second number of times than the first number of times, than when the predetermined mode is repeated for the first number of times as the special effect. Control to the advantageous state (for example, the higher the number of executions of the special fluctuation, the higher the expectation), and the predetermined effect is not executed by the predetermined effect The predetermined effect can be controlled to the advantageous state at a higher rate when the predetermined effect is executed by the predetermined effect execution unit until the predetermined operation is repeated the first time than when the predetermined mode is repeated the second time. (For example, when the predetermined effect is performed at the time of the special change before 12 times, the degree of expectation is higher than when the predetermined effect is not performed and the 12 times of the special change are performed.) Furthermore, a display control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display, and a change suggestion effect capable of executing a change suggestion effect indicating that the mode of the corresponding display changes. Execution means (effect control CPU 120), the change suggestion effect execution means as a change suggestion effect, a change suggestion effect of a successful mode (FIG. 13-18 (1), As shown in 2), the ball thrown by the character hits the active display 30TM003 to change the display mode) and a failure mode change suggestion mode (as shown in FIGS. 13-19 (10) and (20)). In addition, the effect that the ball thrown by the character is flipped by the active display 30TM003 and the display mode is not changed) can be executed, and within a predetermined period (for example, from the start of the change), During the period until the reach state is established, during the period from the start of the fluctuation until the decorative symbol (combination of decorative symbols or pseudo-continuous symbol in which re-variation (pseudo-series) is performed after the temporary stop) is temporarily stopped. The rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed during the period from the start until any of the decorative symbols in the middle left and right stops for the first time is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-16). Thus, at the stage where the second change suggestion effect is executed, if both of the success modes are successful, the third change suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 100%, one time is the success mode and one time. In the case of a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the execution of the predetermined effect, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest. Further, the degree of attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect can be increased, and the interest can be improved.

  Also, a special effect and a change suggestion effect may be associated with each other. For example, a change suggestion effect is executed at a timing at which a predetermined mode is repeated. By doing so, when the special effect is executed, the player can pay attention to both the number of repetitions and whether or not the mode of the corresponding display changes, thereby improving the interest.

  Further, as the number of repetitions increases, the ratio of displaying the success mode as the change suggestion effect may be increased. By doing so, the form of the corresponding display is easily changed according to the number of repetitions, so that the interest is improved.

Further, the number of executions of the success mode change suggestion effect may be associated with the number of repetitions of the predetermined mode in the special effect. For example, the number of repetitions of the predetermined mode may be increased as the number of executions of the success mode change suggestion effect increases. By doing so, the possibility that the number of repetitions of the predetermined mode in the special effect increases when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, and an advantageous state can be increased if the number of repetitions of the predetermined mode in the special effect increases Since the character is enhanced, it is possible to further focus on whether or not the change suggestion effect is a successful mode, and it is possible to improve interest.
Further, the rate at which the predetermined effect is executed may be made different depending on the number of times the effect indicating the change of the success mode is executed. For example, the rate at which the predetermined effect is executed may be increased as the number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect of the success mode increases. By doing so, if the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the possibility that the predetermined effect is executed is increased, and if the predetermined effect is executed, the possibility of being in an advantageous state is increased. It is possible to make the user pay more attention to whether or not to be in an aspect, and to improve the interest.

  Further, as an example of a form of a gaming machine capable of improving interest, a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols) is provided. Display control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the display, and change suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the corresponding display changes ( Effect control CPU 120), and the change suggestion effect execution means includes, as a change suggestion effect, a character throws as shown in FIGS. 13-18 (1) and (2) as a change suggestion effect of a successful mode. The effect in which the ball hits the active display 30TM003 to change the display mode) and the failure mode change suggestion effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-19 (10) and (20)) An effect in which the ball thrown by the character is hit by the active display 30TM003 and the display mode is not changed) can be executed, and within a predetermined period (for example, from the start of the change to the reach state) according to the number of executions of the effect indicating the change of the successful mode. Is established from the start of the change, from the start of the change, to the decorative design (combination of the decorative designs or the pseudo-serial design in which the re-variation (pseudo-serial) is performed after the temporary stop) until the temporary stop. The rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed during the period until any of the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right stops for the first time is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-16, the second change suggestion effect) In the stage where is executed, if both are in the successful mode, the third change suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 100%. If one is in the successful mode and one is in the failed mode, There is a case in which times eyes of the change suggests production is not executed), the gaming machine and the like. Hereinafter, an example of the embodiment of the gaming machine will be described as another embodiment.

  (Other examples)

(Explanation about the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, the characteristic portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 10A is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern and a type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 10A, in this embodiment, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the non-reach-losing variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1 in which the display result is "losing". -2. The display results are "big hits" such as reach loss variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the display result is "losing". Are prepared. PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, etc.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (B), in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach AE are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that indicates that it is controlled to the big hit state. The reliability when each reach is executed (big hit reliability) is represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 10-1 (B), normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super reach Reach B <Super Reach A. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it becomes a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the super reach is executed via the normal reach. Further, during the super-reach reach performance, an advanced performance that develops (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. The variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., and the variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4, etc. shown in FIG. 10A are variation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. In FIG. 10A, a variation pattern in which the reliability evolves to a super-reach of one level higher is shown, but a variation pattern in which the reliability evolves in two or more levels is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

  In this embodiment, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability. As shown in FIG. 10-1 (B), the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of the reach. Specifically, the super reach E having the lowest reliability among the super reach is notified only by displaying the title of the reach, and the other super reach is notified of the title by display and sound. In this way, the notification of the title is executed by the effect devices with the reach of the higher reliability than the reach of the lower reliability. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be effectively fueled, and the effect of the performance is improved. Note that the title notification mode may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or irrespective of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Further, the font of the title character (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) or the typeface (line, square, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach.

  The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the title itself such as the name of the reach, but may be the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the content of the effect of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of production operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, an example of a rendering operation according to the present embodiment will be described. The following production operation is executed by the production control CPU 120 executing the production control process based on the production control command transmitted from the main board 11. FIGS. 10-2 and 10-3 are diagrams illustrating an example of a super-reach effect production operation according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10-2 (A) shows that the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. ing. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (B), the decorative symbol indicating the number 7 on the “left” and “right” stops and the reach mode is reached. After that, the production branches depending on the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 10C, the character 31AK001, which is a friendly character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses from the start of the super-reach effect, such as when the introduction part of the super-reach effect (also referred to as the super-reach effect) ends, as shown in FIG. The title 31AK002 of super reach A (here, the character of "SP reach A") is displayed on the entire screen, and the sound (here, "super reach A") corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8. Thus, the title of Super Reach A is announced. Thereafter, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is deleted, the character 31AK003, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the characters 31AK001 and 31AK003 are displayed as shown in FIG. Is performed, the subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. An effect in which the characters confront each other is also referred to as a battle effect. In the battle effect, if a friendly character wins, a big hit occurs, and if the friendly character loses, a loss occurs.

  In addition, when the words are displayed on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, a sound corresponding to the words may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 10-2 (E), and may be displayed as subtitles in a lower portion of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of Super Reach B, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses after the super-reach effect is started, such as when the introduction portion of the super-reach effect ends, the title 31AK005 of the super-reach B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. (Here, “SP Reach B”) is displayed, and a sound (here, “Super Reach B”) corresponding to the Reach title name is output from the speaker 8, so that the Super Reach B title is displayed. Be informed. Thereafter, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is deleted, the character 31AK006, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the characters 31AK001 and 31AK006 are displayed as shown in FIG. Is performed, the subsequent part of the reach effect of the super reach B is executed.

  As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title of the reach is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the super reach effect was started. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction part of the super reach effect or the like is shown to the player, so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

  Also, super reach A (FIG. 10-2 (C) → (D) → (E)...) And super reach B (FIG. 10-2 (C) → (F) → (G)...) Then, in the introductory portion until the title is announced, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 10-2 (C)). By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super-reach has been started since the super-reach production started, and which title is to be notified. The super-reach A and the super-reach B are not limited to the completely common production mode until the title is announced, and it is possible to determine at least one of super-reach by watching the production. The sections may have a common effect mode. For example, in the introduction part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect of displaying an enemy character or suggesting an enemy character) may be executed in a manner related to a title to be notified thereafter. It may be. By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be executed after the super reach can be specified.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 10H, the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the character of “SP Reach D”) is displayed at a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, a sound (here, “defeat the enemy”) corresponding to the title of the reach is output from the speaker 8, thereby notifying the title of the super reach D. As described above, in Super Reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach effect. Under the title 31AK007, an expectation suggestion indication 31AK008 indicating the expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation to be a big hit, but does not have to completely match the big hit reliability of the reach.

  The notification by the voice of Super Reach D does not report the title name as it is, but reports the content of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice differs depending on the type of the reach. Thereby, the notification mode of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

  After the title is announced in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be displayed in a reduced size, for example, in the upper right portion of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of the reach even during the reach effect. Although FIG. 10-2 (I) shows the effect contents common to FIG. 10-2 (C) (super reach A, super reach B), a super reach effect dedicated to super reach D is executed. You may.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (J), the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach reach of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is performed. Be executed.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 10A, the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the character of “SP Reach E”) is displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 5. Then, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In the super reach E, the notification of the title by voice is not performed. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011, which is an enemy character, are displayed. Be executed. As described above, in the super reach E, the title is notified in accordance with the progress of the reach effect. In the super reach E, the title 31AK010 is continuously displayed during the reach effect.

  In the reach production of the super reach E having a low jackpot reliability, by giving the title notification without stopping the progress of the reach production, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of expectation. On the other hand, in the reach effects of the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach D, the progress of the reach effect is stopped and the title is notified (FIG. 10-2 (D), (F)). , (H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that in super reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach. Also, in contrast to this embodiment, in a super-reach reach production with a high jackpot reliability, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach effect of the super reach having a low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach effect may be stopped to notify the title.

(Timing notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach production The title is announced at the start. By doing so, the title notification corresponding to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the superreach effect, and Super Reach D and Super Reach have low jackpot reliability. In E, the title was announced at the start of the super-reach production, but the title was announced at the start of the super-reach production in the case of the reach with a high jackpot reliability, and the super The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the image display device 5 is displayed. Is notified in a part of the screen (second area). By doing so, the title notification corresponding to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, title notification is executed in a wider display area than in a case of a reach with a low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be such that the title is displayed in a size that fits on the entire screen, or the entire background is displayed as a title notification background. (Title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, or the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

  The method of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect may be arbitrarily changed. For example, in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in a case of a reach with a low reliability. Further, when the display area for performing the title notification is made different according to the reach effect, the display area may be made different as in this embodiment, or the display place may be made different.

(Expectation degree suggestion display)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in the super reach A and the super reach B having the high jackpot reliability, the super reach D having the lower jackpot reliability than the super reach A and the super reach B is displayed without displaying the indication of the expectation degree. In the title notification in, an indication of the degree of expectation was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming dull. In addition, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, an indication of the degree of expectation is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the expectation by displaying the expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. Note that an expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on at least a part of the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach E.

  Note that the indication of the degree of expectation is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars as shown in FIG. 10-2 (H) and the like. May be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (H) and the like, in the case where the number of black stars is indicated, half (= half) black stars can be displayed, and the number of levels of expectation may be increased. .

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is deleted and the super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in the super reach A and the super reach B, it is possible to pay attention to the reach effect. Further, in the super reach D and the super reach E, after the title is displayed, the title is continuously displayed until a predetermined effect described later is executed. Thereby, in the super reach D and the super reach E, the type of the reach can be grasped even during the super reach effect. Further, by performing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed in any case in order to improve the effect.

  Note that, here, the operation of the super-reach C in the reach effect is omitted, but it is only necessary to execute, for example, title notification and expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability.

(Decided production)
When it is time to derive the display result (the end of the variable display) after each reach effect has been executed, a determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result will be a "big hit" is executed. The determined effect includes a determined effect indicating that the display result is "big hit" and a determined effect indicating that the display result is "losing". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), a determined effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. Thereafter, if the display result is "big hit", an image 31AK013 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 10C, and as shown in FIG. A definitive decorative symbol to be a big hit combination is derived. If the display result is "losing", an image indicating that the ally character has been defeated is displayed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a reach-losing combination is derived.

  In the present embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the fixed effect is executed. Thereby, it is possible to pay attention to the determined effect, and it is possible to execute a sharp title notification.

  In the effect operation example shown in FIGS. 10-2 and 10-3, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative design is reduced at the lower right portion of the image display device 5 and the variable display is executed. The way of displaying the decorative pattern during the reach effect may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative design may not be displayed during the reach effect, and the display mode (size, position, shading, number, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach effect.

  In addition, in the case of displaying the characters resident during the hold display, the active display, the variable display, and the display related to the mobile phone on the image display device 5, the display is appropriately not displayed during the super-reach's reach effect in order to focus on the reach effect. It may be. At this time, these displays may be kept displayed during a low-reliability reach effect such as super reach E. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from excessively expecting a low-reliability reach effect, and to focus on the reach effect in the high-reliability reach effect.

(Development stage)
Next, an example of an effect operation when an extended effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), when the extended effect is executed when the reach effect of super reach D is executed (the title notification of super reach D is executed), FIG. As shown in (B), an effect is performed in which the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn. Thereafter, when the game reaches the super reach A, as shown in FIG. 10C, the title of the super reach A is announced, and the reach effect of the super reach A is executed. In the case of developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 10D, the title of Super Reach B is announced, and the reach effect of Super Reach is executed. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title of the reach of the development source is switched to the title of the reach of the development destination. As shown in FIG. 10-4, when the reach of the development destination is a reach that performs title notification by display and voice, title notification by display and voice is executed again.

  Note that the development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), and may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked and cracked, or a sandstorm (indicating that a failure has occurred). It may be displayed. With such an effect, an unexpected effect can be performed. It should be noted that there may be a development effect of gasses, such as an effect in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion)
In the effect operation example shown in FIG. 10-2 (H), the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 is configured such that black stars indicating the expectation degree are displayed from the beginning. It is also possible to execute an expectation suggestion effect that suggests an expectation by becoming a black star.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), when notifying the title of Super Reach D, first, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021 of five white stars is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation degree indication display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 10-5 (C), the black star 31AK022 moves and is expected. An effect that fits into one of the white stars of the degree suggestion display 31AK021 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound of “pin” indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 10-5 (D) and (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of the reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed step by step each time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation falls in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021, the black star is highlighted, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (F). By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expected degree suggestion effect has been completed.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 10-5 (A) to (F), the black stars are displayed one by one, and the expectation indicated by the expectation suggestion display is increased by one step. One or more items may be displayed, and the degree of expectation may be increased by two or more levels. Alternatively, half black stars may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be increased by half a step. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output according to the number of displayed stars (the number of stages of rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when a half black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing so, the effect indicating the degree of expectation is diversified, and the effect of the effect is improved. Regardless of the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases at one time, the same black star image is displayed and fits in the white star of the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars according to the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases increases Such an effect may be performed.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command specifying a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, the character, the motif displayed on the image display device 5, the sound output from the speaker 8, and the like need only be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or the game state, or may be changeable by a player's operation.

  FIGS. 10-5 (G) to (L) are examples of the production operation of the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion production in the special mode when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the production mode. In the normal mode, as shown in FIGS. 10-5 (A) to (F), title notification and expectation degree suggestion effect are executed. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is a reach effect of the super reach D2 having a different effect form from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 10-5 (G). At this time, a voice corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but a voice different from the normal mode (for example, a voice having a different voice color) is output. In addition, the expectation degree suggestion indication 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star but a diamond.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (H), a black diamond 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 10-5 (I), the black diamond 31AK025 moves and is expected. An effect that fits into one of the white diamonds of the degree suggestion display 31AK024 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound of “pong” indicating that the black rhombus indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 10-5 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of the reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation falls in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (L), the black rhombus is highlighted so as to shine. In this way, by making the notification mode of the title different depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the selection of the player, the game state, and the like, the effect is diversified, and the effect of the effect is enhanced. improves.

  FIG. 10-5 shows an example of the production operation when the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D is designated. However, depending on the production mode (the state when the reach production is executed), other reach productions (title notification, expected degree) (Including a suggestion effect) may be made different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether to notify the title of the reach or the execution ratio of the title notification may be different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect according to the preference of the player, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the degree of expectation is indicated by the number of black stars in the expectation degree suggestion display, and the degree of expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is executed. May be executed to gradually reduce the number of displays indicating the degree of expectation. Such an expectation suggestion effect may be executed in addition to, or instead of, the expectation effect effect of the present embodiment.

(Other examples of development effects)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, in the case where the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (A), the title of Super Reach D is announced, and after the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, the image is displayed as shown in FIG. 10-6 (B). An extended effect in which the button image 31AK031 is displayed on the device 5 is executed. Here, when the operation on the push button 31B is detected, the title 31AK032 of super reach C (here, the character of “SP reach C”) is displayed as shown in FIG. 10-6 (C). , The title of Super Reach C is announced. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title of the reach of the development source is switched to the title of the reach of the development destination. Under the title 31AK032, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK033 having three black stars is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. Note that, after the movable body 32 operates, a development effect in which the title and the expected degree suggestion display change may be executed.

(Preliminary production)
In this embodiment, a title announcement for announcing the jackpot reliability is executed as an announcement effect according to the title notification mode (for example, the display color of the title). For example, as shown in FIG. 10A, the title 31AK036 of Super Reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of Super Reach A is displayed. Is notified, the title notice that the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed as shown in FIG. 10-7 (B). As described above, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title notice shown in FIG. 10-7, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of the display of the title.

  When a title notice in which the title display mode (display color) is changed is executed, after the title display mode has been changed, a sound corresponding to the changed display mode may be output. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The title notification by voice may be executed after the title display mode (display color) changes. In this case, a sound corresponding to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change may be output.

(Timing notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during the reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of an effect (specific effect) such as a notice effect or an advanced effect that improves the degree of expectation controlled in the jackpot advantageous state. By doing in this way, once the title is announced, an effect of increasing the degree of expectation can be executed, and thus the player's expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 10-8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an announcement effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute an announcement effect and an effect mode. The announcement effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 in FIG. In the announcement effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a super-reach fluctuation pattern (step 31AKS001).

  If the pattern is a super-reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of the super-reach (whether or not to execute a title notice) is determined (step 31AKS002).

  In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined at a determination ratio shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (A), the display color of the super reach title changes from “black”, “red”, “black” to “red”, and from “black” to “fruit pattern”. The ones that change and those that change from “red” to “fruit pattern” are provided, and the big hit reliability increases in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing of change of the title display color. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of production is improved.

  The “fruit pattern” may be such that the title character is displayed in bold and the character itself is a “fruit pattern”, or the background portion of the title display area may be a “fruit pattern”. . There may be a pattern displayed as a “fruit pattern” from the beginning. In the case where the display color changes, as shown in FIG. 10-7, the display color may change after the title notification is executed. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the big hit reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes depending on the type of super reach may be made different. In the case of super reach having a long title display period (for example, super reach D or super reach E), a plurality of changing timings may be provided, and the changing timing may be determined to any one. In the case of a super reach having a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or a smaller number than a super reach having a long title display period.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the title is determined in the normal mode at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-9 (A), and as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B) in the special mode. The display color of the title is determined at a different rate from the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. As described above, by making the execution mode (display color and display color change timing) of the title notice different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a line notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the character display mode (for example, the display color of the line) in the super reach reach effect.

  After the display color of the title of the super reach is determined, the display color of the words of the character in the reach attainment of the super reach (whether or not to execute the speech notice) is determined (step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-9 (C) according to whether the display result is “big hit” or “losing”. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (C), the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect includes “white”, “red”, and a color that changes from “white” to “red”, in this order (ascending order). ) Has increased the jackpot reliability. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing at which the display color of the dialogue changes. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the performance effect is improved. In the case where the display color changes, the display color may change after the words are displayed. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the big hit reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  In addition, the big hit reliability may be different depending on the combination of the presentation mode of the title notice and the speech notice. For example, in the case where the same announcement mode (display color) is included in the title announcement and the dialogue announcement, the big hit reliability may be increased when the same announcement mode is achieved. In addition, the big hit reliability may be different depending on the combination of the timing of change of the presentation mode between the title notice and the speech notice. For example, when the change timing is the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be different depending on which change occurs first. By doing in this way, it is possible to pay attention to the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the dialog may be determined at a different rate from the normal mode in the special mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

  Note that, instead of the dialogue notice, a notice effect in which the reliability of the big hit is foreseen by a change in the effect mode of the reach effect may be executed. In this case, in the notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing.

  After the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, or when it is determined that the pattern is not a fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), the presence or absence and the effect form of other notice effects are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in the 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (Step AK31S005), and the announcement effect determination processing ends.

  Note that in this embodiment, a title advance notice and a dialogue advance notice can be executed in the case of super reach, but in the case of a specific super reach (for example, a super reach with low reliability), the title advance notice is provided. And at least one of dialogue notices may be made executable. In addition, the title announcement and the dialogue of the dialogue have been described as being determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-9. However, the determination ratio is arbitrary. Good. By doing so, a notice effect can be performed according to the type of reach, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the number of executable effect modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between a title notice and a dialogue notice. By doing in this way, the effects can be varied and the effect of the effects can be enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of executable effect modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of executable effect modes may be the same. By doing so, a notice effect with a sense of unity can be executed, and the player can easily grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action effect)
When the presentation mode of the title notice and the dialogue of the dialogue change, an effect indicating that the presentation mode changes may be executed. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5 and an effect effect in which the image acts on at least one of a title and a line may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or the line may be changed. The effect mode of the action effect (action effect image and the like) may be common to both the title and the line. It should be noted that there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the dialogue does not change despite the execution of the action effect. In the case of executing the action effect, the presence / absence of execution of the effect effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination result regarding the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be performed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the speech notice changes in the effect mode (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different depending on the effect mode of the action effect. The ratio of the effect of the effect and the effect of the line notice (the ratio of the effect) may be different, or the ratio of the color (how many steps) the effect changes may be different. . By executing such an action effect, when the action effect image is displayed, the player pays attention to which one of the title and the line is to be applied, and the effect is improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence or absence of the effect effect and the effect mode may be determined at different rates depending on the effect mode. By doing in this way, an action effect corresponding to the effect mode can be performed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  As another example of such an action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of any of a title and a line in accordance with the effect content of the reach effect (for example, an effect of a character or an effect in a battle effect). May be changed. In this way, the player pays attention to the content of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the feature section 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the other invention. For example, all of the features described in the above embodiments are not essential components, and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Here, it is referred to as a sub liquid crystal, but the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5 or the like, or may be a movable type or a retractable type. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and display of a hold display are executed. For example, title notification may be executed in the sub liquid crystal. As in the case of the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, when the title is displayed continuously after the notification of the title, the display of the title and the degree of expectation may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after the image display device 5 notifies the title, the sub liquid crystal may display the title and the expected degree suggestion display. By doing so, it is possible to display the title and the degree of expectation suggestion display without obstructing the super reach effect on the image display device 5, and the title and the degree of expectation suggestion display are also easy to understand.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which another invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestive effect has been described. However, the title information relating to the other effect (notice that mainly displays characters) may be replaced with another invention. May be applied. For example, as a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect), when performing a look-ahead zone effect of shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, and the like) in which the background image and the effect mode on the image display device 5 are different, the shifted zone Other inventions may be applied to the title notification. When a mission ("Let's reach at 7", "Eliminate enemies using a stick controller", etc.) is presented, and a mission effect that is advantageous to the player when the mission is completed is executed, Other inventions may be applied to the title notification of the mission.

(Variation 1 of characteristic portion 31AK)
In the above-described embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, the determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a “big hit” is executed, and thereafter, the display result is displayed ( (FIG. 10-3 (B)-(D)). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and when a predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the winning or losing of the battle effect or temporarily stopping the display result. By doing so, the display result is displayed in accordance with the operation of the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest can be improved.

  FIGS. 10-10 and 10-11 are diagrams illustrating an example of a super reach effect operation in a modification in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is displayed according to the operation. After reaching the reach mode in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 10-10 (A), for example, as shown in FIG. 31AK042 is displayed, and a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed as shown in FIGS.

  With the reach effect, a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. Thereby, an operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the reception of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modification, a plurality of operation effect images indicating that an operation effect is to be executed are prepared. Then, the jackpot reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, an image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a mode having higher reliability.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 10D, a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. It changes to the large button image 31AK047.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 10-11 (I), an effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the large button image 31AK047. The effect 31AK050 that the bullet hits is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

  As described above, in this modified example, when the operation effect image changes, the effect effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. The operation effect image may change without accompanying the effect effect. Further, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the effect effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of the effect effect.

  Then, a predetermined time before the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 10-11 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is moved to the center part as shown in FIG. 10-11 (K). Is displayed, and a display urging the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is displayed. At this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A is an effective operation valid period.

  Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 10-11 (L). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. If an operation is not detected within a predetermined operation validity period, an image shown in FIG. 10-11 (L) is automatically displayed.

  In this modification, operation effect images include a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image, and an operation effect using these images in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image is performed. The jackpot reliability is high. Even when an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, the operation effect image may change to a highly reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so that the effect of the effect is improved and the expectation of the player is improved. Can be maintained.

  In addition, in the effect operation example shown in FIGS. 10-10 and 10-11, the notification of the title of the reach and the display of the suggestion of the degree of expectation are omitted, but the reach effect shown in FIGS. 10-10 and 10-11 is omitted. Or in parallel with the operation effect. The determination of the operation effect and the operation effect image (whether or not there is an operation effect, the operation effect image to be displayed, and whether or not there is an effect effect) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 10-8.

(Modification 2 of characteristic portion 31AK)
A suggestion indicating the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a big hit game state may be displayed. For example, a shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and a reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with a shutter display after the start of the variable display is executed. In the reach title effect, after the reach, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating a development destination of the reach effect is executed. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title announcement of the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

  The specific image is an image with a high jackpot reliability displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plural types of elements include a banana image of the element E1, a melon image of the element E2, an apple image of the element E3, a watermelon image of the element E4, and a strawberry image of the element E5. The fruit pattern image including these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. In addition, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to a difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display, respectively.

  When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. In addition, when a reach title is displayed during the execution of the reach effect, when a fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Note that an image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image indicating the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <a blue image <a red image <a fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of the jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach title of red characters). Then, one of the image patterns may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

  When the shutter display and the reach title display are performed, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the notification that the common sound (melody) is output by the speaker 8 and the notification by the emission of the game effect lamp 9 are performed. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When such a shutter display and a reach title display are performed, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. In the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. Note that the output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 10-12 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 10A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of the variable display. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, when the shutter effect is performed, the notification that the common sound (melody) is output by the speaker 8 is performed, and the notification by the emission of the game effect lamp 9 is performed. When the shutter that has been closed is opened, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started as shown in FIG. Downward arrows indicate variable display of left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (d), the super reach effect is started. The variable display is, for example, displayed small in the upper right of the screen, and a character is displayed on the left side of the screen. At the lower right of the screen, a reach title image 31AK062 is displayed, and the contents of the super reach to be executed from now on are shown as a reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Also, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters “Battle Reach” indicating that a reach effect accompanied by a battle effect is executed are displayed.

  In addition, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification that the common sound (melody) is output by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect of issuing a specific sound (voice) indicating that the character has high jackpot reliability, such as "hot hot", is executed. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title effect, by outputting the specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the case where the common sound and the specific sound have completely separated output periods has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

  Thereafter, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 10-12 (e) is executed. An enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the character "BATTLE WIN!" Is displayed at the upper left of the screen. It is announced that the jackpot has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect is over, the display returns to the original variable display screen with the numeric symbols. As shown in FIG. 10F, all the symbols are stopped and the big hit symbol of “777” is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-12 (a) and (d), both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. This makes it possible to suitably display the fruit pattern image in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. Thereby, it is possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image with a high jackpot reliability is displayed.

  Further, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 10-12 (a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 10-12 (d). Therefore, the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 can be noticed.

  The shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 10A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 10D are displayed at different timings. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is the specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to the overlapping of the execution timings.

  The determination regarding the shutter effect (the presence / absence of the shutter effect and the effect mode) may be performed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 10-8. In that case, the determination regarding the shutter effect may be performed based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 in FIG. 10-8. For example, when it is determined that the display color of the title is a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily executed. Also, the determination regarding the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 10-8 together with the determination regarding the shutter effect.

[Explanation about the characteristic part 21TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 21TM will be described. Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. 11A are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also provided with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes a first starting port switch 22A and a second starting port switch 22B, and a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Various components are connected, and various effect devices such as speakers 8L and 8R and a game effect lamp 9 are connected to the effect control board 12, but these devices are omitted in FIG. 11A.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side. As shown in FIG. 11-3, the main board 11 is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 21TM201, and progresses the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Various circuits for control are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly directed to a function of setting random numbers used in a special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and a sub-side control board including an effect control board 12 and the like. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like. In addition, the main board 11 controls the lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, a segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to perform the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The display of the variation of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variation display of the normal symbol, and controlling the variation of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 20 by performing lighting / off / coloring control of the ordinary symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-3 and 11-5 (A), the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 which can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It also has a function of displaying various winning information related to winning. Note that a display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be switched by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

  The main board 11 captures various signals such as a power-off signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal in addition to detection signals from the game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for detecting game balls, for example. An information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as a security signal from the switch circuit 110 for transmission to the terminal 100 and the terminal board 21TM016 is mounted.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-3 and 11-5 (A), the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 11A is sealed in a substrate case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material. A display monitor 21TM029 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged at the center of 11, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged on the front when the main board 11 is viewed. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 11A) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided at the lower center of the rear surface of the main board 11. Since the main board 11 is not visible when the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front face when viewing the main board 11 means the back side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened. This is the front when viewing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  The main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100) has a winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning opening, hereinafter referred to as "entry area"). ), And the various kinds of winning information such as the connection ratio and the winning ratio based on the counting are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and the winning information is displayed. Thereby, various winning information such as the connection ratio and the winning combination after the installation in the game hall can be confirmed. That is, on the maker side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual that the game board surface is designed so that the game ball enters the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency (to pass the test). When the test is performed, it is checked whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment has been made and as a result of the adjustment, whether the gaming ball has entered the general winning opening as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made after the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been installed.

  The power supply board is sealed in a board case made of a synthetic resin material having transparency. On the lower right side of the back of the power supply board, set values such as a jackpot winning probability (a payout rate) described later are changed. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 functioning as a setting switch and a power switch 21TM055 are provided. By operating the power switch 21TM055 in a state where the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a store clerk or the like at the amusement arcade determines whether a predetermined number of boards such as the main board 11, the production control board 12, and the payout control board 21TM037 are provided. Operating voltage is supplied. Further, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and an initialization process (RAM clear) described later is performed. Be executed. By disposing the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, the power-on operation and the initialization operation can be easily performed.

  The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 which can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Thus, only a clerk having a predetermined key can operate. In addition, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires key operation, only a store clerk who has a key for operating the lock switch 21TM051 can be operated among game store clerks. The lock switch 21TM051 is a switch capable of performing an ON / OFF switching operation using a predetermined key. The locking switch 21TM051 is capable of performing the switching operation and performing an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pressing operation). A possible switch may be used.

  Note that the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain an ON state or an OFF state. In other words, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state even if no force is applied by a store clerk or the like at the game arcade. The lock switch 21TM051 has a configuration in which a key can be inserted and removed only in an OFF state. According to such a configuration, the clerk at the game hall must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key. Can be prevented.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 11C, the lower part of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided for discharging the gaming balls that have won each winning opening and the gaming balls that have entered the out opening to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a shot game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the above-described switch circuit 110 as shown in FIG.

  The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, an audio control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And an LED control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like.

  FIG. 11B is a block diagram illustrating components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 11B, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371 is mounted on the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and has at least a built-in RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a RAM (not shown), a ROM (not shown) storing a payout control program, an I / O port, and the like constitute a payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having the payout control CPU 21TM371, RAM and ROM, and the I / O port. Further, the I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  The detection signals from the ball out switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and then is output to the main board 11 via the I / O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. .

  As shown in FIG. 11B, the payout control board 21TM037 has a game machine frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the game machine frame 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2, and the front face of the game board 2 can be opened and closed. And a door frame opening sensor 21TM300 which is provided with a door frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a to be covered, and various abnormalities are detected based on detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that the payout control microcomputer is input. The 21TM370 can distinguish and recognize the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the opened state of the glass door frame 3a.

  The detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor including a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect that a game ball is clogged, that is, to detect a so-called ball bite. . The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 indicates that the detection signal from the ball-out switch 21TM187 indicates a ball-out state or the detection signal from the full-state switch 21TM048 indicates a full-state. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

  Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the low level to the firing board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball firing from the hit ball firing device. Outputs a full signal. The firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 output from the AND circuit 21TM091 of the firing board 21TM090 is transmitted from the firing board 21TM090 to the firing motor 21TM094. The full signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of an AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the launch board 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the launch motor 21TM094). The signal is a signal that serves to supply power from the power supply board.) Is input to the other of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting the full signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 is stopped.

   The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) signals through serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, a connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is established between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuits 21TM505 and 21TM380. In order to perform confirmation, signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted / received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal (prize ball request signal in this embodiment) for confirming the connection at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 When the prize ball request signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the signal transmits a signal (received ACK signal) notifying the prize ball request signal to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, specific data is added to the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal, so that the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can transmit and receive the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal. And specific data is exchanged between them. For example, when a prize is generated, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by changing a predetermined bit of a prize ball request signal, and sets the prize for which the setting has been made. The ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 completes the prize ball payout operation, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the data indicating the end of the prize ball by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and transmits the set received ACK signal to a game. This is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100. Further, when a predetermined error (error such as lending, filling up the ball, running out of ball, etc.) occurs, the data indicating the content of the error is set by changing the predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is performed. The received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Note that the specific signal exchange between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 by serial communication will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 11-22 and FIGS.

   The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits, via the output port 21TM372b, a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls paid out and a ball lending number signal indicating the lending ball number to a terminal board (an external terminal board for a frame and an external terminal board for a board). Is output to 21TM160. Note that a driver circuit is provided outside the output port 21TM372b, but is not shown in FIG. 11B.

  Also, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 using a 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Further, a signal for instructing turning on / off is output to prize ball LED21TM053 and ball out LED21TM054 via output port 21TM372b. The detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release an error state by software reset.

  Further, a drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. Although a driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is provided outside the output port 21TM372a, it is omitted in FIG. 11-3.

  A card unit control microcomputer is mounted on the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. In addition, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indication lamp, a connection stand direction indicator, a card insertion indication lamp, and a card insertion slot. A frequency display LED 21TM060, a ball lending enable LED 21TM061, a ball lending switch 21TM062, and a return switch 21TM063 are connected to the interface board (relay board) 21TM066.

  From the interface board 21TM066, to the card unit 21TM050, a ball rental switch signal indicating that the ball rental switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are supplied to the card unit 21TM050 according to the operation of the player. . Further, a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lending permission display signal are given from the card unit 21TM050 to the interface board 21TM066. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal), and a pachinko machine operation signal ( PRDY signal) is transmitted and received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066, as shown in FIG. 11B.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. When the power is turned on, the microcomputer for controlling the card unit outputs a VL signal. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connection state / non-connection state of the card unit 21TM050 based on the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated, and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit controlling microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the microcomputer for controlling the card unit outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050, and when detecting the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to send a predetermined number of loaned balls to the player. Pay out. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 lowers the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. Thereafter, under the condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the ON state, when a payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the prize ball payout control is executed.

  The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in a power supply line of 24V AC for the card unit 21TM050 provided in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. Is prevented.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (payout rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in a special symbol normal process of a special symbol process process to be described later, a jackpot winning probability (a winning rate) is changed by using a display result determination table (winning probability) corresponding to a set value. . The set value is made up of six steps of 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases.

  FIGS. 11A to 11F are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to the respective set values. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each of the display result determination tables, the variable special figure designating buffer is 1 (first), that is, the first special symbol is a target of the variable display, and the variable special figure designating buffer is 2 (second). That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subjected to the variable display, the determination value of the big hit is set.

  As shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1, the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. , The jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/300) than when the set values are “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, and “6”. ing. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the target of the variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/300) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in a certain case. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of the variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in the case of "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of the variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11D, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 4 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than in the case of "2" or "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/250) as the case where the first special symbol is the subject of variable display.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11E, when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235) than in the case of "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/235) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11F, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of the variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to one of the big hits shown in FIGS. If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the jackpot winning is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 11A to 11F indicates a probability (ratio) of a big hit. To determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to control to a big hit gaming state, but to determine whether to stop the symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also to decide whether to make a big hit symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 11A to 11F. Provided separately, the jackpot determination is performed by using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special figure designation buffer. Is also good.

  In this embodiment, a total of six setting values 1 to 6 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but other inventions are not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited thereto. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

  Here, the display of the total of the game balls and the ratio of the accessory on the main board 11 of the present embodiment will be described.

  The main board 11 has information on winning of a game, for example, the number of prize balls by winning the first starting winning opening (navel), the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the big winning opening. The number of prize balls and the total number of prize balls due to winning in the (Attacker) are input, and the number of firing balls are totaled. Percentage (%), the percentage of the total prize balls, and the percentage of the total number of prize balls due to the prize in the second starting winning opening (Deng Chu) and the total number of prize balls in the total winning prize ball (Attacker) A base ratio (%), which is a ratio of a certain combination (%) and a ratio of the total number of award balls to the number of game balls launched, is displayed. The repetition ratio is a percentage of the total number of prize balls occupied by the number of prize balls (the number of continuous character-acquired balls described below) due to the prize in the large winning opening (attacker). The winning combination is the number of winning balls in the second starting winning opening (electric chew) and the winning number of balls in the large winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of winning balls (the following number of acquired balls). Is the percentage that is accounted for. The base is the ratio of the number of game balls launched to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls (the total number of balls obtained below) is calculated based on the number of prize balls by winning in the grand prize opening port (attacker), the number of prize balls by prize in the second starting prize port (electric chew), and the grand prize port. (Attacker) and the total number of prize balls by winning a prize port (first start prize port, general prize port) other than the second start prize port (electric chute). The special winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are variable characters, and the passing ratio of the game ball varies, so that the expected winning ratio of the game ball varies. is there. The winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the large winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are fixed auditoriums, and the passing width of the game ball is fixed. As a result, the expected winning percentage of the game balls is a fixed character.

  As a method of totaling and calculating information on winnings in the game, regarding the connection ratio and the winning ratio, the winning balls by winning the first starting winning opening (navel) and the general winning opening (sode) in the number of winning balls of 6000 pieces. The number of balls (general prize balls), the number of prize balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the number of ordinary electric prize balls (electric chew prize balls), and the winning in the large winning opening (attacker) The number of special electric prize balls (attacker prize balls), which is the number of prize balls, is totaled. The total is defined as one set, and the connection ratio (%) and the combination ratio (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60000 pieces are calculated. The number of prize balls (general prize balls), the number of ordinary electric prize balls (number of electric chu prize balls), the number of special electric The number of role prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls) is recorded in a ring buffer provided for each set value, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated every set. ing. In other words, the storage of 11 sets of 6000 pieces is stored in a considerable amount (for example, for several bytes), and the total ratio (%) and the winning combination (%) of the totals can be calculated. As for the base, the number of launched game balls with respect to the number of 60000 prize balls is counted. The total is set as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60,000 prize balls to the number of game balls launched is calculated.

  The display monitor 21TM029 displays the base ratio (%), the combination ratio (%), the total connection ratio (%), the combination ratio (%), and the last calculated 6000 prize balls (6000). The base 1 (%)) and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls can be switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds). That is, six displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to complete the display, but the number of prize balls due to winning in the first starting winning opening (navel) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are counted as the game progresses. The number of prize balls due to winning and the number of prize balls due to winning in a large winning opening (attacker) will change. Then, for example, if the number of winning balls won after displaying the connection ratio (%) for 6000 pieces is reflected in the winning percentage (%) for 60000 pieces displayed thereafter, for example, There is a possibility that a discrepancy occurs between the repetition ratio (%) and the role ratio (%) of 60000 pieces. Therefore, the number of award balls by winning the first starting winning opening (navel), the number of awarding balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the number of award balls by winning the large winning opening (attacker), the award ball If the total number is input and tabulated at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, a display timing of the connection ratio (%) for 6000 pieces), such a discrepancy can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, a storage area for storing information related to the winning of a game is provided for each set value. The prize balls, the total prize balls, and the total hits are stored in a storage area (ring buffer) corresponding to the set value. For this reason, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in the present embodiment can be individually calculated for each set value.

  In the following, as an example of the calculation method, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (electric chew) and the number of winning balls by winning in the large winning opening (attacker) are described below. A method of calculating the ratio of the bonuses (combination ratio (%)) when the total number of the bonuses acquired balls is 42000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls refers to the total cumulative number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the number of the accessory acquisition balls refers to the cumulative number of game media paid out when the game media wins the attacker and the electric chew. In addition, the number of continuous bonus item acquisition balls refers to the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning the game media to the attacker. The hit total is the cumulative number of game media hit into the pachinko gaming machine 1 until the number of prize balls reaches 60000. Therefore, the connection ratio can be obtained by the following equation (1). Further, the winning combination can be obtained by the following equation (2). The base can be obtained by the following equation (3).

  Connection ratio = [Number of consecutive bonus ball acquisitions / Total number of acquisitions] × 100 (1)

  Role ratio = [(Number of consecutive role-acquired balls + Number of role-acquired balls) / total number of acquired] × 100 (2)

  Base = [60000 (total number of prize balls) / total hits] × 100 (3)

  In the case where the total number of prize balls is 60000 and the number of obtained bonus balls is 42,000, the ratio of bonus items is obtained as 0.70 (three decimal places rounded down) by dividing 42,000 by 60000. However, since the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot perform calculations below the decimal point, calculations using the following method are required.

  First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of the accessory acquisition balls is multiplied by 100 to be 4200000. Then, this 4200000 is divided by 60000. This requires 70 as the quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, the calculation result up to two decimal places can be obtained. Here, when calculating the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, the calculation result may be multiplied by 1000.

  Next, a second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then, 42000 is divided by the 600. This requires 70 as the quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two decimal places can be obtained. Here, when calculating the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, the calculation result may be divided by 1000.

  In the above example, the total number of prize balls is 60000, but a three-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate a long-term bonus ratio. That is, in this example, 00EA60h is stored in the 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A410h is also stored in the storage area of 3 bytes for the number of the winning ball.

  Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can perform only operation between values of a maximum of 2 bytes. Therefore, the lower one byte may be truncated to facilitate the operation.

  Here, a third calculation method which is performed by simplifying the above-described second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, the lower one byte 60h is rounded down to 00EA60h of the total number of prize balls, so that the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, 00EA60h of the total number of prize balls, so that the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can easily calculate. 234 is calculated in decimal notation. Similarly, the lower one byte of 10h is rounded down to 00A410h, which is the number of the accessory acquisition balls, and the number of the accessory acquisition balls is calculated as 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 78%.

  In the third calculation method, while the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is facilitated, an error of + 12% occurs. However, the error when the total number of prize balls and the number of obtained bonus balls are 10 times is + 1%. That is, as the period for calculating the accessory ratio becomes longer, the error is reduced and approximates the original value.

The board case 21TM201 is formed of a light-transmitting material, so that the main board 11 and the display monitor 21TM029 are visible. The board case 21TM201 has a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat radiating hole for releasing heat of electric components of the main board 11. The display monitor 21TM029 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat radiating hole is not directly in front. For this reason, the visibility of the display monitor 21TM029 is not blocked by the heat radiating holes. Here, “directly in front” means directly in front of the main board 11 as a viewpoint, and means between an employee or the like who wants to view the main board 11 and the main board 11.
Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform an operation between values of a maximum of 2 bytes. Therefore, the lower one byte may be truncated to facilitate the operation.

  Here, a third calculation method which is performed by simplifying the above-described second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, the lower one byte 60h is rounded down to 00EA60h of the total number of prize balls, so that the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, 00EA60h of the total number of prize balls, so that the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can easily calculate. 234 is calculated in decimal notation. Similarly, the lower one byte of 10h is rounded down to 00A410h, which is the number of the accessory acquisition balls, and the number of the accessory acquisition balls is calculated as 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 78%.

  In addition, a storage area in which information on game winning is stored (ring buffer, 10 sets total buffer (sum of information on game winning stored in a ring buffer provided with 10 counters of up to 2 bytes), award ball The total number buffer) is not initialized when the reset button is operated, and may be stored continuously. The ring buffer will be further described later. It should be noted that the checksum of the stored value is calculated and initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected. Initialization of the storage area for storing information on winning of a game when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of consecutive bonus balls obtained is larger than the value of the number of balls obtained. Processing may be performed. Further, an error display, a warning display, or the like may be performed without performing the initialization process, or an error display or a warning display may be performed, or the initialization process may be performed after the display. The error display and the warning display will be further described later.

  For example, assuming that the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of acquired accessory balls is 19876, the calculation of the winning combination (%) is performed by dividing 34876 by 19321 and dividing the number by 34321 to calculate the ratio. 19876/34321 = 0.57912... It is calculated that the winning combination (%) is about 57.9%. When performing calculations in the game control microcomputer 100, calculations at the decimal point must be avoided, and therefore, are replaced by the following formulas. In the division of 19876/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100, and the decimal point is truncated to be 19876/343 = 57.9475. Since the fractional part is rounded down, it is calculated to be a 57% duty ratio (%) and displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. In this example, the value calculated by the accurate calculation is different from the value calculated by the accurate calculation in the display. There will be no.

  The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (the value other than the value of the most significant bit is 0), and the value with the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of accessory acquired balls are 32799. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when it is replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327 = 100.3%, resulting in an error of + 0.3%. When the calculation is performed with the decimal point truncated, for example, the accurate value is 69.9%, and when the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, the display is changed from 69% to 70% by 1%. Although it is conceivable that an error of% is displayed, the combination ratio (%) (or the connection ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error on the display of the error of 1%.

  In addition, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of obtained balls is divided by 100, so that the calculation cannot be performed if the total number of obtained balls is less than 100. Further, when the value is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. If it is less than 10,000, the error may exceed 1% and may be even larger. That is, the error increases as the total number of acquired balls decreases. Therefore, until the total number of acquired balls equal to or more than a specific number (for example, 32768 which is the minimum value of 16 bits) is counted by the counter, the display ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are not displayed on the display monitor. Even if the display is performed, the fact that there is a possibility that the error is large may be notified by emitting a dedicated LED, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

  Further, the display monitor 21TM029 displays the combination ratio (%), the connection ratio (%), and the base (%) on seven segments, and switches each value every predetermined period (for example, every five seconds). To display. In this case, for example, while the winning combination (%) is displayed for 5 seconds, an event occurs in which a game medium newly wins on the electric chute or the attacker, and the value calculated accordingly changes the ratio ( %), The value of the winning combination (%) may differ from the value of the consecutive winning combination (%). For this reason, it is preferable that the combination ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are calculated within the same interrupt and the calculated values are sequentially displayed.

  In addition, when the numerical value that can be displayed in seven segments is two digits (for example, when two seven segments are provided), 100% cannot be displayed as 100. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. In the display monitor 21TM029 shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), a numerical value can be displayed in the lower two digits, but in this case, the numerical value may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, a numerical value may be displayed in a part of the upper two digits under a specific condition.

  In the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the sensors provided in the attacker and the electric chew each detect that a game medium has won, and the respective award balls are individually counted based on the detection result. However, other inventions are not limited to this, and using a sensor provided after a discharge path for discharging a game medium that has won the attacker and a game medium that has won the electric chew, the detection result is used. , The number of the accessory acquired balls and the number of the continuous accessory acquired balls may be totaled.

  Hereinafter, the display of the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base will be described more specifically. In this embodiment, the main board 11 is provided on the back side of the game board 2 (see FIG. 11C). On the back side of the game board 2, in addition to the main board 11, peripheral boards such as the effect control board 12 are also provided.

  The RAM 102 on the main board 11 has a gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, a third general winning number counter, and a fourth general winning number counter. A general winning number counter and a large winning number counter are provided. In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the number of winnings of the special winning opening (attacker) is counted by the special winning number counter, but other inventions are not limited to this, and these first inventions are not limited thereto. A first grand prize counter that counts the number of prizes to the winning opening and a second grand prize counter that counts the number of winnings to the second grand prize opening are separately provided to win the first grand prize opening. The number and the number of winnings in the second big winning opening may be separately tabulated, and the respective winning numbers may be summed up to be the number of winnings in the attacker.

  The gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start port switch 22A. The second start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 22B. The first general winning number counter to the fourth general winning number counter are counters for counting the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch to the fourth general winning opening switch. The large winning number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.

  A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is connected to the power supply board shown in FIG. 11-3. The clear switch 21TM052 is arranged on the rear side surface of the game board 2 at a position where an employee or the like cannot easily operate it. By operating the clear switch 21TM052, data used for the connection ratio and the combination stored in the RAM 102, which will be described later, is cleared. The clear switch is a switch which is operated when a situation arises in which the calculation of the ratio or the combination of the ratios has to be performed again, for example, when a failure occurs in the calculation of the ratio of the ratio or the combination of the ratios. For this reason, this switch does not need to be operated when collecting data for calculating a normal connection ratio or a winning combination. When the clear switch 21TM052 is operated, a clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 11 in addition to clearing the data.

  The main board 11 is provided with the RTC 106 as described above, and the RTC 106 can detect the current time. The RTC 106 can measure a predetermined time, elapsed time, and the like by performing initial settings. In the present embodiment, the RTC 106 can measure the business hours of the game hall.

  The main board 11 is housed in a board case 21TM201 as shown in FIG. The caulking pin 21TM011B is attached to the board case 21TM201. With the provision of the caulking pins 21TM011B, the main board 11 is completely sealed in the board case 21TM201, and illegal acts on the main board 11 are prevented. The board case 21TM201 is a swaged board case (hereinafter also referred to as a "swaging board case").

  The display monitor 21TM029 is provided on the main board 11. Further, a sealing seal 21TM011S for proving that the main substrate 11 is sealed is attached to the substrate case 21TM201. The sealing seal 21TM011S is affixed, for example, across the removed portion of the board case 21TM201. Sealing seal 21TM011S is arranged at a position distant from main substrate 11, and is arranged at a position different from the position where visibility of display monitor 21TM029 is blocked, such as directly in front of display monitor 21TM029. Thus, the display monitor 21TM029 is arranged at a position that is not hidden by the seal 21TM011S.

  The display monitor 21TM029 includes a first display unit 21TM029A, a second display unit 21TM029B, a third display unit 21TM029C, a fourth display unit 21TM029D, and a fifth display unit 21TM029E. Each of the first display unit 21TM029A to the fifth display unit 21TM029E is composed of seven segments composed of seven segments that draw the character “8” and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 21TM029A to the fifth display unit 21TM029E can be turned on and off in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white, and the like. Further, these colors can be displayed in different colors or so-called rainbows while being changed in an extremely short cycle.

  The items of display Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 11-5 (B) are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. The first display unit 21TM029A at the first digit displays the totaled set values (1 to 6) and the RAM clear notification (“C”) that notifies the CPU 103 that the RAM clear executed after the processing of the setting change mode is completed. ) Is displayed, the totaling period is displayed on the second digit second display unit 21TM029B and the third digit third display unit 21TM029C, the fourth digit fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth digit fifth display unit. 21TM029E displays a numerical value as a percentage. In display No. 1, a short-term connection ratio is displayed, and in display No. 2, a short-term winning ratio is displayed. In the display No. 3, the total ratio is displayed, and in the display No. 4, the total winning combination is displayed. Display No. 5 displays the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls, and display No. 6 displays the base (base 2) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls. Is done.

  Here, the short term means a period in which the number of awarded balls (acquired balls) is 6,000. The period in which the total sum is obtained means the total period after the calculation of the ratio and the winning ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the ratio and the winning ratio is once reset.

  In the above example, the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base are calculated without depending on the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the repetition ratio may be a percentage of the total number of prize balls occupied by the number of prize balls due to winning in the special winning opening during the jackpot game state. The winning combination is defined as a ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of prize balls due to winning in the second starting winning opening in the high base state and the number of winning balls due to winning in the large winning opening in the jackpot game state. Is also good. Further, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

  When the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. “Y7.” Is displayed on the display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the short-term winning combination is displayed as a percentage (in%) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the total cumulative ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed, “A6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed, “A7.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the total cumulative connection ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (in%) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the total cumulative combination of display No. 4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative winning ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, “bL.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit is displayed. “B6.” Is displayed on the 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the total cumulative winning combination is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  The main board 11 enters the fourth general winning opening from the large winning opening (attacker), the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening in calculating the connection ratio, the winning ratio and the base. The number of entered game balls and the number of game balls discharged from the outlet are counted. In the main process, the CPU 103 controls the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the first to fourth general winning port switches to the fourth general winning port switch and the discharge port switch 21TM070. A switch process for checking the state of each switch (the presence or absence of a detection signal) is performed.

  In this switch process, it is specified which entry area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. When the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passage number counter is added, and when the detection signal is output from the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, The value of the first start winning number counter and the value of the second start winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 23, the value of the large winning number counter is added, and the first general winning opening switch, When the detection signals are output from the second general winning opening switch, the third general winning opening switch, and the fourth general winning opening switch, the first general winning number counter, the second general winning number counter, and the third general winning number are output. The values of the counter and the fourth general winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the outlet switch 21TM070, the value of the number of hits counter is added, so that each entry area is added. Aggregate of entering the number of game balls (the winning number of game balls to each of the winning openings). The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102.

  As described above, the step of counting the number of game balls entering each entry area is also executed in a series of processing for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each entry area (switch state confirmation processing). (Included in the switch processing), it is possible to count the number of game balls entering each entry area without having to execute a separate counting program, that is, without causing a problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in the number of execution programs. It has become.

  The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of prize balls due to winning in each winning opening based on the total number of game balls winning in each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning opening. Let it. The number of prize balls obtained by winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out by one prize to the prize port by the number of wins to the prize port. The number of prize balls obtained by winning game balls is predetermined for each winning port.

  As shown in FIG. 11-6, the number of prize balls for each prize port divided here is a prize ball for a prize ball for a general prize port prize ball (first general prize port to fourth general prize port (sode)). ), First starting winning opening prize ball (winning prize ball at the first starting winning opening (navel)), ordinary electric prize winning ball (winning prize ball in electric chew), special electric winning prize ball (attacker Prize balls). The RAM 102 also stores the total number of prize balls and the number of hit game balls. Although the CPU 103 separately counts the number of game balls won to the general winning opening and the number of game balls won to the first starting winning opening, the number of game balls winning to the general winning opening and the first starting are calculated. The number of game ball winnings to the winning opening may be summed up. The number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the number of prize balls of the first starting winning prize ball are separately calculated. The number of prize balls may be calculated together.

  The RAM 102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of hit balls and the number of hits. The ring buffer includes ten first to tenth storage areas each having a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of winning balls in each winning opening for each of the 6,000 winning balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (up to 2 bytes). The active buffer also has a 0-th storage area consisting of a 2-byte maximum counter for storing the number of winning balls in each winning opening for each of the 6,000 winning balls. In the 0th storage area, the number of prize balls for each winning opening that increases as the game progresses is added. The eleven storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin.

  Further, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area for each of the winning openings, for the total number of prize balls (for 10 sets) and the number of hits stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area, and for the total sum. I have. The storage area of the total sum and the total total of 10 sets is constituted by a counter of a maximum of 3 bytes. Therefore, 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60000 data can be stored with a margin. I can remember.

  Further, the RAM 102 has an association ratio storage area for storing the combination ratio and the connection ratio of 10 sets and the total total, a base of 10 sets (base 2), and a base of the previous 10 sets (base 1). And a base storage area for storing The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the winning combination and the total ratio of the 10 sets and the total total based on the winning prize number based on the winning number of the game ball to each winning port of the 10 sets and the total total, and calculates the 10 sets and the total ratio. And the total winning combination and the connecting ratio are stored in the storing and storing portion. The connection ratio storage area for storing the combination ratios and the connection ratios for the 10 sets and the total total is configured by a counter of a maximum of 1 byte. For example, when the combination ratio and the connection ratio of the ten sets and the total total are stored as integers, they can be stored with a margin by a maximum of 1 byte counter.

  Further, the CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the base of 10 sets by the number of hits of the game balls into the winning holes of 10 sets for each of the winning sets, and calculates the base of the 10 sets (base 2) and the last time. The base (base 1) calculated from the number of hits of the game balls to the winning ports for each of 10 sets for each winning port is stored in the base storage area. For example, when storing the bases 1 and 2 as integers, the bases 1 and 2 can be stored with a margin with a maximum 1-byte counter.

  Here, the memory space of the CPU 103 on the main board 11 will be described. FIG. 11-7 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU on the main board. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing the above-described internal registers, the ROM 101, the RAM 102, and the like. More specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 11-7, the address / data signal lines of the ROM 101 correspond to the ROM area of the memory space (in the present embodiment, 0000H to 2FFFH (H indicates a hexadecimal number. 0000H to 2FBFH, and 2FC0H to 2FFFH are assigned to a program management area), and the CPU 103 reads data from the ROM 101 by designating the ROM area. In this embodiment, the ROM area is managed by dividing it into eight areas, a first area to an eighth area, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H.

  The address / data signal lines of the built-in register are allocated to a register area (FE00H to FEBFH in the present embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads data from the built-in register and transfers data to the register via this register area. Is written.

  The address / data signal lines of the RAM 102 are allocated to RWM areas (F000H to F3FFH in the present embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 specifies the RWM area to read data from the RAM 102 or to read data from the RAM 102. Write data. The other areas of the memory space (in the present embodiment, 3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, and FEC0H to FFFFH) are unused areas.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-8, a RAM area corresponding to a storage area of the RAM 102 (a 16 Kbyte area of 0000H to 2FFFH in this embodiment) is a RAM control area, an unused area, a RAM data area, and other areas. It is composed of The storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area stores instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions to be executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction. The data for the configured control program (which may be simply referred to as control program data) is temporarily stored, and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area has the reference data referred to by the control program. (For example, the various lottery data described above) are temporarily stored.

  Further, data used for displaying the connection ratio and the winning combination is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area is provided with a storage area for storing the total sum of the number of prize balls for each winning opening and a storage area for the total winning combination ratio. The storage areas of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas include an active buffer having a zero storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having a first storage area to a tenth storage area, and the number of prize balls (10 sets) for each winning opening. ), And a storage area for 10 sets. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area, data having different subroutine start addresses are stored.

  In the present embodiment, 1-byte (8-bit) data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and the above-mentioned data (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data, etc.) can be stored. , Management data) is data having a number of bytes exceeding 1 byte (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored for each byte in a storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. are doing.

  Further, the main board 11 controls the display monitor 21TM029 to display the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base. Here, the main board 11 performs control to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 11-9 (A) is a time chart showing display times of items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 11A, when the display on the display monitor 21TM029 is started, first, the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed. The display of the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term connection ratio of the display No1, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-1), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “y” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the short-term ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the short-term connection ratio is 41%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “1.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of the display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term role ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term duty ratio of the display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-2), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “y” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E display the short-term role ratio. For example, when the short-term role ratio is 63%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “3.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative connection ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-3), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “A” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. In addition, the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E display the total cumulative connection ratio. For example, when the total cumulative connection ratio is 58%, the character “5.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of the display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total total winning combination of the display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-4), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “A” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. The total display ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character “6.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-5). The display of the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 1 of the display No. 5, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-5), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “b” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. The character is displayed, and the character “L.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. The base 1 calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “0.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-6). The display of the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 2 of the display No. 6, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-6), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “b” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. The character is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. In addition, the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E include
The base 2 calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls is displayed. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “2” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  Then, when the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-1). The short-term ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. Thereafter, the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 to the display of base 2 of display No. 6 are sequentially displayed every 5 seconds. In the display color, only the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is green, and the short-term role ratio of the display No. 2 to the base 2 of the display No. 5 are red. As described above, the display monitor 21TM029 switches and displays the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative connection ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 every 5 seconds.

  Further, the display of the short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, base 1 and base 2 is indicated by a display changeover switch 21TM030 as shown in FIGS. 18 (A) and 18 (B). Based on the operation, the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative connection ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the display of the base 1 and the base 2 when the setting value is “1”, and the display when the setting value is “2” Short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, display of base 1, base 2, short-term ratio when the set value is "3", short-term role ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative It is possible to sequentially change the display of the winning combination, the base 1, and the base 2. If the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term ratio, the short-term role ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “1”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to "2", and the short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E are displayed. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “2”.

  When the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term ratio, the short-term position ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “2”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “3”, and the short-term ratio, the short-term position ratio, the total cumulative ratio, and the total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E are displayed. The numerical values of the ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “3”.

  When the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative connection ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “3”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “4”, and the short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E are displayed. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “4”.

  When the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term ratio, the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “4”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “5”, and the short-term ratio, the short-term position ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E are displayed. The values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “5”.

  When the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term ratio, the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “5”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “6”, and the short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E are displayed. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “6”.

  When the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term ratio, the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “6”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “1”, and the short-term connection ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E are displayed. The numerical values of the ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value “1”.

  Although the display monitor 21TM029 of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base at each set value can be displayed, other inventions are not limited to this. 21TM029 may be able to display only one numerical value or any two numerical values among the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, are calculated, and the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. However, other inventions are not limited to this, and the history of the awarded number of awarded balls may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 without calculating the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base. Good.

  In the present embodiment, only the short-term ratio is displayed in red on the display monitor 21TM029, and the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed in green. However, other inventions are not limited to this, and the short-term ratio and short-term duty ratio, the total cumulative ratio and the total cumulative role ratio are displayed in the same color, and the short-term ratio, It may be displayed in the same color different from the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative connection ratio, and the total cumulative combination ratio.

  When the total prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reach the predetermined capacity of 6000, the main board 11 updates the storage in the 0th to 10th storage areas in the ring buffer. Further, the storage unit stores the sum and total cumulative storage area for 10 sets and the combination and combination ratio storage area for storing the combination and total ratio of the 10 sets and total.

  In updating in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer. Further, the numerical values stored in the first to ninth storage areas of the ring buffer are moved to the second to tenth storage areas, respectively. For example, as shown in FIGS. 11 to 10, the prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 0th storage area to the ninth storage area are “27”, “81”, “120”, “36”, “225”, and “87”, respectively. It is assumed that they are "66", "117", "45", and "21". At this time, when the total prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reach 6000, the prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 1st storage area to the 10th storage area are respectively set to “27” “81” “ 120, 36, 225, 87, 66, 117, 45, and 21. Also, the number of award balls in the 0th storage area is set to “0”, and the number of award balls in the 10th storage area is deleted.

  When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area, the stored number of prize balls may be deleted once, and then the new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new prize ball number may be stored by overwriting the stored prize ball number.

  Next, an operation (operation) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. As shown in FIG. 11-11, when the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 executes a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether or not the contents of the program are valid, and then executes the game control main process from step S21TM1010. Start processing. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S21TM1010). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1020), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S21TM1030). Next, a wait is performed until the effect control board 12 starts operating (step S21TM1040).

  Then, the CPU 103 initializes the built-in device (eg, initializes a CTC (counter / timer) and a PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) (step S21TM1050). The access state is set (step S21TM1060). In the interrupt mode 2, an address synthesized from a value (1 byte) of a specific register (I register) built in the CPU 103 and an interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is: This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-12, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM1110). If the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM1110; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM1310. When the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM1110; YES), the CPU 103 outputs the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch mounted on the power supply board) 21TM052 input through the input port. ) Is confirmed (step S21TM1120).

  If the ON state is detected in checking the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 shifts to a setting change mode in which the set value can be changed. . That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The processing state is controlled to the setting change mode on the basis of the presence.

  Upon transition to the setting change mode, the CPU 103 outputs a setting change corresponding signal from the information output circuit 112 and outputs a security signal (step S21TM1130). Thus, in an external device such as a hall computer that manages game information of each gaming machine, based on the input of the setting change correspondence signal and the security signal, the gaming machine that is the output source of these signals changes the setting. It is possible to specify that the mode is controlled to the mode or the setting confirmation mode described later. Therefore, in the display device provided in the external device, it is possible to notify a gaming machine (for example, a machine number or the like) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in a identifiable manner.

  In addition, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command designating the control to the setting change mode as an effect control command for the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1140). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode.

  Then, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and displays it on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1150). Then, the operation waits for the operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (step S21TM1160) and the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (step S21TM1180).

  In the operation standby state of the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052, the CPU 103 changes the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 every time the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM1160). (Step S21TM1170). For example, as described below, each time a setting change operation is received, a display control is performed in which the displayed set value is increased by one and returned to one after reaching six.

  When the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 in a state of waiting for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (YES in step S21TM1180), the CPU 103 changes the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 to The set value is changed to the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1190). That is, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is overwritten with the displayed set value, thereby fixing the set value. Then, the determined set value (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1190).

  In step S21TM1160, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated (without determining YES in step S21TM1160), and the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 is performed (YES in step S21TM1180). If it is determined), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 matches the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and as a result, the setting value storage The setting value stored in the area is not changed.

  When the process of step S21TM1200 is executed, the setting change mode ends, and the CPU 103 shifts to the initialization process of step S21TM1410 shown in FIGS.

  In the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 in the above-described step S21TM1120, when the OFF state is detected (NO in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 performs the setting for confirming the set value. Move to confirmation mode. That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, but does not satisfy the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Based on this, the processing state is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  The CPU 103 outputs a setting change corresponding signal from the information output circuit 112 and outputs a security signal with the transition to the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM1210). Thus, in an external device such as a hall computer that manages game information of each gaming machine, based on the input of the setting change correspondence signal and the security signal, the gaming machine that is the output source of these signals changes the setting. It is possible to specify that the mode is controlled to the mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, in the display device provided in the external device, it is possible to notify a gaming machine (for example, a machine number or the like) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in a identifiable manner.

  In addition, the CPU 103 transmits, as an effect control command for the effect control board 12, a setting confirmation mode command designating control to the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM1220). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Accordingly, it is possible to notify the image display device 5 that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  Then, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and displays it on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1230). Then, it waits for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (step S21TM1240).

  When the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 in the state of waiting for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (YES in step S21TM1240), the setting confirmation mode ends, and the CPU 103 executes the processing shown in FIG. The process proceeds to a determination process of whether or not the power-off detection process has been performed in step S21TM1320 shown in FIG.

  When it is determined in step S21TM1110 that the lock switch is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM1110), the CPU 103 executes the clear switch input through the input port as shown in FIG. (Setting switch mounted on the power supply board) The state of the output signal (clear signal) of 21TM052 is confirmed (step S21TM1310).

  When the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not ON (NO in step S21TM1310), the CPU 103 executes a power-off detection process (see FIG. 11-14). It is determined whether or not check data is stored in a predetermined backup area (step S21TM1320).

  In this example, as a case where the process of step S21TM1320 is executed, (1) the setting change is performed based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF when the power is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also OFF. When the process of step S21TM1320 is immediately executed without shifting to any of the mode and the setting confirmation mode, and (2) when the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF. There is a case where the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the processing has been performed, and the processing of step S21TM1320 is executed after the setting confirmation mode ends.

  If the backup data is stored, the CPU 103 checks the data in the backup RAM area (Step S21TM1330). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S21TM1330, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power-off detection process. When the power is restored after an unexpected power outage or other power supply interruption, the data in the backup RAM area should have been saved, and the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on and not at the time of recovery from the stop of the power supply is executed (NO in step S21TM1330). It is determined and the process proceeds to step S21TM1410).

  If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM1330), CPU 103 performs a game state restoring process (processes in step S21TM1340 and step S21TM1350) for returning game control microcomputer 100 to the state at the time of stopping power supply. More specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (step S21TM1340), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in a work area (an area in the RAM 102), and step S21TM1360 is set. (Step S21TM1350). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data is set for an area of the work area that may be initialized. As a result of the processing of steps S21TM1340 and S21TM1350, the saved contents of the work area that must not be initialized remain. The parts that must not be initialized include, for example, data indicating the game state before power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probable change flag, time saving flag, restriction member state designation flag, initialized flag, etc.), output of output port An area where the state is stored (output port buffer), a part in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set, and the like. The set value storage area (the area in which the determined set value is stored) is also included in the part that must not be initialized. Further, for each set value, an area in which each total value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base is stored is also included in the part that must not be initialized.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (Step S21TM1360). In a later-described game control timer interrupt process, a big hit determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command at the time of restoration) as a command at the time of restoration of power supply (step S21TM1370). The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the power supply has been restored based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply based on the reception of the backup command (command at the time of restoration). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, and the like, the power supply is restored from the power cutoff based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply. It is possible to notify that. Next, CPU 103 executes a setting command transmission process of step S21TM1470.

  In step S21TM1310, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is on (step S21TM1310; YES) or if no backup data is stored in step S21TM1320 (step S21TM1320; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM1330. If the result of the parity check is not normal (step S21TM1330; NO), an initialization process is executed (step S21TM1410).

  In this example, the case where the initialization processing of step S21TM1410 is executed is as follows. (1) The setting is performed based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is immediately executed without shifting to either the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, or (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052. Is also OFF, based on the determination of NO in either step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330, immediately after step S21TM1410 without shifting to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. When the initialization process is executed and (3) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also ON, the mode is shifted to the setting change mode. The case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed after the end of the setting change mode, and the case where (4) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF at the time of power-on. There is a case where the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, and the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed on condition that it is determined as NO in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330 after the end of the setting confirmation mode. .

  In the initialization process, the CPU 103 first performs a RAM clear process (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clearing process, the data (special symbol process flag, probable change flag, time saving flag, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped, which is stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102, is cleared and an initial value is set. However, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear processing. In addition, the area in which the tally values (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base are stored for each set value is not cleared, and the tally for each of these set values is not cleared. The value is not changed before the RAM clear processing. Then, by notifying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029, it is notified that the gaming state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). In the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) is initialized to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value is set. May be initialized. Alternatively, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 102. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (step S21TM1430), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S21TM1440).

  Also, by performing the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, it is possible to selectively perform processing in accordance with a control state such as a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total winning ball count storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and the like. An initial value is set in the flag.

  In the present embodiment, the mode in which the mode is shifted to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is exemplified on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, but other inventions are not limited to this. Further, the setting change mode is conditioned on the condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is open by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300). It may be possible to shift to the setting confirmation mode.

  After executing Step S21TM1430 and Step S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (Step S21TM1450). In a later-described game control timer interrupt process, a big hit determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that the initialization process has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends) (step S21TM1460). The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the initialization process has been performed based on the reception of the initialization command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the effect control device 120 may notify that the game state or the like has been initialized in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. It is possible. Next, CPU 103 executes a setting command transmission process of step S21TM1470.

  The CPU 103 transmits the setting command specifying the setting value read in step S21TM1360 or step S21TM1450 to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM1470). The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state ends according to the specified set value.

  Then, CPU 103 executes a setting process of serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037 (see FIGS. 11-19 and 11-21). The communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to be executable.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). The CPU 103 performs settings for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result by executing processing according to a random number circuit setting program, for example.

  Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every 2 ms.

  Next, CPU 103 repeatedly executes a display random number update process (step S21TM1520) and an initial value random number update process (step S21TM1530). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt is prohibited (step S21TM1510), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt is enabled. It is set (step S21TM1540). In the present embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when not a big hit or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when a large hit is not made. The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of a counter for generating a display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of a counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is used to determine an initial value of a count value of a counter (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number for determining whether or not a symbol is a hit. It is a random number to perform. A game control process for controlling the progress of a game described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls a game device such as an effect display device, a variable prize ball device, and a ball payout device provided in the game machine by itself. In this process, the count value of the random number for the normal symbol hit determination is one round (the normal value of the random number for the normal symbol hit determination) in the process of transmitting the command signal to control the other microcomputer, or the game machine control process. When the value has increased by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values, the initial value is set in the counter.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command (step S21TM1140), and then transmits a power-on initialization command. (Step S21TM1460), and transmits a setting command (Step S21TM1470). When the CPU 103 is set to the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM1220), and then transmits a backup command at the time of power-off recovery or an initialization command at power-on (step S21TM1370 or step S21TM1370). S21TM1460), and transmits a setting command (step S21TM1470). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting change mode based on receiving the initialization command after receiving the setting change mode command, and can display the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect, and the like. It is possible to notify the end of the setting change mode by the effect device such as the lamp 9. The effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the backup command or the initialization command after receiving the setting confirmation mode command, and can specify the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R. It is possible to notify the end of the setting confirmation mode by the effect device such as the game effect lamp 9 or the like.

  Upon receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 11-14. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIGS. 11 to 14 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a power-off detection process (step S21TM1610). Then, it is determined whether or not a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615). On the condition that a game stop error has not occurred (NO in step S21TM1615), a predetermined switch process is executed to execute a switch. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the discharge port switch 21TM070 via the circuit 110 is determined (step S21TM1620). On the other hand, when a game stop error has occurred (YES in step S21TM1615), the switch processing in step S21TM1620 is not executed, and as a result, the game is stopped.

  For example, the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, the opening state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, and an abnormality is detected by a magnetic sensor (not shown). That the level of magnetism determined is detected, that the vibration of the level determined to be abnormal is detected by the vibration sensor (not shown), and that the level and frequency band of the level determined to be abnormal by the radio sensor (not shown) are detected. Based on the detection of the radio wave, it is determined that a game stop error has occurred.

  Subsequently, when the game ball has won any of the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the large winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, that is, the first starting opening switch 22A. When the detection signals are input from the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, the first general winning port switch to the fourth general winning port switch, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning by each detection signal is determined. A prize ball process (step S21TM1630) for setting and the like is executed.

  Next, the CPU 103 displays winning information such as a winning ratio such as a winning ratio, a connecting ratio, and a base (step S21TM1640), and displays winning information such as a winning ratio, a connecting ratio, and a base calculated by the winning information. The winning information display control process to be displayed on the 21TM029 is performed (step S21TM1650). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined main-side error process (step S21TM1660), an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be executed if necessary according to the diagnosis result. In step S21TM1660, an abnormality (game stop error) is detected by the various sensors described in the description of step S1615. If an abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection flag is set, and a step in the next timer interrupt is set. In S21TM1615, the game may be stopped (the switch process is not executed). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as big hit information, start information, probability variation information, and payout information which are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 are output. (Step S21TM1670).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random number such as the random number value MR1 or the random number values MR1 to MR4 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S21TM1680). ). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S21TM1690). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display are updated. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation in the device 4B and set the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Subsequent to the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S21TM1700). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on or off the segment LED) on the ordinary symbol display 20 by executing the ordinary symbol process processing, and displays the variation of the ordinary symbol and the movable wings in the variable winning ball device 6B. Enables setting of one-sided tilting operation.

  After executing the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 103 executes the command control processing to transmit a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1710). As an example of these, in the command control processing, in the output port included in the I / O 105, the effect is produced in accordance with the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit. After setting control data in an output port for transmitting an effect control command to the control board 12, predetermined control data is set in an output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By turning off after that, the effect control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. After the command control process is executed, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated after the interrupt control is set.

  In the command control process of step S21TM1710, a command for notifying the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a command for notifying that the variation pattern or the variation display has been completed is transmitted. By transmitting the existing command such as the information of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the effect control board 12, the setting value may be periodically notified. Further, by receiving these commands from the main board 11, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) executes an effect indicating the set value at various timings, such as during a variable display or a big hit game. You may.

  Next, the display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the processing related to the setting change mode (steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200 of the main processing) and the RAM clear (steps S21TM1410 to S21TM1420 of the main processing) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 11A, when the power is turned off (the power is turned off) by the operation of a game clerk or the like, the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, and the display monitor is stopped. The display on 21TM029 ends.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (B), on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main processing), a store clerk or the like of the game arcade switches the clear switch (setting changeover switch). When the power is turned on while operating the 21TM052 (in the case of Y in step S21TM1120 of the main processing), the processing of steps S21TM1130 and S21TM1140 is executed by the CPU 103, and the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (this In the example, the setting value “1”) is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area on the display monitor 21TM029 (more precisely, the first display unit 21TM029A). (In this example, the setting value "1") is displayed. (Step S21TM1150).

  In the state where the set value is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A in this way, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (C), the CPU 103 sets the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 by a store clerk of the game arcade or the like. Each time an operation is detected, the numerical value (setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is sequentially updated and displayed (step S21TM1170). For example, each time the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value (setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is changed from 1 → 2 → 3 → Update display is performed in the order of 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 →. Here, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the setting value (the setting value “1” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed by the operation. When the lock switch 21TM051 described later is turned off, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (the set value “1” in this example) is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A. Is changed (in this example, the setting value “2” stored in the setting information temporary storage area) (overwritten).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (D), the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 by the clerk of the game arcade or the like (YES in step S21TM1180) and stores it in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. The stored setting value (in this example, the setting value “1”) is changed to the numerical value displayed in the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting value “2” stored in the setting information temporary storage area). ) (Overwritten), and the set value (set value “2” in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is determined (step S21TM1190). At this time, the CPU 103 causes the first display unit 21TM029A to blink, thereby notifying the clerk of the game arcade that the new set value is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102, and that the control of the setting change mode has been completed. (Setting completion notification) is performed (step S21TM1200).

  Note that once the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting information temporary storage area Neither the stored set value “2”) nor the set value (set value “2” in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed. If the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is changeable even after the set value is determined, there is a possibility that the user may misunderstand that the set value can be changed even when the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, once the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is not changed.

  Then, the setting change mode (step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) ends, and the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear process (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clearing process, data (a special symbol process flag, a probable change flag, a time saving flag, etc.) stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 and indicating the game state at the time of power failure is cleared, and an initial value is set. Thereby, the game state is initialized, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear processing. Further, when the reserved storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the reserved storage is cleared. After the RAM clearing process is completed, the CPU 103 displays “C” on the first display unit 21TM029A, thereby notifying a clerk or the like of the game hall that the RAM clearing process has been performed (RAM clearing notification). (Step S21TM1420). Thereby, the clerk at the game hall or the like grasps that the setting change mode ends (the set value is determined) and the initialization process has been executed. Then, by executing the processing after step S21TM1430, a state in which a game can be performed, that is, a state in which a fluctuation display result, a jackpot type, a fluctuation pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, and the like can be executed.

  Note that, in the setting change mode of the present embodiment, a mode in which the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed as an initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is exemplified. The initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the setting change mode is, for example, the most advantageous setting value for the player ("6" in this embodiment) or the most disadvantageous setting for the player. It is also possible to display an appropriate setting value (“1” in this embodiment).

  Further, with the end of the setting change mode, the CPU 103 notifies the display monitor 21TM029 of the change of the connection ratio and the combination corresponding to the determined set value (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) after the notification of the RAM clear. You may make it display each total value, such as a ratio and a base. In addition, for each set value, each total value such as the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base corresponding to each set value may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the order (in ascending or descending order of the set values).

  If the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off without being turned off while the lock switch 21TM051 is in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off. The setting values stored in the storage area have not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting values stored in the setting information temporary storage area are deleted.

  Next, the display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the setting confirmation mode (steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 11-16 (A), when the power is turned off (the power is turned off) by the operation of a game clerk or the like, the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, and the display monitor is stopped. The display on 21TM029 ends.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-16 (B), on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main processing), the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF. (In the case of N in step S21TM1120 of the main processing), the CPU 103 executes the processing of step S21TM1210 and step S21TM1220, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (in this example, the setting value "1") is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and the set value (in this example, stored in the setting information temporary storage area on the display monitor 21TM029 (more precisely, the first display unit 21TM029A)). Set value "1") is displayed (step 21TM1230).

  Note that, unlike the case where the setting change mode is controlled, the first display unit is operated even when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated by a game room clerk or the like when the setting check mode is controlled. The numerical value (setting value “1” stored in the setting information temporary storage area in this example) displayed on 21TM029A is not updated and displayed. If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade while being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (this example) In this case, if the setting value “1”) stored in the setting information temporary storage area is updated and displayed, it may be misunderstood that the setting value can be changed in the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the setting check mode is being controlled, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting The setting value “1” stored in the information temporary storage area is not updated and displayed.

  Then, the CPU 103 ends the setting confirmation mode based on detecting that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off by the store clerk at the game arcade (YES in step S21TM1240). By executing the processing after step S21TM1320, a state in which a game can be performed, that is, a state in which a fluctuation display result, a jackpot type, a fluctuation pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, and the like can be executed. That is, when the processing in the setting confirmation mode is executed, the CPU 103 does not execute the processing related to the RAM clear, except when the result of the determination in step S21TM1320 or S21TM1330 is NO.

  After the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, as described above, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting information Neither the set value “1” stored in the temporary storage area nor the set value (set value “1” in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed.

  As described above, when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also in the ON state. If the condition for controlling the setting change mode is satisfied, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting change switch) If the condition for controlling the setting check mode, that is, the 21TM052 is in the OFF state, is satisfied, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting check mode.

  In order to change or display the set value (to shift to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode), the clerk of the game arcade turns on the lock switch 21TM051 at the time of turning on the power. In order to shift to, the operation for further executing the initialization process (operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052) is performed, and in order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, the initialization process is executed. Do not perform the operation of. In this way, the clerk at the game arcade can select whether to control the gaming machine in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (or not to control any of them) when the power is turned on, and to perform the initialization processing. It is also possible to select whether or not to execute.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to perform an initialization process to shift the gaming machine to the setting confirmation mode (the RAM clear is not executed except when it is determined NO in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Therefore, even if the clerk at the game hall wants to check the set value while the player is playing a game, the power is turned off once, and the game is transferred to the setting check mode when the power is turned on, the game state remains unchanged. It is not initialized and does not disadvantage the player. On the amusement arcade side, the setting value can be checked without any trouble by the setting checking mode.

  In addition, with the end of the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 displays the setting values (setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102) corresponding to the setting values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. May be displayed. In addition, for each set value, each total value such as the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base corresponding to each set value may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the order (in ascending or descending order of the set values).

  FIG. 11-17 shows a setting change mode by the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, and game effect lamp 9) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when controlled in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. An example is shown in which notification that the mode has shifted to the setting confirmation mode is performed. FIG. 11-17 (1) is an example of an image displayed on the image display device 5 when controlled in the setting change mode, and FIG. 11-17 (2) is an image displayed when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. An example of an image displayed on the device 5 is shown.

  As shown in (A) of FIG. 11-17 (1), the activation of the effect control board 12 is not completed when the power is turned on (in particular, before the wait for the effect control board operation waiting in step S21TM1040 is completed). Therefore, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the gaming effect lamp 9 is not emitting light.

  Next, as shown in (B) of FIG. 11-17 (1), based on the reception of the setting change mode command transmitted to the effect control board 12 from the CPU 103 in step S21TM1140 in the main processing, the effect control The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode, and can notify that fact. For example, the image display device 5 displays the character “Setting is being changed”, and outputs a sound (for example, “Setting is being changed”) from the speakers 8L and 8R to notify that the mode has changed to the setting change mode. By making the effect lamp 9 emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode), it is notified that the setting change mode has been entered. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the mode is shifted to the setting change mode in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the setting change is performed. It is possible to clearly grasp that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in (B) of FIG. 11-17 (1), other display information on the image display device 5 (for example, effect design, small design, fourth design, right-handed display, etc.) is not displayed.

  It should be noted that when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting change mode command, it is not in a state in which a video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 by the VDP (Video Display Processor) (that is, by the display control unit 123). Until control of the image display device 5 is not possible (until the image display device 5 can be supplied to the image display device 5) (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). The notification by the image display device 5 is not performed, and the voice notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. That is, a sound (for example, a sound saying "Setting is being changed") is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to notify that the mode has changed to the setting change mode, and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white blinking mode). By emitting light, it is notified that the mode has shifted to the setting change mode. After that, when the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, when the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5), the audio notification and the light emission notification are transmitted. In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the image display device 5 displays the text “setting is being changed”.

  Then, as shown in (C) of FIG. 11-17 (1), based on the reception of the setting command transmitted from CPU 103 to effect control board 12 at step S21TM1470 in the main processing (or at step S21TM1460, CPU 103). The control CPU for effect control 120 specifies that the microcomputer 100 for game control has finished the setting change mode, based on the reception of the initialization command at the time of power-on transmitted to the effect control board 12 from That fact can be reported. For example, on the image display device 5, a character “Setting change completed” is displayed, and a sound (for example, a sound “Setting is being changed”) for notifying that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode output from the speakers 8L and 8R is output. By stopping the output and stopping the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a white blinking mode), the end of the setting change mode is notified. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the setting change mode has ended in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the setting change mode is not set. It is possible to clearly understand that the process has been completed.

  Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 11-17 (1), the CPU 103 executes the processing after step S21TM1480 of the main processing, and is in a game-enabled state (the game control timer interrupt processing is performed). With the execution, the effect control command for displaying the demonstration screen on the image display device 5 is transmitted, and the effect control CPU 120 having received the command displays the demonstration screen on the image display device 5.

  As shown in (A) of FIG. 11-17 (2), the activation of the effect control board 12 is not completed when the power is turned on (in particular, before the wait for the effect control board operation waiting in step S21TM1040 is completed). Therefore, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the gaming effect lamp 9 is not emitting light.

  Next, as shown in (B) of FIG. 11-17 (2), based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command transmitted to the effect control board 12 from the CPU 103 in step S21TM1220 in the main processing, the effect control The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode, and can notify that fact. For example, on the image display device 5, the characters "Setting is being confirmed" are displayed, and a sound (for example, "Setting is being confirmed") is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to notify that the mode has shifted to the setting confirmation mode. By making the effect lamp 9 emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode), it is notified that the mode has shifted to the setting confirmation mode. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like, it is possible to notify that the mode has been shifted to the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to clearly grasp that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in (B) of FIG. 11-17 (2), other display information on the image display device 5 (for example, effect symbols, small symbols, fourth symbols, right-handed display, etc.) is not displayed.

  It should be noted that when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting confirmation mode command, it is not in a state where a video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 by a VDP (Video Display Processor) (that is, by the display control unit 123). Until control of the image display device 5 is not possible (until the image display device 5 can be supplied to the image display device 5) (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). The notification by the image display device 5 is not performed, and the voice notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. That is, a sound (for example, a sound of “Setting is being changed”) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to notify that the mode has shifted to the setting confirmation mode, and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a predetermined light emitting manner (for example, a white blinking manner). By emitting light, it is notified that the mode has shifted to the setting confirmation mode. After that, when the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, when the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5), the audio notification and the light emission notification are transmitted. In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the image display device 5 displays the characters “Setting is being confirmed”.

  Then, as shown in (C) of FIG. 11-17 (2), based on the reception of the setting command transmitted to the effect control board 12 from the CPU 103 in step S21TM1470 in the main process (or alternatively, in step S21TM1370 or step S21TM1370). In step S21TM1460, the CPU 120 for effect control is set by the microcomputer 100 for game control based on the reception of the backup command for power-off recovery or the initialization command for power-on transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in S21TM1460). It is possible to specify that the confirmation mode has ended, and to notify that fact. For example, on the image display device 5, a character “Setting confirmation completed” is displayed, and a sound (for example, a sound “Setting confirmation is being performed”) indicating that the mode has been shifted to the setting confirmation mode output from the speakers 8L and 8R is output. By stopping the output and stopping the light emission by the game effect lamp 9 in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a white blinking mode), it is notified that the setting confirmation mode has ended. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to notify that the setting check mode has ended. It is possible to clearly understand that the process has been completed.

  Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 11-17 (2), the CPU 103 executes the processing after step S21TM1480 of the main processing, and is in a game-enabled state (the game control timer interrupt processing is performed). With the execution, the effect control command for displaying the demonstration screen on the image display device 5 is transmitted, and the effect control CPU 120 having received the command displays the demonstration screen on the image display device 5.

  The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state ends according to the specified set value. 11-18 (1), (2), and (3) show examples of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 11-18 (1) shows an example in which the “sunny” mode ending image is selected on the big hit end screen, and FIG. 11-18 (2) shows an example in which the “cloudy” mode ending image is selected on the big hit end screen. FIG. 11-18 (3) shows an example in which the ending image in the “rain” mode is selected on the big hit end screen. FIG. 11-18 (4) is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the setting value designated by the setting command.

  In step S21TM1470 of the main process, the CPU 103 transmits a setting command for designating a setting value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when the big hitting game state ends, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing an ending effect on the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 stores the setting value specified by the received setting command in the RAM 102, so that the ending effect mode can be determined based on the stored setting value. For example, based on an effect control command transmitted when the big hit game state ends, the image display device 5 stores the character together with a character (“BONUS end” character) notifying that the big hit game state has ended. It is possible to display an ending image in a mode (fine mode, cloudy mode, rainy mode) determined based on the set value that is set.

  The table shown in FIG. 11-18 (4) indicates that the setting value specified by the setting command is “1, 2”, “3, 4”, and “5, 6”. 11-18 (1), the "cloudy" mode shown in FIG. 11-18 (2), and the setting suggestive mode shown in FIG. 11-18 (2). In the case of deciding on the “rain” mode shown in 18 (3), the judgment value of is assigned.

  If the setting value specified by the received setting command is “1” or “2”, effect control CPU 120 suggests the setting of the “sunny” mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is decided to perform the effect (ending effect), and to execute the setting suggestive effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) at a moderate ratio (for example, 40%). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at the ratio of (for example, 40%). Further, when the setting value specified by the received setting command is “3” or “4”, the effect control CPU 120 performs the “clear” mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is determined that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) is to be executed, and that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) is to be executed at a high ratio (for example, 50%), and It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at the ratio (for example, 30%). When the setting value specified by the received setting command is “5” or “6”, the effect control CPU 120 performs the “clear” mode shown in (1) at a high rate (for example, 50%). It is determined that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) is to be executed, and that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) is to be executed at a low rate (for example, 20%), It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at the ratio (for example, 30%).

  In this way, by making the determination ratio of each mode of the setting suggestion effect different according to the setting value, the player becomes interested in what mode the setting suggestion effect is performed, and The entertainment of the production can be improved. In this example, the player is interested in the manner in which the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state ends is performed, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the “sunny” mode. You expect to be done.

  Next, the award ball processing (step S21TM1630) in the main processing will be described. First, a payout control signal (connection confirmation signal) and a prize ball request signal (payout control command) transmitted and received between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 will be described.

  FIG. 11-19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a control signal output from the game control microcomputer 100 to the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, a connection confirmation signal is transmitted and received as a control signal between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various controls related to payout control and the like. As shown in FIGS. 11-19, the connection confirmation signal is output when the main board 11 starts up (when the game control microcomputer 100 starts the game control process), and is output to the payout control board 21TM037. Is a signal (connection confirmation signal of the main board 11) for notifying that has started. The connection confirmation signal indicates that a prize ball can be paid out. The connection confirmation signal is output via the I / O port 21TM057 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the output circuit 21TM067, and is controlled through the input circuit 21TM373A and the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is input to the microcomputer 21TM370. Each of the connection confirmation signals is 1-bit data, and is transmitted by one signal line. It should be noted that the connection confirmation signal is set to an output enabled state by setting an initial value to a bit corresponding to the connection confirmation signal of the output port 0 by the processing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440 executed when the power is turned on (specifically, Is output by the process of step S21TM2080, but may be output at the timing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440.)

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 includes a serial communication circuit 21TM380 as in the game control microcomputer 100. Various payout control commands are transmitted and received between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built in the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The configuration and functions of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are the same as those of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 included in the game control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 11-20 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a control command transmitted and received between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, various control commands (prize ball request signals) are transmitted and received between the microcomputers of the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various controls related to payout control and the like.

  As described above, the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal are composed of 8-bit data (binary 8-digit data), and are output as control commands indicating predetermined contents according to the set contents of the 8-bit data. Is done.

  The connection confirmation command is sent from the game control microcomputer 100 at regular intervals (1 s) to check whether the connection state between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal. This is a control command to be transmitted. The data content of the connection confirmation command is “A0 (H)”, that is, “1010000”.

  The connection OK command is a control command for notifying that the connection state between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits the connection confirmation command. Is a control command to be transmitted as a response signal in response to the reception of the control command. The data content of the connection OK command is “8x (H)”, that is, “10000xxx”. Here, when an award ball error (abnormal state in which the award ball payout operation based on the winning or the ball lending operation based on the ball lending request cannot be performed normally) occurs, the first bit “x” is set. Is set to "1". When a full tank error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the second bit. In addition, when an out-of-ball error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the third bit. When a door opening error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the fourth bit. In this way, while the connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is being confirmed, the occurrence of a predetermined error in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is determined by the game control microcomputer. 100 can be notified.

  The prize ball number command is a control command for notifying the number (0 to 14) of game balls for which a payout request is made, and is a control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100 based on the occurrence of a prize. . The content of the data of the winning ball number command is “5x (H)”, that is, “0101xxxx”. In this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, three prize balls are paid out, and the game ball is released by the prize port switch corresponding to the general prize port 10. When detected, ten prize balls are paid out, and when a game ball is detected by the count switch 23, 14 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, when a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, the prize ball number command “01010111” for notifying three prize balls is transmitted, and the general winning port 10 is transmitted. When a game ball is detected by the corresponding winning opening switch, a prize ball number command “01011010” for notifying the number of prize balls is transmitted, and when a game ball is detected by the count switch 23, the prize ball number is determined. A prize ball number command “0101110” for notifying 14 pieces is transmitted. It should be noted that any one of the connection confirmation command and the winning ball number command is transmitted as a winning ball request signal. The prize ball number command is transmitted instead of the connection confirmation command at the timing when the connection confirmation command is transmitted, based on the condition for paying out the prize balls (the occurrence of a prize or the like). In this embodiment, as described above, data corresponding to the number of winning balls is set in the upper 4 bits, but data corresponding to the number of winning balls is set in the lower 4 bits while sharing the upper 4 bits. You may do so.

  The prize ball end command is a control command indicating that the prize ball operation (prize ball payout operation) has been completed, and is a control command transmitted by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the end of the prize ball operation. The content of the data of the award ball end command is “50 (H)”, that is, “01010000”. The prize ball end command is transmitted instead of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is transmitted based on the completion of the prize ball operation. In this embodiment, it is not configured to set data indicating error information in the prize ball end command. This is because the prize ball end command is transmitted only once when the prize ball operation ends, so that the data indicating the error information is set and transmitted in the next connection OK command without transmitting the error information at that timing. This is because it is possible to do so. Note that data indicating error information may be set in the lower 4 bits of the prize ball end command.

  The prize ball preparation command is a control command for notifying that a predetermined error has occurred and the prize ball operation has not been completed. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 generates a predetermined error during execution of the prize ball operation. This is a control command to be transmitted based on what has been done. The data content of the connection OK command is “8x (H)”, that is, “10000xxx”. Here, when an award ball error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the first bit. When a full tank error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the second bit. In addition, when an out-of-ball error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the third bit. When a door opening error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the fourth bit. In this way, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the predetermined error has occurred during the execution of the prize ball operation and the prize ball operation has not been completed. In addition, the content of the error can be notified to the game control microcomputer 100. As with the connection OK command, the prize ball preparation command notifies that a predetermined error has occurred by changing the contents of the lower 4 bits according to the error state (by changing the predetermined bit). Further, any of the connection OK command, the prize ball preparation command, and the prize ball end command is configured to be transmitted as a received ACK signal. The award ball preparation command is a command (signal) that is output not only in a state where an error has occurred but the award ball operation cannot be performed, but also in a state where the award ball operation is being performed.

  The prize ball preparation command is transmitted instead of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is transmitted based on the state where an error has occurred and the prize ball operation cannot be performed. is there.

  FIG. 11-21 is a block diagram illustrating signal lines and the like used for transmitting and receiving the control signal shown in FIG. 11-19 and the control command shown in FIG. 11-20. As shown in FIG. 11-21, the connection confirmation signal is output by the game control microcomputer 100 via the output circuit 21TM067, and is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the input circuit 21TM373A. The connection confirmation command and the number of prize balls command among the control commands are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM505 incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100 and input to the serial communication circuit 21TM380 incorporated in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. You. Among the control commands, the connection OK command, the prize ball end command, and the prize ball preparation command are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the serial communication circuit built in the game control microcomputer 100. 21TM505. In FIG. 11-21, two signal lines (a signal line for transmitting a prize ball request signal and a signal line for transmitting a received ACK signal) are shown as signal lines for performing serial communication. However, actually, the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal are transmitted and received through one signal line.

  Next, transmission and reception of signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal; control command) between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation will be described. The winning ball request signal includes a connection confirmation command and a winning ball number command, and the received ACK signal includes a connection OK command, a winning ball end command, and a winning ball preparation command.

  FIG. 11-22 is a sequence diagram showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIG. 11-22, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the connection of the signal line with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505 has been cut. A connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When receiving the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal via the serial communication circuit 21TM380, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits a connection OK command as the received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. Upon receiving the connection OK command as a received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal after a lapse of 1 s (1 second) from the point of reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication processing as long as the connection state is normal.

  Next, the operation of the payout control board 21TM037 will be described. FIG. 11-23 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the main processing, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 first performs necessary initialization. That is, the payout control CPU 21TM371 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S21TM1810). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1820), and the stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S21TM1830). Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets the built-in device register (step S21TM1840), sets the CTC and PIO (step S21TM1850), and then sets the RAM in an accessible state (step S21TM1860). In addition, 0000 (H) is set as the initial value of the winning ball unpaid number counter (step S21TM1870).

  In this embodiment, one channel of the built-in CTC is used in the timer mode. Therefore, in the setting process of the built-in device register of step S21TM1840 and the process of step S21TM1850, the register setting for setting the channel to be used to the timer mode, the register setting for permitting the interrupt generation, and the interrupt vector are set. Is set. Then, the interruption by the channel is used as a timer interruption. If it is desired to generate a timer interrupt every 2 ms, for example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value.

  The interrupt vector set for the channel set in the timer mode (channel 3 in this embodiment) corresponds to the start address of the timer interrupt processing. Specifically, the start address of the timer interrupt processing is specified by the value set in the I register and the interrupt vector. In the timer interruption process, a payout control process for controlling the payout means (including a process of driving at least the payout motor 21TM289 in response to a command signal relating to winning ball payout from the main board, and driving the payout motor 21TM289 in response to a ball lending request) May be included.) Is performed.

  In this embodiment, the interruption mode 2 is also set in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, it is possible to use the interrupt processing based on the count up of the built-in CTC. Further, it is possible to set an interrupt processing start address according to the interrupt vector transmitted by the CTC. The interrupt based on the count-up of the channel 3 (CH3) of the CTC is an interrupt generated when the internal clock (system clock) of the CPU is counted down and the register value becomes “0”, and is used as a timer interrupt. .

  Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 first performs a RAM clear process (step S21TM1880). Further, an initial value is set to a flag, a counter, and the like in the RAM area (step S21TM1890). The process of step S21TM1890 includes a process of setting the prize ball unpaid number counter initial value to the prize ball unpaid number counter.

  Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a serial communication circuit setting process for initializing the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1900). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 causes the serial communication circuit 21TM380 to perform serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100 in accordance with the same process as the serial communication circuit setting process (see step S21TM2560) performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100. Make the settings for

  When the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is initialized, the payout control CPU 21TM371 initializes the priority order of the interrupt processing executed in response to the interrupt request of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1910). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM 371 initializes the priority of the interrupt processing according to the same processing as the processing of initializing the priority performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100.

  Then, the register of the CTC provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically performed (step S21TM1920). That is, a value corresponding to the timer interrupt occurrence interval is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. Since the interrupt is prohibited in step S21TM1810 of the initial setting process, the interrupt is permitted before the initialization process is completed (step S21TM1930). Thereafter, the process enters a loop process for monitoring occurrence of a timer interrupt.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the built-in CTC of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to repeatedly generate a timer interrupt. When a timer interrupt occurs, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes a timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 11-24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a timer interrupt process executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the timer interrupt processing, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the following processing as payout control processing. First, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs an input determination process (step S21TM2010). The input determination process is a process of detecting the states of bits 4 to 6 of the input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of the input port 1 and reflecting the detection result to a predetermined byte (called an input state flag) of the RAM. is there. In the payout control process, when control is performed based on the state of bits 4 to 6 of input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of input port 1, the state of the input port is not directly checked but the input state is checked. Check the state of the flag.

  Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a payout motor control process (step S21TM2020). In the payout motor control process, when the payout motor 21TM289 is to be driven, a process for outputting the pattern of the payout motors φ1 to φ4 to the output port 0 is performed.

  The payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a prepaid card unit control process for communicating with the card unit 21TM050 (step S21TM2030). In addition, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a main control communication process described later (step S21TM2035). Further, a prize ball lending control process for controlling to pay out a lending ball in response to a ball lending request from the card unit 21TM050, and for controlling to pay out the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command from the main board. Is executed (step S21TM2040).

  Then, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes error processing for detecting various errors (step S21TM2050). Further, an information output process for outputting prize ball information and ball lending information output to the outside of the gaming machine is executed (step S21TM2060). In addition, a predetermined display is performed on the error display LED 21TM374 according to the result of the error processing, and a display control process for turning on the prize ball LED 21TM053 and the ball cut LED21TM054 is executed (step S21TM2070).

  In the present embodiment, when various errors (for example, a full error, an out-of-ball error, a prepaid card unit unconnection error) are detected in an error process described later, an error bit corresponding to the detected error is set. Then, in the display control process of step S21TM2070, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs a predetermined display on the error display LED 21TM374 based on the fact that the error bit is set. In the display control process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs control for turning on the prize ball LED21TM053 when the prize ball is being paid out. When the prize ball payout is completed, control for turning off the prize ball LED 21TM053 is performed.

  In this embodiment, the RAM area (output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, output port 2 buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the payout control CPU 21TM 371 The contents of the port 0 buffer, the output port 1 buffer, and the output port 2 buffer are output to the output port (step S760: output processing). The output port 0 buffer, the output port 1 buffer, and the output port 2 buffer perform payout motor control processing (step S21TM2020), prepaid card control processing (step S21TM2030), main control communication processing (step S21TM2035), and information output processing (step S21TM2060). And in the display control process (step S21TM2070).

  Next, in the main control communication processing of step S21TM2035, an operation in which the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits and receives various commands will be described. As shown in FIGS. 11-21, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for serially communicating various commands with the game control microcomputer 100. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the award ball number command shown in FIGS. 11-20 from the game control microcomputer 100 using the serial communication circuit 21TM380. When receiving the award ball number command, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits the award ball ACK command "D2" as a reception confirmation signal using the serial communication circuit 21TM380.

  Similarly to the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, when there is an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 while the interrupt is enabled, the payout control CPU 21TM 371 performs an interrupt request issued by the serial communication circuit 21TM 380. Execute the interrupt processing according to the cause. In this embodiment, when the payout control CPU 21TM371 specifies that the interrupt cause is that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 has received the received data, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes the reception interruption process. In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets a reception interrupt flag indicating that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is receiving reception data. Note that the payout control CPU 21TM371 may read data from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 instead of setting the reception interrupt flag in the reception interrupt processing. In this case, for example, the payout control CPU 21TM371 determines whether the read reception data is a winning ball number command in the reception interruption process. When the received data is the winning ball number command, the payout control CPU 21TM371 may add the winning ball number indicated by the winning ball number command to the winning ball unpaid number counter. By doing so, in the main control communication process described later, it is determined whether or not the received data is a prize ball number command based on the reception interrupt flag being set, and the prize ball number is determined. It is not necessary to execute the process of adding the number to the unpaid number counter.

  FIG. 11-25 is a diagram illustrating the main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100), the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370), the payout motor 21TM289, and the ball rental executed between the card unit 21TM050. It is a block diagram for explaining communication processing of. Here, as will be described later, there are a first ball lending restriction method to a fourth ball lending restriction method described below as methods for restricting ball lending by the payout motor 21TM289.

  First, (1) in the first ball lending restriction method, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcontroller) is used from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100). This is a method of stopping the output of the connection confirmation signal to the computer 21TM370). (2) In the second ball lending restriction method, during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, PRDY from the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the card unit 21TM050 is used. This is a method of stopping signal output. (3) In the third ball lending restriction method, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. During this period, output of a signal for driving the payout motor 21TM289 from the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped. (4) In the fourth ball lending restriction method, the EXS from the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the card unit 21TM050 is controlled during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. This is a method of stopping signal output.

  Since the transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involve power-off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power-on, the state of the gaming machine is unstable. If the payout control corresponding to the ball lending process is executed in such an unstable state, there is a possibility that an appropriate amount of game media corresponding to the lending request cannot be paid out. In order to prevent a disadvantage of the player in such a situation, in the following embodiment, ball lending in a gaming machine controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is limited. Hereinafter, these first to fourth ball lending restriction methods will be specifically described.

  FIG. 11-26 is a timing chart for explaining communication among the main board 11, the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050 of the gaming machine. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the payout control board 21TM037 turns the PRDY signal ON when the payout operation is possible. The connection confirmation signal is turned on in the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 11-13 (see FIG. 11-19). When power supply is started, the card unit 21TM050 turns on a VL signal as a connection signal.

  When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated, and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being ON. Output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control board 21TM037 turns on the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is on and both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are on, so that the card unit 21TM050 When the falling (OFF) of the BRQ signal is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of lending balls to the player. Then, the payout control board 21TM037 falls the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. That is, the EXS signal is turned off.

(First ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
As a method of restricting ball lending during the period in which the setting is changed to the setting change mode, there are the first ball lending restriction method to the fourth ball lending restriction method described above. First, the first ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 11-27 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 11-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. While the processing in the mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

  While the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection control signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state, and therefore the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state but changes the PRDY signal to the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even in the state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, even when the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state instead of the ON state based on the fact that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the OFF state. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the process is being executed, ball lending (payout of game media) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

  As described above, during the period in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 does not set the connection confirmation signal to the ON state, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 controls the payout of the game medium. Can be prevented from running. In addition, the card unit 21TM050 can notify that ball lending is not executed (a ball lending error has occurred) based on the PRDY signal not being turned on.

  When the CPU 103 completes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. When the payout operation is possible, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to the ON state based on the fact that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the ON state, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

  It should be noted that, during the game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the first ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 11-27 can be applied. That is, the game control microcomputer 100 stops outputting the connection confirmation signal (switches from the ON state to the OFF state) based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the PRDY signal to the OFF state or does not set the EXS signal to the ON state, thereby executing the ball lending. Not to be.

(Second ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the second ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the example illustrated in FIGS. 11 to 28, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode, and is also in the ON state during the period of being controlled to the setting confirmation mode. Shall be. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on during the setting change mode. Shall be. Also, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at a timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and is kept on during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

  FIG. 11-28 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIG. 11-28, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops transmitting the connection confirmation command based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The connection confirmation command is a command for confirming a communication state with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505 as described above.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state based on the fact that no connection confirmation command has been received from the game control microcomputer 100. When the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (ie, the state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (ie, the game control microcomputer). Even when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (while the connection confirmation command is not received), the PRDY signal is turned on even when the CPU 103 is in the state of being electrically connected to the connection confirmation command. It is not in the state, but in the OFF state.

  As a result, even when the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state instead of the ON state based on the fact that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the OFF state. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal is ON, when the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Is performing the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball lending (payout of the game medium) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

  As described above, during the period in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has not received the connection confirmation command. Thus, the PRDY signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the payout control of the game medium. In addition, the card unit 21TM050 can notify that ball lending is not executed (a ball lending error has occurred) based on the PRDY signal not being turned on.

  When the CPU 103 ends the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, transmission of the connection confirmation command is restarted. Based on restarting the reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to the ON state based on the fact that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the ON state, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

  It should be noted that, during the game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the second ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 11-28 can be applied. Further, the PRDY signal can be output (turned on) regardless of whether the connection control signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether the connection is on or off). Even if such a configuration is adopted, the second ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 11-28 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the PRDY signal in the ON state based on not receiving the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Is switched to the OFF state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Third ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the third ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and do not open the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation. In order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened. That is, it is normal that the gaming machine frame 3 is open during the period in which the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. That is, during the period in which the control is performed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 has been opened. Become. As described above, the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected includes a period in which the setting control mode is controlled and a period in which the setting control mode is controlled.

  FIG. 11-29 shows the main board when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050.

  In the example of FIGS. 11-29, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a) is open. Therefore, the PRDY signal is not turned on. When the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (ie, the state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (ie, the game control microcomputer). Even when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (a period in which the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state), The PRDY signal is not turned on, but is turned off.

  As a result, even when the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state instead of the ON state based on the fact that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the OFF state. That is, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a), the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ Since both the payout signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball is not operated even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. Lending (payout of game media) is not executed.

  As described above, during the period in which the control is performed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 provides the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Is detected, the PRDY signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the payout control of the game medium. In addition, the card unit 21TM050 can notify that ball lending is not executed (a ball lending error has occurred) based on the PRDY signal not being turned on.

  Then, the clerk of the game hall or the like performs an operation of turning off the lock switch 21TM051, whereby the CPU 103 ends the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, a game machine clerk or the like closes the gaming machine frame 3 so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be put into a playable state. 21TM300 does not detect the open state of gaming machine frame 3. With the closing of the gaming machine frame 3, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to the ON state based on the fact that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the ON state, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

  It should be noted that, during the game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the third ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 11-29 can be applied. Further, the PRDY signal can be output (turned on) regardless of whether the connection control signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether the connection is on or off). Even if such a configuration is adopted, the third ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 11-29 can be applied. That is, during the period in which the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is controlled by the gaming machine frame 3 ( Alternatively, the PRDY signal is not turned ON based on the detection of the open state of the glass door frame 3a). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the present embodiment, an example is described in which the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the open state detection signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 may be provided on the main board 11 (a detection signal of an open state is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In the case of such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 determines that the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Then, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped (switching from ON state to OFF state). As a result, based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the PRDY signal to the OFF state or does not set the EXS signal to the ON state, thereby executing the ball lending. Not to be.

(Fourth ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the fourth ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the example illustrated in FIGS. 11 to 30, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period in which the setting change mode is being controlled, and the connection confirmation signal is also in the ON state during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is being controlled. Shall be. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on during the setting change mode. Shall be. Also, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at a timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and is kept on during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

  FIG. 11-30 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIGS. 11-30, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops transmitting the connection confirmation command based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The connection confirmation command is a command for confirming a communication state with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505 as described above.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal on based on the connection confirmation signal being on. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is maintained in the ON state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (ie, the state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (ie, the game control microcomputer). When the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the PRDY signal is set to the ON state.

  When the card is received in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 The BRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Here, in the payout control board 21TM037, the PRDY signal is in the ON state, and both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, but the connection control command is not received from the game control microcomputer 100. Based on this, the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 is not turned on. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (ie, the state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (ie, the game control microcomputer). 100), the PRDY signal is in the ON state (ie, the payout operation is possible by the payout control board 21TM037), and the BRDY signal is in the ON state (ie, the ball rental switch 21TM062). Is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input), and the CPU 103 sets even if the BRQ signal is in the ON state (that is, a state in which a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the BRDY signal was turned ON). While executing the process of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode (while the connection confirmation command is not received) It is without EXS signal ON state to the OFF state. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, when the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the EXS signal is in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, ball lending (payout of game media) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

  As described above, during the period in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has not received the connection confirmation command. Therefore, the EXS signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the payout control of the game medium. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not executed (the ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the EXS signal is not turned on.

  Then, when a predetermined time elapses after the BRQ signal is turned on and the EXS signal is turned off after the BRQ signal is turned on (when a timer set to a predetermined value times out), the card unit 21TM050 stops outputting the BRQ signal. I do. That is, the BRQ signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops outputting the BRDY signal based on the BRQ signal being turned off. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off.

  When the CPU 103 ends the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, transmission of the connection confirmation command is restarted. At this time, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the PRDY signal in the ON state.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 resumes the reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, and based on the fact that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are all in the ON state, The EXS signal for the unit 21TM050 is turned on, and the subsequent ball lending payout control is executed.

  It should be noted that, during the game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the fourth ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 11-30 can be applied. Further, the PRDY signal can be output (turned on) regardless of whether the connection control signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether the connection is on or off). Even when such a configuration is adopted, the fourth ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 11-30 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the EXS signal to the ON state based on not receiving a connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Also, in FIG. 11-30, if a predetermined time elapses after the BRQ signal is turned on and the EXS signal is turned off (when a timer set to a predetermined value times out), the card unit 21TM050 Shows an example in which the BRQ signal is returned to the OFF state, and the BRDY signal is also returned to the OFF state. However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment, and the EXS signal remains OFF after the BRQ signal is turned ON. Even when a predetermined time has elapsed, the BRQ signal may be maintained in the ON state, and the BRDY signal may be maintained in the ON state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 resumes the reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 (the completion of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode), and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal. May be turned on based on the fact that both are on. Here, when the EXS signal is turned on, (1) the ball lending switch 21TM062 is not operated again, the BRQ signal is turned off, and the ball lending is automatically executed (that is, the setting change mode or When the setting confirmation mode ends, a ball lending process corresponding to the ball lending operation received during the setting change mode or the period of the setting confirmation mode may be performed.) (2) Ball lending When the switch 21TM062 is operated again, the BRQ signal may be turned off and ball lending may be executed.

(How to not execute ball lending restriction during setting change mode)
Next, a method of not executing the ball lending restriction during the setting change mode will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the example illustrated in FIG. 11-31, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period in which the setting change mode is being controlled, and the connection confirmation signal is also in the ON state during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is being controlled. Shall be. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on during the setting change mode. Shall be. Also, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at a timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and is kept on during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

  FIG. 11-31 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIG. 11-31, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 continues transmitting the connection confirmation command even during the period in which the game is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The connection confirmation command is a command for confirming a communication state with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505 as described above.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the PRDY signal to the ON state based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state and the fact that the connection confirmation command has been received. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is maintained in the ON state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, in a state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, in the game control microcomputer 100). When the CPU 103 is in the state of being electrically connected) and receiving the connection confirmation command, regardless of whether the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the PRDY signal is output. Is turned on.

  When the card is received in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 The BRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  The payout control board 21TM037 outputs an EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are all in the ON state and the connection confirmation command is being received. Is turned on, and when the falling (OFF) of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050 is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of game media to the player.

  Thus, even during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 continuously transmits the connection confirmation command, thereby continuously receiving the connection confirmation command. On the control microcomputer 21TM370 side, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned on. In this way, the payout control of the game medium by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can be executed even during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. The control load for preventing the payout control from being executed during the controlled period can be reduced. In addition, during the period in which the setting is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the communication function between the card unit 21TM050 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be checked at the same time, and workability can be improved. it can.

  The CPU 103 continues to transmit the connection confirmation command even after ending the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Based on continuing to receive the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the ON state of the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  When the payout of a predetermined number of game media is completed and the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled, the payout control board 21TM037 stops outputting the EXS signal. . That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops outputting the BRDY signal based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off. As described above, during the period in which the setting is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the EXS signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state, and accordingly, the BRDY signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state. When the payout of a predetermined number of game media ends and the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 stops after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the payout control board 21TM037 stops outputting the EXS signal. That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops outputting the BRDY signal based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state. As described above, after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the EXS signal changes from the ON state to the OFF state, and accordingly, the BRDY signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state.

(How to restart ball lending after the end of setting change mode)
Next, regarding the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power cutoff during the ball lending being executed and the control is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is subsequently turned on, FIG. This will be described specifically. In the example shown in FIGS. 11-32, the payout of the game medium is interrupted based on the occurrence of the power supply interruption while the payout of the game medium is being executed, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is turned on. After the change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the suspended payout is resumed.

  FIG. 11-32 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes the payout of the game medium. Is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. Is in the ON state.

  When the power is cut off during the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is performing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. You. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  The unpaid number is updated based on a detection signal from the number-of-payouts count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the number of unpaid items is calculated from the predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), from the number-of-payouts count switch. It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by the 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 11-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. While the processing in the mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

  While the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection control signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state, and therefore the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state but changes the PRDY signal to the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even in the state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 performs the payout control based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the substrate 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state instead of the ON state based on the fact that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing is being executed, the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 completes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. When the payout operation is possible, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal.

  Then, the power supply is resumed, and the payout control is performed based on the fact that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode controlled at the time of turning on the power is completed (the connection confirmation signal is turned on and the PRDY signal is turned on). The microcomputer 21TM370 drives the payout motor 21TM289 based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and drives the payout motor 21TM289 one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. Perform payout operation. This completes the payout of the game medium that has been interrupted due to the power interruption and the subsequent transition to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As described above, when the supply of the game medium is interrupted due to a power outage during the execution of the ball lending, even if the setting is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode at the time of power restoration, the setting is not performed. After the end of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to resume the interrupted payout of the game medium and complete the ball lending.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 11-32, the payout processing is interrupted due to the occurrence of power interruption during the payout processing, and the power supply is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is restored. After the end of the above, the example in which the interrupted payout process is restarted is shown. However, this power-off is caused by the clerk of the game hall turning off the power switch 21TM055 in order to change or confirm the set value. It may be a power-off that has occurred or a power-off that has occurred due to turning off the power switch 21TM055 with the closing of the game arcade. Not only when the power is cut off, but also during the payout processing, the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, or the opening of the glass door frame 3a. In response to the state being detected, the payout process being executed is interrupted, and thereafter, the setting change mode or the setting check mode is controlled, and after the setting change mode or the setting check mode ends, the interrupted payout process is performed. You may make it restart.

(Forcible termination of ball rental due to power outage)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 11-33, the processing when the payout is forcibly terminated (stopped) when the power is cut off while the ball lending is being performed and the payout is not restarted after the power is restored will be specifically described. explain. In the example shown in FIG. 11-33, when the power supply is interrupted while the payout of the game medium is being executed, the payout being executed is stopped, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored, The payout is not restarted, and the payout is not restarted even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends.

  FIG. 11-33 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes the payout of the game medium. Is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. Is in the ON state.

  When the power is cut off during the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is performing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. You. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 based on the EXS signal being turned off, and forcibly ends (stops) the payout of the game medium. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is not stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (or the unpaid number storage buffer itself is not provided). Therefore, as shown below, after the power is restored, the payout of the game media corresponding to the unpaid number is not executed.

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 11-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. While the processing in the mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state but changes the PRDY signal to the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even in the state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 performs the payout control based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the substrate 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state instead of the ON state based on the fact that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing is being executed, the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 completes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. When the payout operation is possible, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal. Since the data of the unpaid number is not backed up, a predetermined number to be paid out in the ball lending process executed before the power failure occurs (before the power is restored to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). Of the number of game media (that is, the number of payouts designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the payout is not made for the unpaid number that has not been paid out due to the stoppage of the payout (forced termination). Not done. As described above, when the power is cut off during the ball lending, the payout is forcibly terminated (stopped), and thereafter, when the power is restored, the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the setting change mode or the setting. By not executing the payout for the unpaid number after the confirmation mode is completed, the control of backing up the data of the unpaid number and restarting the payout becomes unnecessary, and the ball lending process can be simplified.

  In the example shown in FIG. 11-33, when the power is cut off during the payout, the data of the unpaid number is not backed up, so that the payout being executed is forcibly terminated (stopped) in the middle. Not limited to such a mode, as in the example shown in FIGS. 11 to 32, when the power is cut off, the data of the unpaid number is backed up, and after the power is restored, the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are set. Under the condition that neither is controlled, the payout of the game media corresponding to the unpaid number is executed based on the data of the unpaid number that has been backed up (payout is restarted based on the backup data). When the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout of the game media corresponding to the unpaid number is not executed (the payout based on the backup data is not restarted), and the setting is not performed. Do not run the payout of unpaid coin number corresponding to the game medium even after the change mode or setting confirmation mode end may be so.

  It should be noted that, during the game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the method of forcibly terminating the ball lending accompanying the shift to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 11-33 can be applied. Further, the PRDY signal can be output (turned on) regardless of whether the connection control signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether the connection is on or off). Even when such a configuration is adopted, the method of forcibly terminating ball lending accompanying the shift to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 11-33 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state based on not receiving a connection confirmation signal from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent payout (ball lending) from being executed during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

(Award ball payout control)
FIG. 11-34 is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIG. 11-34, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is received as the connection OK command. When receiving the connection OK command as the received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 again transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after a lapse of 1 s (1 second) from the reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication processing as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication process is not being executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the received ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of winning balls in the winning ball request signal, and transmits the winning ball number command as the set winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receiving the winning ball number command as the winning ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of winning balls specified by the winning ball number command, and pays out the winning balls (winning ball payout operation). Upon completion, a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Upon receiving the prize ball end command as a received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal 1 s (1 second) after the reception.

  Although not shown, a prize is awarded during the execution of the communication processing of the connection confirmation (between transmitting the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal and receiving the connection OK command as the received ACK signal). In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the data indicating the number of winning balls in the winning ball request signal, and transmits the winning ball number command as the set winning ball request signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. After receiving the connection OK command as a reception ACK signal, the connection control section 21 transmits the connection OK command to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receiving the winning ball number command as the winning ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of winning balls specified by the winning ball number command, and pays out the winning balls (winning ball payout operation). Upon completion, a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. During execution of the prize ball payout (prize ball payout operation), a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

(Winning is invalid during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode)
FIG. 11-35 is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. In the main board 11, when the power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process.

  As described above, until the CPU 103 executes the interruption permission (step S21TM1540) shown in FIG. 11-13, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the first general winning opening switch to the fourth winning port switch. A special symbol process including a jackpot determination process and the like, in which a switch process (step S21TM1620 shown in FIGS. 11 to 14) for confirming a state of each of the general winning opening switch and the count switch 23 (the presence or absence of a detection signal) is not executed. The processing (step S21TM1690 shown in FIGS. 11 to 14) and the like are not executed. Therefore, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 does not detect the detection signal output from each switch, and does not execute the big hit determination processing or the like. That is, during the period in which the game medium is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the winning is invalid even if the game medium passes through each winning opening. Further, since the switch process is not executed, the detection of the game ball by the outlet switch 21TM070 is not executed, and the totaling of the base is not executed. In other words, until the interruption permission is executed, the tabulation of each item such as the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base is not required. , The processing load on the CPU 103 can be reduced.

  In the period in which the game is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 does not execute the switch process and the special symbol process process, thereby invalidating the winning based on the game medium passing through each winning opening. And That is, it does not transmit the winning ball number command to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and does not execute the big hit determination processing or the like. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 based on not receiving the winning ball number command from the game control microcomputer 100. That is, even if the game medium passes through each winning opening during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control of the prize ball is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 completes the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first general winning opening switch to the fourth general winning opening switch, and the count switch 23 A switch process for confirming the state of each switch (presence or absence of a detection signal) can be executed, it can be detected that the game medium has passed through each winning opening, and a prize ball number command (and a connection confirmation command) can be transmitted. Become. In addition, it becomes possible to execute a special symbol process including a big hit determination process.

  The game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 which has received the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal receives the ACK signal. A connection OK command is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 as a signal. At this time, when the game medium passes through any of the winning holes (when a winning is generated), the CPU 103 detects the winning by executing a switch process, and the microcomputer 100 for game control controls the gaming control microcomputer 100 as a winning ball request signal. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, which has transmitted the prize ball number command to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and received the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to drive a predetermined number (for example, three). Pay out game media. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out a predetermined number of game media transmits a winning ball end command as a received ACK signal.

  If the switch processing is executed during the setting change mode period in which the set value may be changed, the jackpot determination random number is extracted, and the jackpot determination is performed based on the jackpot determination random number. In the case where the big hit is determined based on the big hit determination random number which is a big hit with the set value before the change but is not a big hit with the set value after the change (the set value after the determination), Although the set value does not result in a big hit, there may be a case where the big hit determination is executed based on the big hit determination random number which becomes the big hit with the changed set value (set value after determination). In other words, in these cases, the relationship between the execution timing of the big hit determination and the set value becomes complicated, and the player or the game arcade may be disadvantaged.

  In the present embodiment, when the game mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the payout of the prize ball based on the passing of the game ball through each winning port is not performed, and the big hit determination process is not performed. Is prevented from complicating the relationship between the execution timing and the set value, and disadvantages of the player or the playground are prevented.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed, in the setting check mode in which the set value is displayed but cannot be changed, similarly, the winning is invalidated, and the big hit determination process is not performed. I have to. For example, unlike the setting change mode, the setting check mode can be controlled when the game control timer interrupt process is being executed instead of when the power is turned on. If the special symbol process can be executed, control completely different from the setting change mode is required, and a problem arises in that the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 increases.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, even in the setting confirmation mode, control can be performed only at the time of turning on the power, similarly to the setting change mode. By not executing the processing, the processing is shared and the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 is reduced.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, the timer interrupt setting is performed after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed (step S21TM1500). . Accordingly, since the game control timer interrupt process itself is not executed, the switch process and the special symbol process process in the game control timer interrupt process are not executed, and the period is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Winning in has been disabled. On the other hand, when the game is stopped due to a magnetic error, a radio wave error, a vibration error, or the like, whether a game stop error has occurred during the period in which the game control timer interrupt process is being executed, that is, during the game. If it is determined (step S21TM1615) that a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615), subsequent switch processing (step S21TM1620) and special symbol process processing (step S21) in the same interrupt processing S21TM1690) is not executed, so that the winning is invalidated. Thus, the method of invalidating the winning (stopping the game) differs between the case where the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled and the case where a game stop error occurs.

  Note that by stopping the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the period in which the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not transmit a connection OK command as a received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. Accordingly, the microcomputer 100 for game control sends the microcomputer 21TM370 for payout as a prize ball request signal to the microcomputer 21TM370 for payout based on the fact that the connection OK command has not been received during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By not transmitting the prize ball number command, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the payout control of the game medium. As described above, based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 100 does not output the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not execute the payout control, Winning can be invalidated.

  Note that, during a game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 may be operated to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. . Even when such a configuration is adopted, the method shown in FIGS. 11-35 can be applied, and based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 , Switch processing and special symbol processing are preferably not executed.

  In addition, a configuration in which the game control microcomputer 100 can execute a switch process while being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (a configuration in which it is possible to detect that the game medium has passed each winning opening). It is good. When such a configuration is employed, as described above, the transmission of the prize ball number command and the connection confirmation command is stopped when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, thereby controlling the payout control. The payout is invalidated without causing the microcomputer 21TM370 to execute the payout control, and the special symbol process is not executed. Then, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the transmission of the winning ball number command and the connection confirmation command is resumed in a state where the switch processing can be executed, and the special symbol process processing is executed.

(Payout restriction method during detection of gaming machine frame / door frame opening)
FIG. 11-36 is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the detection of the opening of the gaming machine frame / door frame. As described above, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the normal operation. A connection OK command is received as a signal. At this time, when a clerk of the game arcade opens the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door. An open state of the frame 3a is detected.

  In the state in which the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (and in the case where the glass door frame 3a and the upper plate are integrated, the state in which the glass door frame 3a is opened), award balls to be paid out Is not physically connected to the path where the flowing prize balls are stored.If the prize balls are paid out in this state, the game media reaches the upper plate. Without falling. Here, in a state where the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened, the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, and the large winning opening. When the passage of the game medium is detected at any one of the winning ports, the microcomputer 100 for game control transmits a command for the number of prize balls as a prize ball request signal to the microcomputer 21TM370 for payout. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, which detects the open state of the frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, does not execute the payout control of the game medium, and sends a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. Send to This prize ball preparation command is issued until the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 no longer detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a Transmission to the game control microcomputer 100 is continued until the state is closed.

  In this manner, during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, even if the game medium passes through each winning opening and detects a winning, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the payout motor 21TM289. Is not executed without driving the prize ball. Then, a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 activates the payout motor 21TM289. It is driven to execute payout control of a predetermined number (a number specified by a prize ball number command) of prize balls according to a prize during a period in which the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected. . Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out the predetermined number of game media transmits a winning ball end command as a received ACK signal.

  When detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a during the payout of the prize ball, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 suspends the payout of the prize ball, and The data of the unpaid number out of the number specified by the number command is stored in the backup area in the RAM. Then, a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 activates the payout motor 21TM289. The game machine is driven to execute payout control of game media corresponding to the unpaid number. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out the game medium transmits a winning ball end command as a received ACK signal.

  It should be noted that, during the game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the payout restriction method during the detection of the opening of the gaming machine frame / door frame shown in FIGS. 11-36 can be applied. In the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and operate as long as the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is not opened. It is considered impossible. Therefore, in order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened, and during the period in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, Normally, the machine frame 3 is open. During the period in which the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is restricted so that the payout of the prize ball is not executed. As a result, the payout of prize balls during the period when the setting change mode is being controlled and the period when the setting confirmation mode is being controlled are limited.

  Next, the control when the power is cut off during the setting change mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-37 (1) and (2).

  FIGS. 11-37 (1) and (2) show the patterns related to the power-down in different charts based on the difference in the situation when the power-down occurs. The power-off pattern shown in FIG. 11-37 (1) indicates control in the case where power-off occurs in a state where “set value confirmation” is not performed during “setting value change”, and power-off recovery is performed. The setting value at the time becomes the setting value at the time of the previous power-on. Further, the power-off pattern shown in FIG. 11-37 (2) indicates the control when the power-off occurs in a situation where “set value decision” is performed during “setting value change”, The set value at power recovery is the set value at the time of power failure.

  That is, FIG. 11-37 (1) shows a setting in the case where the power is cut off without the “set value confirmation” operation in which the lock switch 21TM051 is operated to the OFF state (the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state). FIG. 11-37 (2) shows the control related to the set value when the power is cut off after the operation of “set value determination” in which the lock switch 21TM051 is operated to the OFF state. Is shown.

  FIGS. 11-37 (1) and (2) show various situations in the setting change work from the top to the bottom in the order of occurrence (see the “Order” and “Status” columns). ). In addition, in FIGS. 11-37 (1) and (2), the ON / OFF state of the lock switch 21TM051 in each situation (order 1 to 8) is shown in the column of “lock switch”. In the column of “set value”, set value data (set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) in each situation is shown. In the column of "set value display" in the figure, the display contents (set values stored in the setting information temporary storage area) of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) in each situation are shown. I have.

  When a setting change operation is performed, as shown at the top of the “Status” column in FIG. 11-37 (1), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on (order 1), and As shown in the “Lock switch” column, the state of the lock switch 21TM051 at this time is in the ON state. In FIG. 11-37 (1), the “set value” at the time of “power-on” in order 1 is “1” because the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 at this time is “1”. , "1".

  Also, the display content of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) shown in the column of "set value display" is blank (blank) just at this stage because the power has just been turned on. This is before the process of reading and displaying the set value stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM1150), indicating that the display of the set value has not been started.

  After the “power-on” status, the “setting change mode starts” status (order 2). Then, in this “setting change mode start”, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (1), the “lock switch” column is “ON”, and the “setting value” column is the RAM 102. Is set to “1” based on the fact that it has not been changed from the set value stored in the set value storage area of the set value storage area of the RAM 102 as described above. Is set to “1” based on the fact that the setting value read from the setting information and stored in the setting information temporary storage area is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A).

  Subsequently, when the status of “setting value is being changed” (order 3) is reached, the “lock switch” column remains “ON”, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated. As shown in FIG. 11-37 (1), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed, so that the "setting value" column remains "1", but the setting information is temporarily stored. By changing the set value stored in the area from “1” to “2”, the “set value display” column (set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) The selected value changes to "2".

  Further, when the status of “setting value is being changed” (order 4) is reached, the “lock switch” column remains “ON”, and when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, As shown in FIG. 11-37 (1), since the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed, the “set value” column remains “1”. Is changed from “2” to “3”, the “set value display” column (set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) is selected. To the new value "3".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (1), when the power is cut off during “setting value change” (order 5), no operation for finalizing the setting value is performed, and the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not set. Has not been executed (the process of step S21TM1190 for finalizing the set value), the column of "set value" remains "1". That is, when the power is turned off, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 maintains the state of “1” when the power is turned on. Here, the set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is deleted due to the occurrence of the power interruption.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (1), when the power is turned on while the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (order 6), then In the “setting change mode start” situation (order 7), the setting value (“1” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read and stored in the setting information temporary storage area. Is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (the first display unit 21TM029A), the "set value" column remains "1", and the "set value display" column also becomes "1". Note that, in the order 7, the same is applied to a case where the setting is changed to the setting confirmation mode instead of the setting change mode.

  As described above, when the power is turned on, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the setting change operation is not completed (the lock switch 21TM051 is not switched to the OFF state). Since the setting value stored in the storage area has not been changed, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the restoration of the power is: The setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 at the time of the previous power-on (before the power-off occurs) are used. As described above, it is possible to appropriately set a set value in the case where power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode.

  Next, the control in the case where the power is cut off after the set value is determined will be described with reference to FIG. 11-37 (2). The description of the processing part common to the case where the power supply shuts down before the set value is determined is omitted. When the power is cut off after the set value is determined, the “set value determination” shown in order 5 is performed after the “setting value is being changed” shown in order 4. Here, immediately before the operation for finalizing the set value is performed, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is “1”, and the set value ( The display monitor 21TM029 (the set value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A) is in the state of "3". Then, during the setting change mode, the “lock switch” column is set to “OFF” based on turning off the lock switch 21TM051.

  That is, in the setting change mode, when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (YES in step S21TM1180), the setting value “1” stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is stored in the setting information temporary storage area. The stored set value (the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) is overwritten by "3", and the set value is determined (step S21TM1190). As a result, "3" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102.

  Then, when the power is cut off in this state (order 6), the process of overwriting the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (the process of step S21TM1190 for fixing the set value) is executed, The column of “setting value” is “3”. That is, when the power is turned off, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed to “3” which is different from when the power is turned on. Here, the set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is deleted due to the occurrence of the power interruption.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (2), when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state and the power is turned on (order 7), the status of the “start of the setting change mode” (the order 7) In order 8), the setting value (“3” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read and stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A). ), The “set value” column is “3”, and the “set value display” column is also “3”. Note that, in the order 8, the same applies to the case where the setting is controlled not in the setting change mode but in the setting confirmation mode.

  As described above, if the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off without turning off the lock switch 21TM051 during the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off. The setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 has not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is deleted. Therefore, the clerk of the amusement arcade may erroneously shift the gaming machine to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, and further perform the setting change operation (the operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052). However, by subsequently turning off the power switch 21TM055, the change of the set value can be stopped to return to the state before shifting to the setting change mode.

  Since the transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involve power-off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power-on, the state of the gaming machine is unstable. 11-37 (1), the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off and the power supply is turned off. If a power failure occurs, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed from the time of power-on, so that the set value can be appropriately determined and the control of the set value becomes unstable. Therefore, it is possible to execute appropriate control relating to the set value.

  FIG. 11-38 is an effect device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the lock switch 21TM051 or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated during a game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed). An example is shown in which (the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9) notifies that an operation for changing the set value has been performed.

  FIG. 11-38 (1) shows a state in which a decorative symbol is variably displayed on the image display device 5 during the game. At this time, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing a game control timer interrupt process. The main board 11 (CPU 103) detects that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated (switched from the OFF state to the ON state) during the game (for example, during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol) (game control). (Step S21TM1660 of timer interrupt processing for game), transmits a lock switch operation command indicating that lock switch 21TM051 is operated to effect control board 12 (CPU 120 for effect control) (step S21TM1710 of timer interrupt processing for game control). When detecting that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM1660 of the game control timer interrupt process), the setting changeover switch operation indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated. Command to the production control board 12 And transmits to the effect control CPU 120) (step a game control timer interruption process S21TM1710). That is, the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command are transmitted to notify that the operation for changing the setting value has been performed.

  As shown in FIG. 11-38 (2), the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120) receives the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command, and performs the setting change mode and It is possible to specify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed, and to notify the user of the fact that control is not performed in any of the setting check modes. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the character “operation of the lock switch has been detected.” In addition, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the text “Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected” is executed.

  In this example, based on the fact that both the lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command have been received, the effect control CPU 120 detects the operation of the lock switch and the setting changeover switch as an abnormal operation warning notification. Are displayed on the image display device 5. In the abnormal operation warning notification, since the display priority is higher than the background image and the decorative pattern (the displayed layer is higher than the background image and the decorative pattern), as shown in FIG. Even during the variable display of the symbol, the clerk at the game hall, etc., confirms that the operation for changing the set value has been performed even though it is not controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. By grasping clearly, it is possible to confirm whether or not fraud has been performed. Note that the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a sound (for example, a sound indicating that the operation of the lock switch and the setting changeover switch has been detected) to notify that the operation for changing the set value has been detected, and outputs the game effect lamp 9. May be emitted in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a red flashing mode) to notify that an operation for changing the set value has been detected.

  In this embodiment, only when the power is turned on (before the game control timer interrupt process is executed), the configuration can be set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Normally, the setting value is changed or confirmed. (Operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052) is not performed within a period in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed. Accordingly, the operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are performed during the period in which the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is performed or the period in which the variable display of the ordinary symbol is performed. In such a case, there is a possibility that the setting value is being illegally changed.

  In the present embodiment, when the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are operated at a timing other than the time when the power is turned on, or the period during which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Informs that an operation for changing the set value and an operation for confirming the set value have been performed on the image display device 5, which is the largest display device provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, to detect fraud. I try to deter them.

  Further, as described above, when the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are operated, the gaming machine frame 3 is normally in an open state, so that the gaming machine frame / door frame is opened. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the sensor 21TM300, and the fact is notified. Further, as described above, ball lending is suspended or stopped, and award ball payout is also suspended or stopped. However, with respect to the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at a predetermined position on the gaming island, the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at a position facing the predetermined position on the gaming island is opened. Thus, the back side of the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at the predetermined position can be seen from the position facing the predetermined position, and the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch ( Setting switch 21TM052 can be operated. That is, even when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the predetermined position does not detect the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3, the lock switch 21TM051 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the predetermined position and In some cases, the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 can be operated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are set regardless of whether or not the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. When operated, the fact that an operation for changing the set value and an operation for confirming the set value have been performed is reported, thereby strengthening the suppression of fraud.

(Setting change corresponding signal)
Next, various signals output from the information output terminal of the main board 11 will be specifically described. As shown in FIGS. 11 to 39, the information output circuit 112 in the present embodiment is provided with ten information output terminals from a first terminal to a tenth terminal, and outputs a signal corresponding to each information output terminal. Is done.

  In the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 11-39 (1), a prize ball signal is output from the first terminal. The prize ball signal is a pulse signal output every time 10 prize balls are paid out, and has a pulse width of 0.1 second. A game machine frame / door frame open signal is output from the second terminal. The gaming machine frame / door frame opening signal is turned on when the gaming machine frame 3 opening state is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, and the opening state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. It is also in the ON state when it is on.

  From the third terminal, a signal for all symbol determination times is output. The all symbol determination frequency signal is output when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the display result is derived and displayed (when it is determined), and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed to derive the display result. This is a pulse-like signal output when displayed (when it is determined), and has a pulse width of 0.5 seconds. From the fourth terminal, an all starting port signal is output. The all-starting-port signal is a pulse-like signal that is output when a game ball is won to the first starting winning port and is also output when a game ball is received to the second starting winning port. The pulse width is 0.1 seconds.

  The jackpot 1 signal is output from the fifth terminal. The big hit 1 signal is turned on when the big hit game state is controlled. The jackpot outputs two jackpot signals. The big hit 2 signal is turned on when being controlled to the big hit game state, and is turned on also when being controlled to the high base state. That is, a period in which one big hit signal is in the OFF state and two big hit signals are in the ON state can be specified as the high base state.

  A setting change correspondence signal is output from the seventh terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is a signal that is turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode and is also turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode. The setting change corresponding signal can be output in a pulse form (special mode) after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, as will be described later. It is possible.

  An out signal is output from the eighth terminal. The out signal is a pulse-like signal output every time 10 out balls (game balls fired in the game area and guided to the outlet) are detected by the outlet switch 21TM070, and the pulse width is 0. .1 second. A winning signal is output from the ninth terminal. A winning signal is generated each time a game ball wins a winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, large winning opening, first general winning opening to fourth general winning opening) (corresponding to each winning opening). Each time a winning is detected by the switch), it is a pulse signal output every time 10 winning balls are paid out. The pulse width of the winning signal is 0.1 second.

  A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that is turned ON for 30 seconds when an initialization process (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is executed when the power is turned on. In addition, when an injustice is detected, it is turned on for 4 minutes. In the case where the misconduct is detected, for example, a case where an abnormal prize is generated is included, and an abnormal frequency is displayed in each of the winning ports (for example, a game ball is frequently transmitted to the first starting prize port at a frequency of 15 times or more per 30 seconds). An abnormal winning is determined based on the fact that the gaming ball has won in the case of winning). In addition, the case where the switch abnormality detection occurs is included, and the period in which the switch corresponding to each winning opening is in the winning detection state is abnormal (for example, the game control timer interrupt processing is performed ten times or more in succession). (1 When the start port switch is in the ON state, etc.), it is determined that the switch is abnormal. When the magnetic sensor detects abnormal magnetism, based on the occurrence of the game stop target error, the ON state continues until the power is turned off, and when the abnormal magnetism is no longer detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is cleared), it is ON for 4 minutes.

  Furthermore, in the example of the pattern 1 shown in FIG. 11-39 (1), the security signal is turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode, and is also turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode. .

  As described above, the security signal can be output from the tenth terminal, and the setting change correspondence signal can be output from the seventh terminal. It is possible to notify to the outside that the control has been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the processing related to the setting change has been executed). Further, with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal output from the seventh terminal is temporarily turned off, and then stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 from the same seventh terminal. Since the number of pulse-like setting change correspondence signals corresponding to the current setting value is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (1), when the mode shifts to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, a setting corresponding change signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, from the tenth terminal. Outputs a security signal. Then, based on the execution of the RAM clear, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off with the end of the setting change mode.

  As shown in FIG. 11-40 (2), when the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, a setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Is output. Then, based on the fact that the RAM clear is not executed, the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are simultaneously turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode. Here, if the RAM clear is executed after the power is turned on and the control mode is set to the setting confirmation mode (NO in step S21TM1320 or NO in step S21TM1330), the example shown in FIG. Similarly to the case described above, the security signal is kept ON for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned OFF with the end of the setting confirmation mode.

  When the RAM is cleared without shifting to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds from the time when the power is turned on. Does not turn on.

  As described above, the security signal is also in the ON state while being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, even when the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and is configured not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, at least the external device is configured to perform the processing based on the input of the security signal. Thus, it is possible to recognize that control may be performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  The setting change corresponding signal is turned off when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, but the security signal is not changed in the setting change mode (or the parity in the setting confirmation mode) based on the execution of the RAM clear. It remains ON for 30 seconds after the check is completed (if the result of the check is not normal). On the other hand, when the RAM is cleared without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds from when the power is turned on. Therefore, on the external device side to which the security signal is input, when the input period of the security signal is about 30 seconds, the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to recognize that there is a possibility. On the other hand, when the input period of the security signal exceeds 30 seconds, it is possible to recognize that the control may be performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the input period of the security signal reaches 30 seconds. If not, it is possible to recognize that the RAM clear may not have been executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode. In other words, when the input period of the security signal is about 30 seconds, it is determined that the RAM clear may have been executed without being controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. When the security signal can be recognized by the device and the input period of the security signal is shorter than 30 seconds, the management device can recognize that the setting may be temporarily controlled to the setting confirmation mode. If the period exceeds 30 seconds, the management apparatus can recognize that the setting change mode may have been controlled. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish what control the gaming machine has executed on the outside based on the output period of the security signal of the gaming machine.

  Therefore, even when the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and is configured not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, at least the external device is configured to perform the processing based on the input of the security signal. Thus, the possibility of executing the RAM clear and the possibility of being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be distinguished and recognized.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (3), a configuration in which a security signal is not output during a period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled may be adopted. This configuration includes a configuration in which the security signal is output during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, and a configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Does not output the security signal and does not output the security signal even during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Specifically, when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, a setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, but no security signal is output from the tenth terminal. When the setting change corresponding signal is turned off with the end of the setting check mode, the OFF state of the security signal is maintained based on the fact that the RAM is not cleared. That is, when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is not output on condition that the RAM clear is not executed.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period in which the setting control mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the power is turned on and the control mode is controlled to the setting check mode, as shown in FIG. In this case (NO in step S21TM1320 or NO in step S21TM1330), the security signal is ON for 30 seconds from the end of the setting confirmation mode (OFF state of the setting change corresponding signal).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (4), a configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled may be adopted. That is, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, but the security signal is not output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the fact that the RAM has been cleared with the end of the setting change mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off. In the configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, when the RAM is cleared without shifting to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on. The security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on, but the setting change corresponding signal is not turned on.

  As described above, while the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled, the setting change corresponding signal is set to the ON state, while the security signal is set to the OFF state. By turning on the security signal for 30 seconds after the setting check mode ends (after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off), when one signal is on, the other signal is turned off. Relationship. Due to such a relationship, the signal output control is simplified (the output control is simplified because both signals are not turned on at the same time), and the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is clarified in the external device. , And clearly recognize that the initialization process has been executed upon termination of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (6), when the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300, the game is started from the second terminal. A machine frame / door frame open signal is output, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the fact that the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is completed with the closing of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, Even after the machine frame / door frame open signal is turned off, the security signal is kept on for 30 seconds.

  Here, in the example of the pattern 1 shown in FIG. 11-39 (1), the setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal, and the security signal is output from the tenth terminal. There is a case where it is difficult to assign an output terminal dedicated to the setting change correspondence signal due to restrictions on the assignment of the setting change correspondence signal. The example of the pattern 2 shown in FIG. 11-39 (2) shows an example in which the setting change corresponding signal is also output from the tenth terminal from which the security signal is output.

  In the pattern 2, the first to sixth terminals, the eighth terminal, and the ninth terminal are the same as in the signal assignment in the pattern 1. In pattern 2, unlike pattern 1, a high base signal is output from the seventh terminal. The high base signal is turned on when being controlled to the high base state. A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that is turned ON for 30 seconds when an initialization process (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is executed when the power is turned on. In addition, when an injustice is detected, it is turned on for 4 minutes. In the case where the misconduct is detected, for example, a case where an abnormal prize is generated is included, and an abnormal frequency is displayed in each of the winning ports (for example, a game ball is frequently transmitted to the first starting prize port at a frequency of 15 times or more per 30 seconds). An abnormal winning is determined based on the fact that the gaming ball has won in the case of winning). In addition, the case where the switch abnormality detection occurs is included, and the period in which the switch corresponding to each winning opening is in the winning detection state is abnormal (for example, the game control timer interrupt processing is performed ten times or more in succession). (1 When the start port switch is in the ON state, etc.), it is determined that the switch is abnormal. When the magnetic sensor detects abnormal magnetism, based on the occurrence of the game stop target error, the ON state continues until the power is turned off, and when the abnormal magnetism is no longer detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is cleared), it is ON for 4 minutes.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 11-39 (2), a setting change corresponding signal is output from the tenth terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is a signal that is turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode and is also turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode. The setting change corresponding signal can be output in a pulse form (special mode) after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, as will be described later. It is possible. Therefore, a security signal and a setting change correspondence signal are output from the tenth terminal. That is, the security signal and the setting change correspondence signal are output from the common terminal.

  As described above, since the security signal and the setting change correspondence signal can be output from the tenth terminal, it is possible to notify the possibility that an illegal act has been performed to the outside, and to provide an output terminal dedicated to the setting change correspondence signal. Without this, it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been controlled (that there is a possibility that a process related to the setting change has been executed). Further, with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal output from the tenth terminal is temporarily turned OFF (when the RAM clear is executed, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is disabled). After 30 seconds from the end, the signal output from the tenth terminal is turned off), and thereafter, from the same tenth terminal, the number of pulse-shaped pulses corresponding to the current set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 Since the setting change corresponding signal is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside. Since the setting change corresponding signal is transmitted to the management device together with the game machine number (vehicle number) via the relay device provided on the gaming machine island, the management device sets the set value based on the machine number and the setting change corresponding signal. By displaying the set value and the predetermined set value in association with each other, it is possible to perform a process of displaying the set value in a comparable manner. As a result, the actual setting values of the plurality of gaming machines can be easily managed by the manager of the game arcade via the management device, and the setting values determined in advance by the manager and the setting values changed in the setting change work. The administrator can grasp the inconsistency with the value. Then, when such inconsistency has occurred, by performing setting confirmation or re-setting change work for the gaming machine, it is possible to achieve appropriate management of settings for a plurality of gaming machines in the amusement store. it can.

  As described above, the setting change correspondence signal is temporarily turned off with the end of the setting change mode and the end of the setting confirmation mode, but thereafter, the signal corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 Output in a special manner. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-41, a pulse corresponding to the set value is output as the setting change corresponding signal in the special mode. In this example, the same pulses as the number of set values are output. The pulse width is, for example, 0.1 second. For example, when the set value is 3, a pulse having a width of 0.1 second is output three times at predetermined intervals (for example, 0.5 second intervals). This makes it possible to easily specify the set value of each gaming machine in an external device such as a hall computer.

  As shown in FIG. 11-42 (1), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on when the power is turned on and the setting change mode is controlled. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the setting change mode ends without the setting value being changed. With the end of the setting change mode, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off. Is output as one pulse.

  As described above, it is possible to notify the outside whether or not the setting change mode is controlled by the setting change corresponding signal, and to set the value at the end of the setting change mode (when the setting value is changed, (A set value after change) can be notified to the outside, and a signal for notifying whether or not the mode is controlled to the setting change mode and a signal for notifying the set value are output from a common information output terminal. Becomes possible.

  Further, in the present embodiment, not only when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are ended, but also at predetermined predetermined timings, a number of pulses corresponding to the set value are output as a special mode setting change corresponding signal. You. Specifically, events related to the gaming state, such as being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, ending the jackpot gaming state, ending the high base state, and increasing the number of paid prize balls by 1000. In addition, when an event related to a gaming machine error such as detection of the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, detection of the opening of the glass door frame 3 a, detection of a magnetic abnormality, etc. (When it occurs), and outputs a special mode setting change corresponding signal corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. In the example shown in FIG. 11-42 (1), one pulse is output as a special mode setting change corresponding signal in response to the occurrence of a big hit.

  Thereby, in the external device, it is possible to secure an opportunity to grasp the setting value of each gaming machine. Even if the set value cannot be specified on the side, the set value can be specified at a predetermined subsequent timing, and the prevention of improper change of the set value by an inappropriate method can be enhanced.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 11-42 (2), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on in accordance with the control to the setting change mode when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 has been changed from 1 to 3 as a result of the change of the set value in the setting change mode. In this case, with the end of the setting change mode, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off, and based on the fact that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 has become 3, Three pulses are output as a signal. In the example shown in FIG. 11-42 (2), a pulse of 3 is output as a special mode setting change corresponding signal when a big hit occurs.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (1), the operation of changing the set value (the operation of the setting changeover switch 21TM052) was not performed while being controlled in the setting change mode, and the set value was not changed. In the case and as shown in FIG. 11-41 (2), an operation of changing the set value (operation of the setting changeover switch 21TM052) is performed while being controlled in the setting change mode, and the set value is changed. In either case, after the setting change mode ends, a pulse-like setting change corresponding signal corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is output. I have. As described above, when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the common signal output processing is executed at the end of the setting change mode regardless of whether the setting change operation or the setting value is actually changed. Thus, the signal output processing can be simplified.

  In the example shown in FIG. 11-42 (3), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on in accordance with the control to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. In the setting confirmation mode, since the setting value is not changed, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 remains unchanged at 1. In this case, with the end of the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off, and based on the fact that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is 1, the setting change corresponding signal is turned off. Is output as one pulse. In the example shown in FIG. 11-42 (3), one pulse is output as a setting change correspondence signal in a special mode triggered by the occurrence of a big hit.

  As described above, it is possible to notify to the outside whether or not the control mode is set to the setting check mode by the setting change corresponding signal, and to set values notified in the setting check mode (setting values stored in the RAM 102 when the power is turned on). A setting value stored in the area, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) can be notified to the outside, and a signal notifying whether or not the control is in the setting confirmation mode, and a setting value Can be output from a common information output terminal.

  In the information terminal assignment pattern 2 shown in FIG. 11-39 (2) described above, when the RAM clear is executed following the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the signal output from the tenth terminal is output. After the elapse of 30 seconds from the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the state is turned off, and thereafter, from the same tenth terminal, a pulse number (special mode) corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 ) Is output.

(Modification of the game control main process)
Next, another embodiment related to the game control main process of FIGS. 11-11 to 11-13 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-43 and 11-44. FIGS. 11-11 to 11-13 show an example in which the initialization process (RAM clear) is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 11-44, after the initialization process (RAM clear) is executed, the mode may be shifted to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 11-11, when the CPU 103 sets the RAM 102 to an accessible state (step S21TM1060), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM2110 in FIG. The state of the output signal (clear signal) of the switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is confirmed (step S21TM2110).

  When the ON state is detected in checking the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM2110), the CPU 103 sets the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. A RAM clear flag indicating that the operation has been performed is set (step S21TM2210), and an initialization process is executed (step S21TM2220). A series of processes involved in the initialization process (the processes shown in steps S21TM2220 to S21TM2270) are the same as the processes shown in steps S21TM1410 to S21TM1460 shown in FIGS.

  On the other hand, in the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 in step S21TM2110, if the OFF state is detected (NO in step S21TM2110), the CPU 103 executes the processing of step S21TM2120 and thereafter. I do. The processing shown in step S21TM2120 to step S2170 is the same as the processing shown in step S21TM1230 to step S21TM1370 shown in FIG.

  Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the lock switch 21TM051 is ON after transmitting the backup command at the time of power-off restoration in step S21TM2170 or transmitting the initialization command at power-on in step S21TM2270. (Step S21TM2310 in FIG. 11-44). If the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM2310; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM2550. If lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM2310; YES), CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag has been set, that is, whether or not clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 has been operated at power-on. Is confirmed (step S21TM2320).

  If the RAM clear flag is set, that is, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 sets the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed. (Steps S21TM2330 to S21TM2400). That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The processing state is controlled to the setting change mode on the basis of the presence. The processing shown in steps S21TM2330 to S21TM2400 related to the setting change mode is the same as the processing shown in steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200 in FIG. After executing the processing of step S21TM2400, the set RAM clear flag is deleted (step S21TM2410), and the flow advances to step S21TM2550.

  If the RAM clear flag has not been set, that is, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has not been operated when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 checks the setting to confirm the setting value. The mode is shifted (step S21TM2510 to step S21TM2540). That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, but does not satisfy the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Based on this, the processing state is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. The processing shown in steps S21TM2510 to S21TM2540 related to the setting confirmation mode is the same as the processing shown in steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240 in FIG. Then, in step S21TM2540, when it is confirmed that lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off (YES in step S21TM2540), the flow proceeds to step S21TM2550.

  Here, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on, it is temporarily determined to be NO in step S21TM2120 or step S21TM2130 in FIG. Is executed, the RAM clear flag is not set. As a result, NO is determined in step S21TM2320, and the mode is not shifted to the setting change mode. As described above, even when the initialization process (initialization of the game state by clearing the RAM) is executed, when the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on is not satisfied. Is not controlled in the setting change mode.

  After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, or when the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state when the power is turned on, a series of processes related to Steps S21TM2550 to S21TM2620 are performed in Steps S21TM1470 to S21TM1470 shown in FIG. This is the same as the series of processing shown in step S21TM1540, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 11-43 and 11-44, when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the CPU 103 transmits the power-on initialization command (step S21TM2270), and then transmits the setting change mode command (step S21TM2340). ) Is transmitted, and a setting command is transmitted (step S21TM2550). When the CPU 103 is controlled to be in the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 transmits a backup command at the time of power-off recovery or an initialization command at the time of power-on (step S21TM2170 or step S21TM2270), and then transmits a setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM2170). S21TM2520), and transmits a setting command (step S21TM2550). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting command after receiving the setting change mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp, and the like. 9 can notify the end of the setting change mode. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting command after receiving the setting confirmation mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp, and the like. 9 can notify the end of the setting confirmation mode. According to such a configuration, without providing a dedicated command (setting change mode end command or setting check mode end command) for designating that the setting change mode or the setting check mode has ended, the setting command can be received. Since it is possible for the effect control CPU 120 to specify that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended, the number of commands can be reduced. That is, the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 can be reduced, and the capacity for storing the number of commands can be suppressed.

(Other Modifications of Feature 21TM)
In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the switch for changing the set value is common to the clear switch for initializing the game machine (RAM clear) is not limited to such a form. Is provided on the main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100 can detect the operation), and is different from a clear switch for initializing the game machine (RAM clearing). It may be. With this configuration, the position of the switch for switching the set value and the position of the display monitor 21TM029 (the first display unit 21TM029A) are different from the case where the switch for switching the set value is provided on the power supply board. Is closer, when changing the set value, it is easy to check the set value and to perform a switching operation in accordance with the check of the set value, thereby improving workability.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the set value is displayed in the partial display area (first display unit 21TM029A) of the display monitor 21TM029 on which the game information such as the totaled base is displayed is described. The present invention is not limited to such a form, and is a display device different from the display monitor 21TM029 on which the aggregated game state is displayed, for example, a dedicated display device for displaying set values, and is provided on the main board 11. The set value may be displayed on a 7-segment display or the like. According to such a configuration, the aggregated game information and the set value can be individually and more clearly grasped, so that the work of changing the set value according to the aggregated game information can be easily performed. Therefore, workability can be improved.

  Further, a configuration may be employed in which a clear switch for initializing the gaming machine (RAM clear) is provided, but a switch for changing the set value is not provided. In such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 automatically changes the set values to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (the first display unit 21TM029A) in sequence while being controlled to the setting change mode (for example, 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 every 5 seconds) and when the lock switch 21TM051 changes from the ON state to the OFF state, it is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A). The set value (the set value stored in the set information temporary storage area) is stored in the set value storage area (the set value stored in the set value storage area is stored in the set information temporary storage area). The set value may be determined by overwriting the set value. The store clerk at the game hall switches the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state at the time when the set value to be determined is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A), and the value is displayed at that time. The set value can be determined as the set value of the gaming machine.

  In the above embodiment, the example has been described in which the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 1 that pays out a predetermined number of game media to the upper plate or the lower plate based on the occurrence of a prize, but is not limited to such a form. An enclosed gaming machine may be one in which a gaming medium is sealed in a gaming machine and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. In the enclosed gaming machine, the information periodically transmitted from the main board 11 to the card unit 21TM050 via the payout control board 21TM037 may include information regarding the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, For example, being controlled by the setting change mode, being controlled by the setting confirmation mode, being within the period controlled by the setting change mode, being within the period being controlled by the setting confirmation mode, May be included, indicating that an operation for changing the setting has been performed, that the setting change mode has ended, that the setting confirmation mode has ended, and the like. Further, the information may be transmitted from the information output circuit 112 to a management device such as a hall computer or the like, and the hall computer may be able to specify that each gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. .

  In the above embodiment, the image display device 5 or the like connected to the effect control board 12 is within the period of being controlled to the setting change mode, being within the period of being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the like. Is shown, but the game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a form, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4A, The symbol display device 4B, the ordinary symbol display 20, or the like may notify that the control is being performed in the setting change mode (for example, the seven-segment display may emit light in the first notification mode). Is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the ordinary symbol display device 20, etc. Notification (for example, emit light to a different second notification manner from the first notification manner the 7-segment display) may be. Further, a display (number of rounds display) for displaying the number of rounds during the big hit game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 or an instruction for the player to launch a game ball in a specific area of the game area (for example, the right game area). When a display (right-handed display) or the like is provided, the display indicates that the process of the setting change mode is being executed and that the process of the setting confirmation mode is being executed. The light may be emitted in the embodiment.

  In the above embodiment, when the security signal is turned on when the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the security is changed. An example is shown in which the security signal is continuously turned ON for 30 seconds after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode without the signal being turned OFF. Alternatively, when the security signal is turned on when the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and then the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated. Accordingly, the security signal is temporarily turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then the security signal is turned off. Utility signal specified period (e.g., 30 seconds) may be turned ON. With such a signal output method, it is possible to clearly specify the period during which the apparatus is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in an external device such as a hall computer, and to clearly indicate that the RAM clear has been executed. Can be specified.

  Regarding the expected effect suggestion effect shown in FIG. 10-5, each effect mode (black star) is set according to the set value of the gaming machine (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) and the big hit expectation. May be changed. For example, even when the jackpot expectation degree is low, if the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high (for example, 5 or 6), if the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is low (for example, (In the case of 1 or 2), an expectation degree suggestion effect in which the number of black stars is 3 or more may be executed at a higher rate. With such an effect configuration, even when the display result is lost, the expected value indicating that the number of black stars is 3 or more is executed, so that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high. Can be expected from the player, and the player can pay attention to the effect mode (the number of black stars) when the effect indicating the degree of expectation is executed. In addition, even when the reach of the jackpot is low, the expectation effect with a large number of black stars (for example, 3 or more) is executed, so that the player can use the pachinko gaming machine 1 Since it can be expected that the set value is high, the interest can be improved even when the jackpot expectation degree is low.

  In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine. If the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, Other inventions can be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.). In such a slot machine, the rate at which the bonus is established differs according to the set value, and the set value can be changed by controlling the slot machine to the setting change mode. It can be confirmed.

[Details and other forms regarding the feature portion 21TM]
Next, details and other aspects of the above-described feature portion 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a gaming machine frame. The gaming machine frame includes a gaming machine frame 3, a glass door frame 3a, and an outer frame (not shown). Further, the gaming machine frame has a hinge mechanism (not shown) at one end in the left-right direction (for example, the left side as viewed from the player), and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a each support the hinge mechanism. The other end in the left-right direction (for example, the right side as viewed from the player) is rotatably connected in a direction away from the outer frame. By rotating the glass door frame 3a like a door with the hinge mechanism as a fulcrum, the inner part of the outer frame including the game area of the game board 2 can be opened. A lock mechanism for fixing the other end of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a to the outer frame is provided on the other end side (for example, on the right side when viewed from a player).

  The outer frame is made of metal and is an outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is a frame made of a synthetic resin to which the gaming board 2 is attached, and has a substantially rectangular frame shape whose center is penetrated when viewed from the front. The gaming board 2 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 from the front. The game board 2 attached to the game machine frame 3 is locked by the fixing device so as not to come off the game machine frame 3. The gaming machine frame 3 is a frame in which the speakers 8L and 8R, the gaming effect lamp 9, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, and the like are provided. The glass door frame 3a is provided with a glass plate (corresponding to a window portion) as a see-through window that protects a game board surface and allows a game area on the front of the game board 2 to be visually recognized.

  When a store clerk at a game arcade performs maintenance on a game board surface (for example, measures to eliminate clogged balls), the glass door frame 3a is hinged from the closed state where the other end is fixed (locked) to the outer frame. It is necessary to open the other end side away from the outer frame by rotating the mechanism part (one end side) to the near side like a door with the fulcrum as a fulcrum. In order for a store clerk at the game arcade to operate the power switch 21TM055, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the display changeover switch 21TM030, and the like disposed on the back side of the game board 2, the display monitor 21TM029 is visually recognized. By rotating the gaming machine frame 3 from the closed state in which the other end side is fixed (locked) to the outer frame, the hinge mechanism portion (one end side) is pivoted toward the front side like a door by using the hinge mechanism (one end side) as a fulcrum. It is necessary to open the other end side away from the outer frame.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can specify a detection signal capable of specifying that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, a detection signal that can specify that the glass door frame 3a is open is output to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. On the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be distinguished and recognized.

(Process at power-on)
12-1 and FIG. 12-2 are diagrams illustrating an example of processing executed in the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, and FIG. 11-11 to FIG. This is processing corresponding to the processing shown in FIGS. 11-11 and 11-43 to 11-44. However, among the processes shown in FIGS. 11-11 and the like, some processes (for example, the processes shown in FIGS. 11-11) are not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 12A, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM3010). This process is similar to the process shown in step S21TM1330 in FIG. 11-13 and step S21TM2130 in FIG. 11-43, and performs a parity check as a data check.

  If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), CPU 103 checks whether or not the setting change flag is set (step S21TM3020). The setting change flag is set when the process proceeds to a setting change / confirmation process described later (step S21TM3510), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (step S21TM3710).

  If the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM3020), the CPU 103 matches the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 with a regular value, for example, any one of 1 to 6. It is confirmed whether or not this is the case (step S21TM3030). Here, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shipped from the gaming machine maker (before being installed in the game arcade), a value (for example, 0) different from the above-mentioned regular value is stored in the set value storage area. May be. When the data in the setting value storage area is broken, the data may not be a regular value. If the set value is a regular value (YES in step S21TM3030), it is checked whether the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM3040).

  If clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM3040), CPU 103 clears the area excluding the setting value storage area and sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM3050). In the RAM clear processing in step S21TM3050, the data (special symbol process flag, probable change flag, time reduction flag, and the like) indicating the game state before the power supply stop stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the initial value is set. Is set, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared, and is not changed before the RAM clear processing. In addition, the area in which the tally values (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base are stored for each set value is not cleared, and the tally for each of these set values is not cleared. The value is not changed before the RAM clear processing. Then, the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to notify that the gaming state has been initialized. The notification that the gaming state has been initialized may be performed before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and as described above, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. It may be performed.

  Next, CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that the initialization processing has been performed (step S21TM3055), and proceeds to step S21TM3060. The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the initialization process has been performed based on the reception of the initialization command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the effect control device 120 may notify that the game state or the like has been initialized in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. It is possible.

  On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3040), the CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command for restoration) as a command for restoration of power supply (step S21TM3045). The process moves to step S21TM3060. The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the power supply has been restored based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply based on the reception of the backup command (command at the time of restoration). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, and the like, the power supply is restored from the power cutoff based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply. It is possible to notify that.

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM3060). Here, as described above, the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300. A detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected are output from the sensor 21TM300 to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, When recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, the game control microcomputer 100 notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  In addition, a detection signal indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected and the open state of the glass door frame 3a have been detected from the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 to the game control microcomputer 100. If the configuration is such that a detection signal indicating that the game control has been output (that is, the game control microcomputer 100 includes the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300), the game control microcomputer 100 By the input of the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3060), it checks whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM3070). . Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3070), the flow shifts to the processing after step S21TM3510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. When the mode shifts to the setting change mode, the setting value can be checked and changed. When the mode shifts to the setting checking mode, the setting value can be checked.

  That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), no power interruption has occurred during the setting change (NO in step S21TM3020), and the set value is a regular value (step S21TM3020). The setting value is changed and / or changed on condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM3060) and the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM3070). Confirmation becomes possible, and the process proceeds to the normal game process on condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM3060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3070). .

  In the present embodiment, although the change of the set value is not permitted, in order to set the state in which the set value can be checked (setting check mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open, 2) Two conditions that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON are required. When the CPU 103 confirms that both of the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied by the determination processing of step S21TM3060 and step S21TM3070, the CPU 103 can confirm the setting value (setting confirmation). Mode). Further, in addition to the conditions (1) and (2), (3) in step S21TM3040, on condition that it is determined that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES), As described later, it is possible to shift to a state in which the set value can be changed (setting change mode).

  As described above, the lock switch 21TM051, which must be operated to confirm or change the set value, is provided on the back side of the gaming board 2, and must be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. Can not. If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, it means that there is an abnormality in the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 or there is some illegal There is a possibility that confirmation or change of the set value is going to be performed by means. In such a state, it is inappropriate to allow the confirmation or change of the set value. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in the setting confirmation mode. And the setting change mode is not controlled.

  In this embodiment, when one of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a is in the open state as the condition (1), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although the control is possible, the present invention is not limited to this mode. Even if the glass door frame 3a is open, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not open, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode May not be controlled.

  On the other hand, when the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM3060 (NO in step S21TM3060), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are not recognized. If it is in the closed state, the process proceeds to the normal game process. If it is confirmed in step S21TM3070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3070), the flow shifts to a normal game process. With the transition to the normal game processing, processing corresponding to step S21TM1470 to step S21TM1540 shown in FIG. 11-13 or step S21TM2550 to step S21TM2620 shown in FIG. 11-44 can be executed. The indicated game control timer interrupt process can be executed (special symbol process process and the like can be executed).

  In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM3010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM3010), the CPU 103 determines that the set value stored in the set value storage area may be abnormal. The set value abnormality error command shown is transmitted to effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). Here, even if regular values (1 to 6) are stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is broken, step S21TM3110 is executed, and The CPU 103 and the effect control CPU 120 recognize that the value stored in the setting value storage area may be inappropriate.

  If it is confirmed in step S21TM3020 that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM3020), CPU 103 transmits a setting value abnormality error command to effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). ).

  Also, in step S21TM3030, if the normal values (1 to 6) are not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM3030), CPU 103 stores 0 in the set value storage area (step S21TM3100). ), And transmits a set value abnormality error command to effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM3010), even if the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), if the set value storage area does not store the normal values (1 to 6), , 0 is set as the set value, and the set value error command is transmitted.

  Upon receiving the setting value error command, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the setting value may be abnormal (for example, a message “Setting value is abnormal” is displayed. Do). Further, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the setting value should be changed (for example, a message “Please change the setting value” is displayed). The speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R may notify that the set value may be abnormal (for example, output a sound “the set value is abnormal.”), And change the set value. It may be informed that the state is to be changed (for example, a sound such as “Please change the set value” is output).

  Upon transmitting the set value abnormality error command, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM3120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3120), it checks whether the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM3130). .

  If lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM3130), CPU 103 checks whether clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (step S21TM3140).

  If clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM3140), CPU 103 clears the area including the set value storage area and sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM3150). In the RAM clearing process in step S21TM3150, the data (the special symbol process flag, the probable change flag, the time reduction flag, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped, which is stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102, is cleared and initialized. Is set, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is also cleared, and 0 is stored in the set value storage area. On the other hand, for each set value, the area in which each total value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base is stored is not cleared. The tally value is not changed before the RAM clear processing. Then, the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to notify that the gaming state has been initialized.

  Then, after executing the RAM clear (step S21TM3150), the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command (step S21TM3160), and processes from step S21TM3510 and subsequent steps related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. Move to The backup command (step S21TM3045) at the time of power-off recovery and the initialization command (step S21TM3055 or step S21TM3160) at the time of power-on are commands transmitted only once at the time of power-on. Therefore, when transmitting these power-on commands, the CPU 103 can specify that the power-on command has been transmitted, and set a command transmission flag that does not require backup storage at power-off. Alternatively, the command transmission flag may be cleared when shifting to the normal game process (from step S21TM1470). Then, only when the command transmission flag is not set, a backup command at the time of power-off restoration (step S21TM3045) and an initialization command at the time of power-on (step S21TM3055 or step S21TM3160) may be transmitted.

  On the other hand, when the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM3120 (NO in step S21TM3120), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are not recognized. If it is in the closed state, the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200). If it is confirmed in step S21TM3130 that lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3130), the process is not executed until power is turned off (step S21TM3200). If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3140), the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200).

  That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM3010), the power is cut off during the setting change (that is, the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, If the answer is YES in step S21TM3020) or if the set value is not a regular value (NO in step S21TM3030), the game should not be performed in this state, Before shifting to the normal game process, the set value in the set value storage area needs to be fixed to a regular value. Therefore, the area including the set value storage area is cleared by RAM clear (step S21TM3150), and the mode is shifted to the setting change mode.

  In the present embodiment, in order to change the setting value (setting change mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, (3) The three conditions that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state are required. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied by the determination processing of step S21TM3120, step S21TM3130, and step S21TM3140, the CPU 103 can change the set value ( (Setting change mode).

  If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value of the set value storage area can be fixed to a normal value. Therefore, it is not possible to shift to the normal game processing. Therefore, in the case where NO is determined in any of the determination processes of step S21TM3120, step S21TM3130, and step S21TM3140, the power is turned off once and (1) to (3) at the time of next power-on. Are satisfied, the mode is shifted to the setting change mode, and the set value of the set value storage area is fixed to the normal value.

  When any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 transmits a command for notifying that the power should be turned off to the effect control CPU 120. You may do it. Then, the effect control CPU 120 that has received this command may display a message (for example, the characters “Please turn off the power.”) On the image display device 5 to prompt the user to turn off the power. . If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 sets the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B in advance. The light may be emitted in the power-off instruction mode to urge the user to turn off the power.

  Next, processing related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIG. In the process of FIG. 12B, the CPU 103 sets a setting change in-progress flag indicating that the setting value may be changed (step S21TM3510). Since the area storing the value of the setting change flag is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting change flag is retained even when the power is turned off.

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM3520). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3520), it checks whether the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (step S21TM3530). . If lock switch 21TM051 is ON (NO in step S21TM3530), CPU 103 outputs a setting change correspondence signal and a security signal (step S21TM3540), and displays the set value stored in the set value storage area. It is displayed on the monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM3550).

  Further, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM3570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3570), that is, if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has not been executed, the CPU 103 sets the setting confirmation mode to specify that it has been controlled to the setting confirmation mode. A command is transmitted (step S21TM3580), and the flow shifts to step S21TM3520. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM3570), that is, if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has been executed, the CPU 103 sets A change mode command is transmitted (step S21TM3585), and it is confirmed whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM3590). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is being controlled to the setting change mode.

  If setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has not been operated (NO in step S21TM3590), CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM3520. When setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM3590), CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of RAM 102 (step S21TM3600), and proceeds to step S21TM3520. Transition.

  Here, the output of the security signal (step S21TM3540), the display of the current setting value (step S3550), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM3580) can be executed, but the transmission of the setting change mode command (step S21TM3585). ) And a state in which the setting value cannot be updated (step S21TM3600) correspond to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed or the setting value cannot be changed. That is, in the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (NO in step S21TM3530), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF (NO in step S21TM3040, and the RAM clear flag is determined). Is kept 0).

  In addition, it is possible to output a security signal (step S21TM3540) and display the current setting value (step S3550), and transmit a setting change mode command (step S21TM3585) and update the setting value (step S21TM3600). This state corresponds to a setting change mode in which setting values can be checked and changed. That is, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (NO in step S21TM3530), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM3040 or step S21TM3140). (The RAM clear flag is set to 1).

  The setting confirmation mode command is a command transmitted only once during the setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when transmitting the setting confirmation mode command, the CPU 103 can specify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted, and sets a setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. The setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM3710). The setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command transmitted only once during the setting change mode control. Therefore, when transmitting the setting change mode command, the CPU 103 can specify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted, and sets a setting change mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. Alternatively, the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM3710). The setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

  In step S21TM3530, if lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (YES in step S21TM3530), CPU 103 clears the setting change flag (step S21TM3710). Here, when the setting change in progress flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting change in progress flag is not set (NO) in the processing of step S21TM3020 executed thereafter, so that it is possible to shift to the normal game processing. Become.

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting command for specifying the set value stored in the set value storage area to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3720). As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Further, by executing an effect corresponding to the setting value specified by the setting command, the setting value can be suggested. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state ends according to the specified set value.

  Next, the CPU 103 deletes the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM3730), and checks whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM3740).

  Here, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3740) indicates that the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), and that power is cut off during the setting change. Is not present (NO in step S21TM3020), and the set value is determined to be a regular value (YES in step S21TM3030), and furthermore, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (step S21TM3040). NO), that means that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050) has not been executed, so that it is sufficient to execute the normal processing at the time of power restoration, and both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. (Step S21TM3060 When the NO) has been confirmed, it may be shifted to the normal game processing.

  On the other hand, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM3740) means that the RAM has been cleared in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150, and the lock switch 21TM051 is temporarily turned off. Before (before YES is determined in step S21TM3530), if the regular set values (1 to 6) are not stored in the set value storage area (for example, in the setting change mode, the set value remains 0). When the operation of changing the set value is not performed (for example, when the operation of changing the set value is not performed), it is necessary to shift to the setting change mode and store the regular set values (1 to 6) in the set value storage area. Therefore, the CPU 103 shifts to the power-on process again, and executes the processes after step S21TM3010.

  As described above, the clerk at the game hall or the like sets the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. In addition to being able to control, it is possible to initialize the game state and the like (to execute the RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). Further, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming state and the like can be controlled. Can be initialized (that is, the determination in step S21TM3040 or step S21TM3140 is NO and the RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 is not executed). In this way, the clerk at the game hall can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the gaming state or the like. I have.

  In the control shown in FIG. 12-2, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off (NO in step S21TM3530) in the state where the lock switch 21TM051 is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming machine frame 3 and When all of the glass door frames 3a are closed, NO is determined in step S21TM3520, and the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in a state of waiting for being opened. At this time, the game control microcomputer 100 instructs to notify that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a should be opened, and operates the lock switch 21TM051 to change the setting mode or confirm the setting. A command instructing that the mode should be ended may be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 that receives these commands notifies the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R that the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a should be opened, and sets the lock switch 21TM051. The user is notified to end the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. For example, a message such as "Please open the gaming machine frame 3 and turn off the lock switch 21TM051 to end the setting change mode" may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the process proceeds to the normal game process, when both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 Is operated (changed from the OFF state to the ON state), a lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120, and (2) a setting changeover switch ( When the (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (changed from the OFF state to the ON state), a setting change switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120. Become.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 11-38 (2), the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120) performs the setting based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command. Even though neither the change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, it is possible to specify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed, and to notify that fact. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the character “operation of the lock switch has been detected.” In addition, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the text “Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected” is executed. As a result, the store clerk at the amusement arcade clearly understands that an operation for changing the set value has been performed even though the control is not performed in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and Can be confirmed.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a mode, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and shifts to the normal game process, whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is operated, and The lock switch operation command and the setting switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. As described above, during the period in which the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not checked. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the game control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 12C is an explanatory diagram illustrating a change in the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. When the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed in step S21TM3550. At this time, if a value different from the normal value (0 in this example) is stored in the set value storage area, the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029 is displayed as shown in FIG. Indicates the letter "E". Therefore, the clerk of the game hall operates at least the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (performs the setting change operation), knowing that at least the regular value is not stored in the set value storage area.

  Each time a store clerk at the game hall operates the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM3590), the set value stored in the set value storage area is updated (step S21TM3600). In this example, for the sake of explanation, an example is shown in which the normal set value is in the range of 1 to 3, and in this case, the set value stored in the set value storage area is 0 for each setting change operation. Information is updated in the order of → 1 → 2 → 3 → 1, and accordingly, the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is updated in the order of E → 1 → 2 → 3 → 1.

  As described above, when the value stored in the setting value storage area is not a regular value, information (a letter E in this example) different from a number is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as information corresponding to the value. Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to clearly understand that a value different from the regular value is stored in the setting value storage area, and to prompt a setting change operation. If a value (0 in this example) different from the regular value is stored in the set value storage area, if the value (0 in this example) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, the administrator of the game arcade May misunderstand that the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 corresponds to one of the regular values, and may turn off the lock switch 21TM051 without performing the setting change operation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a value different from the regular value is stored in the set value storage area, information (a letter E in this example) different from a number is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. In order to prevent such misunderstanding, the setting change operation is surely performed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (1), if a value different from a regular value (0 in this example) is initially stored in the set value storage area when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, The character "E" is displayed on the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029. After that, if a setting change operation is performed even once and a normal value is stored in the setting value storage area, Regardless of how many times the setting change operation is performed, during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled (until the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off), the setting value is updated within the range of the regular setting value. This is performed, and a value (0 in this example) different from the normal value is not stored in the set value storage area, and information (a character E in this example) different from the normal value is also displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. ) Is not displayed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (2), when the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is a normal value when the setting change mode is controlled, the process proceeds to step S21TM3550. Thus, the regular set value (2 in this example) stored in the set value storage area is displayed. In this example, for the purpose of explanation, an example is shown in which the normal set value is in the range of 1 to 3, and in this case, the set value stored in the set value storage area is 2 for each setting change operation. The information is updated in the order of → 3 → 1 → 2 → 3, and accordingly, the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is updated in the order of 2 → 3 → 1 → 2 → 3.

  That is, if the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is initially a normal value when the setting change mode is controlled, no matter how many times the setting change operation is performed thereafter, During the period in which the setting change mode is controlled (until the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off), the setting value is updated within the range of the regular setting value, and the regular value is stored in the setting value storage area. A different value (0 in this example) is not stored, and information (a character of E in this example) different from the normal value is not displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

  For example, when the gaming machine maker ships the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installing the gaming machine), a value (0 in this example) different from a regular value is set in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102. Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on thereafter, if the set value is not changed to a regular value via the setting change mode when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the game with the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be performed. become unable. Thereby, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, the setting change operation can be reliably performed, and the set value can be determined to a regular value.

  Also, when the gaming machine maker ships the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installing the gaming machine), the setting changing flag is set in advance, and thereafter, the gaming machine side goes through the setting changing mode. Unless the set value is changed to a regular value and the setting change mode is not ended, it becomes impossible to cause the pachinko gaming machine 1 to play a game. Thereby, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, the setting change operation can be reliably performed, and the set value can be determined to a regular value.

(Restriction of ball lending based on detection of open state of gaming machine frame or glass door frame)
Next, a ball lending restriction method when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened and the glass door frame 3a is opened will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 12-4. FIG. 12-4 shows the main board 11 when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is a timing diagram for explaining the communication processing performed between the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050.

  In the example of FIG. 12-4, based on the fact that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, The PRDY signal is not turned on. When the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (ie, the state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (ie, the game control microcomputer). Even when the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the CPU 103 does not turn the PRDY signal on, but turns it off.

  As a result, while the card is received in the card unit 21TM050, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and a ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state instead of the ON state based on the fact that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the OFF state. That is, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, And the EXS signal are both OFF, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, ball lending (payout of game media) is not executed.

  As described above, while the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal is set to the ON state. Not to be. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the payout control of the game medium.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a in a closed state so that a clerk or the like at the game arcade can put the pachinko gaming machine 1 into a playable state. The provided game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the game machine frame 3 and does not detect the open state of the glass door frame 3a. When both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to the ON state based on the fact that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the ON state, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and can be opened by a predetermined key operation. Since the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be operated unless it is in the open state, the gaming machine frame 3 must be in the open state in order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. That is, it is normal that the gaming machine frame 3 is open during the period in which the control is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected includes a period in which the setting change mode is controlled and a period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

  Here, the transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involve power-off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power-on. If the payout control corresponding to the ball lending process or the prize ball process is executed in such an unstable state, an appropriate amount of game media corresponding to the payout request can be paid out. May not be. In order to prevent the disadvantage of the player in such a situation, it is appropriate to limit the payout control in the gaming machine controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. However, in order for the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to grasp the control status to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode on the game control microcomputer 100 side, commands and determination processing for the control state are required, and the control is complicated. There is a problem that it becomes.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected during the period in which the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. During this period, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not execute the ball lending process and the prize ball process. As a result, the payout control is not executed regardless of whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting change mode and whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting confirmation mode. As a result, without complicating the control on the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side, the ball lending process and the prize ball process during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode and the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode are restricted. You. With such a configuration, appropriate payout control for the ball lending process and the prize ball process is realized.

  In this manner, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 while the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected. By restricting the payout control during the period, it is possible to avoid occurrence of troubles associated with the payout control, such as not being able to pay out an appropriate amount of game media corresponding to the payout request, and to provide the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. The maintenance work of the gaming machine and the like in the case where is set to the open state can smoothly proceed.

(Resumption of ball lending after detection of open state)
Next, the payout is interrupted because the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened while the ball rental is being performed, and thereafter the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. Is specifically described with reference to FIG. 12-5. In the example shown in FIG. 12-5, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a has been opened during the payout of the game medium. Then, the payout of the game medium is interrupted, and the interrupted payout is resumed based on the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a not being in the open state (becoming closed).

  FIG. 12-5 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes payout of the game medium. FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. Is in the ON state.

  When the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened while the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Switches the PRDY signal from the ON state to the OFF state based on detecting that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is open. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  The unpaid number is updated based on a detection signal from the number-of-payouts count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the number of unpaid items is calculated from the predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), from the number-of-payouts count switch. It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by the 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

  While the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs the PRDY signal. Is not turned ON. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state but changes the PRDY signal to the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even in the state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, while the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is detecting the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the card unit 21TM050 operates based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. Thus, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, the BRDY signal is not output to the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state instead of the ON state based on the fact that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 is in the period of detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, any of the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal Is also in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, so that the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door). When detecting that the open state of the frame 3a has been completed), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 changes the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the fact that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed (PRDY signal is turned on). The payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the above, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the unpaid number data becomes zero. This completes the payout of the game medium that has been interrupted by the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a.

  Accordingly, of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process that was executed before the power failure occurred (that is, the payout number designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), The payout is executed for the number of unpaid items that have not been paid, so that the disadvantage of the player can be avoided.

(Ball lending process at power failure occurrence (do not shift to setting change mode))
Next, with reference to FIG. 12-6, a process in a case where the payout is interrupted due to a power cutoff during the ball lending and the control is not controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored. Will be explained. In the example shown in FIG. 12-6, the payout of the game medium is interrupted based on the occurrence of the power supply interruption while the payout of the game medium is executed, and the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is turned on. After the connection confirmation signal is turned ON, the suspended payout is resumed.

  FIG. 12-6 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes the payout of the game medium. Is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. Is in the ON state.

  When the power is cut off during the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is performing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. You. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, the clerk of the game arcade turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the gaming machine frame 3 to turn on the power. At this time, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is further operated. After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a power-on process. In this example, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 was in the OFF state when the power was turned on, the processing after step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. Shall be. Here, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 12A.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state because the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state but changes the PRDY signal to the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even in the state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state instead of the ON state based on the fact that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. During the period when the PRDY signal is in the OFF state), the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. When possible, the PRDY signal is turned on. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. The PRDY signal is turned on on the condition that it is not performed.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300. During the period in which the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected, whether the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode or not is controlled by the setting confirmation mode. No payout of game media is executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By maintaining the PRDY signal in the OFF state instead of the ON state, the ball lending process is prevented from being executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  When the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk of the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then removes the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. In order to set the closed state, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in the open state even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON (step S21TM1480 and thereafter). In such a case, even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is turned OFF based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. .

  When the store clerk of the game arcade closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the connection confirmation signal and opens the game machine frame and door frame. The PRDY signal is turned ON based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a has been opened by the sensor 21TM300. Then, based on the PRDY signal being turned on, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the unpaid number is calculated. The payout operation is performed one by one until the data becomes zero. Thereby, the supply of the game medium interrupted by the occurrence of the power interruption and the subsequent opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is completed. As described above, when the power supply is interrupted during the ball lending and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed when the power is restored thereafter. As a condition, it is possible to resume the suspended payout of the game media and complete the ball lending.

(Ball lending processing at power failure occurrence (transition to setting change mode))
FIG. 12-7 (1) is a block diagram illustrating a connection example of a RAM clear signal line in the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the main board 11, and the payout control board 21TM037. In the example shown in FIG. 12-7 (1), when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is changed to the game control microcontroller. It is input to the I / O 105 of the computer 100 and the I / O 21TM372f of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. That is, the store clerk of the game arcade operates the one clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, thereby clearing the RAM 102 for initializing the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 and initializing the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. And clearing the RAM are executed.

  Next, with respect to the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power failure occurring during the ball lending and the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, FIG. 12-7 (2) This will be specifically described with reference to FIG. In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (1), when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is sent to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. It shall be transmitted. In the example shown in FIG. 12-7 (2), when the power supply is interrupted while the payout of the game medium is being executed, the payout being executed is stopped, and after the power is restored, the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Sometimes, the payout is not restarted, and even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended, the payout is restarted based on the fact that the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has been subjected to the RAM clear. do not do.

  FIG. 12-7 (2) shows the main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 when the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes the payout of the game medium. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between (dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370) and card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. Is in the ON state.

  When the power is cut off during the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is performing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. You. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 based on the EXS signal being turned off, and interrupts the payout of the game medium. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, the clerk of the game arcade turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the gaming machine frame 3 to turn on the power. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (and further to initialize the pachinko gaming machine 1), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and The clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is also set to the ON state. To shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a power-on process. In this example, the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state but changes the PRDY signal to the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even in the state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 performs the payout control based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the substrate 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state instead of the ON state based on the fact that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the process is being executed, the payout of the game medium is not executed even if the data of the unpaid number is not cleared.

  Thereafter, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the processes after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 12-2 are executed. When the RAM clear processing is executed, it is notified that the RAM clear has been executed. In this example, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the time of turning on the power, a RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 12A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. When possible, the PRDY signal is turned on. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. The PRDY signal is turned on on the condition that it is not performed.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300. During the period in which the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected, whether the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode or not is controlled by the setting confirmation mode. No payout of game media is executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By maintaining the PRDY signal in the OFF state instead of the ON state, the ball lending process is prevented from being executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the store clerk of the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then executes the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Is closed, even if the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed is in the ON state (step S21TM1480 and thereafter), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is not closed. It may be open. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even when the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed is in the ON state. , The PRDY signal is turned off.

  When the store clerk of the game arcade closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the connection confirmation signal (processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). Has been completed), and based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a has been opened by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, the PRDY signal is turned on. And

  In this example, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is used. The microcomputer 21TM370 does not clear the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (because there are remaining game media to be paid out). Based on the PRDY signal being turned on, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. One by one until the data of the unpaid coin number becomes 0 performs a payout operation. As a result, the game medium that has been interrupted due to the occurrence of the power interruption, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Is completed. As described above, when the supply of the game medium is interrupted due to the power cutoff during the execution of the ball lending, the data of the unpaid number is not cleared when the power is restored thereafter, and the setting is performed based on the setting. Resuming the suspended payout of the game media and completing the ball lending, provided that the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. Is possible.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (2), when RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the power is turned on, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated). In this case, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 clears the data of the number of unpaid items stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining number to be paid out). Even when the PRDY signal is turned ON, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed even when the PRDY signal is turned ON.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Accordingly, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has not been formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The data of the number of unpaid items stored in the number-of-payouts storage buffer is initialized. As described above, when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the data of the number of unpaid items is initialized. Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process executed in the previous) (that is, the number of payouts designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), No payout is made for the number of payouts.

  Accordingly, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 accordingly stores the data of the unpaid number stored in the RAM21TM302. Is initialized, it is possible to simplify management of data of a predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process or the prize ball process.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption during the execution of the ball lending process, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number stored in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The data of the unpaid number is stored in the buffer. Here, by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the data of the unpaid number is cleared, so that the suspended payout is forcibly terminated (stopped) without being restarted. That is, when the power is restored, the payout for the number of unpaid items is not executed during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled and after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Modified example regarding ball lending processing (transition to setting change mode) when power failure occurs)
FIG. 12-8 (1) is a block diagram illustrating a connection example of a RAM clear signal line in the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and the main board 11, and the clear switch 21TM052a and the payout control board 21TM037. In the example shown in FIG. 12-8 (1), the above-described clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is provided corresponding to the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), and corresponds to the payout control board 21TM037. Further, another clear switch 21TM052a different from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is provided. That is, the main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 are provided with separate and independent clear switches.

  When the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is input to the I / O 105 of the game control microcomputer 100. When the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052a is input to the I / O21TM372f of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  If the game clerk initializes the game control microcomputer 100 and does not initialize the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the power supply is turned on, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned on, and the clear switch is turned on. 21TM052a is turned off. Conversely, when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized without initializing the game control microcomputer 100, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off when the power is turned on to clear the game. The switch 21TM052a is turned on. When the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch 21TM052a is also turned on. And

  Next, FIG. 12-8 (2) relates to a process in a case where the payout is interrupted due to a power cutoff during the ball lending and the control is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored. This will be specifically described with reference to FIG. In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (1), the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, and the clear switch 21TM052a is turned on when the power is turned on. By operation, the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized. In the example shown in FIG. 12-8 (2), when the power supply is interrupted while the payout of the game medium is being executed, the payout being executed is stopped, and after the power is restored, the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Sometimes, the payout is not restarted, and the payout is restarted based on the fact that the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has not been executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. .

  FIG. 12-8 (2) shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between (dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370) and card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. Is in the ON state.

  When the power is cut off during the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is performing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. You. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 based on the EXS signal being turned off, and interrupts the payout of the game medium. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, the clerk of the game arcade turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the gaming machine frame 3 to turn on the power. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (and further to initialize the game control microcomputer 100), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. The clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is also set to the ON state. To shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a power-on process. In this example, the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state but changes the PRDY signal to the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even in the state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 performs the payout control based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the substrate 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state instead of the ON state based on the fact that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the process is being executed, the payout of the game medium is not executed even if the data of the unpaid number is not cleared.

  Thereafter, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the processes after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 12-2 are executed. When the RAM clear processing is executed in the game control microcomputer 100, it is notified that the RAM clear has been executed. Also, in this example, when the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is operated at the time of turning on the power, a RAM clear signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 12A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. When possible, the PRDY signal is turned on. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. The PRDY signal is turned on on the condition that it is not performed.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300. During the period in which the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected, whether the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode or not is controlled by the setting confirmation mode. No payout of game media is executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By maintaining the PRDY signal in the OFF state instead of the ON state, the ball lending process is prevented from being executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the store clerk of the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then executes the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Is closed, even if the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed is in the ON state (step S21TM1480 and thereafter), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is not closed. It may be open. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even when the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed is in the ON state. , The PRDY signal is turned off.

  When the store clerk of the game arcade closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the connection confirmation signal and opens the game machine frame and door frame. The PRDY signal is turned ON based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a has been opened by the sensor 21TM300.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (2), when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated when the power is turned on) ) Indicates that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at power-on). Even if there is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 clears the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. (There are remaining game media to be paid out), and based on the fact that the PRDY signal has been turned on, based on the contents of the unpaid-out number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. As a result, the game medium that has been interrupted due to the occurrence of the power interruption, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Is completed. As described above, when the supply of the game medium is interrupted due to the power cutoff during the execution of the ball lending, the data of the unpaid number is not cleared when the power is restored thereafter, and the setting is performed based on the setting. Resuming the suspended payout of the game media and completing the ball lending, provided that the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. Is possible.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clearing for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the backup data in the RAM 21TM302. When the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the area has been cleared (because there is no remaining game medium to be paid out), and the PRDY signal is turned on. Also, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to the game control microcomputer 100, but is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not done. Therefore, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated, even if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout is performed. If the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not initialized. Thus, regardless of whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on (whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed) Regardless of this, if the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated, the data of the number of unpaid items is not initialized, and is executed before the power is cut off (before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode upon power restoration). Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process (i.e., the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the number of unpaid out payouts that have not been paid out , Payout will be executed.

  Therefore, regardless of whether the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the unpaid number data stored in the RAM21TM302 is not initialized. Data of a predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the processing or the prize ball processing can be appropriately protected.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption during the execution of the ball lending process, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number stored in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The data of the unpaid number is stored in the buffer. Here, even if the clear switch 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated when the power is turned on, if the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid number data is maintained without being cleared. Therefore, the suspended payout is resumed, and the payout of the unpaid number of game media is completed. In other words, after the power is restored, after a period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the payout of the unpaid number is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends.

  In the present embodiment, an example is described in which the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the open state detection signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 may be provided on the main board 11 (a detection signal of an open state is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In the case of such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 determines that the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Then, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped (switching from ON state to OFF state). As a result, based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the PRDY signal to the OFF state or does not set the EXS signal to the ON state, thereby executing the ball lending. Not to be.

(Restriction on prize ball payout based on detection of open state of gaming machine frame or glass door frame)
Next, a method of restricting award ball payout when the game machine frame 3 is opened and the glass door frame 3a is opened will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 12-9. FIG. 12-9 shows a game control microcomputer 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 when the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is a timing chart which shows transmission and reception of the signal between computer 100 and microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control. As shown in FIG. 12-9, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is received as the connection OK command. When receiving the connection OK command as the received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 again transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after a lapse of 1 s (1 second) from the reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication processing as long as the connection state is normal.

  At this time, when a clerk of the game hall opens the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door. An open state of the frame 3a is detected. In the state in which the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (and in the case where the glass door frame 3a and the upper plate are integrated, the state in which the glass door frame 3a is opened), award balls to be paid out Is not physically connected to the path where the flowing prize balls are stored.If the prize balls are paid out in this state, the game media reaches the upper plate. Without falling.

  In the example of FIG. 12-9, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the game control is performed. Microcomputer 100 has detected the passage of game media related to any of the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, and the large winning opening. Is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 as a prize ball request signal based on the payout ball request signal, but the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 which detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Does not execute the payout control of the game medium, and sends the prize ball preparation command as the received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. To send. This prize ball preparation command is issued until the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 no longer detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a Transmission to the game control microcomputer 100 is continued until the state is closed.

  As described above, while the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming medium is provided with each winning port. , The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not execute the payout control of the prize ball without driving the payout motor 21TM289. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the payout control of the game medium. Then, a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a in a closed state so that a clerk or the like at the game arcade can put the pachinko gaming machine 1 into a playable state. The provided game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the game machine frame 3 and does not detect the open state of the glass door frame 3a. When both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 drives the payout motor 21TM289 when the payout operation is possible, and the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass. The payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls (the number specified by the prize ball number command) according to the winning during the period in which the open state of the door frame 3a is detected is executed. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out the predetermined number of game media transmits a winning ball end command as a received ACK signal.

(Restart of payout of prize balls after detection of open state)
Next, the payout is interrupted because the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened while the prize ball is being paid out, and thereafter the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. The processing in the case of the closed state will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the example shown in FIG. 12-10, based on the fact that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a has been opened during the payout of the game medium. Then, the payout of the game medium is interrupted, and the interrupted payout is resumed based on the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a not being in the open state (becoming closed).

  As shown in FIG. 12-10, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is received as the connection OK command. When receiving the connection OK command as the received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 again transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after a lapse of 1 s (1 second) from the reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication processing as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication process is not being executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the received ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of winning balls in the winning ball request signal, and transmits the winning ball number command as the set winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receiving the winning ball number command as the winning ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of winning balls specified by the winning ball number command. The gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened during the payout of the number of prize balls specified by the award ball number command, and the gaming machine frame / door frame provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Based on the opening sensor 21TM300 detecting the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 and interrupts the payout of the game medium. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  The unpaid number is updated based on a detection signal from the number-of-payouts count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the number of unpaid items is calculated from a predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14), and It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by the 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, which detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, does not execute the payout control of the game medium, and outputs a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal for the game control. It is transmitted to the microcomputer 100. This prize ball preparation command is issued until the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 no longer detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a Transmission to the game control microcomputer 100 is continued until the state is closed.

  As described above, during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 even during the execution of the payout of the game medium. Do not pay out game media. Then, a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door). Upon detecting that the open state of the frame 3a has ended), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the information in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the closing of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. The payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the stored contents of the unpaid number storage buffer, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. This completes the payout of the game medium that has been interrupted by the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a.

(Prizeball processing when power failure occurs (without shifting to the setting change mode))
Next, with reference to FIGS. 12 to 11, the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power failure occurring during the execution of the prize ball payout and the control is not controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored. This will be specifically described. In the example shown in FIG. 12-11, the payout of the game medium is interrupted based on the occurrence of the power supply interruption while the payout of the game medium is executed, and the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is turned on. After that, the connection confirmation signal is turned on, and after the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the interrupted payout is resumed.

  As shown in FIG. 12-11, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is received as the connection OK command. When receiving the connection OK command as the received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 again transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after a lapse of 1 s (1 second) from the reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication processing as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication process is not being executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the received ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of winning balls in the winning ball request signal, and transmits the winning ball number command as the set winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receiving the winning ball number command as the winning ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of winning balls specified by the winning ball number command. If the power is cut off during the payout of the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped. Suspend media removal. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, the clerk of the game arcade turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the gaming machine frame 3 to turn on the power. At this time, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is further operated. After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a power-on process. In this example, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 was in the OFF state when the power was turned on, the processing after step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. Shall be. Here, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 12A.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the payout motor 21TM289 stopped because the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. As a result, after the power is turned on, a period during which the CPU 103 is performing a predetermined process as a power-on process (after the power is turned on, without being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the serial connection shown in FIG. During the communication circuit setting process (a period until the execution of the step S21TM1480), the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is in a stopped state, so that the state where the payout of the game medium is interrupted is maintained.

  As a result, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, during the period in which the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state (after the power is turned on, the serial communication circuit setting process shown in FIG. Until the execution of S21TM1480), the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the unpaid number data becomes zero. Do. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. It is assumed that the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to perform the payout operation on condition that the payout operation is not performed.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300. During the period in which the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected, whether the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode or not is controlled by the setting confirmation mode. No payout of game media is executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the award ball processing is not executed. Thus, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  When the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk of the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then removes the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. In order to set the closed state, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in the open state even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON (step S21TM1480 and thereafter). In such a case, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. State, and the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the store clerk of the game arcade closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the connection confirmation signal and opens the game machine frame and door frame. Based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a has been opened by the sensor 21TM300, the contents of the unpaid-number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are determined. Based on this, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. Thereby, the supply of the game medium interrupted by the occurrence of the power interruption and the subsequent opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is completed. As described above, when the power supply is interrupted during the execution of the prize ball payout and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed when the power is restored thereafter. On condition that the payout of the interrupted game media can be resumed, the payout of the prize ball can be completed.

(Award ball processing when power failure occurs (transition to setting change mode))
Next, FIG. 12-12 shows the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the occurrence of the power supply interruption during the execution of the prize ball payout and the control is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored. This will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (1), when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is sent to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. It shall be transmitted. In the example shown in FIG. 12-12, when the power supply is interrupted during the execution of the payout of the game medium, the payout being executed is stopped, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored, The payout is not restarted and the payout is not restarted even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, based on the fact that the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has been subjected to the RAM clear.

  As shown in FIG. 12-12, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is received as the connection OK command. When receiving the connection OK command as the received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 again transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after a lapse of 1 s (1 second) from the reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication processing as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication process is not being executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the received ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of winning balls in the winning ball request signal, and transmits the winning ball number command as the set winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receiving the winning ball number command as the winning ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of winning balls specified by the winning ball number command. If the power is cut off during the payout of the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped. Suspend media removal. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, the clerk of the game arcade turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the gaming machine frame 3 to turn on the power. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (and further to initialize the pachinko gaming machine 1), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and The clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is also set to the ON state. To shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a power-on process. In this example, the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the payout motor 21TM289 in a stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, a period during which the CPU 103 is executing the predetermined process as the power-on process (the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. During the period until the step ()) is executed, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so that the state in which the payout of the game medium is interrupted is maintained even when the data of the number of unpaid is not cleared. Will be.

  Thereafter, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the processes after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 12-2 are executed. When the RAM clear processing is executed, it is notified that the RAM clear has been executed. In this example, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the time of turning on the power, a RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 12A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. I do. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. It is assumed that the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to perform the payout operation on condition that the payout operation is not performed.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300. During the period in which the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected, whether the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode or not is controlled by the setting confirmation mode. No payout of game media is executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the award ball processing is not executed. Thus, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the store clerk of the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then executes the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Is closed, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in the open state even during the period in which the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (after step S21TM1480). In such a case, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. State.

  When the store clerk of the game arcade closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the connection confirmation signal (processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). Is completed), and the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a has been opened by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. Let it.

  In this example, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is used. The microcomputer 21TM370 does not clear the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (because there are remaining game media to be paid out). The payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout is performed one by one until the unpaid number data becomes zero. Carry out the work. As a result, the game medium that has been interrupted due to the occurrence of the power interruption, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Is completed. As described above, when the power supply is interrupted during the execution of the prize ball payout and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the data of the unpaid number is not cleared at the time of the subsequent power restoration, and On the condition that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the interrupted payout of the game medium is resumed and the award ball is paid out. Can be completed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-12, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on). Since the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 clears the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining game media to be paid out are stored). Therefore, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Accordingly, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has not been formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The data of the number of unpaid items stored in the number-of-payouts storage buffer is initialized. As described above, when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the data of the number of unpaid items is initialized. Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the prize ball processing executed in the previous step (i.e., the number of payouts designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14), No payout is made for the number of payouts.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power-off during the execution of the prize ball processing, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number stored in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The unpaid number data is stored in the buffer. Here, by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the data of the unpaid number is cleared, so that the suspended payout is forcibly terminated (stopped) without being restarted. That is, when the power is restored, the payout for the number of unpaid items is not executed during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled and after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Modified example of prize ball processing (transition to setting change mode) when power interruption occurs)
Next, FIG. 12-13 shows the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power cutoff during the execution of the prize ball payout and the control is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored. This will be described specifically. In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (1), the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, and the clear switch 21TM052a is turned on when the power is turned on. By operation, the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized. In the example illustrated in FIGS. 12 to 13, when the power supply is interrupted during the payout of the game medium, the payout during the execution is stopped, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored, After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends without dispensing, the dispensing is resumed based on the fact that the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 has not been executed.

  As shown in FIG. 12-13, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is received as the connection OK command. When receiving the connection OK command as the received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 again transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after a lapse of 1 s (1 second) from the reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication processing as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication process is not being executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the received ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of winning balls in the winning ball request signal, and transmits the winning ball number command as the set winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receiving the winning ball number command as the winning ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of winning balls specified by the winning ball number command. If the power is cut off during the payout of the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped. Suspend media removal. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, the clerk of the game arcade turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the gaming machine frame 3 to turn on the power. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (and further to initialize the game control microcomputer 100), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. The clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is also set to the ON state. To shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a power-on process. In this example, the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the payout motor 21TM289 in a stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, a period during which the CPU 103 is executing the predetermined process as the power-on process (the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. During the period until the step ()) is executed, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so that the state in which the payout of the game medium is interrupted is maintained even when the data of the number of unpaid is not cleared. Will be.

  Thereafter, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the processes after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 12-2 are executed. When the RAM clear processing is executed in the game control microcomputer 100, it is notified that the RAM clear has been executed. Also, in this example, when the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is operated at the time of turning on the power, a RAM clear signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 12A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. I do. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. It is assumed that the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to perform the payout operation on condition that the payout operation is not performed.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300. During the period in which the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected, whether the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode or not is controlled by the setting confirmation mode. No payout of game media is executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the award ball processing is not executed. Thus, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the store clerk of the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then executes the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Is closed, even if the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed is in the ON state (step S21TM1480 and thereafter), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is not closed. It may be open. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even when the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed is in the ON state. Based on this, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped.

  When the store clerk of the game arcade closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the connection confirmation signal and opens the game machine frame and door frame. The driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is started based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a has been opened by the sensor 21TM300.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (2), when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated when the power is turned on) ) Indicates that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at power-on). Even if there is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 clears the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. Therefore, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the unpaid number is determined. The payout operation is performed one by one until the data becomes zero. As a result, the game medium that has been interrupted due to the occurrence of the power interruption, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Is completed. As described above, when the power supply is interrupted during the execution of the prize ball payout and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the data of the unpaid number is not cleared at the time of the subsequent power restoration, and On the condition that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the interrupted payout of the game medium is resumed and the award ball is paid out. Can be completed.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clearing for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the backup data in the RAM 21TM302. Since the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the area is cleared (there is no remaining game medium to be paid out), the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, and the payout is performed. No action is taken.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to the game control microcomputer 100, but is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not done. Therefore, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated, even if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout is performed. If the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not initialized. Thus, regardless of whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on (whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed) Regardless of this, if the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated, the data of the number of unpaid items is not initialized, and is executed before the power is cut off (before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode upon power restoration). Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the prize ball processing (i.e., the number of payouts designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14), the number of unpaid out payouts that have not been paid out , Payout will be executed.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power-off during the execution of the prize ball processing, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number stored in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The unpaid number data is stored in the buffer. Here, even if the clear switch 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated when the power is turned on, if the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid number data is maintained without being cleared. Therefore, the suspended payout is resumed, and the payout of the unpaid number of game media is completed. In other words, after the power is restored, after a period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the payout of the unpaid number is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends.

  In the present embodiment, an example is described in which the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the open state detection signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 may be provided on the main board 11 (a detection signal of an open state is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In the case of such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 detects that the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Therefore, even if a prize is detected, the prize ball number command is not transmitted. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 based on the fact that the winning ball number command is no longer received, thereby preventing the payout of payout balls.

(Output period of security signal and setting change corresponding signal)
As described above, in the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 11-39 (1), a security signal can be output from the tenth terminal. As described above, the security signal can notify the outside of the possibility that the initialization process (RAM clear), the detection of an illegal act, the detection of a game stop target error, and the like have been performed. Further, the security signal is output from the time when the processing relating to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started to the time when the processing relating to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the normal game processing is performed (for example, FIG. In the period from Step S21TM3510 to Step S21TM3060 or Step S21TM3070 shown in 12-2 (until NO is determined and the normal game process is executed), the ON state is set.

  In the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 11-39 (1), a setting change corresponding signal can be output from the seventh terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is output from the time when the processing relating to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started to the time when the processing relating to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the normal game processing is performed (for example, FIG. In the period from Step S21TM3510 to Step S21TM3060 or Step S21TM3070 shown in 12-2 (until NO is determined and the normal game process is executed), the ON state is set. With this setting change corresponding signal, it is possible to notify the outside that the process related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been executed (the process related to the change or confirmation of the set value has been executed). Further, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed (when the process shifts to the normal game process), the setting change corresponding signal output from the seventh terminal is temporarily turned off, and thereafter, the RAM 102 is read from the same seventh terminal. Since the number of pulse-like setting change correspondence signals corresponding to the current setting value stored in the setting value storage area is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (1), when the power is turned on, when the mode shifts to the setting change mode with the RAM clear (for example, step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 shown in FIG. 12-1), A setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the execution of the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150), the security signal is kept ON for 30 seconds even after the setting change mode ends and the normal game process is started. Also, with the end of the setting change mode (accurately, at a timing of 50 ms after the setting change mode ends and the normal game process is performed), the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off. Based on the fact that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is 2, two pulses are output as a special mode setting change corresponding signal.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (2), when the power is turned on, the RAM is cleared (for example, step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 shown in FIG. 12-1), but the mode is not shifted to the setting change mode. In this case, the security signal is in the ON state for 30 seconds after the power is turned on (when the RAM is cleared), but the setting change corresponding signal is not in the ON state.

  As described above, the security signal is also in the ON state while being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, even when the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and is configured not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, at least the external device is configured to perform the processing based on the input of the security signal. Thus, it is possible to recognize that control may be performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  As shown in FIGS. 12-15 (3) and (4), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended. (Accurately, at the timing when 50 ms elapses after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the process shifts to the normal game process), the state is turned off. The security signal is also turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, but when the RAM is cleared (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) as shown in FIG. 12-15 (3). In this case, the OFF state is not set immediately after the setting change mode ends, and the ON state is continued for 30 seconds after the setting change mode ends. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-15 (4), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is not executed, the setting confirmation mode ends (exactly, the setting confirmation mode ends). (At the timing when 50 ms elapses after shifting to the normal game process).

  12-15 (3) and (4), the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. After the mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the game is turned off at the timing when 50 ms elapses after shifting to the normal game processing), and thereafter (for example, after an elapse of 50 ms or more), the set value stored in the RAM 102 is stored. Based on the fact that the setting value stored in the area is 2, two pulses are output as a setting change corresponding signal in a special mode. This makes it possible to easily specify the set value of each gaming machine in an external device such as a hall computer.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (2), if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed and the mode is not shifted to the setting change mode, the security signal is output when the power is turned on (RAM It is ON for 30 seconds from the time of clear execution).

  Therefore, on the external device side to which the security signal is input, if the input period of the security signal is about 30 seconds, the RAM is cleared (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150), but the mode does not shift to the setting change mode. It is possible to recognize that there is a possibility. On the other hand, if the input period of the security signal exceeds 30 seconds, there is a possibility that the mode has shifted to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. If the security signal input period has not reached 30 seconds, the mode may have shifted to the setting confirmation mode without executing the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). That is, it is possible to recognize that there is a possibility that only the confirmation was performed without being in a state where the setting value can be changed.

  That is, if the input period of the security signal is about 30 seconds, the fact that the RAM may have been cleared (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) but may not have shifted to the setting change mode may indicate that the hall computer or the like has not performed. If the security device is recognizable and the input period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, the mode may have shifted to the setting confirmation mode without executing the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). If the management device can recognize that the setting value may have been changed without being able to change the setting value, and the security signal input period exceeds 30 seconds, It is possible that the mode has changed to the setting change mode or setting check mode (Especially, it is likely that the transition to the setting change mode with RAM clear) and is recognizable in the management device. As described above, it is possible to distinguish what control the gaming machine has executed on the outside based on the output period of the security signal of the gaming machine.

  Therefore, even if the external device is configured not to assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, at least the external device is configured to perform the processing based on the input of the security signal. Thus, the possibility that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed and the possibility that the setting is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be distinguished and recognized.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode, the RAM clear is always executed because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on (step S21TM3050). Or, step S21TM3150). As a result, the output period of the security signal is approximately +30 seconds during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled. On the other hand, when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF when the power is turned on, and the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3570). RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has not been executed. As a result, the output period of the security signal is a period controlled in the setting confirmation mode (more precisely, a period controlled in the setting confirmation mode + about 50 ms).

  As described above, since the output period of the security signal is different between the case where the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode and the case where the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, each of the gaming machines can change the setting on the external device side. It is possible to distinguish and specify whether the mode is controlled to the mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the setting change corresponding signal is turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends (to be exact, the setting change mode). Or, it becomes OFF state (at the timing when 50 ms has elapsed since the setting check mode ended and the normal game process was started). Therefore, on the external device side, the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be specified by the input period of the setting change corresponding signal. If the input period of the security signal is longer than the input period of the setting change corresponding signal by about 30 seconds, it is recognized that the setting change mode has been controlled and that the RAM has been cleared accordingly. It is possible, and when the input period of the setting change corresponding signal and the input period of the security signal are the same period, it is possible to recognize that the setting is controlled to the setting confirmation mode without RAM clear.

  As described above, when the security signal and the setting change correspondence signal are output from different output terminals, the external device to which these signals are input causes a predetermined event (RAM clear in this example) in the gaming machine. Has occurred, and that the gaming machine has been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Then, it is possible to clearly specify the control period for the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and it is possible to specify which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is controlled based on the input period of the security signal.

  Next, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state when the power is turned on, the setting is confirmed without the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). When the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in less than 50 ms after the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode (for example, after the setting change flag is set in step S21TM3510), the setting confirmation mode ends. Then, it is assumed that the process has shifted to the normal game process.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-15 (5), a setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal starting from the timing when the setting confirmation mode is started, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Is output. Even if less than 50 ms has elapsed since the setting confirmation mode was started, and the setting confirmation mode was terminated (the lock switch 21TM051 was turned off) and the process shifted to the normal game processing, at least a period of 50 ms or more The setting change correspondence signal and the security signal are continuously output. That is, once the setting change correspondence signal and the security signal are turned ON, the ON state is maintained for at least 50 ms.

  Assuming that the period during which the setting change correspondence signal and the security signal are in the ON state is shorter than a predetermined period (in this example, 50 ms), the pachinko gaming machine 1 sets the setting change mode or the setting confirmation on the external device side such as a hall computer. It becomes difficult to recognize the transition to the mode. As in the present embodiment, the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are turned on for at least a predetermined period (50 ms in this example) regardless of the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. The external device can recognize that each pachinko gaming machine 1 has shifted to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Further, regarding the setting change corresponding signal, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the setting change corresponding signal is output in a special mode having a pulse width of 100 ms. The set value of the gaming machine 1 can be specified and managed. If the period during which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled is less than 50 ms, the setting change corresponding signal is turned on and then switched to the off state within less than 50 ms. When the number of pulses having a width of 100 ms corresponding to the set value stored in the storage area is output, the period in which the external device is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (less than 50 ms) Cannot be recognized, and by recognizing only the setting change corresponding signal of the special mode (pulse width is 100 ms) output thereafter, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is incorrectly recognized. May be recognized. As in the present embodiment, the external device side is set by turning on the setting change corresponding signal for at least a predetermined period (50 ms in this example) regardless of the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Thus, the set value of each pachinko gaming machine 1 can be accurately specified.

  FIG. 12-16 is a diagram illustrating another example of the effect device provided in the effect control board 12. In this example, unlike the example shown in FIG. 2, in addition to the game effect lamp 9, a first off-screen display 21TM101 outside the screen, a second on-hold display 21TM102 outside the screen, and a fourth symbol display are provided on the lamp control board 14. 21TM103 and a setting change status indicator 21TM104 are connected, each of which is constituted by a light emitting device such as an LED. All of these light emitting devices are provided outside the screen frame of the image display device 5. The effect control CPU 120 controls the light emission of these light emitting devices via the lamp control board 14. In this example, it is assumed that all of these light emitting devices emit light in a common emission color.

  The first off-screen display 21TM101 is composed of two light emitting devices. The effect control CPU 120 changes the first number of retained memories, that is, when a winning in the first start winning opening occurs (when the first number of retained memories increases), and when the first special symbol is changed. When the variable display is completed and the display result is determined (when the number of first reserved storages is reduced), the game control microcomputer 100 specifies the first retained storage number after the update from the game control microcomputer 100. When the designation command is received, the off-screen first suspension indicator 21TM101 is caused to emit light in a mode corresponding to the first suspension storage number designated by the first suspension storage number designation command.

  For example, when the first reserved storage number designated by the first reserved storage number designation command is 1, one light emitting device is turned on and the other light emitting device is turned off. In addition, when the first reserved storage number designated by the first reserved storage number designation command is 2, both light emitting devices are turned on. In addition, when the first reserved storage number designated by the first reserved storage number designation command is 3, one of the light emitting devices is turned on and the other light emitting device is turned on. When the first reserved storage number specified by the first reserved storage number designation command is 4, both light emitting devices are turned on and off.

  The off-screen second hold indicator 21TM102 includes two light emitting devices. The effect control CPU 120 changes the number of the second reserved storages, that is, when the winning in the second starting winning opening occurs (when the second reserved storage number increases), and the second special symbol. When the variable display is completed and the display result is determined (when the number of the second reserved storages decreases), the game control microcomputer 100 specifies the updated second reserved storage number from the game control microcomputer 100. When the designation command is received, the off-screen second suspension indicator 21TM102 is caused to emit light in a mode corresponding to the second suspension storage number designated by the second suspension storage number designation command.

  For example, when the second reserved storage number designated by the second reserved storage number designation command is 1, one light emitting device is turned on and the other light emitting device is turned off. In addition, when the second reserved storage number designated by the second reserved storage number designation command is 2, both light emitting devices are turned on. In addition, when the second reserved storage number designated by the second reserved storage number designation command is 3, one of the light emitting devices is turned on and the other light emitting device is turned on. Then, when the second reserved storage number designated by the second reserved storage number designation command is 4, both light emitting devices are turned on and off.

  The fourth symbol display 21TM103 includes two light emitting devices. Here, one of the light emitting devices is a fourth symbol variable display device corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A on the main board 11 side, and blinks at the timing when the first special symbol variable display is started (ie, (Variation display) is started, and at the timing when the variation display of the first special symbol is completed, the display is turned off or lit (that is, the variation display is terminated), and the display result is derived. The other light emitting device is a fourth symbol variable display device corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B on the main board 11 side, and blinks at the timing when the second special symbol variable display is started (that is, the variable symbol). Display) is started, and at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is completed, the display is turned off or lit (that is, the variable display is completed), and the display result is derived.

  The effect control CPU 120, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, a first reserved storage number subtraction designation command for designating that the first reserved storage number has been subtracted, a display result designation for designating a display result A command and a variation pattern command for designating a variation time of the special symbol, a variation display of the first special symbol is executed based on the reception of the set of commands from the game control microcomputer 100; In addition, the change time of the first special symbol can be specified. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 is configured to, when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed and the display result is determined, receive the symbol determination designation command from the game control microcomputer 100, and perform the first special symbol. It is possible to specify that the variable display has been completed and the display result has been derived.

  Here, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the one set of commands accompanying the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, one of the light emitting devices in the fourth symbol display 21TM103 blinks (that is, the variable display). Is started, and when the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command elapses, one of the light emitting devices is turned off or turned on in response to the reception of the symbol confirmation specification command (that is, the display result is determined). ). For example, if the display result of “outside” is specified by the display result specifying command, one of the light emitting devices is turned off in the symbol determination period, and the display result of “big hit” is specified by the display result specifying command. In this case, one of the light emitting devices is turned on during the symbol determination period.

  The effect control CPU 120, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, a second reserved storage number subtraction designation command for designating that the second reserved storage number has been subtracted, a display result designation for designating a display result A command and a variation pattern command for designating a variation time of the special symbol, a variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on receiving from the game control microcomputer 100 a set of commands; In addition, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol can be specified. Further, the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol determination designation command from the game control microcomputer 100 when the variable display of the second special symbol ends and the display result is determined, based on the second special symbol. It is possible to specify that the variable display has been completed and the display result has been derived.

  Here, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the one set of commands accompanying the start of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the other light emitting device on the fourth symbol display 21TM103 blinks (ie, fluctuation display). Is started, and when the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed, the other light emitting device is turned off or turned on in response to the reception of the symbol confirmation specification command (that is, the display result is determined). ). For example, when the display result of “outside” is designated by the display result designation command, the other light emitting device is turned off in the symbol determination period, and the display result of “big hit” is designated by the display result designation command. In this case, the other light emitting device is turned on during the symbol determination period.

  The emission color of the off-screen first hold indicator 21TM101 and the emission color of the off-screen second hold indicator 21TM102 may be different. For example, the former emits blue light and the latter emits red light. You may make it do. In the fourth symbol display device 21TM103, the emission color of one light emitting device corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A is made different from the emission color of the other light emitting device corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, the former is caused to emit light in blue (the same emission color as the first off-screen display 21TM101) and the latter is emitted in red (the same emission color as the second on-hold display 21TM102). You may do it.

  In addition, an image indicating the first number of reserved storages (for example, an image of blue numbers “0 to 4”) and an image indicating the second number of reserved storages (for example, an image of red numbers “0 to 4”) are displayed as images. The information may be displayed on the display device 5. In addition, when the image of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (for example, a square image, is blinking (fluctuation) in white while the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the display result is out of order. Is an image that is stopped and displayed in blue during the symbol fixing period, and is stopped and displayed in red during the symbol fixing period when the display result is a big hit), and an image of a fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (for example, a square) Is blinking (fluctuating) in yellow during the period in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and is stopped and displayed in blue in the symbol determination period when the display result is out of order, and the display result is a big hit. In this case, an image that is stopped and displayed in red during the symbol determination period) may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  The setting change state indicator 21TM104 is composed of one light emitting device. The effect control CPU 120 displays the setting change state at the timing of receiving the setting change mode command (see step S21TM3585 in FIG. 12-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the effect control is performed in the setting change mode. The device 21TM104 is turned on. Then, at the timing of receiving the setting command (see step S21TM3720 in FIG. 12B) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the control to the setting change mode is completed, the setting change state display 21TM104 is turned off. I do.

  The effect control CPU 120 changes the setting at the timing of receiving the setting confirmation mode command (see step S21TM3580 in FIG. 12-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the setting control mode is controlled. The status indicator 21TM104 is made to blink. Then, at the timing of receiving the setting command (see step S21TM3720 in FIG. 12B) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the control to the setting confirmation mode is completed, the setting change state display 21TM104 is turned off. I do.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the setting change mode (lighting state) and that it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode (blinking state) by the light emission mode of the setting change state indicator 21TM104. Has become. Here, compared with the period from when the power is turned on to when the image display control on the image display device 5 is enabled by the display control unit 123, the light emission of each light emitting device is performed by the lamp control board 14 after the power is turned on. The period until control becomes possible is very short. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 11-17, in the image display device 5, it is not possible to notify that the control is being performed in the setting change mode and that the image display device 5 is being controlled in the setting confirmation mode (the image display device 123 displays the image by the display control unit 123). Even before the display control is enabled), the light emission mode of the setting change state indicator 21TM104 can notify that the control is being performed in the setting change mode and that the control is being performed in the setting confirmation mode. It becomes possible.

  In the effect control board 12, the game is not limited to the setting change state display 21TM104, but the first off-screen first hold display 21TM101, the second off-screen second hold display 21TM102, and the fourth symbol display 21TM103 are played. By emitting light in a light emission pattern different from the normal light emission pattern when the operation is being performed, it may be notified that the control is being performed in the setting change mode or the control is being performed in the setting confirmation mode. For example, it is controlled that the setting change mode is controlled by turning on all the LEDs that constitute the first off-screen display 21TM101, the second off-screen display 21TM102, and the fourth symbol display 21TM103. It is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by making all the LEDs constituting the first off-screen display 21TM101 outside the screen, the second off-screen display 21TM102 outside the screen, and the fourth symbol display 21TM103 blink. May be notified.

  On the other hand, on the main board 11 side, during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, the CPU 103 operates the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the general-purpose hold display 25C, and the first special symbol. The display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 emit light in a light emission pattern different from a normal light emission pattern when a game is being played (for example, all are simultaneously turned on). ), It can be notified that the setting change mode is being controlled. During the period in which the setting confirmation mode is being controlled, the CPU 103 operates the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the general-use hold display 25C, the first special symbol display 4A, and the second special display. The special symbol display device 4B and the ordinary symbol indicator 20 emit light in a light emission pattern different from a normal light emission pattern when a game is being played (and a light emission pattern different even when being controlled in the setting change mode). (For example, by making all of them blink at the same time), it can be informed that the setting control mode is being controlled.

[Explanation about the characteristic part 30TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 30TM will be described. FIG. 13A is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the hold display and the active display. On the screen of the image display device 5, a first reserved display area 30TM101 for displaying the first reserved storage number (0 to 4 first reserved display 30TM001) and a second reserved storage number (0 to 4 second reserved display). A second hold display area 30TM102 for displaying the display 30TM002) and an active display area 30TM103 for displaying the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the currently displayed variable display are provided. The first hold display area 30TM101, the second hold display area 30TM102, and the active display area 30TM103 are provided at the bottom of the screen. The first hold display area 30TM101 is located on the left side when viewed from the player with the active display area 30TM103 at the center. The right side is the second reserved display area 30TM102.

  When the first reserved storage number is not 0, effect control CPU 120 displays a number of first reserved displays 30TM001 corresponding to the first reserved storage number in first reserved display area 30TM101. That is, in the first hold display 30TM001, the start condition (for example, winning in the first start winning opening) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the special symbol change display is not executed, and the first hold display 30TM001 is controlled to the big hit game state. Information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) for which the second reserved storage number is not 0 and the first reserved storage number is not 0). It is. When a plurality of first hold displays 30TM001 are displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101, the first hold displays 30TM001 correspond to the first hold display 30TM001 in an order close to the active display area 30TM103 (from the right as viewed from the player). The start condition of the changed display is satisfied.

  Further, when the second reserved storage number is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays a second reserved display 30TM002 corresponding to the second reserved storage number in the second reserved display area 30TM102. That is, in the second hold display 30TM002, the starting condition (for example, winning in the second starting winning opening) is satisfied, but the starting condition (for example, the special symbol variation display is not executed, and the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state. This is information corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) for which the second reserved storage number is not 0). When a plurality of second hold displays 30TM002 are displayed in the second hold display area 30TM102, the second hold displays 30TM002 correspond to the active display area 30TM103 in order (from the left as viewed from the player). The start condition of the changed display is satisfied.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 30TM003 in the active display area 30TM103 when the decorative symbol variation display is being executed. That is, the active display 30TM003 indicates that after the start condition (for example, winning in the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening) is established, the start condition (for example, the change display of the special symbol is not executed and the big hit game This is information corresponding to the special symbol variable display (and the decorative symbol variable display) in which the state is not controlled and the number of reserved storages is not zero.

  In addition, the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5 (left side as viewed from the player) is an area different from the first hold display area 30TM101, and stores the first hold storage number (0-4 sub-hold displays 30TM004). A sub-hold display area 30TM104 to be displayed and a sub-active display area 30TM105 which are different from the active display area 30TM103 and display the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the currently displayed variable display are provided.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the sub-hold display 30TM004 is to be displayed at the time of the start winning (when a winning in the first starting winning opening occurs), and displays the sub-hold display area 30TM104 in the sub-hold display area 30TM104. The number of sub-hold displays 30TM004 corresponding to one hold storage number is displayed, and the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105. That is, in the sub-hold display 30TM004, the start condition (for example, winning in the first start winning opening) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the special symbol change display is not executed, and the big hit game state is controlled). And the second reserved storage number is 0 and the first reserved storage number is not 0). In addition, the secondary active display 30TM005 is controlled after the start condition (for example, the winning in the first start winning opening) is satisfied and the start condition (for example, the special symbol change display is not executed, and the big hit game state is performed). This is information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) in which the second reserved storage number is 0 and the first reserved storage number is not 0). When a plurality of sub-hold displays 30TM004 are displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104, the fluctuations corresponding to the sub-hold display 30TM004 are arranged in an order close to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (from the right as viewed from the player). The display start condition is satisfied.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 13A, the sub-reserve display 30TM004 is a star-shaped outline, which is different from the first reservation display 30TM001 (round or triangular display). The sub-hold display 30TM004 is smaller in size than the first hold display 30TM001 and therefore less noticeable, and has low visibility for the player. The sub-active display 30TM005 is also a star-shaped outline, which is different from the active display 30TM003 (circular display or triangular display). The secondary active display 30TM005 is smaller in size than the active display 30TM003, and therefore less noticeable, and has low visibility for the player.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13A, the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the secondary active A sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed in the display area 30TM105. In this manner, as information corresponding to one variable display (common variable display) being executed, information in different modes of the active display 30TM003 and the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed. That is, the active display 30TM003 and the variable display corresponding to the active display 30TM003 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the common variable display are simultaneously displayed on the screen.

  Also, in response to the first number of storages being four, four first hold displays 30TM001 are displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101, and four sub-hold displays are displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104. 30TM004 is displayed. As described above, as information corresponding to each of the four variable displays that have not been executed, information in different modes, that is, the first hold display 30TM001 and the secondary hold display 30TM004 are displayed. That is, one first hold display 30TM001, a variable display (hold storage) corresponding to the first first hold display 30TM001, and one sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the common variable display (hold storage) are simultaneously displayed. It will be displayed on the screen.

  In this manner, a plurality of types of hold displays (first hold display 30TM001, sub-hold display 30TM004) corresponding to a common variable display (variable display of the first special symbol) are simultaneously displayed on the same screen, The effects using the hold display can be diversified to enhance the interest. Similarly, a plurality of types of active displays (active display 30TM003, sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to the active variable display (variable display of the first special symbol and variable design) are simultaneously displayed on the same screen. By doing so, it is possible to diversify the effects using the active display and improve the interest.

  Here, as described later, if it is determined in the determination at the time of the start winning that the sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed, the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101, The secondary hold display area 30TM004 is not displayed in the secondary hold display area 30TM104. In addition, while the active display area 30TM003 is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, the sub-active display area 30TM005 is not displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105, and indicates that the sub-active display area 30TM005 is to be displayed. Information (a rectangular frame shown at the top of the screen in FIG. 13A) is not displayed.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the first change effect and / or the second change effect can be executed based on the determination result at the time of the start winning. The first change effect refers to a first hold display 30TM001 or an active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that has been determined at the time of the start winning, and a special mode different from the normal mode (white circle display in this example). (In this example, white triangle display), blue mode (blue circle display in this example), green mode (green circle display in this example), red mode (red circle display in this example) This is an announcement effect that is displayed in a golden mode (in this example, a golden round display). In addition, the second change effect is different from the normal mode (in this example, a white star display) in which the sub-hold display 30TM004 or the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display that has been determined at the time of the start winning is set. The announcement effect is displayed in a blue mode (in this example, a blue star display) or a red mode (in this example, a red star display).

  FIG. 13B is a flowchart illustrating the change effect determination process. The effect control CPU 120 executes a change effect determination process in the look-ahead notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process process illustrated in FIG.

  In the change effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first sets a set of start winning commands (for example, a symbol designation command, a variation category command, and a It is confirmed whether or not one (1) reserve storage number addition designation command) has been newly received (step S30TM1010).

  The symbol designation command is an effect control command that indicates whether or not a big hit is to be made out of the win-time determination results and the result of determining the type of the big hit. The CPU 103 determines whether or not a big hit is to be made based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number extracted at the time of the start winning, and determines the big hit type when the big hit is made, and designates the result of the determination. Output the specified command. The fluctuation category command is an effect control command indicating a fluctuation pattern determination result among the prize-winning determination results. The CPU 103 determines whether or not to reach a normal reach or a super reach based on the random number for variation pattern type determination extracted at the time of the start winning, and outputs a variation category command for designating the determination result. I do. The first reserved storage number addition designation command is an effect control command for designating that the first reserved storage number has been increased by one.

  Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not one set of the symbol designation command, the fluctuation category command, and the first reserved storage number addition designation command) is newly stored in the start winning command storage area. I do. If one set of start winning commands has not been newly received (NO in step S30TM1010), the process ends.

  If one set of start winning commands has been newly received, effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the change prohibition flag has been set (step S30TM1020). If the change prohibition flag has been set (YES in step S30TM1020), the process ends. As will be described later, the change prohibition flag is set at least based on the determination that the first change effect is to be executed. If the change prohibition flag has been set (YES in step S30TM1020), the process ends.

  If the change prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S30TM1020), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first change effect is executed and the final display mode, and whether or not the second change effect is executed and the final display mode, which will be described later. It is determined based on the display mode determination table (see FIG. 13C) (step S30TM1030).

  By executing the processing of step S30TM1010 and step S30TM1020, in this embodiment, the processing of step S30TM1030 and thereafter is executed only when the first change effect is not executed, and the first change effect is executed. Alternatively, it is configured to be able to execute the second change effect.

  FIG. 13C is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the final display mode determination table. As shown in FIG. 13-3 (A), in this embodiment, as the final display mode of the active display 30TM003, “normal mode”, “special mode”, “blue mode”, “green mode”, “red mode” ”And“ golden aspects ”can be determined, and a determination value is assigned to each of these aspects. Further, as shown in FIG. 13-3 (B), in this embodiment, as the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005, “no display”, “normal mode”, “blue mode”, and “red mode” Can be determined, and a determination value is assigned to each of these aspects. Of these, "no display" indicates that the sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 and the sub-active display 30TM005 is not displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105.

  As shown in FIG. 13-3 (A), when the determination result at the time of the start winning is "losing" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "losing"), the starting winning is concerned. The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display based on (new first hold storage) becomes the normal mode (white circular display) at a rate of 31%, and the special mode (white color mode) at a rate of 4%. (Triangle display), a blue mode (blue round display) at a rate of 18%, a green mode (green round display) at a rate of 21%, and a red mode (red round display) at a rate of 16% ), And becomes a golden mode (golden round display) at a rate of 10%. In other words, the first change effect in which the mode of the information (hold display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that has been determined at the time of the start winning prize is different from the normal mode (white circle display) is 69. % Will be executed.

  On the other hand, when the determination result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designating command is "big hit"), it is based on the starting winning (new first hold storage). The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display is a normal mode at a rate of 2%, a special mode at a rate of 3%, a blue mode at a rate of 15%, and a green mode at a rate of 20%. At a rate of 25%, the color becomes red, and at a rate of 35%, the color becomes gold. That is, the first change effect in which the mode of the information (suspended display or active display) corresponding to the variable display to be determined at the time of the start winning is different from the normal mode is executed at a rate of 98%. Will be.

  As described above, when the first change effect is executed, the rate of the jackpot is higher than when the first change effect is not executed. In addition, when the first change effect is executed, when the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 becomes the golden mode, the ratio of the big hit becomes highest. As shown in FIG. 13A, regarding the display mode of the active display 30TM003, the degree of expectation to be a big hit has a relationship of a normal mode <special mode <blue mode <green mode <red mode <gold mode. .

  In addition, as shown in a change pattern of the first change effect described later, at the stage of the first hold display 30TM001 before the active display 30TM003, the display mode is a special mode, a blue mode, or a red mode different from the normal mode. It may be. Then, when the first hold display 30TM001 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 (when displayed as the active display 30TM003), at least the display mode is the same as that before the active shift or a display mode with a higher degree of expectation than that. To change. Therefore, with respect to the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001, the degree of expectation of a big hit has a relationship of normal mode <special mode <blue mode <red mode.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 13A, the rate at which the special mode is selected as the final display mode of the active display is extremely lower than the rate at which the other modes are selected. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 13-4 and 13-5 described later, the rate at which the special mode is included in the change pattern of the hold display is not so low as compared with the rate at which other modes are included. Therefore, when the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the special mode, the rate of change in the display mode is higher than when the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in another mode. The player cannot expect a big hit when the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the special mode as compared with the case where the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the blue mode or the red mode, but the display mode has a higher degree of expectation. It can be expected to change to a display mode (blue mode, red mode).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13-3 (B), when the determination result at the time of the start winning is “out” (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designating command is “out”), The sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first hold storage) are not displayed at the rate of 70%, but are displayed at the rate of 30%. The ratio in which the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed and the final display mode is the normal mode (white star display) is 25%, the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed, and The ratio of the final display mode being the blue mode (blue star display) is 4%, the sub-active display 30TM005 (the sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed, and the final display mode is the red mode (red star display). The ratio is 1%. In other words, the information (hold display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that is determined at the time of the start winning is displayed at a rate of 30%, and corresponds to the variable display that is determined at the time of the starting winning. The second change effect in which the mode of the information (hold display or active display) is different from the normal mode (white star display) is executed at a rate of 5%.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13-3 (B), when the determination result at the time of the start winning is “big hit” (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designating command is “big hit”), The sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first hold storage) are not displayed at the rate of 40%, but are displayed at the rate of 60%. The ratio in which the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed and the final display mode is the normal mode (white star display) is 25%, the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed, and The ratio in which the final display mode is the blue mode (blue star display) is 10%, the sub-active display 30TM005 (the sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed, and the final display mode is the red mode (red star display). The ratio is 25%. That is, the information (hold display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that is determined at the time of the start winning is displayed at a rate of 60%, and corresponds to the variable display that is determined at the time of the starting winning. The second change effect in which the mode of the information (hold display or active display) is different from the normal mode (white star display) is executed at a rate of 50%.

  As described above, when the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, the rate of the big hit is higher than when the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed. Further, when the second change effect is executed, the rate of the big hit is higher than when the second change effect is not executed. In addition, when the second change effect is executed, when the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is the red mode, the ratio of the big hit becomes highest. As shown in FIG. 13-3 (B), regarding the display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005, the degree of expectation to be a big hit has a relationship of normal mode <blue mode <red mode.

  Also, as shown in the change pattern of the second change effect described later, when the display mode is a blue mode or a red mode different from the normal mode at the stage of the sub-hold display 30TM004 before the sub-active display 30TM005. There is. Then, when the sub-hold display 30TM004 is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (when displayed as the sub-active display 30TM005), at least the display mode is the same as that before the active shift or a display with a higher degree of expectation than that. It changes to an aspect. Therefore, regarding the display mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004, the degree of expectation to be a big hit has a relationship of normal mode <blue mode <red mode.

  Here, in the process of step S30TM1030, effect control CPU 120 determines (1) to execute the first change effect (the final display mode of active display 30TM003 is set to a mode different from the normal mode), and the second It may be determined to execute a change effect (display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 and make the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 different from the normal mode).

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 may decide to execute (2-1) the first change effect and decide not to display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005. Also, (2-2) the first change effect is determined to be executed, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, but the second change effect is not executed (the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is normally In some cases).

  In addition, effect control CPU 120 determines (3) not to execute the first change effect (the final display mode of active display 30TM003 is set to the normal mode), and to execute the second change effect (sub-hold display 30TM004 and 30TM004). The sub-active display 30TM005 may be displayed and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 may be determined to be different from the normal mode.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 may decide not to execute the (4-1) first change effect, and decide not to display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005. (4-2) It is determined that the first change effect is not executed, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, but the second change effect is not executed (the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is normally In some cases).

  In the process of step S30TM1030, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that neither the first change effect nor the second change effect is executed (NO in step S30TM1040), that is, (4-1) and ( In the case of any of 4-2), the first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the new start winning (first hold storage) is displayed in a normal mode. The first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the new start prize (first hold storage) does not change from the normal mode to another mode. Even after the variable display corresponding to the first hold storage is started, the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed. Does not change from the normal mode to another mode (the change patterns 101 and 201 when the final display mode is the “normal mode” shown in FIGS. 13-4 and 13-5). 301, 401).

  In the case of the above (4-2), although the secondary hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning (first hold storage) is displayed, the display mode is changed from the normal mode to another mode. Even after the variable display corresponding to the first hold storage is started, the corresponding sub-active display 30TM005 does not change from the normal mode to another mode (see FIG. 13-6). , Change patterns 601, 701, 801, and 901 when the final display mode is the “normal mode”).

  If the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute at least one of the first change effect and the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1040), that is, (1), (2-1), and (2) If any of -2) and (3) applies, the change pattern of the change effect is determined as described below.

  If it is determined to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1050), that is, if the above (1) is satisfied, in step S30TM1060, the updated first The change pattern of the first change effect is determined on the basis of the number of stored memories (the first number of stored memories after receiving the first reserved memory number addition designation command) and the determined final display mode of the active display 30TM003 ( 13-4 and FIG. 13-5), the updated first reserved storage number (the first reserved storage number after receiving the first reserved storage number addition designation command), and the determined secondary active display 30TM005. The change pattern of the second change effect is determined based on the final display mode (see FIG. 13-6).

  If the effect control CPU 120 determines that the first change effect is to be executed and the second change effect is not to be executed (YES in step S30TM1110), that is, the above (2-1) and (2-2) If any of them is satisfied, in step S30TM1120, the updated first reserved storage number (the first reserved storage number after receiving the first reserved storage number addition designation command) and the finalized active display 30TM003 are determined. The change pattern of the first change effect is determined based on the display mode (see FIGS. 13-4 and 13-5). In addition, in the case of the above (2-2), the secondary hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning (first hold storage) is displayed, but the display mode is changed from the normal mode to another mode. Even after the variable display corresponding to the first hold storage is started, the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to this does not change from the normal mode to another mode (see FIG. 13-6). , Change patterns 601, 701, 801, and 901 when the final display mode is the “normal mode”).

  If the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the first change effect but to execute the second change effect (NO in step S30TM1110), that is, if it corresponds to the above (3), the process proceeds to step S30. In S30TM1210, based on the updated first reserved storage number (the first retained storage number after receiving the first reserved storage number addition designation command) and the determined final display mode of the secondary active display 30TM005, the second The change pattern of the change effect is determined (see FIG. 13-6).

  If the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute at least one of the first change effect and the second change effect (any of (1), (2-1) and (2-2), and (3) above) If this is the case, a prefetch counter is set (step S30TM1070, step S30TM1130, step S30TM1220). In the case where neither the first change effect nor the second change effect is performed, the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning (first hold memory) is displayed (in the case of (4-2) above). If so, set the look-ahead counter.

  The value (the value designated by the first reserved memory number designation command) corresponding to the first reserved memory number updated based on the winning start is set in the look-ahead counter, and the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. Every time (each time the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command is received), the value of the prefetch counter is decremented by one. That is, every time the first hold display 30TM001 or the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the hold storage which has been determined at the time of the start winning is shifted, the value of the look-ahead counter is decremented. Then, when the value of the look-ahead counter becomes 0, the variable display (or the second change effect is not executed, but the sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed as the target of the first change effect and / or the second change effect. (Variation display) is executed.

  If the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first change effect, it sets a change prohibition flag (step S30TM1080, step S30TM1140). During the period in which the change prohibition flag is set, even if a new start winning is generated, the answer to the above-described step S30TM1020 is YES, and the new start winning (new first hold storage) is handled. Neither the first change effect nor the second change effect is executed, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the new start winning (new first hold storage) are not displayed. The change prohibition flag is cleared when the change display targeted for the first change effect ends.

  FIGS. 13-4 and 13-5 are explanatory diagrams illustrating specific examples of the change pattern determination table for determining the change pattern of the first change effect. When the first holding storage number becomes n (n: 1 to 4) due to the start winning, (i) the n-th first holding display 30TM001 corresponding to the starting winning is displayed in the first holding display area 30TM101. (A timing at the time of a winning prize), (ii) the first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the start prize is shifted to a higher position (on the side of the active display area 30TM103) in the first hold display area 30TM101. Timing (when n ≧ 2), and (iii) timing at which the first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the starting winning is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 (timing at which the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the starting winning is displayed). ), Display information (suspended display or Active display) might be displayed in a different manner from the normal manner.

  In FIGS. 13-4 and 13-5, what kind of display information (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display is displayed at each of the timings (i) to (iii) for each change pattern. This indicates whether the display mode is set. In the change patterns shown in FIGS. 13-4 and 13-5, “normal” indicates a normal mode that is a white round display, and “special” indicates a special mode that is a white triangle display. Here, “blue” indicates a blue mode that is a blue round display, and “red” indicates a red mode that is a red round display.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for one hold shown in FIG. Select a table.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 101 has a probability of 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). The determination value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 101 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal state at the timing of the active shift.

  Note that in the description of FIGS. 13-4 and 13-5, the active shift means that the first hold display 30TM001 shifts from the first hold display area 30TM101 to the active display area 30TM103 (as a result, at the time of the start winning prize). The active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that has been determined is displayed).

  Here, when the normal mode is determined as the final display mode, and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 does not change in the normal mode.

  When the determined final display mode is a special mode, a change pattern 101, a change pattern 102, a change pattern 102, or a change pattern according to a determination result at the time of starting winning (a display result specified by a symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of the change patterns 103. The change pattern 102 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the special mode at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the special mode at the time of the start winning, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the active shift.

  Here, if the special mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the special mode. Also, a special mode is determined as the final display mode, and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change patterns 102 and 103, the change patterns 202 to 204 to be described later, the change pattern 302, and the change pattern 402). In (), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 remains unchanged in the special mode.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the blue mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, the change pattern 102, Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 103, 104, and 105, respectively. The change pattern 104 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in a special manner at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the blue form at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the blue form at the time of the start winning, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue form at the timing of the active shift.

  Here, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401 described later). After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the blue mode. Also, the blue mode is determined as the final display mode, and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change patterns 102 and 103, the change patterns 202 to 204, the change pattern 302, and the change pattern 402 described later) In ()), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the special mode to the blue mode. Further, the blue mode is determined as the final display mode, and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, and change pattern 403). And 404), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 remains unchanged in the blue mode.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, the change pattern 102, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102 according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command). Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 103, 104, and 105, respectively.

  Here, when the green mode is determined as the final display mode, and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the green mode. Also, the green mode is determined as the final display mode, and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402 to be described later). In ()), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the special mode to the green mode. Further, the green mode is determined as the final display mode, and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, and change pattern 403). And 404), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the blue mode to the green mode.

  When the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, the change pattern 102, Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 103, 104, 105, 106, and 107, respectively. The change pattern 106 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in a blue form at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the red form at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in a red form at the time of the start winning, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red form at the timing of the active shift.

  Here, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode, and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the red mode. Also, the red mode is determined as the final display mode, and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402 described later). In ()), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the special mode to the red mode. Further, the red mode is determined as the final display mode, and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, and change pattern 403). And 404), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the blue mode to the red mode. Further, the red mode is determined as the final display mode, and the red mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 106 and 107, change patterns 209 to 212, change patterns 306 to 310, and change pattern 405 described later). 412), the active display 30TM003 remains in the red mode after the active shift.

  When the determined final display mode is the golden mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, the change pattern 102, Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 103, 104, 105, 106, and 107, respectively.

  Here, when the golden mode is determined as the final display mode, and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the golden mode. Also, the golden mode is determined as the final display mode, and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change patterns 102 and 103, the change patterns 202 to 204 to be described later, the change pattern 302, and the change pattern 402). In (), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the special mode to the golden mode. In addition, the gold mode is determined as the final display mode, and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, and change pattern 403). And 404), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the blue mode to the golden mode. In addition, when the gold mode is determined as the final display mode and the color mode is the red mode at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 106 and 107, change patterns 209 to 212, change patterns 306 to 310, and change pattern 405 described later). After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the red mode to the golden mode.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the two holdings shown in FIG. 13-4 (B) when the first holding storage number stored in the first holding number storage area is “2”. Select a table.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 201 has a 100% probability regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). The determination value is assigned as determined by. In the change pattern 201, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the active shift of the active shift is not changed. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display to be notified is not changed in the normal mode even at the timing.

  When the determined final display mode is a special mode, a change pattern 201, a change pattern 202, a change pattern 202, or a change pattern according to a determination result at the time of starting winning (a display result specified by a symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 203 and 204, respectively. In the change pattern 202, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the active shift of the active shift is not changed. This is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode at a timing. The change pattern 203 is the timing of the first hold shift after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning. Is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the special mode, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the active shift. After the first hold display is displayed in the special mode, the first hold display to be notified changes in the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift. Without a change pattern remains unchanged at special embodiment the first hold display notice object in the timing of the active shift.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the blue mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, and the change pattern 208, respectively. In the change pattern 205, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 206 is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the notice object into a blue form, and the change pattern 206 displays the first hold display of the notice object in a special form at the time of the start winning, and then gives the notice at the timing of the first hold shift. The first hold display of the target is not changed in the special mode, and the first hold display of the target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 207 is the first target of the notification at the time of the start winning. After the first hold display is displayed in the special mode, the first hold display to be notified is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 208 is that the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the blue form at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display is performed. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the shift, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue mode even at the timing of the active shift.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, and the change pattern 208, respectively.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, the change pattern according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, the change pattern 208, the change pattern 209, the change pattern 210, the change pattern 211, and the change pattern 212, respectively. ing. In the change pattern 209, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in a special manner at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the blue form at the timing of the first hold shift, and is changed at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 210 is a change pattern for changing the first hold display of the notice object to a red form. The change pattern 210 is such that the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the blue form at the time of the start winning, and then the notice is given at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the target is not changed in the blue mode and the first hold display of the target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 211 is the first display of the target in the start winning. After the first hold display is displayed in the blue mode, the first hold display to be notified is changed to the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the live shift, and the change pattern 212 is that the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the red form at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display is performed. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the advance notice is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the shift, and the first hold display of the advance notice is not changed in the red mode even at the timing of the active shift.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the golden mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, the change pattern 208, the change pattern 209, the change pattern 210, the change pattern 211, and the change pattern 212, respectively. ing.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the three reservations shown in FIG. 13-5 (C) when the first reservation storage number stored in the first reservation storage number storage area is “3”. Select a table.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 301 has a 100% probability regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). The determination value is assigned as determined by. In the change pattern 301, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal state at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold display is not changed. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal state even at the timing of the active shift.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 301 and the change pattern are determined according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, which is a loss or a big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of the reference numbers 302. In the change pattern 302, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the advance notice is not changed in the special mode at the timing of, and the first hold display of the advance notice is not changed in the special mode even at the timing of the active shift.

  When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, a change pattern 301, a change pattern 302, a change pattern 302, a change pattern according to a determination result at the time of a start winning (a display result specified by a symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 303, 304, and 305, respectively. In the change pattern 303, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. Is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the change, and the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the blue form at the timing of the active shift. After the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode, the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice object is changed at the timing of the second hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the hold display is changed to the blue mode and the first hold display to be notified is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. In the pattern 305, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold is performed. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue mode even at the shift timing, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue mode even at the active shift timing.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, the change pattern 302, Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 303, 304, and 305, respectively.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the red mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, the change pattern 302, Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 303, 304, 305, 306, 307, 308, 309, and 310, respectively. In the change pattern 306, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. Is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the blue form at the timing of 、, and the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the red form at the timing of the active shift. Is displayed in the blue mode, the first hold display of the notification target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first notification of the target is also displayed at the timing of the second hold shift. A change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift without changing the hold display in the blue mode, After the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, the change pattern 308 does not change the first hold display of the notice object in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift and the second time The first hold display of the notice object is changed to the red form at the timing of the hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed to the red form at the time of the active shift. The change pattern 309 is a start winning. Sometimes, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in a blue mode, the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice object is changed at the timing of the second hold shift. (1) A change pattern that does not change the hold display in the red mode and does not change the first hold display to be notified even in the active shift timing in the red mode. In the change pattern 310, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in a red form at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red form at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red mode even at the timing of the second hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red mode even at the timing of the active shift.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the golden mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, the change pattern 302, Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 303, 304, 305, 306, 307, 308, 309, and 310, respectively.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for four holdings shown in FIG. 13D when the first number of holdings stored in the first holding number storage area is “4”. Select a table.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 401 has a 100% probability regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). The determination value is assigned as determined by. In the change pattern 401, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal state at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold display is not changed. The first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the hold shift, the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal state at the timing of the third hold shift, and the active shift timing is not changed. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display to be notified is not changed in the normal mode.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 401 and the change pattern are determined according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, a loss or a big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of 402. In the change pattern 402, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. The first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the special mode at the timing of, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the third hold shift. Is a change pattern in which the first hold display is not changed in the special mode.

  When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, a change pattern 401, a change pattern 402, a change pattern 402, or a change pattern according to a determination result at the time of a start winning (a display result specified by a symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 403 and 404, respectively. In the change pattern 403, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. The first hold display of the notice object is changed to the blue mode at the timing of, the first hold display of the notice object is not changed to the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice object is also changed at the timing of the active shift. 1 is a change pattern in which the hold display is not changed in the blue mode, and the change pattern 404 is such that the first hold display of the preview target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, and then the change of the preview target is performed at the timing of the first hold shift. 1 Hold display is not changed in the blue mode, and the first hold display to be notified is not changed in the blue mode even at the timing of the second hold shift, 3 times. Without change from the first hold display blue aspects notice object in the timing of the hold shift, a change pattern remains unchanged blue embodiments the first hold display notice object in the timing of the active shift.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, the change pattern 401, Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 403 and 404, respectively.

  Regarding the case where the final display mode determined is the red mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, and the change pattern are determined according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, a loss or a big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 403, 404, and 405 to 412, respectively. In the change pattern 405, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. At the timing of the third hold shift, the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice object is changed at the timing of the active shift. The first hold display is a change pattern for changing the first hold display to the red mode, and the change pattern 406 is such that the first hold display of the preview target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first notification target is displayed at the timing of the first hold shift. The hold display is changed to the special mode, the first hold display to be notified is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the time of the third hold shift is changed. Is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the red form at the timing of the active shift without changing the first hold display of the notice object in the blue mode. After displaying the first hold display of the target in the normal mode, the first hold display of the notification target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notification target is performed at the timing of the second hold shift. The display is changed to a blue mode, the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 408 is a first, second, and third hold after displaying a first hold display of a notice target in a blue mode at the time of starting winning. The first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue mode even at the timing of the shift, and the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 409 is a start winning. Sometimes, the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the blue mode after the first hold display of the notice object is displayed in the blue mode, and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first and second hold shifts. Is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice object is changed to the red form and the first hold display of the notice object is not changed to the red form at the timing of the active shift. After the first hold display is displayed in the blue mode, the first hold display to be notified changes in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift. The first hold display of the notice object is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice object remains in the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift and the active shift. The change pattern 411 is a change pattern that is not changed. The change pattern 411 changes the first hold display of the notice target to the red form at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the blue form at the time of the start winning. The first hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red mode even at the timing of the second and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 412 is the first notice of the notice object at the time of the start winning. After the hold display is displayed in red, the timing of the first, second, and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift Also grayed is without changing the change pattern of the red aspect the first hold display notice object.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the golden mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, and the change pattern are determined according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 403, 404, 405, 406, 407, 408, 409, 410, 411, and 412, respectively. ing.

  FIG. 13-6 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the change pattern determination table for determining the change pattern of the second change effect. In the case where the first hold storage number has become n (n: 1 to 4) due to the start winning, and it is determined to display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005, (i 1) The first to n-th sub-hold displays 30TM004 corresponding to the first number n of the first storage to be stored are displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104, and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display being executed at that time is displayed. The timing (timing at the time of the winning prize) displayed in the active display area 30TM105, (ii) the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the starting prize is positioned higher in the fluctuation order in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 (the sub-active display area 30TM105). Side) (when n ≧ 2), and (iii) At the timing when the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the moving prize is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (when the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the starting prize is displayed), the display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting prize. Information (pending display or active display) may be displayed in a mode different from the normal mode.

  In FIG. 13-6, for each change pattern, at each of the timings (i) to (iii), what kind of display mode is displayed for the display information (the sub-hold display 30TM004 or the sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display. Is shown. In the change pattern shown in FIG. 13-6, “normal” indicates a normal mode that is a white star display, “blue” indicates a blue mode that is a blue star display, and “ “Red” indicates a red mode that is a red star display.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for one hold shown in FIG. 13-6 (A) when the first hold number stored in the first hold number storage area is “1”. Select a table.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 601 has a 100% probability regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). The determination value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 601 is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift.

  Note that in the description of FIG. 13-6, the active shift means that the sub-hold display 30TM004 shifts from the sub-hold display area 30TM104 to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (as a result, the fluctuation which becomes the judgment target at the time of the start winning). (The sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the display is displayed.)

  Here, when the normal mode is determined as the final display mode, and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 601, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 801, and the change pattern 901 described later), After the active shift, the sub-active display 30TM005 does not change in the normal mode.

  When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 601, the change pattern 602, the change pattern 601, the change result according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command is a loss or a big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of the change patterns 603. The change pattern 602 is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice object is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 603 is the start pattern. This is a change pattern in which, when a prize is won, the sub-hold display of the notice object is displayed in the blue mode, and the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift.

  Here, if the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 601, a change pattern 701, a change pattern 801, and a change pattern 901 described later). After the active shift, the sub-active display 30TM005 finally changes from the normal mode to the blue mode. In addition, the blue mode is determined as the final display mode, and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 602 and 603, change patterns 702 to 704, change patterns 802 to 804, and change pattern 902 described later). 905), the sub-active display 30TM005 remains unchanged in blue after the active shift.

  Regarding the case where the final display mode determined is the red mode, the change pattern 601, the change pattern 602, and the Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 603, 604, and 605, respectively. A change pattern 604 is a change pattern in which a sub-hold display of a notice object is displayed in a blue form at the time of start winning, and then the sub-hold display of a notice object is changed to a red form at the timing of an active shift. A change pattern 605 is a start pattern. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice object is displayed in the red mode at the time of winning, and the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift.

  Here, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode, and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 601, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 801, and the change pattern 901 described later). After the active shift, the sub-active display 30TM005 finally changes from the normal mode to the red mode. When the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 602 and 603, change patterns 702 to 704, change patterns 802 to 804, and change pattern 902 described later). 905), the sub-active display 30TM005 changes from the blue mode to the red mode after the active shift. Further, the red mode is determined as the final display mode, and the red mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 604 and 605, change patterns 705 to 708, change patterns 805 to 808, and change pattern 906 described later). -912), after the active shift, the sub-active display 30TM005 does not change in the red mode.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the two holdings shown in FIG. 13-6 (B) when the first holding number stored in the first holding number storage area is “2”. Select a table.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 701 has a 100% probability regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, a loss or a big hit). The determination value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 701 is such that the sub-hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and is also changed at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display to be notified in the normal mode.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 702, the change pattern 701, the change pattern according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 703 and 704, respectively. The change pattern 702 is such that the sub-hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, but is changed at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern for changing the sub-hold display of the notice target into a blue mode, and the change pattern 703 is to display the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and thereafter, at the timing of the first hold shift, This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display is changed to the blue mode and the sub-hold display to be notified is not changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. After the display, the auxiliary hold display of the target for notice is displayed in blue at the timing of the first hold shift and the timing of the active shift. A change pattern remains unchanged at like.

  Regarding the case where the final display mode determined is the red mode, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 702, the change pattern 702, A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 703, the change pattern 704, and the change patterns 705 to 708. The change pattern 705 is to display the sub-hold display of the notice object in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, change the sub-hold display of the notice object to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and change the sub-hold display of the notice object at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 706 is a change pattern for changing the sub-hold display in red to the red mode. The change pattern 706 displays the sub-hold display to be notified in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, and then the sub-hold to be notified at the first hold shift timing. This is a change pattern in which the display is not changed in the blue mode and the sub-hold display of the preview target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 707 is the sub-hold display of the notification target in the blue mode at the time of the start winning. After the display, at the timing of the first hold shift, the sub-hold display to be notified is changed to a red mode, and the active shift The change pattern 708 is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode during the game, and the change pattern 708 indicates the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice object in the red mode at the time of starting winning. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display to be notified is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the three holdings shown in FIG. Select a table.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 801 has a 100% probability regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). The determination value is assigned as determined by. In the change pattern 801, the secondary hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the secondary hold display of the notification target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of, and the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode even at the timing of the active shift.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 801 and the change pattern according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, a loss or a big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of the change patterns 802 to the change patterns 804. The change pattern 802 is such that the sub-hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. Is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice object is changed to the blue mode at the timing of, and the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 803 is the After the sub-hold display is displayed in the normal mode, the sub-hold display to be notified is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-hold to be notified at the timing of the second hold shift and the active shift is performed. The change pattern is a change pattern in which the display is not changed in a blue mode. After displayed in blue manner, first time, for the second time hold shift, a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display notice object at the timing of the active shift remains blue aspect.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 801, the change pattern 802, the change pattern 802, Determination values are assigned to the change patterns 803, 804, and 805 to 808, respectively. The change pattern 805 is as follows: the sub-hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the sub-hold display of the notice object is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the timing of the second hold shift is performed. Is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice object is changed to a red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the sub-hold display of the notice object is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. Is displayed in the blue mode, the sub-hold display of the preview target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-hold display of the preview target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display to be notified is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift. At the time of the start winning, the sub-hold display of the notice object is displayed in a blue mode, and then the sub-hold display of the notice object is changed to the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the timing of the second hold shift and the active shift are displayed. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red mode at the timing, and the change pattern 808 is the first and second hold shifts after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice object in the red mode at the time of starting winning. At the timing of the active shift, the sub-hold display to be notified is not changed in the red mode.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for four holdings shown in FIG. 13D when the first number of holdings stored in the first holding number storage area is “4” Select a table.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 901 has a 100% probability regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). The determination value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 901 displays the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then displays the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first, second, third hold shift, and the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern that is not changed.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 901 and the change pattern according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to 902 to change pattern 905, respectively. The change pattern 902 is such that the sub-hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first and second hold shifts. Is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice object is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the hold shift, and the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the sub-hold display of the notice object in the normal mode, the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-hold of the notice object is changed at the timing of the second hold shift. The display is changed to the blue mode, and the auxiliary hold display to be notified is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift and the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 904 is a change pattern that is not changed, and the change pattern 904 displays the sub-hold display of the notice object in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then changes the sub-hold display of the notice object to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the second and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display to be notified is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first, second, and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift after being displayed in the mode.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change patterns 901 to 905, and the change pattern 901 to the change pattern 905 in accordance with the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, a loss or a big hit). The determination values are assigned to the change patterns 906 to 912, respectively. The change pattern 906 is such that the sub-hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. At the timing of the third hold shift, the secondary hold display of the advance notice is changed to red at the timing of the third hold shift, and the secondary hold display of the advance notice is red at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 907 is a change pattern that is not changed as it is, and the change pattern 907 displays the sub-hold display of the notice object in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then changes the sub-hold display of the notice object to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift. At the timing of the second hold shift, and without changing the sub-hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the timing of the second hold shift, the timing of the third hold shift The sub-hold display of the notice object is changed to the red mode, and the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 908 is the sub-hold display of the notice object at the time of the start winning. Is displayed in the normal mode, the sub-hold display of the notice object is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-hold display of the notice object is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift, At the timing of the third hold shift, the timing of the active shift is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode, and the change pattern 909 displays the sub-hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of the start winning. After that, at the timing of the first and second hold shifts, the auxiliary hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode, and The sub-hold display of the notice object is changed to the red mode at the timing of the eye hold shift, and the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 910 is a start winning. Sometimes, the auxiliary hold display of the advance notice is displayed in the blue mode, and then the auxiliary hold display of the advance notice remains unchanged in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the secondary hold display of the advance target is displayed at the timing of the second hold shift. The hold display is changed to the red mode, and the sub-hold display to be notified is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift and the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 911 is the target of the notice at the time of the start winning. Is displayed in blue mode, and the sub-hold display to be notified is red at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red form at the timing of the second and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 912 is the change of the notice target at the time of the start winning. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display to be notified is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the first, second, third hold shift and the timing of the active shift after the sub-hold display is displayed in the red mode.

  As shown in FIG. 13C, the rate at which the first change effect in which the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode is executed is the sub-hold display 30TM004 or the sub-active display 30TM005. Is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13C, when the second change effect is executed, the ratio of the big hit is higher than when the first change effect is executed.

  As described above, in the lower part of the screen, the first change effect for changing the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 having high visibility is executed at a high frequency, and thereby the player with respect to the notice effect is performed. Interest can be sustained. On the other hand, with respect to the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 having low visibility, the ratio of the big hit depends on whether or not the sub-hold display 30TM004 is displayed at the top of the screen. It will be noted whether or not the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed. Furthermore, since the big hit expectation in the case where the second change effect is executed is higher than the first change effect, when the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, whether or not the display mode changes. You will also pay attention to

  In the present embodiment, a round or triangular icon (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) displayed at the bottom of the screen and a star icon (secondary hold display 30TM004 or secondary active display) displayed at the top of the screen are displayed. 30TM005) is different in size and shape. That is, a plurality of types of icons corresponding to the common hold storage and the common variable display are simultaneously displayed at different display positions in the same screen. In this example, one of the two types of icons (the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003) is displayed as a circle, and the other icon (the sub-hold display 30TM004 or the sub-active display 30TM005) is displayed as a star. This clarifies the characteristics of each icon so that the player can easily grasp the difference (being different types of display information). Also, the effects produced by the icons corresponding to the variable display can be diversified, and the interest can be improved.

  Further, as in the relationship between the first hold display 30TM001 in the red mode displayed at the bottom of the screen and the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the red mode displayed at the top of the screen, a common display color corresponding to the common variable display is displayed. Icons (note that the icons differ in round and star shapes) may be displayed at the same time. Thereby, the variable display that is the target of the first change effect and the second change effect becomes clearer in the first hold display region 30TM101 and the sub-hold display region 30TM104, and the first change effect and the second change effect are displayed. It becomes easier for the player to understand the jackpot expectation degree regarding the target variable display.

  Further, as in the relationship between the red active display 30TM003 displayed at the bottom of the screen and the red active display 30TM005 displayed at the top of the screen, an icon of a common display color corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed. (However, icons with different shapes for round and star shapes) may be displayed at the same time. This makes it easier for the player to understand the jackpot expectation degree related to the variable display being executed.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 13-4 to 13-6, the big hit expectation differs depending on the combination of the display color of the first hold display 30TM001 and the display color of the sub-hold display 30TM004 (for example, in the red mode). Since the combination of the first hold display 30TM001 and the red-hold sub-hold display 30TM004 has the highest jackpot expectation), the player becomes interested in both hold display modes, and displays the hold display. It is possible to enhance the interest of the effect of changing the mode.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 13C, the big hit expectation differs depending on the combination of the display color of the active display 30TM003 and the display color of the sub-active display 30TM005 (for example, the active display 30TM003 in the gold mode and the red display in the red mode). Since the combination of the sub-active displays 30TM005 has the highest jackpot expectation), the player becomes interested in both active display modes, and the effect of changing the display mode of the active display is enhanced. be able to.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-4 and 13-5, when the first hold display 30TM001 shifts to the active display area 30TM103 (the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display targeted for the first change effect is displayed). (When displayed), the display color is at least the same (that is, whether the display color is taken over during the active shift) or the display color is changed to a display color with higher expectation. This allows the player to be interested in how the first hold display 30TM001 changes.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 13-6, when the sub-hold display 30TM004 shifts to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (when the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display targeted for the second change effect is displayed). ), The display color is at least the same (that is, whether the display color is taken over during the active shift) or the display color is changed to a display color with higher expectation. This allows the player to be interested in how the secondary hold display 30TM004 changes.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13C, the active display 30TM003 with high visibility has more display modes than the sub-active display 30TM005 with low visibility. Then, as shown in FIGS. 13-4 to 13-6, the change pattern when changing the mode of the first hold display 30TM001 with high visibility is changed when the mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 with low visibility is changed. Are provided more than the change patterns. In this way, by changing the type of effect that can be performed and the effect pattern in accordance with the visibility of the active display and the hold display, the first change effect and the second effect can be prevented while preventing the effect from being excessively complicated. We try to appropriately enhance the interest of change production.

(Specific examples of the first change effect and the second change effect)
Next, specific examples of the first change effect and the second change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-7 to 13-9. FIG. 13-7 is a time chart when executing both the first change effect and the second change effect. FIGS. 13-8 and 13-9 illustrate both the first change effect and the second change effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when executing.

  First, FIG. 13-8 (1) shows a state in which the first hold storage number is 3 and the display pattern of the left-middle-right decoration pattern is changed on the image display device 5 (started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 13-7). (Variation display) is being executed. At this time, the active display area 30TM103 displays the normal mode active display 30TM003 (white circular display), and the first hold display area 30TM101 displays the normal mode first hold display 30TM001 (white circular display). ) Are displayed. At this time, the sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed, and the sub-active display 30TM005 is not displayed. Also, a guide (square frame) indicating the sub-active display area 30TM105 is not displayed.

  Then, when the variable display of the middle left and right decorative symbols is being executed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (2) (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 13-7), a new prize is won. It is assumed that a start winning prize has occurred in the ball device 6A, and the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first change effect, the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning prize that has been determined (the gold mode in this example). And, when the change pattern of the first change effect (the change pattern 407 in this example) is determined and the execution of the second change effect is determined, the sub-active display corresponding to the start winning prize that has been determined is determined. The final display mode of 30TM005 (red mode in this example) and the change pattern of the second change effect (change pattern 906 in this example) are determined. At this time, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4, 4 is set as the value of the prefetch counter. That is, the value of the look-ahead counter indicates the remaining number of times of variable display until the variable display serving as the target of the pre-read notice effect is executed.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the normal mode sub-active display 30TM005 (white star display) in the sub-active display area 30TM105 based on the decision to execute the second change effect. A guide (square frame) indicating the active display area 30TM105 is displayed. The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed at this time corresponds to the variation display of the currently executed decorative symbol (first special symbol). Also, based on the fact that the first number of storages is four, four sub-holding displays 30TM004 (white star display) in a normal mode are displayed in the sub-holding display area 30TM104.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the change prohibition flag based on the decision to execute the first change effect as shown in (T2) of FIG. 13-7 and FIG. 13-8 (2). Then, the execution of the first change effect and the second change effect for the start winning prize (first hold storage) generated thereafter is prohibited. During the execution prohibition period of the first change effect and the second change effect, after the first hold display 30TM001 as the target of the first change effect is displayed (the sub-hold display 30TM004 as the target of the second change effect is displayed). ), And the period (the period from T2 to T9 shown in FIG. 13-7) until the variable display corresponding to the first hold display 30TM001 (the sub-hold display 30TM004) ends.

  Accordingly, when a new start winning is generated within the change effect prohibition period, the first hold display 30TM001 (white circular display) in a normal mode corresponding to the start winning is displayed, and the change effect is prohibited. During the period, the first hold display of the normal mode does not change to another mode (for example, the special mode, the blue mode, or the red mode). Further, based on the fact that the change prohibition flag is set, whether or not to execute the second change effect and the final display mode are not determined (YES in step S30TM1020 and the process in step S30TM1030 is not executed). The corresponding sub-hold display 30TM004 and sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to such a form, and when a new start winning is generated within the change effect prohibition period, the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the normal mode corresponding to the new starting winning can be displayed, The display mode of the secondary hold display 30TM004 may not be changed.

  In this example, since the first hold storage number is 4 based on the winning start, the fourth first hold display 30TM001 and the second hold display area 30TM104 displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101 are displayed. The fourth sub-hold display 30TM004 displayed is a hold display corresponding to a variable display to be notified by the first change effect and the second change effect. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 13-8 (3).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (4) (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 13-7), effect control CPU 120 erases active display 30TM003 displayed in active display area 30TM103, and deletes the first display. The first hold display 30TM001 displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is deleted. Then, the sub-hold display 30TM004 displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is shifted one by one to the sub-active display area 30TM105 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

  In this shift display, the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103, is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become. In this shift display, the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the sub-hold display at the position closest to the sub-active display area 30TM105, is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 and displayed as the sub-active display 30TM005. Will be.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (4) (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 13-7), the effect control CPU 120 starts the change display based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect. Then, the first reserved display to be notified is changed from the normal mode to the special mode (the first reserved display 30TM001a which is a white triangle display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 13-8 (5).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (6) (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 13-7), effect control CPU 120 erases active display 30TM003 displayed in active display area 30TM103, and deletes the first display. The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001a in the special mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 are shifted and displayed one by one toward the active display area 30TM103. The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is erased, and the sub-hold display (the normal mode sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star display)) displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is set to 1 One by one to the sub-active display area 30TM105 side. It was collected displayed in the image display device 5 starts displaying the following variations.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (6) (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 13-7), the effect control CPU 120 starts changing display based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect. Then, the first hold display of the notice object is changed from the special mode to the blue mode (the first hold display 30TM001b which is a blue circle display in this example), and based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect, The sub-hold display to be notified is changed from the normal mode to the blue mode (the sub-hold display 30TM004b which is a blue star display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (8) (at timing T5 shown in FIG. 13-7), effect control CPU 120 erases active display 30TM003 displayed in active display area 30TM103, and deletes the first display. The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 are shifted one by one toward the active display area 30TM103, and at the same time, The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is erased, and the sub-hold display (normal mode sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star display) and blue mode) displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 are displayed. Display 30TM004b (blue star Shown)) shifts the display one by one sub active display area 30TM105 side, the image display device 5 starts displaying the following variations.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (8) (at the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 13-7), the effect control CPU 120 starts changing display based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect. Then, the first hold display of the notice object is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (the first hold display 30TM001c which is a red circle display in this example), and based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect, The sub-hold display to be notified is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (the sub-hold display 30TM004c which is a red star display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 13-9 (9).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (10) (at timing T6 shown in FIG. 13-7), effect control CPU 120 erases active display 30TM003 displayed in active display area 30TM103 and performs the first display. The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001c in red mode (red circle display)) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub-active display area 30TM105. Of the sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM104, and the sub-active display displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 (the sub-hold display 30TM004c in red mode (red star display)) is displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105. Shift display, and in the image display device 5 To start the display of the change.

  After the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display that is the target of the first change effect (after displaying the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the first change effect), FIG. In the active display area 30TM103, the active display 30TM003c in the red mode is changed to the final display mode (gold in this example) in the period from T7 to T8 of 13-7. A change pattern for changing the display mode of the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 after the shift display will be described later with reference to FIGS. When changing the display mode of the active display 30TM003, a change suggestion effect described later may be executed.

  If the sub-active display 30TM005 is not in the final display mode immediately after the shift display, the sub-active display 30TM005 is finally displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 within the period from T7 to T8 in FIG. Vary to the mode. For example, when the final display mode of the secondary active display 30TM005 determined at the time of the start winning is a red mode and the secondary active display 30TM005 is displayed in a blue mode immediately after the shift display, in the variable display of the notice target, The sub-active display 30TM005 is changed from the blue mode to the red mode.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (11) (at timing T8 in FIG. 13-7), the same decorative symbol (“7” in this example) stops in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area. The reach state is established, and a reach effect is displayed in which the character “REACH !!” is displayed at the bottom of the screen, that is, in an area overlapping the first hold display area 30TM101 and the active display area 30TM103. Here, at the timing when the reach state is established, the first hold display 30TM001, the second hold display 30TM002, and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed, so that the visibility of the reach effect is prevented from being reduced and the interest is not reduced. can do. The first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed until the change display of the notice target ends (until the timing shown at T9 in FIG. 13-7).

  As described above, as the reach effect is executed at the lower part of the screen, the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003, which have at least a part of the display region common to the region where the reach effect is executed, are not displayed. On the other hand, as for the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display which are displayed in an area different from the area where the reach effect is executed, the period during which the reach effect is executed can be continuously displayed at the top of the screen. The player can visually recognize these. This allows the player to easily grasp the number of stored reservations even during the execution of the reach effect, and also to grasp the display mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display.

(Specific example of executing only the first change effect)
Next, a specific example in a case where it is determined that only the first change effect is performed at the time of the start winning is described with reference to FIGS. 13-10 to 13-12. FIG. 13-10 is a time chart when only the first change effect is executed, and FIGS. 13-11 and 13-12 are displayed on the image display device 5 when only the first change effect is executed. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect image.

  First, FIG. 13-11 (1) shows a state in which the first hold storage number is 3 and the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are fluctuated on the image display device 5 (started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 13-10). (Variation display) is being executed. At this time, the active display area 30TM103 displays the normal mode active display 30TM003 (white circular display), and the first hold display area 30TM101 displays the normal mode first hold display 30TM001 (white circular display). ) Are displayed.

  Then, when the variable display of the left-middle-right decorative symbol is executed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (2) (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 13-10), a new prize is won. It is assumed that a start winning prize has occurred in the ball device 6A, and the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute only the first change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first change effect, the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning prize that has been determined (the gold mode in this example). , And the change pattern of the first change effect (the change pattern 407 in this example) is determined. Further, in this example, it is assumed that the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed (therefore, the second change effect is not executed). At this time, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4, 4 is set as the value of the prefetch counter. That is, the value of the look-ahead counter indicates the remaining number of times of variable display until the variable display serving as the target of the pre-read notice effect is executed.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 does not display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 based on the determination that the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed by the determination at the time of the start winning, Also, a guide (square frame) indicating the sub-active display area 30TM105 is not displayed.

  Further, based on the decision to execute the first change effect, the effect control CPU 120 sets the change prohibition flag as shown in (T2) of FIG. 13-10 and FIG. 13-11 (2). Then, the execution of the first change effect and the second change effect for the start winning prize (first hold storage) generated thereafter is prohibited. During the execution prohibition period of the first change effect and the second change effect, the period from when the first hold display 30TM001 that is the target of the first change effect is displayed until the change display corresponding to the first hold display 30TM001 ends. This is a period (a period from T2 to T9 shown in FIG. 13-10).

  Accordingly, when a new start winning is generated within the change effect prohibition period, the first hold display 30TM001 (white circular display) in a normal mode corresponding to the start winning is displayed, and the change effect is prohibited. During the period, the first hold display of the normal mode does not change to another mode (for example, the special mode, the blue mode, or the red mode). Further, based on the fact that the change prohibition flag is set, whether or not to execute the second change effect and the final display mode are not determined (YES in step S30TM1020 and the process in step S30TM1030 is not executed). The corresponding sub-hold display 30TM004 and sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to such a form, and when a new start winning is generated within the change effect prohibition period, the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the normal mode corresponding to the new starting winning can be displayed, The display mode of the secondary hold display 30TM004 may not be changed.

  In this example, since the first number of storages to be held is 4 based on the winning start, the fourth first hold display 30TM001 displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101 is a target to be notified by the first change effect. Is a suspended display corresponding to the variable display. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 13-11 (3).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (4) (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 13-10), effect control CPU 120 erases active display 30TM003 displayed in active display area 30TM103 and performs the first display. The first suspended display 30TM001 displayed in the suspended display area 30TM101 is shifted one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

  In this shift display, the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103, is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (4) (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 13-10), the effect control CPU 120 starts changing display based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect. Then, the first reserved display to be notified is changed from the normal mode to the special mode (the first reserved display 30TM001a which is a white triangle display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 13-11 (5).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (6) (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 13-10), effect control CPU 120 erases active display 30TM003 displayed in active display area 30TM103, and deletes the first display. The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001a in the special mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103, and the image display device is displayed. At 5, the next variable display is started.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (6) (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 13-10), the effect control CPU 120 starts changing display based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect. Then, the first reserved display to be notified is changed from the special mode to the blue mode (the first reserved display 30TM001b which is a blue circular display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 13-11 (7).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (8) (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 13-10), effect control CPU 120 erases active display 30TM003 displayed in active display area 30TM103 and performs the first display. The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103, and the image display device is displayed. At 5, the next variable display is started.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (8) (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 13-10), the effect control CPU 120 starts the change display based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect. Then, the first reserved display to be notified is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (the first reserved display 30TM001c which is a red circular display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (10) (timing of T6 shown in FIG. 13-10), effect control CPU 120 erases active display 30TM003 displayed in active display area 30TM103 and performs the first display. The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001c in red mode (red circle display)) displayed on the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed on the active display area 30TM103 side, and the next fluctuation is displayed on the image display device 5. Start display.

  After the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display that is the target of the first change effect (after displaying the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the first change effect), FIG. In the period from T7 to T8 of 13-10, the active display 30TM003c in the red mode is changed to the final display mode (gold in this example) in the active display area 30TM103.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (11) (at timing T8 in FIG. 13-10), the same decorative symbol (“7” in this example) stops in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area. The reach state is established, and a reach effect is displayed in which the character “REACH !!” is displayed in the lower part of the screen, that is, in the area overlapping the first hold display area 30TM101 and the active display area 30TM103. Here, at the timing when the reach state is established, the first hold display 30TM001, the second hold display 30TM002, and the active display 30TM003 become non-display. The first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed until the change display of the notice object ends (until the timing shown at T9 in FIG. 13-10).

  As described above, when it is determined that only the first change effect is to be executed at the time of the start winning, a new start winning effect is required until the variable display targeted for the first change effect ends. Is not executed, and the second change effect based on the new start winning is not executed. As described above, after the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is temporarily changed in the first hold display area 30TM101 having high visibility (after the mode is changed from the normal mode), a new start winning is generated thereafter. Even in this case, by preventing the second change effect based on the new start winning prize from being executed in the sub-hold display region 30TM104 with low visibility, the player is focused on the first change effect with high visibility, The effect of complicating the effect due to the execution of the second change effect for the variable display different from the variable display targeted for the one change effect is prevented.

  In the present embodiment, if a new starting prize is generated after the execution of the first change effect (the period in which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), the new start prize is generated. Although the example in which the execution of the first change effect and the second change effect corresponding to the start winning prize is prohibited has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a form. Is displayed in a different manner), when a new start winning is generated, the first change effect and the second change effect corresponding to the new start winning can be executed, but at that time, The execution ratio of the first change effect and the second change effect may be made lower than before the execution of the first change effect (the period in which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the normal mode).

  In addition, after the execution of the first change effect (the period in which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), if a new start winning is generated, not only the second change effect but also another notice The execution of the effect may be restricted. For example, the remaining number of times of variable display until the variable display based on the new start winning prize is executed is displayed on the image display device 5 every time the variable display is executed (for example, the first hold storage number is changed from 3 to 0). Along with the subtraction by one, “3”, “2”, “1”, and “0” are displayed). The countdown effect may not be executed. Further, the background change effect of changing the background image to the special mode may not be executed until the variable display based on the new start winning is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, if a new start winning is generated after the execution of the first change effect (the period in which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), the new start prize is generated. Although the example in which the execution of both the first change effect and the second change effect corresponding to the start winning prize has been described, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment, and after the execution of the first change effect (the first hold display 30TM001 is normally displayed). If a new start prize is generated during a period displayed in a mode different from the mode), the first change effect corresponding to the new start prize can be executed, but the new start prize can be executed. The second change effect is not executed (the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning is not displayed, or the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning is displayed. As the display mode remains unchanged at the normal mode) as it may be.

(Modifications regarding the first change production and the second change production)
In the above embodiment, an example in which the mode is changed at the timing when the first hold display 30TM001 is shifted and displayed in the first change effect, and the mode is changed when the sub-hold display 30TM004 is shift displayed in the second change effect. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is changed in response to the execution of the first hold action effect acting on the first hold display 30TM001, and the mode is acted on the sub-hold display 30TM004. The mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 may be changed in accordance with the execution of the sub-hold action effect.

  FIG. 13-13, FIG. 13-14, and FIG. 13-15 are specific examples of the case where the first change effect is executed, and the first change effect is executed, and the secondary change effect is executed.

  First, FIG. 13-13 (1) shows a state in which the first display storage number is 3 and the image display device 5 is performing the variable display of the left-center-right decoration pattern. At this time, the active display area 30TM103 displays the normal mode active display 30TM003 (white circular display), and the first hold display area 30TM101 displays the normal mode first hold display 30TM001 (white circular display). ) Are displayed. At this time, the sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed, and the sub-active display 30TM005 is not displayed. Also, a guide (square frame) indicating the sub-active display area 30TM105 is not displayed.

  Then, when the variable display of the left-middle-right decorative symbol is being performed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (2), a new starting prize to the prize ball device 6A is generated, It is assumed that effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first change effect, the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning prize that has been determined (the gold mode in this example). And, when the change pattern of the first change effect (the change pattern 407 in this example) is determined and the execution of the second change effect is determined, the sub-active display corresponding to the start winning prize that has been determined is determined. The final display mode of 30TM005 (red mode in this example) and the change pattern of the second change effect (change pattern 906 in this example) are determined. At this time, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4, 4 is set as the value of the prefetch counter. That is, the value of the look-ahead counter indicates the remaining number of times of variable display until the variable display serving as the target of the pre-read notice effect is executed.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the normal mode sub-active display 30TM005 (white star display) in the sub-active display area 30TM105 based on the decision to execute the second change effect. A guide (square frame) indicating the active display area 30TM105 is displayed. Also, based on the fact that the first number of storages is four, four sub-holding displays 30TM004 (white star display) in a normal mode are displayed in the sub-holding display area 30TM104.

  In this example, since the first hold storage number is 4 based on the winning start, the fourth first hold display 30TM001 and the second hold display area 30TM104 displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101 are displayed. The fourth sub-hold display 30TM004 displayed is a hold display corresponding to a variable display to be notified by the first change effect and the second change effect. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 13C, the effect control CPU 120 deletes the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and deletes the first display displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. The hold display 30TM001 is shifted one by one toward the active display area 30TM103, and at the same time, the sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is erased and displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104. The sub-hold display 30TM004 is shifted one by one to the sub-active display area 30TM105 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

  In this shift display, the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103, is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become. In this shift display, the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the sub-hold display at the position closest to the sub-active display area 30TM105, is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 and displayed as the sub-active display 30TM005. Will be.

  Here, when effect display control CPU 120 starts the variable display, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, during the execution of the variable display, the first suspended display of the notice target is changed from the normal mode to the special mode ( In this example, it is recognized that the display is changed to the first hold display 30TM001a) which is a white triangle display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first holding effect effect, and determines the type (character type) of the first holding effect effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the first pending action effect (action effect A) in which the character A appears.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the first pending action effect (action effect A) based on the determination result. In the example shown in FIG. 13C, an effect is performed in which the character A appears and throws the ball toward the first reserved display 30TM001 to be notified. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character A hits the target first hold display 30TM001, the player can be expected to change the mode of the first hold display 30TM001.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (5), in response to executing the first holding action effect (action effect A), the effect control CPU 120 changes the first hold display of the notice target from the normal mode to the special mode. The mode is changed to a mode (in this example, the first reserved display 30TM001a which is a white triangle display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (7), the effect control CPU 120 deletes the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and deletes the first display displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. The hold displays (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001a in the special mode) are shifted and displayed one by one toward the active display area 30TM103, and at the same time, the sub-displays displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 are displayed. The active display 30TM005 is deleted, and the sub-hold display (the normal mode sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star display)) displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 side by side. And the image display device 5 To start the next variable display.

  Here, when effect display control CPU 120 starts the variable display, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, during the execution of the variable display, the first hold display to be notified is changed from the special mode to the blue mode ( In this example, it is recognized that the display is changed to the first hold display 30TM001b) which is a blue circle display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first holding effect effect, and determines the type (character type) of the first holding effect effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it is determined that the first hold action effect (action effect B) in which the character B appears will be executed.

  Further, when effect display CPU 120 starts the variable display, based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect, during the execution of the variable display, the sub-hold display to be notified is changed from the normal mode to the blue mode (this example). Recognizes that the display is changed to the sub reserve display 30TM004b) which is a blue star display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the sub-holding effect effect, and determines the type of the sub-holding effect effect to be executed (character type). In this example, it is assumed that it has been decided to execute the sub-hold effect effect (effect effect a) in which the character a appears.

  The effect control CPU 120 first executes the first pending action effect (action effect B) based on these determination results. In the example shown in FIG. 13-13 (7), an effect is performed in which a character B appears and throws a ball toward the first reserved display 30TM001a to be notified. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character B hits the first hold display 30TM001a to be notified, it is possible to expect the player to change the mode of the first hold display 30TM001a.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (8), the effect control CPU 120 changes the first hold display of the notice object from the special mode to blue in response to executing the first hold effect effect (action effect B). The mode is changed to a mode (first reserved display 30TM001b which is a blue circular display in this example).

  The effect control CPU 120 next executes the sub-hold effect effect (effect effect a) within the same variable display period. In the example shown in FIG. 13-14 (9), an effect is performed in which the character a appears and the balloon flies toward the sub-hold display 30TM004 to be notified. As shown in FIGS. 13-14 (10) and 13-15 (11), the balloon that the character “a” has flown toward the sub-hold display 30TM004 to be notified and reaches the position of the sub-hold display 30TM004. By displaying the corresponding image, the player can be expected to change the mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 13-14 (11) and (12), when the balloon arrives at the position of the sub-hold display 30TM004 to be notified, the mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 is changed to the balloon shape (the sub-hold display 30TM004F). ). Subsequently, an image in which the balloon is broken (secondary hold display 30TM004G) is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 13-14 (13) and (14), in response to execution of the sub-hold action effect (action effect a), the effect control CPU 120 displays the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode. To the blue mode (in this example, the sub-hold display 30TM004b which is a blue star display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 13-14 (16), the effect control CPU 120 deletes the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and deletes the first display displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. The hold displays (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode) are shifted and displayed one by one toward the active display area 30TM103, and at the same time, the sub-displays displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 are displayed. The active display 30TM005 is deleted, and the sub-hold display (the normal mode sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star display) and the blue mode sub-hold display 30TM004b (blue star display) displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 are displayed. )) One by one secondary active table Shifted displayed in the area 30TM105 side, the image display device 5 starts displaying the following variations.

  Here, when effect display CPU 120 starts the variable display, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, during the execution of the variable display, the first suspended display to be notified is changed from a blue mode to a red mode ( In this example, it is recognized that the display is changed to the first hold display 30TM001c) which is a red circle display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first holding effect effect, and determines the type (character type) of the first holding effect effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it is determined to execute the first pending action effect (action effect C) in which the character C appears.

  Further, when starting the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 changes the sub-hold display to be notified from the blue mode to the red mode based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect during the execution of the variable display (this example). Recognizes that the display is changed to a red star display 30TM004c). Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the sub-holding effect effect, and determines the type of the sub-holding effect effect to be executed (character type). In this example, it is assumed that it is determined that the sub-hold effect effect in which the character b appears (effect effect b) is executed.

  The effect control CPU 120 first executes the first pending action effect (action effect C) based on these determination results. In the example shown in FIG. 13-15 (17), an effect in which the character C appears and throws the ball toward the first reserved display 30TM001b to be notified is executed. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character C hits the first reserved display 30TM001b to be notified, it is possible to expect the player to change the mode of the first reserved display 30TM001b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (18), the effect control CPU 120 changes the first hold display of the notification target from the blue mode to the red color in response to the execution of the first hold effect effect (action effect C). The mode is changed to the mode (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001c which is a red circle display).

  The effect control CPU 120 next executes the sub-hold effect effect (effect effect b) within the same variable display period. In the example shown in FIG. 13-15 (19), an effect is performed in which a character b appears and a balloon is flown toward the sub-hold display 30TM004b to be notified. As shown in FIGS. 13-15 (20) and 13-15 (21), the balloon that the character b has flew toward the sub-hold display 30TM004b to be notified and reaches the position of the sub-hold display 30TM004b. By displaying the displayed image, the player can be expected to change the mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004b.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 13-15 (21) and (22), when the balloon reaches the position of the sub-hold display 30TM004b to be notified, the mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004b changes to a balloon shape (sub-hold display 30TM004F). ). Subsequently, an image in which the balloon is broken (secondary hold display 30TM004G) is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 13-15 (23) and (24), the effect control CPU 120 changes the sub-hold display of the notice target into a blue mode in response to executing the sub-hold effect effect (effect effect b). To a red mode (in this example, a red star display 30TM004c which is a red star display). .

  As described above, the first holding action effect performed when changing the mode of the first hold display and the sub-holding effect effect performed when changing the mode of the sub-hold display are different in the effect mode. Thereby, the interest due to the existence of a plurality of types of hold corresponding displays (first hold display and sub-hold display) can be further improved.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 13-13 to 13-15, an effect in which a character appears and performs an action on an icon may be executed when the display mode of the active display is changed. Further, it may be executed when the display mode of the sub-active display is changed. For example, when the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the normal mode and the character A appears and performs an active action effect of performing an action of throwing a ball toward the active display 30TM003, the display of the active display 30TM003 is performed. The mode may be changed from the normal mode to another mode (special mode, blue mode, green mode, red mode, gold mode). In addition, when the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed in the normal mode, the sub-active action effect of performing the action of causing the character “a” to fly the balloon toward the sub-active display 30TM005 is performed. The display mode of the display 30TM005 may be changed from the normal mode to another mode (blue mode, red mode). As described above, the active action effect performed when the mode of the active display is changed and the sub-active action effect performed when the mode of the sub-active display is changed are different from each other. Can be further improved by the presence of the change-compatible display (active display and sub-active display).

  In the above embodiment, the execution ratio of the first change effect and the execution ratio of the second change effect may be different depending on the current setting value (1 to 6) regarding the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value is high (4 to 6), the ratio of the first hold display 30TM001 displayed in a mode different from the normal mode is higher when the set value is high (4 to 6) than when the set value is low (1 to 3). Alternatively, the ratio at which the sub-hold display 30TM004 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode (or the ratio at which the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 themselves are displayed) may be set high. Also, as compared with the case where the set value is low (1 to 3), the number of changes in the display color of the first hold display 30TM001 is larger when the set value is high (4 to 6) (for example, three times). The rate at which the change pattern is selected may be high, and the rate at which the change color of the display color of the sub-hold display 30TM004 is large (for example, two) may be high.

(Active change production and change suggestion production)
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display when the start winning prize occurs. Is different, an active change effect for changing the display mode of the active display is executed.

  Here, when the display mode of the active display is changed (when the active change effect is executed) and when the display mode of the active display is not changed (when the active change effect is not executed), the display mode of the active display is changed. It is possible to execute a change suggestion effect indicating that there is a possibility of change. There are a success mode and a failure mode in the change suggestion effect. In the example shown below, when the success mode change suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the active display is changed, and the failure mode change is performed. When the suggested effect is executed, the display mode of the active display is not changed.

  The effect control CPU 120 differs from the display mode of the active display at the time of the active shift and the final display mode of the active display determined when the start winning has occurred when performing the active shift accompanying the start of the variable display. In this case, the active change effect and the change suggestion effect are executed during the execution of the variable display, so that the active display is changed from the display mode at the time of the active shift to the final display mode within the period of the variable display.

  In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines a change pattern for changing the active display from the display mode at the time of the active shift to the final display mode when starting the variable display. FIGS. 13 to 16 are explanatory diagrams of specific examples of the table for determining the change pattern of the active display. In this embodiment, determination values are respectively assigned to a special mode, a blue mode, a green mode, a red mode, and a gold mode as the final display mode of the active display. In addition, the display of "o" in Fig. 13-16 indicates that the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, and the display of "?" Indicates that the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed. ing.

  When the active display at the time of the active shift is in the normal mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the active display change pattern determination table for the normal mode as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13A, the active display change pattern determination table for the normal mode is designed so that the change pattern 011 is selected with a 100% probability when the final display mode is the special mode. Judgment values are assigned. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 011 is two, of which one success mode is one and one failure mode is one. The change pattern 011 displays the active display in the normal mode during the active shift, executes the change suggestion effect of the success mode to change the active display to the special mode, and thereafter executes the change suggestion effect of the failure mode to activate. This is a change pattern in which the display is not changed in the special mode.

  When the final display mode is the blue mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 012 is selected with a probability of 60% and the change pattern 013 is selected with a probability of 40%. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 012 and the change pattern 013 is three, of which two are successful and one is failure. In the change pattern 012, the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to execute the active mode change suggestion effect. The display pattern is changed to a blue mode, and then a change suggestion effect of a failure mode is executed to change the active display in the blue mode. The change pattern 013 displays the active display in the normal mode during the active shift. After that, a success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then a failure mode change suggestion effect is executed to keep the active display unchanged in the special mode, and thereafter, the success mode change It is a change pattern that changes the active display to a blue mode by executing a suggestion effect.

  In the case where the final display mode is the green mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 014 is selected with a probability of 70% and the change pattern 015 with a probability of 30%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 014 and the change pattern 015 is four, of which three are successful and one is failure. In the change pattern 014, the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to execute the active mode change suggestion effect. The display is changed to a blue mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and thereafter, the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed and the active display is not changed to the green mode. The change pattern 015 is a change pattern. After the active display is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and thereafter, the success mode change suggestion effect. To change the active display to a blue mode, and then execute a change mode suggestion for a failed mode. The active display without change from blue aspect, the change pattern running changes suggested effect of subsequent success embodiment changes the active display in green mode.

  In the case where the final display mode is the red mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 016 is selected with a probability of 80% and the change pattern 017 is selected with a probability of 20%. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 016 and the change pattern 017 is five, of which four are successful and one is failure. In the change pattern 016, after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, a success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and thereafter the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to execute the active mode change suggestion effect. Changing the display to a blue mode, then performing a change suggestion effect of a successful mode to change the active display to a green mode, and then performing a change mode suggestion of a successful mode to change the active display to a red mode, Thereafter, the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to change the active display in the red mode without changing the active mode. The change pattern 017 displays the active display in the normal mode at the time of the active shift, and then displays the change mode of the successful mode. To change the active display to the special mode, and then perform the change suggestion effect of the successful mode, The active display is changed to the blue mode, the active display is changed to the green mode after that, and the active display is changed to the green mode, and the active display is changed to the green mode thereafter. This is a change pattern that changes the active display to the red mode by executing the change suggestion effect of the successful mode after that.

  Further, when the final display mode is the golden mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 018 is selected with a probability of 100%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 018 is five, of which five are successful and zero are failure modes. In the change pattern 018, after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, a success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and thereafter, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to execute the active mode change suggestion effect. Changing the display to a blue mode, then performing a change suggestion effect of a successful mode to change the active display to a green mode, and then performing a change mode suggestion of a successful mode to change the active display to a red mode, Thereafter, a change suggestion effect of a success mode is executed to change the active display to the golden mode.

  If the active display at the time of the active shift is in the special mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the active mode change pattern determination table for the special mode, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13B, when the final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 021 is selected with a 100% probability in the active mode change pattern determination table for the special mode. Judgment values are assigned. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 021 is two, of which one success mode and one failure mode. In the change pattern 021, after the active display is displayed in the special mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed to execute the active mode change suggestion effect. This is a change pattern in which the display is not changed in the blue mode.

  In the case where the final display mode is the green mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 022 is selected with a probability of 70% and the change pattern 023 is selected with a probability of 30%. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 022 and the change pattern 023 is three, of which two are successful and one is failure. In the change pattern 022, after the active display is displayed in the special mode at the time of the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and thereafter, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to execute the active mode change suggestion effect. A display pattern is changed to a green mode, and thereafter, a change suggestion effect of a failure mode is executed, and the active display is a change pattern in which the green mode is not changed. The change pattern 023 displays the active display in a special mode during the active shift. Thereafter, a success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and thereafter, a failure mode change suggestion effect is executed and the active display is not changed to the blue mode, and thereafter, the success mode change is performed. It is a change pattern which changes an active display to a green form by performing a suggestion effect.

  In the case where the final display mode is the red mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 024 is selected with a probability of 80% and the change pattern 025 is selected with a probability of 20%. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 024 and the change pattern 025 is four, of which three are successful and one is failure. In the change pattern 024, after the active display is displayed in the special mode during the active shift, a success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and thereafter, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to execute the active mode change suggestion effect. The display is changed to a green mode, and then a success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to a red mode, and thereafter, a failure mode change suggestion effect is executed and the active display is not changed to the red mode. The change pattern 025 is a change pattern. After the active display is displayed in the special mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and thereafter, the success mode change suggestion effect. To change the active display to a green mode, and then perform a change mode suggestion of a failure mode to execute Without changing the active display stays green aspect, the change pattern running changes suggested effect of subsequent success embodiment changes the active display red manner.

  Further, when the final display mode is the golden mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 026 is selected with a probability of 100%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 026 is four, of which four are the success modes and zero are the failure modes. In the change pattern 026, after the active display is displayed in the special mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to execute the active mode change suggestion effect. A change in which the display is changed to a green mode, a success mode change suggestion effect is executed thereafter to change the active display to a red mode, and thereafter, a success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to a gold mode. It is a pattern.

  If the active display at the time of the active shift is in the blue mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects an active display change pattern determination table for the blue mode, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13C, when the final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 031 is selected with a probability of 100% in the active display change pattern determination table for the blue mode. Judgment values are assigned. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 031 is two, of which one is a successful mode and one is a failure mode. In the change pattern 031, after the active display is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the active shift, a success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and thereafter, the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed to execute the active mode. This is a change pattern in which the display is not changed in a green state.

  In the case where the final display mode is the red mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 032 is selected with a probability of 80% and the change pattern 033 is selected with a probability of 20%. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 032 and the change pattern 033 is three, of which two are successful and one is failure. In the change pattern 032, after the active display is displayed in the blue mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and thereafter, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to execute the active mode change suggestion effect. The display is changed to a red mode, and then a change suggestion effect of a failure mode is executed to change the active display to the red mode. The change pattern 033 displays the active display in the blue mode during the active shift. After that, a success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and thereafter, a failure mode change suggestion effect is executed and the active display is not changed to the green mode, and thereafter, the success mode change is performed. This is a change pattern in which a suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to a red mode.

  Further, when the final display mode is the golden mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 034 is selected with a probability of 100%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 034 is three, of which three are the success modes and zero are the failure modes. In the change pattern 034, after the active display is displayed in the blue mode during the active shift, a success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and thereafter, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to execute the active mode change suggestion effect. This is a change pattern in which the display is changed to a red mode, and thereafter, a change suggestion effect of a successful mode is executed to change the active display to a golden mode.

  When the active display at the time of the active shift is in the red mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects an active display change pattern determination table for the red mode, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13D, the active display change pattern determination table for the red mode is set so that the change pattern 041 is selected with a probability of 100% when the final display mode is the gold mode. Judgment values are assigned. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 041 is one, of which one is a successful mode and zero is a failure mode. The change pattern 041 is a change pattern in which the active display is displayed in the red mode at the time of the active shift, and then the change suggestion effect of the successful mode is executed to change the active display to the golden mode.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, within one variable display period (in this example, since the display mode of the active display changes to the final display mode before the reach state is established, the reach is performed after the variable display is started. During the period until the state is established), the more the change suggestion effect is executed, in particular, the more the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the more the color changes to a display color with a high jackpot expectation. The percentage increases.

  Here, in the present embodiment, at the stage where the n-th change suggestion effect has been executed, the ratio of the (n + 1) th change suggestion effect being executed is higher as the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the successful mode is larger. It is configured as follows. For example, at the stage when the second change suggestion effect is executed (in the case of n = 2), the third change suggestion effect is always executed if both times are successful. If one of the two times is a success mode and one is a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed. The same applies when n = 3 and n = 4. As described above, when the change suggestion effect is executed, the larger the number of executions of the success mode change suggestion effect executed during the period from the start of the fluctuation display to the establishment of the reach state, the greater the same fluctuation. During the display period (in the period from the start of the variable display to the time when the reach state is established), the ratio of executing the next change suggestion effect is high. Attention is paid to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect, and thereby the interest can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, as the ratio of [the number of times the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed] to [the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed] within one variable display period, the big hit expectation is increased. The rate of change to a display mode with a high degree is high. Specifically, [the number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the success mode / the number of executions of the change suggestion effect] is に は when the final display mode is the special mode, and the final display mode is the blue mode. In this case, it is 2/3, when the final display mode is a green mode, 3/4, when the final display mode is a red mode, 4/5, and when the final display mode is a gold mode. If so, it is 5/5. As described above, the larger the ratio of the number of executions of the success suggestion effect / the number of executions of the change suggestion effect], the higher the rate of change of the active display to the display mode with high jackpot expectation. Will also pay attention to the relationship between the number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect and the number of times of execution of the change suggestion of the success mode, which can improve interest.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the number of times the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuously executed increases, the rate of change to the display mode having a high jackpot expectation rate increases. Specifically, the number of consecutive success mode change suggestion effects is 1 (not continuous) or 2 when the final display mode is a blue mode, and is 1 when the final display mode is a green mode. 2 or 3, 3 or 4 when the final display mode is the red mode, and 5 when the final display mode is the gold mode. Thereby, the player is interested in whether or not the success suggestion effect of the success mode is continuously executed, and how many times the effect is indicated.

  Further, in this example, when the final display mode has the same display color, a change pattern having a larger number of consecutive success mode change suggestion effects is likely to be selected. For example, in the case of the blue mode, the rate of selection of the change pattern 012 (two continuous) is higher than that of the change pattern 013 (not continuous), and in the case of the green mode, the change pattern is higher than the change pattern 015 (two continuous). 014 (three continuous) is selected at a higher rate, and in the case of the red mode, the change pattern 016 (four continuous) is selected at a higher rate than the change pattern 017 (three continuous). As described above, even when the same display color is finally obtained, the effect of suggesting the change of the success mode is easily continuous, so that the player's sense of expectation can be further increased.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and the mode (success mode or failure mode) of the change suggestion effect, based on the change pattern shown in FIGS. Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of the change suggestion effect based on whether the change suggestion effect is a success mode or a failure mode, and whether or not to execute the next change suggestion effect. decide. As the types of change suggestion effects, change suggestion effect A in which character A appears, change suggestion effect B in which character B appears, change suggestion effect C in which character C appears, change suggestion effect D in which character D appears, and character There is a change suggestion effect E in which E appears.

  If the change suggestion effect executed at the n-th time is a successful mode and the change suggestion effect at the (n + 1) th time is executed in the change pattern determined at the time of the start winning, the effect control CPU 120 [FIG. Successful mode, next stage effect execution] is selected. When the change suggestion effect determination table is [success mode, next effect execution is performed], character A is 10%, character B is 20%, character C is 30%, character D is 40%, and character E is 0%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected by probability.

  In the case of the change pattern determined at the time of the start winning, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the change suggestion effect to be executed for the nth time is a success mode and does not execute the (n + 1) th change suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. Success mode, no next stage execution] is selected. When the change suggestion effect determination table is [success mode, no next effect execution], character A is 5%, character B is 15%, character C is 30%, character D is 45%, and character E is 5%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected by probability.

  If the change suggestion effect executed in the nth time is a failure mode and the change suggestion effect executed in the (n + 1) th time is executed in the change pattern determined at the time of the start winning, the effect control CPU 120 [FIG. Failure mode, next stage effect execution] is selected. When the change suggestion effect determination table is [failure mode, next effect execution is performed], character A has 37%, character B has 32%, character C has 30%, character D has 1%, and character E has 0%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected by probability.

  In the change pattern determined at the time of the start winning, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the change suggestion effect executed at the n-th time is a failure mode and does not execute the (n + 1) -th time change suggestion effect. Failure mode, next stage no execution] table is selected. When the change suggestion effect determination table is [failure mode, no next effect execution], the character A is 35%, the character B is 30%, the character C is 30%, the character D is 5%, and the character E is 0%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected by probability.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the type of the change suggestion effect for each change suggestion effect based on the change suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. Therefore, when the n-th and the (n + 1) -th change suggesting effects are executed, for example, the character A is selected in the n-th change-inducing effect, and all of the characters A to E are selected in the (n + 1) -th change suggesting effect. May be selected. That is, when the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears in the nth time is executed, the change suggestion effect B in which the character B different from the character A appears in the n + 1th time may be executed, while n + 1 There is a possibility that a change suggestion effect A in which the character A similar to the n-th character appears in the third time. According to such a configuration, diversification of change suggestion effects can be achieved.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 to 17, the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears is less likely to be a success mode, but the probability that the next change suggestion effect is executed is high, and the change suggestion effect in which the character D appears. D has a high probability of being a success mode, but has a low probability of executing the next change suggestion effect. Further, the change suggestion effect E in which the character E appears has a probability of being a success mode of 100%, but the probability of executing the next change suggestion effect is 0%. Therefore, for the player, when the character A is displayed on the screen, the degree of expectation that the display mode of the active display changes is low, but the degree of expectation that the next change suggestion effect is executed is high, When the character D is displayed on the screen, the degree of expectation that the display mode of the active display changes is high, but the degree of expectation that the next change suggestion effect will be executed is low, and the character E is displayed on the screen. In this case, the display mode of the active display always changes, but the next change suggestion effect is not executed (the current change suggestion effect is the last).

  As described above, since the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes to the mode with a high jackpot expectation differs depending on the type of the character appearing in the effect, the player pays attention to which type of character appears. Will be. Further, since the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of the character appearing in the effect, the player will pay attention to which type of character appears.

  It should be noted that the effect type is not limited to the effect types shown in FIGS. 13 to 17. An effect type may be provided in which the rate of change in the display mode of display is high and the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed is also high.

(Specific examples of active change production and change suggestion production)
Next, specific examples of the active change effect and the change suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-18 to 13-20. In the effect examples illustrated in FIGS. 13-18, 13-19 (9) to (12), and FIG. 13-20, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the final display mode is the golden mode at the time of start winning. This is an example in which the active shift mode is determined to be the normal mode, and when the variable display based on the start winning is started, the active display change pattern is determined to be the change pattern 018. . 13-18 and FIGS. 13-19 (9), (10), and (20) to (22), the effect control CPU 120 sets the final display mode to the green mode when the start winning is achieved. And a case where the active shift mode is determined to be the normal mode and the change pattern of the active display is determined to be the change pattern 014 when the variable display based on the start winning is started. It is.

  In this example, based on the change pattern 018, it is determined that the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears for the first change suggestion effect is to be executed, and based on the fact that the second change suggestion effect is executed. It is determined that the success suggestion effect A of the success mode is to be executed, the change suggestion effect B in which the character B appears in the second change suggestion effect is determined, and the third change suggestion effect is executed. It is determined to execute the change suggestion effect B of the success mode based on the fact that the character C has appeared in the third change suggestion effect, and the fourth change suggestion effect is determined. Is determined to be performed based on the execution of the change suggestion effect of the character D, and the character D climbs up with respect to the fourth change suggestion effect. Has been determined to perform the change suggestion effect D, and the fifth change suggestion effect has been determined to be performed based on the execution of the fifth change suggestion effect. It is assumed that it has been decided to execute a change suggestion effect E of a success mode in which the character E appears in the effect.

  In FIG. 13-18 (1), the active display area 30TM003 (white circular display) in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern in the middle left and right. It shows the state in which

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the success suggestion change effect A in response to the execution timing of the first change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (1), the effect image in which the character A appears from the right side of the screen and the character A performs an action of throwing a ball toward the active display 30TM003 is displayed. As shown in -18 (2), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by character A has hit active display 30TM003 is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the active display 30TM003 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. This effect image is an image reminiscent of the explosion of the active display. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (3), in response to the completion of the first change suggestion effect, active display 30TM003a (white triangle display) in a special mode is displayed in active display region 30TM103. .

  Next, in response to the execution timing of the second change suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 executes a success suggestion change suggestion effect B. As a result, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (4), a character B appears from the left side of the screen, and an effect image in which the character B performs an action of throwing a ball toward the active display 30TM003a is displayed. As shown in -18 (5), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by character B has hit active display 30TM003a is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the special mode active display 30TM003a is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (6), in response to the completion of the second change suggestion effect, the active display area 30TM103 displays the active display 30TM003b (blue circular display) in a blue mode. You.

  Next, in response to the execution timing of the third change suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 executes a success suggestion change suggestion effect C. As a result, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (7), an effect image is displayed in which the character C appears from the right side of the screen, and the character C performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003b. As shown in FIG. 13-18 (8), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by character C has hit active display 30TM003b is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the blue active display 30TM003b is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (9), in response to the end of the third change suggestion effect, a green mode active display 30TM003d (green circle display) is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. You.

  Next, in response to the execution timing of the fourth change suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 executes the success suggestion change effect D. As a result, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (10), an effect image is displayed in which the character D appears from the left side of the screen, and the character D performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003d. As shown in FIG. 13-19 (11), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by character D has hit active display 30TM003d is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the green active display 30TM003d is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (12), in response to the end of the fourth change suggestion effect, the active display area 30TM103 displays the active display 30TM003c in red mode (red circular display). You.

  Next, in response to the execution timing of the fifth change suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 executes the success suggestion change suggestion effect E. As a result, as shown in FIG. 13-20 (13), a crack image (screen crack image 30TM200) in which the transparent member (glass plate or the like) constituting the screen of the image display device 5 has a crack is displayed. . Further, as shown in FIG. 13-20 (14), a crack image (screen crack image 30TM200) in a mode in which the range of the crack is enlarged is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 13-20 (15), an image of a mode in which the transparent member constituting the screen of the image display device 5 is cracked (screen cracking image 30TM210) is displayed, and the character E appears from the center of the screen. An effect image is displayed in which the character E performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003c. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 13-20 (16), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character E has hit the active display 30TM003c is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the red active display 30TM003c is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-20 (17), in response to the end of the fifth change suggestion effect, the active display area 30TM103 displays the active display 30TM003e (golden circular display) in the golden mode. You.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 13-20 (18), the screen broken image 30TM210 displayed on the image display device 5 is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 13-20 (19), the left symbol display area and the right symbol The reach state in which the same decorative symbol (in this example, “7”) is stopped is established in the display area, and the text “REACH !!” is displayed at the bottom of the screen (the area overlapping the active display area 30TM103). An effect is performed. Here, at the timing when the reach is established as described above, the active display 30TM003e in the golden mode is not displayed, and the rectangular frame indicating the active display area 30TM103 is also not displayed. The non-displayed information is not displayed until the variable display of the notice target ends.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 13-18 and 13-19 (9), (10), (20) to (22), the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode to be a green mode at the time of start winning. This is an example in which the active shift mode is determined to be the normal mode, and when the variable display based on the start winning is started, the active display change pattern is determined to be the change pattern 014. .

  In this example, based on the change pattern 014, it is determined that the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears regarding the first change suggestion effect is to be executed, and based on the fact that the second change suggestion effect is executed. It is determined that the success suggestion effect A of the success mode is to be executed, the change suggestion effect B in which the character B appears in the second change suggestion effect is determined, and the third change suggestion effect is executed. It is determined to execute the change suggestion effect B of the success mode based on the fact that the character C has appeared in the third change suggestion effect, and the fourth change suggestion effect is determined. Is determined to be performed based on the execution of the change suggestion effect of the character D, and the character D climbs up with respect to the fourth change suggestion effect. It changes suggested effect decided to run a D, and it is assumed that the fifth variation suggest effect is decided to execute the changes suggested effect D failure mode based on the not executed for.

  The effect examples (first change suggestion effect to third change suggestion effect) illustrated in FIGS. 13-18 (1) to 13-19 (9) are the same as the effect examples of the change pattern 018 described above, and will be described. Are omitted, and the effect examples shown in FIGS. 13-19 (10) and (20) to (22) will be described.

  The production control CPU 120 executes the failure mode change suggestion effect D in response to the fourth change suggestion effect execution timing. As a result, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (10), an effect image is displayed in which the character D appears from the left side of the screen, and the character D performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003d. As shown in FIG. 13-19 (20), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by character D did not hit active display 30TM003d is displayed. At this time, the green active display 30TM003d is continuously displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the above-described effect image (active display 30TM003G) is not displayed. Instead, the character D does not throw and hit. The effect image in which the ball rolls toward the lower right of the screen is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (21), when the fourth change suggestion effect is completed, the active display area 30TM103 continuously displays the green-state active display 30TM003d. That is, the display mode of the active display does not change from before the execution of the fourth change suggestion effect (after the end of the third change suggestion effect).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (22), a reach state in which the same decorative symbol (in this example, “4”) is stopped in the left symbol display region and the right symbol display region is established, and “reach! Is displayed at the bottom of the screen (the area overlapping the active display area 30TM103). Here, as described above, at the timing when the reach state is established, the active display area 30TM103 is not displayed, so that the green-state active display 30TM003d is not displayed until the variable display of the notice target ends.

  As shown in FIGS. 13-18 (1) to 13-20 (19), the effect control CPU 120 is in a state in which the image display device 5 is continuously performing the variable display of the left middle right decorative pattern. A change suggestion effect is executed a predetermined number of times (1 to 5 times) according to the change pattern. When the execution of the predetermined number of change suggestion effects is completed, the same decorative symbol is stopped in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area to establish the reach state. That is, during the period in which the effect control CPU 120 is executing the change suggesting effect a predetermined number of times, the image display device 5 temporarily stops the left middle right decorative pattern, changes the direction of the variable display, and changes the reach state. It is not established. According to such a configuration, during the period in which the change suggestion effect is performed a predetermined number of times in accordance with the change pattern, the manner in which the decorative symbol is fluctuated is not changed, so that more attention can be paid to the change suggestion effect.

  In addition, FIG. 13-16 shows a change pattern in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is not continuous. However, the change pattern is not limited to such a form, and a change pattern in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is continuous may be provided. . Further, a change pattern in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed more frequently than the change suggestion effect of the successful mode may be provided. For example, a change pattern in which a change suggestion effect of a successful mode is executed twice consecutively after a change suggestion effect of a failure mode is executed three consecutive times may be provided. Further, an effect pattern may be provided in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed one or more times, but the display mode of the active display does not change because the change suggestion effect of the success mode is not executed even once.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 13 to 16 and the like, the display mode of the active display does not change when the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed, and the active display mode is always displayed when the success mode change suggestion effect is executed. Although the example in which the display mode is changed has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and when the success mode change suggestion effect is executed, the active ratio is higher at a higher rate than when the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed. Any configuration may be used as long as the display mode of the display changes.For example, an effect pattern in which the display mode of the active display does not change even when a change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed may be provided. An effect pattern in which the display mode of the active display changes even when a suggested effect is executed may be provided.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 13 to 16 and the like, when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the active display is changed to the display mode in which the jackpot expectation is higher by one step (from the normal mode to the special mode, from the special mode). Blue mode, blue mode to green mode, green mode to red mode, red mode to golden mode), but is not limited to such a mode, and when a change suggestion effect of a successful mode is executed. May be provided with a change pattern in which the display mode of the active display changes to a display mode in which the jackpot expectation is higher by two or more levels (for example, from a normal mode to a green mode, from a blue mode to a gold mode). Further, the rate at which the display mode changes by two or more steps may be different depending on the type of the change suggestion effect to be executed (for example, the type of the character that appears). For example, the change suggestion effect in which the character A appears Is executed, the rate at which the display mode changes by two or more steps is low, and when the change suggestion effect in which the character B appears is executed, the rate at which the display mode changes by two or more steps is set to be high. Is also good. Further, when a change suggestion effect in which the character C appears is executed, the display mode may be changed in three steps.

  In the above embodiment, the change suggestion effect may be executed at a timing before the decorative symbol temporarily stops. More specifically, when the decorative symbol is fluctuated and displayed on the basis of a fluctuating pattern in which the pseudo-repeated fluctuation for temporarily re-changing the decorative symbol is performed once or more, the decorative symbol is displayed before the temporary stop of the decorative symbol. A change suggestion effect of the success mode may be executed. For example, when the temporary stop is performed n times, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is performed before each temporary stop (a total of n times the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuously performed), and thereafter, By executing the change suggestion effect of the failure mode, it may be indicated that the (n + 1) -th temporary stop is not executed. In the case where the decorative symbol variation display is executed based on the variation pattern in which the pseudo-run variation is not executed at all, an effect pattern in which only the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed and the success mode change suggestion effect is not executed. May be provided. In addition, in the case where the decorative symbol change display is performed based on a change pattern in which the pseudo continuous change is performed a predetermined upper limit number (for example, n + 1 times), n + 1 times success mode change suggesting effects are continuously performed. An effect pattern that is executed but does not execute the change suggestion effect of the failure mode may be provided.

  In the case of such a configuration, a change suggestion effect is started in a state where the decorative symbol is not temporarily stopped (a character appears), and the change suggestion effect is terminated before the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (character). Perform an action to change the display mode of the active display). For example, the character A appears and performs an action immediately after the decoration pattern variation display is started, and the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode to the special mode, and then the first temporary stop is performed and the first temporary stop is performed. Is started, the character B appears and performs an action to change the display mode of the active display from the special mode to the blue mode. After that, the second temporary stop is performed and the second re-change is performed. After the start, the character C may appear and perform an action to change the display mode of the active display from the blue mode to the green mode. As described above, by making the execution period of one change suggestion effect and the temporary stop period of the decorative symbol (that is, the period for changing the variation mode of the decorative symbol) not to overlap, it is possible to pay attention to the change suggestion effect. Besides, it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped from being reduced.

  In the case of performing an effect of changing the display direction of the decorative design from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction, a change suggestion effect is started while the decorative design is displayed in the vertical direction (a character appears). It is preferable that the change suggestion effect is ended before the change display direction of the decorative symbol is changed to the horizontal direction (the character performs an action to change the display mode of the active display). For example, the first character appears and performs an action immediately after the decoration pattern variation display is started, and the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode to the blue mode, and then the variation display direction of the decoration pattern changes from the vertical direction. After the change in the horizontal direction, the next character may appear and perform an action to change the display mode of the active display from the blue mode to the red mode. In this way, by preventing the execution period of one change suggestion effect and the timing at which the change display direction of the decoration symbol changes, the change suggestion effect can be noticed, and the decoration symbol change display can be performed. The effect of the effect when the direction changes can be prevented from being reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the change suggestion effect is an effect indicating that the display mode of the active display changes is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. May be an effect that suggests that changes. For example, the change pattern shown in FIGS. 13 to 16 may be used as a change pattern when changing the display mode of the hold display, and when the success suggestion change effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display is changed. Alternatively, when the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed, the display mode of the hold display may not be changed.

  In the above-described embodiment, in both cases of the change suggestion effect of the success mode and the change suggestion effect of the failure mode, the appearing character is a similar action (the effect acting on the active display or the hold display. Action to throw) has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and in a change suggestion effect of a success mode, while an appearing character performs an action for changing the display mode of the active display or the hold display, In the effect of suggesting a change in the failure mode, the appearing character may not perform an action for changing the display mode of the active display or the hold display. In addition, the action performed by the appeared character may be different between the success suggestion of change in the success mode and the change suggestion of the failure mode. For example, in the success suggestion of change of the success mode, the active display or the hold display to be changed is performed. Performing the action of throwing the ball in the direction of (i.e., acting on the active display or the hold display), and in the effect suggesting a change in the failure mode, the action of throwing the ball in a direction different from the active display or the hold display (the active display or the hold display) It is also possible to perform an effect that does not work).

  In the above-described embodiment, as the number of executions of the success mode change suggestion effect executed within a predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the establishment of the reach state increases, the next change suggestion effect within the predetermined period increases. Is higher, the higher the ratio of the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode with respect to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect executed during the predetermined period is, the higher the expectation degree of the big hit is shown. . However, the predetermined period is not limited to this, and the period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the temporary stop of the decorative symbol (the combination of the decorative symbols or the pseudo consecutive symbol in which the re-variation (pseudo-run) is performed after the temporary stop) is temporarily performed. The period may be a period, or may be a period from the temporary stop of the decorative symbol to the temporary stop of the decorative symbol again after the decoration symbol is changed again (that is, a period between pseudo-runs). In addition, the predetermined period may be a period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the first stop of any of the decorative symbols on the middle left and right. It may be a period until the final stop.

  In the above embodiment, when a plurality of change suggestion effects are executed, a plurality of patterns may be provided for a period from the end of one change suggestion effect to the start of the next change suggestion effect. For example, when the interval from the end of one change suggestion effect to the start of the next change suggestion effect is long, the success rate of the next change suggestion effect is higher than when the interval is short, and the jackpot expectation degree May be higher. In addition, when a change suggestion effect is executed a large number of times, the interval may be gradually shortened, and accordingly, the big hit expectation may be gradually increased. According to such a form, when the change suggestion effect of 1 is completed, the player determines whether or not the next change suggestion effect is to be executed and also determines the interval until the next change suggestion effect is started. You will be interested and improve your interests.

  In the above embodiment, the rate at which the display mode of the active display is changed may be changed according to the current setting value (1 to 6) regarding the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value is high (4 to 6), the display ratio of the active display is different from the normal mode when the set value is high (4 to 6), as compared with the case where the set value is low (1 to 3). You may do it. Also, when the set value is high (4 to 6), the display color of the active display is changed more frequently (for example, three times or more) than when the set value is low (1 to 3). The rate at which the pattern is selected may be high, that is, the rate at which the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, and the rate at which the change suggestion effect of the success mode continues may be high. In addition, when the set value is high (4 to 6), a change suggestion effect of a specific type (for example, an effect in which the character X with a low appearance frequency appears) is higher when the set value is higher (4 to 6) than when the set value is lower (1 to 3). May be increased.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special design display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General winning opening 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Ordinary symbol display 21 ... Gate switches 22A, 22B ... Switch 23: Count switch 30: Hitting operation handle 31A: Stick controller 31B: Push button 32: Movable body 100: Game control microcomputers 101, 121: ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuits 105, 125 ... I / O
120… effect control CPU
123 ... display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Special effect execution means for executing a special effect that repeats a predetermined mode a predetermined number of times,
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect during the execution of the special effect,
When the predetermined effect is not executed by the predetermined effect executing means, the case where the predetermined mode is repeated a second number of times greater than the first number is higher than the case where the predetermined mode is repeated a first number of times as the special effect. Controlling the ratio to the advantageous state,
A case where the predetermined effect is executed by the predetermined effect executing means before the predetermined mode is repeated the first number of times, rather than a case where the predetermined effect is repeated the second time without executing the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect executing means. Can be controlled to the advantageous state at a higher rate,
further,
Display control means capable of displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display;
Change suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the corresponding display changes,
The change suggestion effect execution means can execute a change suggestion effect of a success mode and a change suggestion effect of a failure mode as a change suggestion effect,
A gaming machine characterized in that the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed within a predetermined period varies depending on the number of times the success suggestion change effect effect is executed.